MAJOR HS KALSI’S BAALNOI ACADEMY

Delhi/Jaipur
Latest Group Discussion and Lecturette Topics for SSB

1. Agnipath Scheme
2. Artificial Intelligence (AI)
3. Indo- ASEAN Relations
4. Atmanirbhar Bharat Abhiyan
5. India and the AUKUS Grouping
6. Bangladesh- China- India- Myanmar (BCIM) Economic Corridor
7. BIMSTEC
8. India's Blue Economy
9. Security and Growth for All in the Region (SAGAR)
10. Sino-India Diplomatic Relations
11. The Effects of the China-Pakistan Economic Corridor on India-Pakistan Relations
12. Cryptocurrency
13. Curbing Fake News
14. Cyber Security
15. Developing India as a Hub for World Class Digital Talent
16. The Transforming Face of India's Agriculture Role of Digital Tools in Farming
17. Disaster Management In India
18. Drones In Indian Armed Forces
19. E-governance in India: Concept, Initiatives and Issues
20. Empowering Girls For A Better Tomorrow
21. Enhancing Cooperation in South Asia
22. G4
23. G7
24. G-20
25. G20 Women Engagement Group W20
26. Global Warming Impact on the Global Climate
27. Government Schemes & Missions
28. Green Energy - The Way Forward
29. Hybrid Warfare
30. India's Arctic Policy
31. India-Egypt Strategic Partnership Navigating Challenges, Embracing Opportunities
32. India-France Partnership
33. Inflation
34. Judicial Reforms in India
35. Khelo India National Programme For Development Of Sports
36. Kisan Drones
37. Mission MAHIR (Mission on Advanced and High-Impact Research) Driving Advanced
Research & Innovation in Power Sector
38. Medical Tourism Taking India's Healing Touch To The World
39. My Aspirations for New Age India
40. Namami Gange Recognized by UN as Torchbearer in World Ecology Restoration Efforts
41. India’s Armed Forces Contribution to Nation Building
42. Open Network for Digital Commerce (ONDC)
43. Operation Sadbhavana
44. Organic Farming and Natural Farming
45. One Sun, One World, One Grid (OSOWOG)
46. OTT Platform
47. Tackling Plastic Pollution
48. QUAD vs China
49. Reforms in Education System
50. Right to Repair Initiative for Circular Economy
51. Role of Youth in Nation Building
52. South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation (SAARC)
53. Siachen Glacier
54. Social Media
55. India’s Solar Power Dream
56. Role And Charter Of Defence Space Agency
57. Startup Ecosystem in India
58. TAPI Gas Pipeline Turkmenistan–Afghanistan–Pakistan–India (TAPI) Pipeline
59. Ukraine Crisis – Strategy Followed By Russia And Us Along With Their Allies And Lessons
For India
60. Uniform Civil Court (UCC)
61. Vande Bharat Trains
62. Various Security Forces And Their Mandate
63. Vibrant Villages Programme
64. Empowering Women Encouraging Work From Home (WFH)
65. Induction Of Women In Indian Armed Forces
 AGNIPATH SCHEME
 What is the Agnipath Scheme?
 About
 Agnipath is a new HR Management scheme for Armed Forces. Candidates inducted through
this scheme will be called Agniveers.
 Under this scheme, the youth joining the army, navy and the air force will be called
Agniveer. Youth will be able to be recruited into the armed force for a short duration.
 Under the new scheme, around 45,000 to 50,000 soldiers will be recruited annually, and
most will leave the service in just four years.
 However, after four years, only 25% of the batch will be recruited back into their
respective services, for a period of 15 years.
 The scheme is going to lower the age profile of the Indian Armed Forces and to contain
the ballooning pension bill, as a major chunk of the budget was going into salaries and
pensions and the long-awaited modernization projects of the armed forces were getting
delayed.
 The Agnipath scheme intends to attract the youthful section of society so that they can make
the best use of the emerging technologies that are available in the modern-day world. They
will be able to do this with increased technical thresholds of intake while utilizing the
technical institutions of India in the most efficient way.
 Individuals who are keenly interested in serving in the Indian Armed Forces albeit for a short
duration are welcome through this Agnipath scheme. Agniveers who are enthused to serve in
the army as well as try other sectors can easily exploit this opportunity that is granted by the
Agnipath Scheme.
 The youths of India will imbibe essential qualities while serving in the Indian Armed Forces.
These qualities mainly include ethos, courage, camaraderie, commitment, and teamwork.
 They will even develop other strong skills like discipline, dynamism, motivation, and work
skills. These qualities and abilities have the capacity to turn the youths into an asset. Thus, the
youths will be skilled not only to serve in the Armed Forces but also fare well in other sectors
and in general, life as well.
 Eligibility Criteria
 It is only for personnel below officer ranks (those who do not join the forces as
commissioned officers).
 Aspirants between the ages of 17.5 years and 21 years will be eligible to apply.
 For Women
 While the Army will only recruit female candidates for Corps of Military Police (CMP) and
for the Navy and Air Force the women will get to be recruited as Agniveers.
 Training
 Out of the four year tenure, the first six months of these Agniveers will go in rigorous
training regime and the balance 3.5 years will be in active service.
 According to officials the training for those getting into the Army will be between 10 weeks
to up to six months and for the Navy it will be for almost 16 weeks and they will spend two
weeks on sea training.
 Objectives
 It aims at providing an opportunity to the patriotic and motivated youth with the ‘Josh’
and ‘Jazba’ to join the Armed Forces.
 It is expected to bring down the average age profile of the Indian Armed Forces by about
4 to 5 years.
  The scheme envisions that, the average age in the forces is 32 years today, which will go
down to 26 in six to seven years.
 The Agnipath scheme aims to increase the youthful profile so that more capable youths of the
country can come forward and join the Indian Armed Forces. As youths are naturally risk-
taking individuals and physically more active, their participation will benefit the country in a
major way.
 How many to be recruited by each service?
 In the first phase around 46,000 young boys and girls will be recruited through the new
system. These will include soldiers, airmen and soldiers. The plan of the government to
increase the number of recruitments to up to 59,000 within four years.
 To meet shortage of personnel in the armed forces due to COVID 19, this recruitment process
will help the Indian Army to induct around 40,000 soldiers in the first phase.
 The IAF) will induct 3,000 airmen and the Indian Navy around 3,000 sailors.
 And, through the “Agnipath” scheme by the second year the number of intake will go up to
46,500 and the numbers going into Army and Navy will remain the same, but the number for
the IAF is expected to go up to 3,500.
 The third year will witness a jump in the number of recruits to around 52,400 and the intake
by the Army will go up to 45,000, Navy will remain the same and the IAF will touch 4,400.
 In the fourth year of the scheme the numbers will go up to around 58,000 and the Army will
take on board 50,000, Navy 3,500 and there will be a significant increase in the IAF’s intake
when 5,300 are taken in.
 Benefits for Agniveers
 Upon the completion of the 4-years of service, a one-time ‘Seva Nidhi’ package of Rs
11.71 lakhs will be paid to the Agniveers that will include their accrued interest thereon.
 The ‘Seva Nidhi’ will be exempt from Income Tax.
 They will also get a Rs 48 lakh life insurance cover for the four years.
 In case of death, the payout will be over Rs 1 crore, including pay for the unserved tenure.
 The government will help rehabilitate soldiers who leave the services after four
years. They will be provided with skill certificates and bridge courses.
 During this period of service to the nation, the Agniveers will be imparted with various
military skills and experience, discipline, physical fitness, leadership qualities, courage
and patriotism. Post this stint of four years, the Agniveers will be infused into the civil
society where they can contribute immensely towards the nation building process. The
skills gained by each Agniveer will be recognised in a certificate to form part of his
unique resume.
 Agniveers, on completion of the four year tenure in the prime of their youth, will be
mature and self-disciplined with the realization to become better version of
himself/herself both professionally as also personally. The avenues and opportunities that
will open up for their progress in the civil world after Agniveer tenure would certainly be
a big plus towards nation building. Moreover, the Seva Nidhi of approximately Rs 11.71
lakhs would aid the Agniveer to pursue his/her future dreams without the financial
pressure, which is normally the case for young people from the financially deprived strata
of society.
 The individuals, selected for enrolment in the Armed Forces as regular cadre, would be
required to serve for a further engagement period of minimum 15 years and would be
governed by the existing terms and conditions of service of Junior Commissioned
Officers/Other Ranks in Indian Army and their equivalent in Indian Navy the IAF.
 The scheme will lead to much more youthful and technically adept war fighting force by
ensuring a fine balance between youthful and experienced personnel in the Armed Forces.
 What are the Related Concerns?
 Difficult to Find Another Job
 The 'Agnipath' scheme opens the way for recruitment of about 45,000 soldiers into Army,
Navy and Air Force in the first year but on a short-term contract of four years. After the
completion of the contract, 25% of them will be retained and the rest will leave the forces.
 Our four years of service will mean other jobs will be out of reach after that, and they will
be left behind their peers.
 No Pension Benefit
 Those hired under the 'Agnipath' scheme will be given a one-time lumpsum of a little
more than Rs 11 lakh when they end their four-year tenure.
 However, they do not receive any pension benefits. For most, seeking a second job is
essential to support themselves and their families.
 Training May Remain Unutilized
 Forces will lose experienced soldiers.
 The jawans joining the Army, Navy and Air Force will be given technical training so that
they are able to support the ongoing operations. But these men and women will leave after
four years, which could create a void.

 Agneepath Scheme Advantages

 A transformative reform of the recruitment policy of the Armed Forces.
 This will be a great opportunity for the candidates from the age limit minimum of 17.5 to a
maximum of 21 years.
 25% of the staff will be retained after 4 years which means lakhs of candidates will ultimately get
permanent jobs.
 The Agniveers that will not be retained will get hands-on experience in serving the armed forces.
They will become more disciplined and skilled at the end of their service. Not only this, these
individuals will have the financial backing of Rs 11 Lakhs – they can start their own business or
utilize the funds for further education.
 A unique opportunity for the youth to serve the country and contribute to Nation Building. Armed
Forces profile to be youthful and dynamic.
 The attractive financial package for the Agniveers. Opportunity for Agniveers to train in the best
institutions and enhance their skills & qualifications.
 Availability of well-disciplined and skilled youth with military ethos in civil society.
 Adequate re-employment opportunities for those returning to society and who could emerge as
role models for the youth.

 Agneepath Scheme Disadvantages

 The Agneepath Scheme will provide employment to the candidates only for 4 years.
 Only 25% of the candidates will be made permanent after the training period and the other 75%
will have to leave the job.
 There will no pension for the candidate appointed during the Agneepath Scheme 2023.
 The Agniveers will get 11 lakh only of the lump sum amount after 4 years from the government
Seva Nidhi Scheme whereas some of the amounts in 11 lakh will be deducted from the recruit’s
salary on monthly basis.
 The agniveers will be recruited for the non-commissioned ranks only ie. Naik, and Lance Naik.
 This recruitment is only for 17.5 to 21 years of age for candidates.
 There is no job security as the candidates will again become unemployed after 4 years of service.
 There will no extra or basic benefits will be provided to the candidate alike the other government
jobs.
 What are Government’s Promises for Non-Retained Agniveers?
 Ease in Bank Loans
 The government will help the disbanded Agniveers to start the next phase with bank
loans, which will be extended to them on priority.
 Preference in Other Services
 A proposal to reserve 10% of the job vacancies in the Union Ministry of Defence for
Agniveers meeting the eligibility criterion has also been approved.
 This reservation will be implemented in the Indian Coast Guard, defence civilian posts
and all 16 Defence Public Sector Undertakings.
 This is in addition to the existing reservation for ex-servicemen.
 The Ministry of Home Affairs has also announced schemes to ensure that the Agniveers
get opportunities to remain in the nation’s service beyond the four years they serve under
the Agnipath Scheme.
 It has announced a 10% reservation as well as an upper age limits relaxation for
Agniveers for recruitment in the Central Armed Paramilitary Forces
(CAPFs) and Assam Rifles.
 The upper age limit for the CAPFs — Border Security Force (BSF), Central Reserve
Police Force (CRPF), Central Industrial Security Force (CISF), Indo-Tibetan Border
Police (ITBP), Sashastra Seema Bal (SSB), and the National Security Guard
(NSG), Special Protection Group (SPG) — will be 26 years.
 Several states, including Assam, Haryana, Uttar Pradesh and Madhya Pradesh, have
announced preferential recruitment of Agniveers in respective government jobs.
 Education
 National Institute of Open Schooling has announced that it will institute a special
programme in consultation with defence authorities to enable Agniveers to further their
education and obtain a Class XII pass certificate.
 The Ministry of Education has decided to launch a three-year skill-based bachelor’s
degree programme for serving defence personnel that will recognise the training they have
received during stint time in the armed forces.

 What could be the Way Forward?

 Ease in Licensing
 Government should consider relaxation in mandatory licensing regulations for Agniveers
to attract more of them to invest in starting up a business unit.
 It will act as a double benefit move of providing entrepreneurial opportunity and growth
in the economy.
 Tax Exemptions
 Tax exemptions on salary income/profit earned through business for a specific initial
period could be considered. It will attract more Agniveers to either take up an
employment opportunity or start up a business.
 It will work as an eliminating factor of spending idle money and being unemployed.
 Attractive Interest Rates
 Banks can consider giving attractive interest rates on the deposits of Agniveers.
 It will also act as a double benefit move as an attractive interest rate will act as earning for
Agniveers and banks will get access to more money in the market.
 Relaxation in Admission to Institutions
 For those Agniveers who want to pursue higher education, a relaxation in the admission
criteria (relaxation in cut off etc) will prove to be a major attraction.
 Highly qualified and disciplined Agniveers will have the ability to take up ample
opportunities available to them.
 Benefits of Agnipath scheme for the Nation
 As youths from all walks of life, including women will be a part of the Indian Armed Forces, the
ideals of "unity in diversity" will manifest. Thus, in this way national integration can become a
reality.
 The Agnipath scheme will prepare youths to be empowered, disciplined, skilled and possess
military ethos that will contribute in national development or nation building.
 Future Ready Soldiers
 It will create “future-ready” soldiers.
 More Employment Opportunities
 It will increase employment opportunities and because of the skills and experience
acquired during the four-year service such soldiers will get employment in various fields.
 Higher Skilled Workforce
 This will also lead to availability of a higher-skilled workforce to the economy which will
be helpful in productivity gain and overall GDP growth.

 Benefits of Agnipath scheme for the Armed Forces

 The beneficiaries of this scheme i.e., the youths will gradually evolve to be more energetic, fitter,
diverse, trainable, resilient that will help them in remaining battle ready.
 The best of the candidates will be sieved out through a transparent and rigorous selection process
in place. Having excellent youths in the team will benefit the Indian Armed Forces
immensely.
 By having a youthful profile, there will be optimal balance between youths and more experiences
ones. While youths have more stamina or endurance, experienced ones have more expertise or
skills.
 SKILL INDIA is an initiative by the government of India to help one acquire skills in a particular
field as well as gain employment opportunities. Through the Agnipath scheme, endeavours will
be carried out to make the best use of the benefits of SKILL INDIA through induction from tech
institutes.
 By having a youthful profile, there will be optimal balance between youths and more experiences
ones. While youths have more stamina or endurance, experienced ones have more expertise or
skills.

 Benefits of Agnipath scheme for Individuals

 Youths who have been expectant of joining the Indian Armed Forces can serve the nation through
the Agnipath scheme.
 There will be overall development of the youth in terms of skills, military discipline, motivation
and physical well-being.
 An individual that will attain merits in the form of certifications, diplomas, higher education or
credits will be smoothly integrated into the society and enjoy a settled life.
 Under the Agnipath scheme, beneficiaries will have a good financial package that will improve
the quality of their lives. The stable income so attained will prove tough competition for his
civilian counterparts.
 By attaining the qualities of team building, ethos, camaraderie, and military training, individuals
will be empowered to be more confident and better citizens of the nation.
 By acquiring the necessary skills, qualifications, and merits, individuals will have the best resume
in hand that will enable them to prove themselves unique and well-suited for different job roles.

The Agnipath Scheme will aid in the development of youths that comprise the Indian
Armed Forces which in turn will contribute to the nation and society at large.
 Artificial Intelligence (AI)
Artificial Intelligence (AI) is an area of computer science related to creating intelligent machines.
Artificial Intelligence (AI) involves a machine that mimics the human mind’s cognitive functions such as
learning and problem solving. Artificial Intelligence (AI) can also be defined as a machine that can think
and act rationally and is capable of learning and solving problems autonomously.

 Types of AI
 Algorithm-based AI
Global Search engines like Google use psychological profiling algorithms to predict the users
behaviors and preferences based on their past preferences.
 Neural-Network-based AI
Neural networks are computer systems, modeled on the human brain and replicating the way a
human brain’s network of neurons processes and interprets data. This kind of AI learns
autonomously.
 Deep Learning AI
Deep learning AI involves multiple layers of neural networks, working independently as well as
in combination. Deep learning AI is used in image recognition, real-time face recognition,
automatic speech recognition, cancer treatment, self-driving vehicles and genetics among others.

 Benefits of AI
 Cyber security.
 Warfare systems.
 Logistics and transport.
 Target recognition.
 Warfare healthcare.
 Threat monitoring & situational awareness.
 AI & data information processing.
 Combat simulation & training.
 Can do tasks that are difficult or risky for humans.
 Can overcome human error.
 Can remove the requirement of human supervision in a number of tasks, thereby helping humans
focus on more productive work.
 AI also has multiple uses in a wide spectrum of fields with immense benefits, if it is regulated and
used for good of mankind.

 Drawbacks of AI
 Increasing Unemployment
If AI is used along with robotics, it could automate many tasks which could lead to millions of
humans losing their jobs in industries.
 Increasing Disparity between the Rich and the Working Class
AI could make the rich wealthier and could have a negative impact on the working classes.
 Implications for Human Rights and Freedom
Governments could utilise AI to monitor citizens thereby invading their privacy. This could have
implications for human rights and freedom.
 Helping Media Corporations Control People’s Lives
AI could also help media corporations, control different aspects of people’s lives.
 Military Applications of AI could be Dangerous
 AI has many military applications and is currently being used in autonomous drones to bomb
targets without human intervention. However, if such system is used in nuclear weapons it could
endanger the human race, according to analysts.

 AI to Enhance the Operational Preparedness of the Armed Forces in India

 A high-powered Task Force headed by Tata Sons was finalising the specifics of the project,
which would be implemented in a “partnership model” between the Armed Forces and the private
sector.
 AI is where the future is going to be. We need to prepare ourselves for the next generation
warfare which will be more and more technology-driven, more and more automated and
robotised.
 India has also started to develop the capabilities of its Armed Forces like many other world
powers.
 Unmanned aerial vehicles, naval vessels, tanks and automatic robotic rifles as weapon systems
would have an extensive use in future wars.
 The Government’s decision is seen as part of the broader policy initiative to prepare the Indian
Army, Air Force and Navy for next-generation warfare amid increasing investments by China in
AI for its military.
 Defence experts point out that the application of AI in border surveillance could ease the pressure
on the Armed Forces personnel guarding the borders with China and Pakistan.
 Analysts point out that all the big powers like the US, Britain, France, the EU and China are
increasingly investing in AI. The US is also carrying out operations to target terrorist hideouts in
Afghanistan and north-west Pakistan using drones which operate with the help of AI,
successfully.
 AI would be used in detecting human intrusions on the borders and in constructing new road
maps for the Indian Armed Forces.
 The DRDO Centre for AI and Robotics has developed a solution for signal intelligence to
enhance intelligence collation and analytical capabilities of the Armed Forces.
 To study the whole gamut of issues on the implications of AI on national security and defence
needs, a multi-stakeholder Task Force has been constituted, according to the Ministry of Defence
(MoD).
 The Task Force has initiated research and innovation in AI and outlined its adoption in the
defence sector including future roadmap on how to integrate and embed AI strategy with core
defence strategy.
 AI based tools will aid the defence forces constructively in areas such as decision support, sensor
data analysis, predictive maintenance, situational awareness, accurate data extraction, security
etc. These tools would assist defence personnel in better operations, maintenance and logistics
support.
 The Government of India is expecting enhanced use of Artificial Intelligence and Internet of
Things in the fields of Aero Space, Automation, Defence and Military operations.
 Experts in Defence intelligence wing opine that AI and Internet of Things play a crucial role in
development and deployment of autonomous weapons, intruders detection, situation analysis,
counter measures, face recognition and pattern analyses, which would help in military operations.
 The rapid advances in technology necessitate that we now incorporate the industrial sector in
defence manufacturing,” as statement issued by CDS.
 The Indian Defence industry is taking giant steps in transforming the armed forces into one of the
most advanced in the world. The adoption of technology based on Artificial Intelligence (AI) will
revolutionise the Indian Military. It also places India firmly in the huge defence product market.
  In view of increasing threat of cyber warfare India needs to be prepared. We have to understand
that we have disputed land borders on our western sector. We don’t see peace on the horizon
anywhere in the near future and armed forces need to be prepared. We need to be prepared by
imbibing new technologies, keeping pace with advancements in warfare. Gone are the days when
people fought across sectors with guns and rifles. We are going to see a lot of non-contact warfare
happening.
 Government supports and plans to modernize the military through AI is a result of years of
groundwork. Bold policies, dedicated budgets, policy changes and the thrust towards
indigenisation, have helped create an atmosphere of cutting-edge innovation and collaboration.
 This joint effort among industry both public and private, research organisations, academic
institutions, start-ups and innovators has helped create many unique technological products based
on AI in the areas of data, logistics, surveillance, weapons and many more.
 The introduction of autonomy in weapon systems, in ISR (Intelligence, Surveillance and
Reconnaissance), data management, can be a huge asset in stopping terrorism, installing counter-
terrorism measures, protecting soldiers. In fact, AI in defence can change combat and conflict at
the deepest levels.

 AI in Recent Conflicts
 The Russian Warship Moskva was sunk in the black sea by a drone named Bayraktaras claimed
by Ukraine and US .Cyber-attacks on Ukrainian’s communication system by Russia, Clearview
AI used by Ukraine for facial recognition to identify the dead, and many other technologies are
being tested in the ongoing conflict between Russia and Ukraine. The hacking of defence, space
and communication installation has become a new regime in operation that invokes a counter
deterrent regime.
 In the current ongoing war between Russia and Ukraine, drone assaults have replaced the use of
fighter jets in confined areas. Soldier equipment is geared with sensors that can tell how much
ammunition is left, the health of the armor, and many more.

 The Exponential Rise of AI in India

 The economic potential of the deployment of AI has been widely highlighted by policymakers,
technologists, academics and civil society around the world. AI technologies are on course to
become the most powerful agents of transformation in human history.
 AI is being embraced by an increasing number of businesses, individuals and even governments
to boost productivity and raise efficiency. It will not only reshape the global economic and
technological landscape but also every aspect of our daily lives.
 For India, the fifth-largest economy in the world and a young nation, it is imperative to be
prepared to answer the challenges of AI, leverage it to solve social problems, and move towards
greater economic prosperity. AI is expected to add USD 967 billion to the Indian economy by
2035 and USD 450-500 billion to India's GDP by the next decade, accounting for 10 per cent of
the country's USD 5 trillion GDP target

 Responsible AI for all

 The Government of India has taken concrete steps to encourage the adoption of AI responsibly
and build public trust in using this technology, placing the idea of 'AI for All' at the core of our
National Strategy for AI.
 The Government of India organised Responsible AI for Social Empowerment (RAISE) in 2020, a
first-of-its-kind global meeting of minds on Artificial Intelligence to drive India's vision and
roadmap for social transformation, inclusion and empowerment through responsible AI. It was
attended by over 79,000 stakeholders from academia, research, industry and government
representatives from 147 participating countries. The summit also welcomed 320 distinguished
 speakers from 21 countries participating in the event. The RAISE 2020 Summit was a global
success and has been followed up with initiatives like AI Pe Charcha and Digital India Dialogues,
which brings together experts from industry and practitioners to showcase use cases and
examples of applications of AI for improving services. Recently, the Government has launched
AI For All (aifor-all.in), an initiative that aims to create a basic understanding of AI for all.

 AI uses in India
 Artificial Intelligence in India is addressing societal needs in areas such as healthcare, education,
agriculture, smart cities, and infrastructure, including smart mobility and transportation.
 It is helping push technology frontiers through the creation of new knowledge and in developing
and deploying applications. As per a NASSCOM report, India ranks first in terms of Artificial
Intelligence skill penetration and AI talent concentration, which is also the highest among all G20
and OECD countries.
 A leader in the deployment of digital public infrastructure, India is set to accommodate AI into its
folds to yield greater service excellence. In agriculture, AI is being employed through techniques
such as weather pattern modelling and geospatial imaging to optimise crop yields. The medical
field is improving medical image analysis to detect life-threatening illnesses earlier and enable
more effective treatment plans. In the education sector, new AI-powered technologies are helping
the identification of at-risk pupils, forecasting enrollment, and prognosticating outcomes.
 The Government of India has been at the forefront of applying some of these cutting-edge AI
technologies in areas from e-Governance, agriculture, healthcare, education, finance, and banking
to law enforcement. AI-powered tools like MyGov Corona Helpdesk, Aarogya Setu, Digi Locker,
Digi Yatra and Co-Win are some examples of how the Government is leveraging AI and data to
address big challenges. Alongside deployment, the Government has also focused on evangelizing
and laying the foundation for building a strong AI-ready future generation.

 Government steps to promote AI

 The Indian Government has also been supportive of the expansion of the AI sector. The
Government's National Informatics Centre (NIC) provides cloud-based platforms to facilitate AI
services such as AIManthan which specialises in deep learning models, AI-Vani which is suited
for chatbots and voice services, and AI-Satyapikaanan which is optimised for biometric
technologies like face recognition.
 The National Artificial Intelligence Portal and the National AI Mission have been developed to
encourage the development and adoption of AI throughout the nation. The MeitY Startup Hub
and the National e-Government Plan are positioned to further the cause of information
technology.
 Further, INDIAai (the National AI Portal of India), a joint venture by MeitY, NEGD and
NASSCOM, has been set up to prepare the nation for an AI future. It is the single central
knowledge hub on artificial intelligence and allied fields for aspiring entrepreneurs, students,
professionals, academics, and everyone else. India has curated a booklet as a basic introduction to
AI that a person of any age and background can comprehend the basics. Scan the QR code to read
the booklet FutureSkills PRIME is another B2C framework by the Government for re-skilling/
up-skilling IT professionals in 10 emerging areas including Artificial Intelligence.
 The Government has also initiated the 'Visvesvaraya PhD Scheme' which promotes research in
areas including Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning.
 To foster innovation through research, the Government has created several 'Centres of Excellence'
on various Emerging Technologies including Artificial Intelligence. This will allow leading
industry players to partner in conducting interdisciplinary research and develop cutting-edge
applications and scalable problem solutions in areas of agriculture, health, and sustainable cities.
  To empower government school students with appropriate newage tech mindset, relevant skillsets
and access to required tool sets, Responsible AI for Youth Program has been launched and over
11,000 Government school children were imparted training in AI.
 For research and development in AI, Defence Research Development Organisation (DRDO) has
two dedicated laboratories, Centre for Artificial Intelligence and Robotics (CAIR), Bengaluru and
DRDO Young Scientist Laboratory (DYSL)-AI, Bengaluru for application oriented research in
AI.
 India has also joined the league of leading economies including the USA, UK, EU, Australia,
Canada, France, Germany, Italy, Japan, Mexico, New Zealand, Republic of Korea, and Singapore
as a founding member of the Global Partnership on Artificial Intelligence (GPAI), which is an
international and multistakeholder initiative to guide the responsible development and use of AI,
grounded in human rights, inclusion, diversity, innovation, and economic growth.

 Government adoption of AI
 Digital India BHASHINI: Digital India BHASHINI, as India's Artificial Intelligence (AI)- led
language translation platform, will enable massive citizen engagement to build multilingual
datasets through a crowd-sourcing initiative called Bhasha Daan. It aims to build a National
Public Digital Platform for languages and seeks to enable easy access to the internet and digital
services in Indian languages, including voice-based access, and help the creation of content in
Indian languages. The platform will catalyse the entire digital ecosystem and is a giant step
towards realising the goal of Digital Government
 City Commute: In November 2022, Bengaluru Metro Rail Corporation Ltd introduced QR-
ticketing service powered by AI automation. It is an automated text platform on WhatsApp which
offers ticket and metro rail pass booking. Users can enquire about routes and ticket prices, and
register their unified payments interface (UPI)-linked bank accounts to buy tickets and passes for
journeys.
 AI-enabled Chatbots: The Government is increasingly adopting the usage of AIenabled chatbots
for various services. These chatbots work as conversational interfaces that mimic human
interactions with customers. Indian Railways has AskDisha chatbot for the benefit of the users of
the ticketing website www.irctc.co.in and tourism website www.irctc tourism.com, where
customers can ask queries by voice as well as text. MyGov Helpdesk, an AIenabled chatbot on
WhatsApp, empowered people with COVIDrelated information and vaccination and now
provides access to Digilocker documents. UMANG app of the Government has also launched its
voice-based chatbot that allows users to ask questions in Hindi and English, and through voice or
text, about various Government services. National Payments Corporation of India's DigiSaathi
also uses AI to provide assistance to users with digital payment product and services queries.
 Indian Railways: Indian Railways has introduced the 'Ideal Train Profile', an AI-enabled system,
to maximise the capacity utilisation and revenue generation in reserved mail express trains by
regularly analysing the demand pattern of every single train. Developed by the Centre of
Railways Information System (CRIS), the AI programme takes into account various factors such
as train origin and destination, timings, class of accommodation, and availability of alternative
trains to automate the best possible ticket allocation and reduce wait lists. The system will also
help zonal railways to conduct periodic review of the train quotas to address the changing
demand mix on account of holidays, festivals, seasons, etc.
 Traffic Management: States like Goa, Kerala, Karnataka, and Delhi have or are planning to use
AI for traffic management and road safety. Intelligent Traffic Management Systems (ITMS) helps
the traffic police in security, signal management, and enforcing traffic rules effectively and send
auto-generated challans to the violators with minimum human interventions. Some of these
systems are expected to include high resolution cameras with sensor based real-time traffic
volume count technology.
  iRASTE for Road Safety: In order to make Indian roads more safe and reduce accidents,
predictive AI is being used to identify risks on the road and to provide a collision alert system to
communicate timely alerts to drivers. Started as a pilot project in Nagpur City of Maharashtra has
seen the implementation of Government's project iRASTE (Intelligent Solutions for Road Safety
through Technology and Engineering). This system identifies potential accident-causing scenarios
while driving a vehicle and alerts drivers about the same with the help of the Advanced Driver
Assistance System (ADAS).The system identifies 'greyspots' by data analysis and mobility
analysis by continuously monitoring dynamic risks on the entire road network. The system also
conducts continuous monitoring of roads and designs engineering fixes to correct existing road
blackspots for preventive maintenance and improved road infrastructure.
 Agriculture: AI in agriculture is helping in detection of pests and weeds, precision farming with
the help of predictive analytics, crop health assessment through drones, soil monitoring system,
price forecasting of crops based on historical data, and weather forecast to predict unfavourable
weather conditions. AI is a rapidly growing field with a wide range of career opportunities. In
India, the demand for AI professionals is expected to grow significantly in the coming years
owing to the increasing adoption of AI by businesses across a variety of industries, including
healthcare, finance, manufacturing, and retail. Some of the most in-demand AI jobs in India
include data scientist, machine learning engineer, robotics engineer, Natural Language Processing
(NLP) engineer, computer vision engineer, AI researcher, AI product manager, AI consultant and
AI entrepreneur. The skills required to work with AI vary depending on the specific role, but
there are some general skills that are essential for anyone who wants to work in this field, such as
programming, mathematics, and data science.

 Conclusion
 This is just the beginning of the technologies used in war. Nations are building the best
technologies to dominate the whole world without seeing the risk of invoking the robotic era.
Giving machine a brain will erase the human race. Imagine a robot designed with an AI system
that can work on its failure and update itself for the best accuray.
 Moreover, some of the models are already developed and scientists are very much aware of the
disasters that can come their way. Future military applications will also heavily rely on artificial
intelligence. It will be employed considerably more than people to boost operating speed,
decrease workload, and improve production.
 India also boasts one of the most thriving start-up ecosystems in the world, with dozens of
unicorns deploying AI-powered tools in their core services. They have widened the scope of
India’s AI strategy to build tools for India and the world, especially the global south.
 When it comes to technology, India has been a paradox. The country developed advanced digital
computers early and has highly advanced and cost-effective space programmes. Yet until just a
few decades ago, the nation lagged in its digital transformation and accessibility.
 Today, India’s government is pushing to put digital technologies at the core of its inclusive
development, partly through widespread internet access and one of the world’s most affordable
data pricing schemes. As a result, some fantastic solutions for India’s age-old problems are
coming to light.In the years to come, the AI market is all set to grow further, driven by the
increasing use of cloud-based applications and ever-expanding benefits being realised from AI-
driven decision-making.

Leaders are changing the rules of conducting business in India. Operations are
becoming more fast-paced to keep up with the changing dynamics of the tech
industry and AI is playing a huge part in this. In a nutshell, it is quite evident that
the Indian industry leaders are leveraging AI to its best.
 Indo- ASEAN Relations
 What is ASEAN?
 The Association of Southeast Asian Nations is a regional organization which was established to
promote political and social stability amid rising tensions among the Asia-Pacific’s post-
colonial states.
 It also aims to promote economic growth, peace, security, social progress and cultural
development in the Southeast Asian region.
 The motto of ASEAN is “One Vision, One Identity, One Community”.
 ASEAN Secretariat – Indonesia, Jakarta. 8th August is observed as ASEAN Day.
 Established in 1967 with the signing of the ASEAN Declaration (Bangkok Declaration) by its
founding fathers. Founding Fathers of ASEAN are: Indonesia, Malaysia, Philippines, Singapore
and Thailand.

 Institution Mechanism
 Chairmanship of ASEAN rotates annually, based on the alphabetical order of the English
names of Member States.
 ASEAN Summit: The supreme policy making body of ASEAN. As the highest level of authority
in ASEAN, the Summit sets the direction for ASEAN policies and objectives. Under the Charter,
the Summit meets twice a year.
 ASEAN Ministerial Councils: The Charter established four important new Ministerial bodies to
support the Summit.
1. ASEAN Coordinating Council (ACC)
2. ASEAN Political-Security Community Council
3. ASEAN Economic Community Council
4. ASEAN Socio-Cultural Community Council

 Member Nations
1. Indonesia 5. Thailand 9. Myanmar
2. Malaysia 6. Brunei 10. Cambodia
3. Philippines 7. Vietnam
4. Singapore 8. Laos

 Significance of the grouping

 3rd largest market in the world – larger than EU and North American markets.
 6th largest economy in the world.3rd in Asia.
 Free-trade agreements (FTAs) with China, Japan, South Korea, India, Australia and New
Zealand.
 4th most popular investment destination globally.
 Trade between India and the ASEAN region has surpassed $80 billion.

 ASEAN’s role in Regional Peace and Security

 Southeast Asia is a diverse and complex region where every major culture and civilisation of the
world finds a place.
 Modern Southeast Asia presents an example of varied cultures living together and thriving,
despite the region experiencing decades of conflicts.
 The year 2017 marks the 50th year of the establishment of ASEAN.
 ASEAN’s Role
 The group acted as a platform for the member nations to resolve disputes from economic
aspects to strategic and security aspects.
 Regional and extra-regional multilateral platforms engage ASEAN with its dialogue
partners were created.
 These include the Annual Ministerial Meeting (AMM), Asia -Pacific Economic
Partnership (APEC) and ASEAN Regional Forum (ARF) among others.
 Through these multilateral initiatives, ASEAN has maintained stable relations with the
great powers in Asia.
 ASEAN is now important in the region. It has helped shape regional interactions with the
great powers including China, India, Japan and the US.
 The contribution towards regional peace, stability and prosperity goes beyond Southeast
Asia to the wider Asia-Pacific region.
 ASEAN has declared itself as a nuclear weapon free zone.

 ASEAN’s Strength
 ASEAN’s strength lies in its great sense of community despite its diversity.
 The adoption of the ASEAN Charter in 2007 reinforces the sense of community.
 The neutral role played by ASEAN in its external relations has helped ASEAN to “retain
its centrality in the region”.
 ASEAN is seen as the most successful regional organisation next only to the EU.
 The centrality of Asia and ASEAN in global politics adds to the opportunities ASEAN
has a major role in providing peace and stability in the region

 Weaknesses of ASEAN
 Lack of natural custodian, accepting a common responsibility of ownership to keep the
organisation moving.
 Geopolitical conflicts and rivalries, weak leadership and the failure to deal with both
 Intra-ASEAN security issues like Rohingya crisis, migration, human trafficking,
pandemics, climate change, South China Sea and piracy.

 Concerns / Challenges for ASEAN

 China’s territorial claims in the oil and gas-rich South China Sea, and building up of
artificial islands can prove to be a threat for freedom of navigation in region.
 The South-China sea dispute has resulted into many ASEAN nations aligning with China.
 Growing threat posed by Islamic State in Southeast Asia.
 ASEAN was largely unsuccessful in containing the Rohingaya refugee crisis.
 Cross country organised crime like drug trafficking between Myanmar, Thailand and
Laos forming the Golden Triangle could not be contained by ASEAN.
 Regional imbalances in the economic and social status of its individual markets.
 Gap between rich and poor ASEAN member states remains very large and they have a mixed
record on income inequality. The members’ political systems are equally mixed with
democracies, communist, and authoritarian states.
 The emphasis on consensus sometimes becomes a chief drawback – difficult problems have
been avoided rather than confronted.
 There is no central mechanism to enforce compliance.
 Inefficient dispute-settlement mechanism, whether it be in the economic or political spheres.
 India and ASEAN
 India's relationship with ASEAN is a key pillar of her foreign policy and the foundation of Act
East Policy.
 India has a separate Mission to ASEAN and the East Asia Summit (EAS) in Jakarta.
 India and ASEAN already has 25 years of Dialogue Partnership, 15 years of Summit Level
interaction and 5 years of Strategic Partnership with ASEAN.
 Economic Cooperation
 ASEAN is India's 4th largest trading partner.
 India's trade with ASEAN stands at approx. 10.6% of India's overall trade.
 India's export to ASEAN stands at 11.28% of our total exports. The ASEAN-India Free
Trade Area has been completed.
 ASEAN India-Business Council (AIBC) was set up in 2003 to bring key private sector
players from India and the ASEAN countries on a single platform.
 Socio-Cultural Cooperation
 Programmes to boost People-to-People Interaction with ASEAN, such as inviting ASEAN
students to India, Special Training Course for ASEAN diplomats, Exchange of
Parliamentarians, etc.
 Funds
 Financial assistance has been provided to ASEAN countries from the following Funds:
 ASEAN-India Cooperation Fund
 ASEAN-India S&T Development Fund
 ASEAN-India Green Fund
 Delhi Declaration
 To identify Cooperation in the Maritime Domain as the key area of cooperation under the
ASEAN-India strategic partnership.
 Delhi Dialogue
 Annual event for discussing politico-security and economic issues between ASEAN and
India.
 ASEAN-India Centre (AIC)
 To undertake policy research, advocacy and networking activities with organizations and
think-tanks in India and ASEAN.
 Political Security Cooperation
 India places ASEAN at the centre of its Indo-Pacific vision of Security and Growth for All
in the Region.

 What is the Significance of ASEAN for India?

 India needs a close diplomatic relationship with ASEAN nations both for economic and security
reasons.
 Connectivity with the ASEAN nations can allow India to improve its presence in the region.
 These connectivity projects keep Northeast India at the centre, ensuring the economic growth of
the northeastern states.
 Improved trade ties with the ASEAN nations would mean a counter to China’s presence in the
region and economic growth and development for India.
 ASEAN occupies a centralised position in the rules-based security architecture in the Indo-
Pacific, which is vital for India since most of its trade is dependent on maritime security.
 Collaboration with the ASEAN nations is necessary to counter insurgency in the Northeast,
combat terrorism, tax evasions etc.
 Why India and ASEAN Must Boost Cooperation?
 Southeast Asia is an important focal point of India's foreign policy and India sees ASEAN as
part of its immediate neighbourhood.
 India’s participation in ASEAN symbolises its commitment to continue a deepening
relationship with ASEAN Member States, in particular, and with the Indo-Pacific region, in
general, within the framework of India’s Act East Policy.
 ASEAN is a strategic partner of India since 2012. The creation of ASEAN-India Free Trade
Area has boosted the ASEAN-India economic integration process. About 10–15% of India's
trade depends upon these ASEAN nations.
 ASEAN is an important part of India's vision of open, mutual, inclusive and rules-based
security architecture in the Asia Pacific region where disputes are resolved through dialogue
and not unilateral show of force.
 India and ASEAN have a unique opportunity to reap the potential of their geographic proximity
as their cultural and trade ties go back to 2000 years.
 China’s aggressive posture in the Southeast Asian region, naval forays in the Indo-Pacific and
its BRI connectivity project, have the potential to change equations in the region.
 Given the South China Sea issue states support freedom of navigation and non-militarization as
well as observance of a rules-based approach in resolving the conflict.
 Continuing tensions between the ‘great powers’ – between the US and Russia, or the US and
China – are forcing the unaligned countries of ASEAN and India to forge a common
understanding.
 The demand for goods in Western economies has come down, hence the region needs to look
deeper within to grow markets and increase trade.

 Challenges and Concerns

 With trade with ASEAN at $80 billion, India ranks lower than not just the US and China, but
also South Korea, Japan and Australia. In comparison, China-ASEAN trade is $450 billion.
 The RCEP negotiations launched in 2012 have been held up, largely because of Indian concerns
over unfettered access to Chinese goods and ASEAN resistance to movement of Indian services
and labour.
 Connectivity, between ASEAN countries and India, as well as India’s connectivity through its
Northeast to Myanmar and beyond are lagging behind. Work on the extension of the India-
Myanmar-Thailand Trilateral Highway and the Kaladan multimodal project, are far from
completion.
 Border trade posts and infrastructure in the Northeast need much improvement to attract
investment in the region.

 Way Forward
 India needs to do a more convincing job as a beneficial strategic partner of ASEAN. It has to
boost its domestic economic reforms agenda, enhance connectivity within the region, and
increase its presence in regional institutions.
 Other than Trilateral Highway or Kaladan projects, India should also focus on partnering with
Japan in implementing mega corridors such as ASEAN India islands connectivity or Indo-
Pacific connectivity.
 The ASEAN countries have always looked up to India for attaining a balance of power against
China. However, India has not been able to live up to their expectations.

Starting with the Look East Policy in the 1990s, India advanced its policy in
2014 as Act East Policy taking up its partnership with ASEAN to a step
further which provided an opportunity for India to explore Southeast Asia.
 Atmanirbhar Bharat Abhiyan
 What is Atmanirbhar Bharat?
 Atmanirbhar Bharat Abhiyan is a mission initiated by the government of India under the
leadership of Prime Minister Narendra Modi, who initiated it in May 2020 to make India a self-
reliant nation. This mission was launched during the pandemic. The main purpose of launching
this program was to support the country during the pandemic, for which the PM announced an
economic package worth ₹ 20 lakh crores.
 Although this mission was launched to combat the vaccination crisis during the Coronavirus
pandemic, later on, it developed drastically, and today many sectors are seen performing in the
same field working in other dimensions.
 The package released by the PM of India focused on 4 major fields:
 Land  Laws
 Labour  Liquidity

 The goal of Atmanirbhar Bharat mission is to reduce the import of products by improving the
quality and quantity within the country itself.
 This mission does not signify any exclusionary strategy but is more of creating a helping hand to
the world by empowering the country's population.
 Atmanirbhar Bharat mission's primary focus is on the promotion of local products. The scheme
aims to cut down on dependence on imports and focus on indigenous quality products to make
India self-reliant.
 During the announcement of this scheme, PM Modi mentioned the Sanskrit phrase "Eshah
Panthah" which means "self-sufficient India". It means self-reliance is the only way out for India.
This phrase is mentioned in Mundaka Upanishad.
 Globalisation will become more human-centric as a result of the Self-Reliant India Mission. In a
globalised world, the notion of five pillars of Self-Reliant India has evolved, and it is distinct
from being self-centred. The world is given a glimpse of hope by India’s underlying concept and
tradition of “Vasudhaiva Kutumbakam.” This should be considered in the context of Human-
Centric vs Economy-Centered Globalization.
 Self-sufficiency does not imply isolation from the rest of the world. India believes in the world’s
welfare, and its progress is intertwined with that of the rest of the world. The world believes that
India can significantly contribute to humanity’s growth.
 The PM also emphasised being vocal about local products and urged people to buy exclusively
locally produced goods.
 Atmanirbhar Bharat is more complimentary to the Make in India initiative, where manufacturing
in India is encouraged.

 Focus Areas
 Agriculture  Education  Food Security
 MSME  Defence  Mining
 Migrants  Space  Reforms
 Health  Banking Credit

 Five Phases of Atmanirbhar Bharat

 Businesses including MSMES  Agriculture
 Poor,including migrants and farmers  Government Reforms and Enablers
 New Horizons of Growth
 Objectives of Atmanirbhar Bharat
 The Atmanirbhar Bharat program has the higher objective of reducing the dependency on the
import of any foreign products and focuses on the production of its substitute within the
boundaries of the country to improve the compliance and production of quality goods to create a
global market share.
 To make the country and its citizens self-reliant in all senses, to transform India into a global
supply chain hub and to strengthen the local and regional manufacturers and service providers.
 To improve the standard of living of citizens by focusing on the trade deficit and the balance of
payment.
 To incentivise small businesses and farmers who faced losses from COVID-19 by providing them
special incentives and funds.
 The Atmanirbhar Bharat program focuses more on becoming vocal for locals and promoting the
products produced locally that benefit the rest of the country.
 It has already released a package worth ₹ 20 lakh crores and will keep on releasing more funds to
cater to the labourers, MSMEs, cottage industries, and Middle Class industries.
 By reducing the imports, increasing the production within the country, and increasing the export,
it is a vision to become a helping hand and partner for the economic growth of the entire world.

 Five Pillars of Atmanirbhar Bharat

 Economy: To build a type of economy that is sufficient enough to take a Quantum jump rather
than growing and changing incrementally.
 Infrastructure: To create more and more Infrastructures within the country that becomes the
spotlight and identity for modern India.
 System: To create a system that runs on technology and can fulfil the needs and dreams of 21st-
century requirements. The present system would be entirely upgraded, unlike the past conditions.
 Demography: The vibrant demographic is the present millennials in the country who are
ambitious enough to bring the nation to a global level and upgrade it from developing to
developed countries. Being the world's largest democracy, the vibrant demography would be
given chances to come up and be part of a selfreliant India.
 Demand: To create a demand cycle, there has to be proper supply there for Atmanirbhar Bharat
aims to create a proper cycle of demand and supply chain within the economy, which will boost
the needs of the country to be harnessed at its fullest.

 The important key features of Atmanirbhar Bharat mission that aims to make a self-
reliant, self- sufficient India are:
 Job Creation  Financial Support to Industries
 Increasing expenditure on the health  Boost to Agriculture
 Reforms in Education  Support to States
 Ease of doing Business

 Why is the Atmanirbhar Bharat Abhiyaan needed?

 To improve the share of the domestic manufacturing sector in the Gross Value Added (GVA). In
the last decade, despite the growth of the GDP of India, the manufacturing sector remains
stagnant.
 The Atmanirbhar Abhiyan is needed to promote local and indigenous products from different
parts of the country and to reduce the over-dependent on imports from foreign countries and
decrease the fiscal deficit by increasing exports.
  There are many policies that are as old as 100 years. Through this scheme, the Government will
take several bold reforms related to supply chain for agriculture, rational tax systems, simple,
clear and rational laws, human resource management, and a strong financial system.

 Atmanirbhar Bharat in Defence

 A formidable military, armed with advanced technology and modern weaponry, serves as a shield
for a nation, protecting it from external aggression and internal turmoil. It reflects the country's
military prowess and its ability to defend its sovereignty. In today's global scenario, it is
imperative for countries to constantly upgrade their military equipment and surveillance systems.
India too, must strive to build a strong and well-equipped military force to fortify its security,
intelligence and territorial integrity.
 In light of the current geopolitical landscape, it is imperative for India to assert its autonomy in
the region. To safeguard its border regions, India must not only possess modern defence
equipment but also the strategic autonomy to acquire and maintain such equipment.
 A selfreliant defence industry would not only enhance India's defence capabilities but also bolster
the nation's economy. With this strategy, over the years, India's capital expenditure in defence
budget is increasing, and within that, the percentage reserved for indigenous procurement has also
been increasing.
 India faces a possibility of a two-front war situation in the near future wherein it has to combat its
adversary “Pakistan” along with its all-weather friend/iron brother (Peoples Republic of China)..
 India has till now released lists of over 650 defence items slated to be manufactured locally,
which include Light Combat Aircraft (LCA), Tanks, Vehicles, Submarines, Missiles, Satellites,
Corvette, Radars, Avionics etc. As per government estimates, orders worth Rs 7 lakh crore are
likely to be placed in the next five to seven years as part of these items. With this strategy, over
the years, India's capital expenditure in defence budget is increasing, and within that, the
percentage reserved for indigenous procurement has also been increasing.
 Some of the recent 'Make in India' category of weapon systems and equipment inducted/ordered
by the Indian armed forces, propelling India's vision to be self-reliant are:
 INS Vikrant: India's first indigenous aircraft carrier INS Vikrant was commissioned in
September 2022. The commissioning showcased the country's growing prowess of
indigenous manufacturing and a major milestone in the path towards 'AatmaNirbhar Bharat.
Designed for a crew of around 1,600 officers and sailors. It has a large number of indigenous
equipment and machinery, involving major industrial houses in the country as well as over
100 MSMEs. INS Vikrant is the largest ship ever built in the maritime history of India. The
carrier is designed with a very high degree of automation for machinery operations, ship
navigation and survivability. It is capable of operating an air wing consisting of 30 aircraft
comprising MiG29K fighter jets, Kamov-31, and MH-60R multi-role helicopters, in addition
to indigenously manufactured Advanced Light Helicopters and Light Combat Aircraft Navy.
 Main Battle Tank-Arjun: DRDO has designed and developed Main Battle Tank (MBT)
Arjun, a multi-disciplinary Armoured Fighting Vehicle, which has already been inducted into
the Indian Army. It is a state-of-the-art tank with superior firepower, high mobility, and
excellent protection.
 LCH Prachanda: Prachanda-Light Combat Helicopter (LCH) designed and developed by
HAL, was inducted into the IAF in October 2022. The LCH is the first indigenous Multi-Role
Combat Helicopter which has potent ground attack and aerial combat capability. Onboard
advanced navigation systems, guns tailored for close combat and potent air-to-air missiles
make the LCH especially suited for the modern battlefield. Prachanda meets the requirements
of modern warfare and necessary quality parameters under varied conditions of operations.
Prachanda is the only attack helicopter in the world which can land and take off at an altitude
of 5,000 metres, with a considerable load of weapons and fuel. The LCH can perform a range
 of roles, including combat search and rescue, destruction of enemy air defence and counter-
insurgency operations in the jungle and urban environments.
 Missile Destroyers/ Frigates: INS Surat and INS Udaygiri were commissioned in May 2022.
'Surat' is the fourth StealthGuided Missile Destroyer of the P15B class, while 'Udaygiri' is the
second Stealth Frigate of P17A class. Project 15B class of ships are the next-generation
stealth guided-missile destroyers of the Indian Navy which are follow-on class of the
weapon-intensive P15A (Kolkata Class) Destroyers. P17A Frigates are warships that are a
follow-on class of the P17 (Shivalik Class) Frigates with improved stealth features, advanced
weapons & sensors and platform management systems
 Diving Support/Survey Vessels: Two Diving Support Vessels (DSVs), Nistar and Nipun,
built by HSL, were launched in September 2022. DSVs equipped with an array of complex
Diving Support systems and are being deployed for deep sea diving and submarine rescue
operations. The ships are capable of conducting Search and Rescue operations and carrying
out Helicopter Operations at sea. 'Ikshak', the third of the four Survey Vessels (Large) (SVL)
Project for the Indian Navy was launched in November 2022. SVL ships will replace the
existing Sandhayak Class survey ships with new generation hydrographic equipment to
collect oceanographic data. The primary role of the ship would be to undertake full-scale
coastal and deep-water hydrographic surveys of ports and navigational channels. The ships
would also be deployed for collecting oceanographic and geophysical data for defence as well
as civil applications..
 ICG-Offshore Patrol Vessel: In a significant development aimed at bolstering the maritime
security of the nation, the Indian Coast Guard (ICG) commissioned 'Saksham', the fifth Coast
Guard Ship in the series of 105 M-Class offshore patrol vessels, in March 202. Saksham will
form a formidable part of the Coast Guard Fleet and be used for the protection of the
Exclusive Economic Zone of territorial waters of the nation.
 Def Expo 2022: The 12th and largest-ever defence exhibition, DefExpo 2022, - marked the
emergence of India's defence industry as a sunrise sector for investment on the global scale.
DefExpo 2022 was the first-ever edition exclusively for Indian companies. Indian companies,
Indian subsidiaries of Foreign OEMs, Division of companies registered in India, exhibitors
having joint venture with an Indian company were considered as Indian participants. The
theme of 12th DefExpo was 'Path to Pride', which is in line with the Prime Minister's vision
to transform India into a strong and selfreliant nation by supporting, showcasing and forging
partnerships for the Indian Aerospace and defence manufacturing sectors with Indian as well
as global customers. The event showcased the might of the domestic defence industry which
is now powering the 'Make in India, Make for the World' resolve of the Government and the
nation at large.
 Mission DefSpace: India’s Space Defence initiative, Mission DefSpace was launched by PM
Narendra Modi during DefExpo in October 2022. The goal of the space programme is to use
industry and startups to further India’s preparation and position the nation for potential future
space opportunities.
 Innovations for Defence Excellence (iDEX): The government introduced the Innovations
for Defence Excellence (iDEX) framework with the goal of fostering innovation and
technology development in the defence and aerospace sector by involving industries such as
MSMEs, start-ups, individual innovators, R&D institutes, and academia and encouraging
self-reliance.
 SRIJAN: SRIJAN Portal of Department of Defence Production, Ministry of Defence was
launched in 2020. The portal is a one stop online portal that provides access to the vendors to
take up items that can be taken up for indigenization.
 Defence Industrial Corridors: To achieve self-reliance in the Defence sector in line with
Make In India initiative, the Centre has developed two Defence Industrial Corridors (DICs)-
one in Uttar Pradesh and the other in Tamil Nadu. Through these DICs, the government
 wants to create a defence manufacturing ecosystem with favourable conditions. The intention
is to have a strong supply chain for boosting production and testing and certification to foster
economies of scale and the growth of globally competitive businesses in the nation. All the
major sectors of the domestic defence production ecosystem have benefited from the
initiatives, which place a strong emphasis on indigenization and procurement from domestic
businesses. The initiatives have also sped up the development of domestic businesses,
including MSMEs and start-ups.

 Many significant products including 155mm Artillery Gun system ‘Dhanush’, Light Combat
Aircraft ‘Tejas’, Surface to Air Missile system ‘Akash’, Main Battle Tank ‘Arjun’, T-90 Tank,
T-72 tank, BMP-II/IIK, Su-30 MK1, Cheetah helicopter, Advanced Light Helicopter, Dornier
Do-228, High mobility Trucks, INS Kalvari, INS Khanderi, INS Chennai, Anti-Submarine
Warfare Corvette (ASWC), Arjun Armoured Repair and Recovery Vehicle, Bridge Laying Tank,
Bi-Modular Charge System (BMCS) for 155mm Ammunition, Medium Bullet Proof Vehicle
(MBPV), Weapon Locating Radar (WLR), Integrated Air Command and Control System
(IACCS), Software Defined Radios(SDR), Lakshya Parachute for Pilotless Target Aircraft, Opto
Electronic Sights for battle tanks, Water Jet Fast Attack Craft, Inshore Patrol Vessel, Offshore
Patrol Vessel, Fast Interceptor Boat, Landing Craft Utility, 25 T Tugs, etc. have been produced in
the country during the last few years which are being used by the Indian Armed Forces.

 Following the Make In India initiative, the country has been able to shift from being a Defence
importer to an exporter. In a new feat, India’s defence export stood at a record Rs 14,000 and the
Government is now aiming to achieve Rs 25,000 crores worth of exports by 2025.

 Challenges to achieving self-reliance in Defence Sector

 Lack of growth in defence modernisation and defence capabilities: Over the years, the pace of
defence modernisation in India has remained slow and indigenous production of high-tech
weapons continues to be a challenge. This is mainly due to a:
 Declining defence budget towards long term investments, and research and development.
 Process inefficiencies and delays in domestic production by government lead organizations.
 The government's reluctance to grant defence contracts to India's private sector.
 As a result, India continues to rely on foreign imports for high-tech weapons, thereby
hindering the development of the indigenous industry.
 Budgetary issues: While India's defence budget has increased over the years, a major chunk is
spent on personnel costs such as salaries and pension, thereby shrinking the funds available for
defence production. Further, India's budget allocation for research and development remains
around 4%. This is much lower compared to capital expenditure by technologically advanced
countries like USA and China, which spend 12% and 20% of their defence budgets on research
and development, respectively.
 Lack of strategic planning for future needs of the Armed Forces: In the emerging geopolitical
scenario, the Indian Armed Forces have to remain operationally ready to respond to border
threats. Consequently, the Armed Forces' war-fighting capabilities have to be constantly
augmented and the technology in the weapons and equipment has to be updated. In order to meet
these needs indigenously, there is a need to strategically and pragmatically plan for the needs of
the Armed Forces and invest in long-term development of high-tech weapons. Commentators
have argued that this is currently lacking in India's defence policy.
 Production and time delays: Indigenous defence production has been wrought with production
delays. For example, India's first indigenously produced Light Combat Aircraft, HAL Tejas,
faced a long production delay with HAL requiring a total of seven years to produce 16 aircrafts
despite the estimated timeline of four years.
  Hierarchal and skewed decision-making: Skewed decision-making process, bureaucratic red-
tape and multiple decision-making heads as the reason for inordinate delays in defence
procurement. Decision-making on issues of national security and defence procurement has been
slow and inefficient due to hierarchical complexities, resulting in the slow growth of defence
modernisation.

 Way forward
To overcome the challenges identified above and support self-reliance in defence production,
the government should consider the following suggestions for reform:
 Supporting private sector: To build a defence industrial base, the government should consider
supporting the private sector in India and trusting the private sector with bigger and stable
defence contracts. Supporting R&D, design and manufacturing capabilities of the private sector
are vital for increasing defence production in India.
 Funds for Armed Forces: Several defence projects are pending due to a lack of funds. The
government should consider reviewing the budget allocation for the defence to ensure adequate
funds for the three forces relative to personnel costs. In addition, long-term and larger capital
investment in the defence production, and R&D are the need of the hour.
 Decision-making and time delays: To overcome decision-making challenges facing defence
procurement, the Ministry of Defence should consider a restructuring of the decision-making
process. Representatives from the three forces should be included in defence procurement and
national security decision-making for a more inclusive and efficient decision-making. Time
delays in defence procurement can also be reduced by making structural changes to the decision-
making process.
 Self-reliance in defence manufacturing: is a crucial component of effective defence capability
and to maintain national sovereignty and achieve military superiority. A robust domestic defence
manufacturing sector can transform India’s military capabilities and help achieve self-reliance in
its defence requirements

 Conclusion
 The Atmanirbhar Bharat Abhiyan approach appears to deliver a strong supply-side push by
increasing the availability of low-cost finance and helping agriculture and business. The increased
funding for MNREGA will aid in the productive employment of returning migrants. For the time
being, demand-side stimulation via deficit financing is not being explored. However, there is no
denying that demand stimulation is desperately needed right now. Demand for industrial products
and services must be developed, and people’s purchasing power must be boosted. Likewise,
income support for migratory workers and the disadvantaged in cities is a pressing issue. As a
result, even in declining revenues, a more aggressive fiscal stimulus may have been attempted.
 India is slowly moving forward on Atmanirbhar Bharat. However, unless it invests in key
technologies, the expenditure may be under the domestic head but utilized for imports. Further,
India needs to concentrate on displaying Indian equipment in global defence exhibitions to
enhance its export market. Finally, if we are to remain a global military power, the domestic
manufacturing and R&D has to grow manifold, supported by central funding.

Atmanirbhar Bharat is an attempt to find India’s

legitimate place in a rapidly changing world.
 India and the AUKUS Grouping
 What is AUKUS Grouping?
 It is a trilateral security partnership for the Indo-Pacific, between Australia, the UK and the US
(AUKUS) which was signed in 2021.
 The main purpose of the partnership is to share the nuclear submarines so that Australia can become
one of the six nuclear submarines operating nations in the world (including India).as it couldn’t have
been done under the existing alliance arrangements as nuclear sharing has been kept in very tight
partnership between the UK and USA.
 Its Indo-pacific orientation makes it an alliance against China’s assertive actions in the South China
Sea.
 It involves a new architecture of meetings and engagements between the three countries, as well as
cooperation across emerging technologies (applied AI, quantum technologies and undersea
capabilities).
 Australia has shifted its long-standing policy against having nuclear submarines and the UK and US
have also shifted from their long-standing policy of sharing nuclear technology with only each other.
The reason for this is that they have a common assessment around the systemic challenge from
China and it requires this much tighter accelerated capability of trilateral partnership.

 Why nuclear-powered submarines?

 These submarines are much faster and harder to detect than conventionally powered fleets. They can
stay submerged for months, shoot missiles longer distances and also carry more.
 The US is sharing its submarine technology for the first time in 50 years. It had previously only shared
technology with the UK.
 Australia will become just the seventh nation in the world to operate nuclear-powered submarines,
after the US, UK, France, China, India and Russia.

 What are the Concerns related to AUKUS Grouping for Asia?

 Regional Security: The AUKUS partnership has been perceived as a challenge to the security and
stability of the region, particularly by China. The agreement includes the sharing of sensitive
defence technologies and intelligence, which has raised concerns about its impact on the strategic
balance in the region.
 Diplomatic Implications: The AUKUS partnership has also been viewed as a diplomatic setback
for countries such as India, Japan, and South Korea, which have traditionally been seen as key allies
of the United States in the region. These countries fear that the new partnership will sideline them
and reduce their influence in the region.
 Impact on Non-Proliferation: The AUKUS partnership involves the transfer of nuclear-powered
submarine technology to Australia, which has raised concerns about its impact on global non-
proliferation efforts. Some experts have expressed concern that this move could set a dangerous
precedent and encourage other countries to pursue nuclear capabilities.
 Economic Consequences: The AUKUS partnership has also raised concerns about its economic
implications, particularly for countries such as India that have significant defence industries. The
agreement is expected to lead to increased competition and could potentially impact the ability of
these countries to sell defence equipment to Australia.

 Concerns for India

 Change of Power in Indo-Pacific: A worry for India is that the U.S. is now promoting a security
partnership with its English allies which India is not a part of. It might possibly upset the balance of
power in the region, and set off new tensions to India’s east while substantial turbulence in India’s
west is caused by the recent change of government in Afghanistan.
  Crowding of Nuclear Submarines: The deal could eventually lead to a crowding of nuclear
submarines in the eastern Indian Ocean, eroding India’s regional pre-eminence. The Indian Navy
presently dominates the space, but its conventional underwater capability has been shrinking.
 Skepticism about Loyalties: It raises the question, “what the future might hold for India”. France, a
big NATO ally to the US and Australia, considers this partnership as an act of betrayal. The chances
are likely for the two countries to look up to their own advantage if a similar condition arrives in
future that involves India.

 Significance for India

 Powerful Allies Equals Powerful India: The AUKUS partnership strengthens the QUAD
and gives more weight to important partners like India, which provides the military balance in the
Indo-Pacific region.
 Strengthening QUAD: AUKUS will also accelerate the capabilities of the QUAD in fields like:
 Cyber security
 Artificial Intelligence,
 Quantum technology and
 Advanced missiles.
 It also opens up opportunities for cooperation in these areas for India and Japan.
 Net Positive against China: Any alliance or partnership that benefits the multilateral structure
opposed to China is a net strategic positive for India. China’s aggressive response to AUKUS is a
sign for its benefit to India.

 What are the opportunities of AUKUS for India as a QUAD member?

 AUKUS could strengthen the QUAD’s agenda to keep the Indo-Pacific region free, open and
inclusive.
 It could bolster the QUAD’s efforts on maritime exercises, security and countering COVID-19,
climate change, cooperating on critical technologies, and building resilient supply chains.
 US’s comeback on partnerships with fellow democracies and engaging with Indo-Pacific flank is in
line with India’s hopes.
 India views that AUKUS is not a substitute for the QUAD as QUAD focuses on a much broader
theme beyond maritime security.

 What will be the Strategic Consequences for India?

 Strengthening ties with Australia: With Australia's upgraded scientific and technical
capabilities, there is an opportunity for India to deepen its S&T cooperation with Australia, which
could eventually expand to sensitive strategic areas. This would enhance India's own technological
capabilities and contribute to regional peace and security.
 Recognizing the Continuing Global Strategic Salience of Britain: India tends to neglect the
strategic importance of Britain, but the AUKUS deal may boost UK's profile in Asia. India could
explore opportunities for closer cooperation with Britain on Indo-Pacific security issues.
 Embracing the idea of an "Anglosphere": Despite India's difficult past relations with the
Anglosphere, the AUKUS deal has brought enduring geopolitical bonds between the US, UK,
Australia, Canada, and New Zealand back to life.
 An Anglosphere is also called the world of English-speaking people bound by common
political beliefs, similar legal traditions, and shared geopolitical interests.
 India could explore opportunities to expand its ties with the English-speaking
world, particularly in the areas of technology and defence.
 Developing a Unique Set of Arrangements: With the US seeking to boost the strategic capabilities
of its allies and partners in the Indo-Pacific, India has a rare opportunity to develop its own set of
arrangements with the US and its allies. This could involve closer military cooperation, joint
exercises, and intelligence sharing, among other things.
 How can India Safeguard its Strategic Interests?
 Exploring Opportunities for Collaboration:
 India can explore opportunities for collaboration and technology transfer with the AUKUS
countries, while also ensuring that its own national security interests are not compromised.
 India can seek collaborations with AUKUS countries in areas such as maritime security,
cybersecurity, and intelligence sharing.
 Maintaining Balance:
 India should maintain a balance between its engagement with AUKUS and other key partners,
such as Russia, France, and Japan.
 India should avoid being drawn into a zero-sum game and strive to maintain strong ties with
all relevant countries.
 This is particularly important given the complex geopolitical landscape of the Indo-Pacific
region.
 Strengthening QUAD:
 India should work towards strengthening the QUAD, which could provide a counterbalance to
AUKUS and help promote a rules-based regional order.
 India should leverage the QUAD to promote regional stability and balance of power.
 Ensuring the Interest of Smaller Countries:
 India needs to ensure that the interests of smaller countries in the region are not overlooked in
any engagements with AUKUS. India should take a leadership role in promoting a cooperative
and inclusive approach to regional security issues.
 This could involve initiatives such as capacity building for smaller countries in the region and
promoting greater regional integration and connectivity.

 Way Forward
 India and Its Navy: India operates only one indigenously-built Submersible Ship Ballistic Missile
Nuclear - INS Arihant after returning the Submersible Ship Nuclear - INS Chakra on lease from
Russia. Following the AUKUS partnership, India may persuade France in a deal for procuring the
nuclear attack submarines. It would fill up a huge gap in India’s naval capacity.
 Bolstering Indo-France Relations: As a major Indo-Pacific power, France is an important part of
the regional security calculus. The recent setback from Australia may spur France to focus afresh on
partners such as India. Also, India must strike a balance between continuing imports and
implementing the all-important Atmanirbhar Bharat in defence manufacturing.
 Faster Multilateralism: Minilateral partnerships including the QUAD and AUKUS should add
more partners to their alliance in the near future. For instance, Taiwan and South Korea can be
brought into QUAD when assistance is needed in the field of semiconductors, electronics,
telecommunication or information technology.

 Conclusion
 In tandem with the US and the UK, Australia is all set to play a more robust role in ensuring
peace and stability in the Indo-Pacific region.
 In absence of any giant alliance specifically for the Indo-Pacific region, partnerships like AUKUS
are likely to come into play.
 Meanwhile, India can look forward to France as a possibly bigger ally, especially when the latter has
had a setback from its own allies. The two now have a better chance at mutually
cooperating, economically as well as for ensuring security in the Indo-Pacific.

AUKUS for India has a common interest in protecting the

Indo-Pacific region from China’s dominance over other nations.
AUKUS presents a Sea of Opportunities for India.
Bangladesh- China- India- Myanmar (BCIM)
Economic Corridor
 About BCIM Economic Corridor
 The BCIM Economic Corridor is a project in economic cooperation involving Bangladesh, China,
India and Myanmar.
 It started as a 'track two' initiative i.e. via backchannel diplomacy to improve coordination in the
flow of goods, services, technology, energy, investments and P2P contacts among these countries.
 The 2800 km BCIM corridor proposes to link Kunming in China’s Yunnan
province with Kolkata, passing through nodes such as Mandalay in Myanmar and Dhaka in
Bangladesh before heading to Kolkata.
 The BCIM economic corridor aims to connect Kolkata with Kunming, capital of the Yunnan
province.
 It envisages formation of a thriving economic belt, focusing on cross-border transport, energy
and telecommunication networks.
 Starting from Kunming, the route passes through nodal points, such as Spread: Mandalay and
Lashio in Myanmar. It heads towards Kolkata after passing through Manipur and Silchar, before
crossing Bangladesh via Sylhet and Dhaka, with branches extending to the ports of Cox Bazar
and Chittagong.

 Facts about BCIM economic corridor

 Sub regional economic cooperation.
 Multi modal connectivity and expressways.
 Reduce non- tariff barriers.
 Boost trade and investment.
 Increase people to people exchanges.
 Capitalize on comparative advantages and competitive advantages.
 Reduce trade deficits.
 Increase business/job opportunities.
 What is the Rationale Behind BCIM
 This project links southwest China's landlocked locations with India's northeast, while also
boosting connectivity in the developing economies of Bangladesh and Myanmar, thus creating a
'cooperation zone'.
 The project seeks to uplift a significant number of underdeveloped areas in these countries by
boosting connectivity and trade linkages.
 The Indian government has been attempting to reduce poverty and develop the economy in the
northeast. The BCIM, by linking the northeastern economy with the markets in southeast and east
Asia, would create opportunities for the northeastern states, which have been highly reliant on the
narrow Siliguri Corridor for connectivity.
 For China, connecting its landlocked economy in Yunnan with the Indian and Bangladeshi ports
would help it access sea routes.
 The project would help the countries leverage the trade complementarities that exist among them:
 China- manufacturing goods.
 India- service export.
 Myanmar- primary and forest-based products export.
 Cheap and abundant labour.
 Bangladesh- garments and clothing export.
 The EC would also increase the countries' revenue from energy trade. Notable locations covered
by the project include:
 Sichuan, Guizhou and Yunnan provinces of China.
 Northeastern oil and gas fields of India, in addition to huge hydroelectric power potential
 Myanmar's Yadana and the Shwe gas fields
 Tourism is another sector that would profit from the EC. The region has significant potential for
religious tourism and eco-tourism, attracting tourists not only from these 4 countries but also
from the world-over.

 Importance of BCIM
 India will benefit in terms of the development of the Kolkata port and the opening up of
the economic potential of the northeast states.
 BCIM offers India an opportunity to create its own win-win relationship with China.
 India’s gain from the BCIM includes the ability to connect to the One Belt, One Road
project thus opening up markets to the east.
 It can also use the economic corridor for negotiating downstream industries to be located
within India.
 With natural gas reserves of about 200 trillion cubic feet, the largest in the Asia-
Pacific, Bangladesh could become one of the major energy exporting countries .
 Tourism too will get a boost.
 BCIM can not only be a game-changer for this region in Asia, but is also pivotal for
India’s ‘Act East’ Policy.
 Economic Benefits include access to several booming markets in Southeast Asia,
improvement of transport infrastructure and setting up of industrial zones.
 The regional connectivity would facilitate cross-border movement of people and goods,
reduce overland trade bottlenecks, ensure access and increase volume of trade.
 Substantially reduce transaction costs.
 Enhance trade and investment and lead to poverty alleviation in the region.
 Greater Market Access for Goods.
 Services and Energy.
 Elimination of Non-Tariff Barriers.
  Better Trade Facilitation.
 Investment In Infrastructure Development
 Joint Exploration and Development Of Mineral, Water, And Other Natural Resources.
 Development of Value and Supply Chains Based On Comparative Advantages.
 Closer People To People Contact.
 Access to Numerous Markets in Southeast Asia.
 Improvement of Transportation Infrastructure.
 Creation of Industrial Zones.
 India’s Isolated Eastern And North-Eastern States Also Stand To Gain By Higher Trade And
Connectivity With China And The Rest Of Asia.

 Challenges to BCIM
 A lot of insecurity surrounds the project due to a lot of sub regional hostility between
participating countries on many grounds. Opening up an economic corridor has much potential
for misuse in promoting anti- national activity.
 Indian critics of BCIM state that China cannot be trusted, and cite the divergent positions of the
two countries on Arunachal Pradesh and PoK.
 Security is a very important aspect of BCIM that ethnic insurgencies, terrorism, drug trafficking
and the accompanying spread of HIV infections, smuggling, as well as cross-border human
trafficking, threatened to derail the project.
 BCIM goes through areas prone to natural disasters so that’s another traditional threat.
 BCIM corridor will improve the leverage of China and hence border dispute resolution on fair
terms will be more difficult. Also, some part of the corridor will be passing through Arunachal
Pradesh, which is a disputed territory as per China.
 The concerns that opening of the north east would flood Indian markets with Chinese goods.
Thus, the north east may not be able to develop its own capabilities.
 200 km stretch from Silchar in Assam to Manipur, and a similar length between Kalewah and
Monywah in Myanmar are still to be constructed.
 India’s North East is infested with a lot of insurgency and cross border terrorism, making the
region highly instable and investment averse, due to the risk. Such instability would continue to
impede any formidable investment coming as a result of BCIM.
 The corridor can also be misused for already existing clandestine actives like drug smuggling,
smuggling of antiques and trafficking.
 Fighting between Myanmar’s army and kokang rebels as well as narcotics trafficking in North
Eastern Myanmar is a big security challenge.
 Communal Violence involving Bhuddhist and Rohingyas in Rakine state of Myanmar, as well as
anti-Bangladeshi sentiments in India are impediment to cultural security.

 Need of the Hour

 The immediate priority for India is to build and upgrade infrastructure, including roads, railway
network, waterways and air connectivity within north-eastern states.
 Work on the India-Myanmar-Thailand Trilateral Highway joining India’s Northeast with
Thailand and other ASEAN members through Myanmar needs to be expedited. This network will
provide connectivity between the isolated NE and the expanding economies of South East Asia.
 Similarly, the Kaladan Multimodal Transit Transport Project will help connect the Northeast with
Myanmar as well as with West Bengal.
 Bangladesh, Bhutan, India, Nepal (BBIN) needs to be accorded the highest priority as it has great
potential to deliver rich dividends quickly.
 Emphasis on the implementation of Act East Policy.
 Issues with BCIM
 There are two views emerging on the approach itself – one group arguing for an economic-centric
approach and the other for a more people-centric, inclusive approach mindful of local social
realities.
 The other dilemma is the tension between centralisation and decentralisation.
 While people in border regions are more concerned about socio-economic and environmental
impacts, national governments are more concerned with security and political issues.
 Another dilemma is the tension between regionalism and subregionalism. Clarity on this question
is important because it has policy implications in terms of framing the overall objectives of the
BCIM project.
 Trust issues with China’s strategy: there is a sense that China’s grand strategy of trans-boundary
connectivity needs to be critically studied to better understand its implications on India’s strategic
interests.

 Significance of the BCIM Economic Corridor for India

 BCIM is directed towards developing sub-regional, regional and trans-regional corridors of the
four nations to further connect and integrate their economies.
 This zone is seen as the meeting point of the three markets of China, Southeast Asia and South
Asia and thereby connecting two major markets of China and India and even the whole of Asia.
For India, BCIM corridor can be pivotal for its Act East Policy.
 BCIM can also play effective role in the energy trade. The energy trade is feasible in the region as
the southwestern provinces of China (Sichuan, Guizhou, and Yunnan), the northeastern states of
India, Yadana, and the Shwe gas fields in Myanmar, all have large reserves of natural gas.
 Region’s rich natural resources promise huge potential for large-scale development.
 In addition, this sub-region has rich reserves of coal, petroleum, and manganese.
 The BCIM region is dotted with a number of tourist destinations. Apart from facilitating easy
travel and hassle free visas among the members, the countries can also develop religious tourism
circuit.
 BCIM can act as a means to improve India-China relations.

 Way Ahead
 In BCIM, a step-by-step approach is desirable in the form of people-centric projects in education,
healthcare, skill development, tourism and cottage industries should be undertaken. Local talent,
material and products should be utilised in this endeavour. China and India need to work together
to bring about a fundamental change in their bilateral relations.
 There are various political and security issues at the local, national, regional levels that need to be
addressed before discussing the commercial prospects of the BCIM Economic corridor.
 While top-down governmental initiatives are important, it is equally important to initiate people-
centric projects to ensure engagement and involvement of the society in projects developed under
the BCIM.
 The BCIM needs to be sub-regionalism from below where small business houses have a role to
play.
 The BCIM needs to be a confidence building organisation.
 The crucial role of people-to-people contact in fostering greater understanding, cooperation and
goodwill should form the base of the BCIM.
 In the current context of trust deficit between India and China, the inclusion of people to people
links is important as it could play an important role in creating a favourable political environment
for sustaining this ambitious initiative.
  India, like the other 3 countries, stand to gain from the project, especially for its efforts to uplift
the north-eastern states. Hence, it is wise for India to take a relook at the project and take efforts
to revive it.
 The BCIM EC predates the BRI project and it was conceived with the obiective of sub-regional
cooperation and development in mind. Hence, the negotiations on the project should continue in
pursuance of those aims.
 India has to be a proactive player, while tackling Beijing's unilateral appropriation of the project.
In the negotiations, India's advantageous geostrategic position with regards to the project could be
leveraged. This is especially vital given how China is quickly increasing its bilateral connectivity
projects in the region.
 Apart from the development of supply chains and value chains along the corridor, addressing
tariff and non-tariff barriers, based on comparative advantage, is necessary to realize the project's
full potential.

 Conclusion
 The BCIM EC is a project with great potential for boosting the economic strength of India's
northeast, as well as the partner countries' landlocked sites.
 However, the ground fact is that Beijing has unilaterally taken over the sub-regional project and
made it a part of its BRI strategy. Now, India can either play catch up or seek claims in the
regional transformation. Given our time and resource limitations, the latter option is more viable-
and this requires a relook at the BCIM EC.
 BCIMEC is still on a multilateral discussion for regional cooperation and integration. India,
unlike China, is reluctant in leading the BCIM economic cooperation as Indo-China trade deficit
surged, besides India’s Sinophobia for territorial disputes and national security concerns.
 The territorial disputes need to be resolved amicably through political dialogue for regional
cooperation and integration of trade and other strategic policies.
 The corridor passes through NER but limited to Manipur and Assam that necessitates building
proper connectivity with the rest of the NE states of India for fuller cooperation of physical
connectivity, trade, environmentally-sustainable development and people-to-people contacts
between NER and the rest of BCIM region.
 The success of establishing the corridor requires ensuring effective building and development of
infrastructure by each BCIM participating country within their respective geographical boundary;
ensuring local participation and decision-making power in the establishment, development and
operation of the corridor; and securing the corridor by solving the undesirable elements like
strike/bandh, road blockage or insurgencies that are common in NER through multilateral
cooperation and effort.

Without building sufficient trust and an all-weather friendship between

the participating countries, the risk is too high for investment of such
massive scales. There is no doubt about the project being extremely
beneficial in terms of potential, but issues like democratic deficit,
disturbance at borders, anti-national activity etc. will have to be
addressed jointly. India can only hope that the economic significance of
this project will tide over the politics of the regions.
 BIMSTEC
 BIMSTEC
 The Bay of Bengal Initiative for Multi-Sectoral Technical and Economic Cooperation
(BIMSTEC) is a regional multilateral organisation.
 BIMSTEC, a grouping of seven countries led by India, is gradually emerging as an alternative
regional engagement platform.
 The Bay of Bengal Initiative for Multi-Sectoral Technical and Economic Cooperation or the
BIMSTEC has Bangladesh, India, Myanmar, Sri Lanka, Thailand, Nepal and Bhutan as its
member states.
 Its members lie in the littoral and adjacent areas of the Bay of Bengal constituting a contiguous
regional unity.
 BIMSTEC is now seen as an important overlay to the neighbourhood policy.
 Founded in 1997, BIMSTEC acts as a bridge between South Asia and South East Asia and
represents over 1.5 billion people - nearly 21 per cent of the world population - and has a
combined gross domestic product (GDP) of USD 3.5 trillion (approx ₹ 240 lakh crore).
 BIMSTEC has also established a platform for intra-regional cooperation between SAARC and
ASEAN members.
 Out of the 7 members,
 Five are from South Asia
 Bangladesh
 Bhutan
 India
 Nepal
 Sri Lanka
 Two are from Southeast Asia
 Myanmar
 Thailand
 BIMSTEC not only connects South and Southeast Asia, but also the ecologies of the Great
Himalayas and the Bay of Bengal.
 Constitute an addition to and not be a substitute for bilateral, regional or multilateral
cooperation involving the Member States.
 It mainly aims to create an enabling environment for rapid economic development; accelerate
social progress; and promote collaboration on matters of common interest in the region.

 Genesis of BIMSTEC?
 This sub-regional organization came into being in 1997 through the Bangkok Declaration.
 Initially, it was formed with four Member States with the acronym ‘BIST-EC’ (Bangladesh,
India, Sri-Lanka and Thailand Economic Cooperation).
 It became renamed ‘BIMST-EC’ in 1997, following the inclusion of Myanmar.
 With the admission of Nepal and Bhutan in 2004, the name of the grouping changed to ‘Bay of
Bengal Initiative for Multi-Sectoral Technical and Economic Cooperation’ (BIMSTEC).
 The founding principles of BIMSTEC are:
 Cooperation within BIMSTEC will be based on respect for the principle of sovereign
equality, territorial integrity, political independence, no-interference in internal affairs,
peaceful co-existence and mutual benefit.
 Cooperation within BIMSTEC will constitute an addition to and not be a substitute for
bilateral, regional or multilateral cooperation involving the member states.
 Main Objectives of BIMSTEC
 Creating an enabling environment for the rapid economic development of the sub-region.
 Encouraging the spirit of equality and partnership.
 Promoting active collaboration and mutual assistance in the areas of common interests of the
member countries
 Accelerating support for each other in the fields of education, science, and technology, etc.

 Principles of BIMSTEC
 Sovereign Equality  No-interference in Internal Affairs
 Territorial Integrity  Peaceful Co- existence
 Political Independence  Mutual Benefit

 Key Areas of Cooperation within BIMSTEC

 Trade and Investment  Disaster Management
 Technology  Public Health
 Energy  People-to-People Contact
 Transportation and Communication  Poverty Alleviation
 Tourism  Climate Change
 Fisheries  Environment Protection
 Agriculture  Counter Terrorism and Transnational
 Cultural Cooperation Crime

 What is the Potential of BIMSTEC

 Bridge between South and South East Asia and represents a reinforcement of relations among
these countries.
 The Bay of Bengal region has the potential to become the epicentre of the Indo-Pacific idea, a
place where the strategic interests of the major powers of East and South Asia intersect.
 Platform for intra-regional cooperation between SAARC and ASEAN members.
  Home to around 1.5 billion people that constitute around 22% of the global population and a
combined Gross Domestic Product (GDP) of USD 3.8 trillion, BIMSTEC has emerged as an
influential engine of economic growth.
 A fourth of the world’s traded goods cross the bay every year.
 Important Connectivity Projects:
 Kaladan Multimodal Project – links India and Myanmar.
 Asian Trilateral Highway - connecting India and Thailand through Myanmar.
 Bangladesh-Bhutan-India-Nepal (BBIN) Motor Vehicles Agreement - for seamless flow
of passenger and cargo traffic.

 Various Institutional Mechanisms of BIMSTEC

 BIMSTEC Summit: highest policymaking body in BIMSTEC process and is comprised of
heads of state/government of member states. The chairmanship of BIMSTEC rotates among the
member states.
 Ministerial Meeting: second apex policy-making forum of BIMSTEC attended by the
External/Foreign Ministers of Member States.
 Senior Officials Meeting: represented by Senior Officials of Foreign Ministries of the Member
States.
 BIMSTEC Working Group: attended by Ambassadors of BIMSTEC Member Countries to
Bangladesh or their representatives on a monthly basis at the BIMSTEC Secretariat in Dhaka.
 Business Forum & Economic Forum: the two important forums to ensure active participation
of private sector.

 Key Challenges Associated with BIMSTEC

 Though largely devoid of bilateral tensions, as is the case in SAARC, BIMSTEC does not seem
to have made much progress.
 Inconsistency in Meetings: BIMSTEC planned to hold summits every two years, ministerial
meetings every year, but this has not gone about as per plan.
 Neglect by member states: It seems that India has used BIMSTEC only when it fails to work
through SAARC in the regional setting and other major members like Thailand and Myanmar
are focused more towards ASEAN than BIMSTEC.
 Broad Focus Areas: The focus of BIMSTEC is very wide, including 14 areas of cooperation
like connectivity, public health, agriculture etc. It is suggested that BIMSTEC should remain
committed to small focus areas and cooperate in them efficiently.
 Bilateral Issues between Member Nations: Bangladesh is facing one of the worst refugee
crisis of Rohingyas from Myanmar who are fleeing prosecution in the state of Rakhine in
Myanmar. There is a border conflict between Myanmar and Thailand.
 BCIM: The formation of another sub-regional initiative, the Bangladesh-China-India-Myanmar
(BCIM) Forum, with the proactive membership of China, has created more doubts about the
exclusive potential of BIMSTEC.
 Inadequate Focus on Economic Cooperation: A quick look at the unfinished tasks and new
challenges gives an idea of the burden of responsibilities on the grouping.
 Despite signing a framework agreement for a comprehensive Free Trade Agreement
(FTA) in 2004, BIMSTEC stands far away from this goal.
 Of the seven constituent agreements needed for the FTA, only two are in place as of now.
 Unfinished Projects: Despite talks for the need for expansion of connectivity, much of
the work is unfinished when it comes to finalising legal instruments for coastal shipping, road
transport and intra-regional energy grid connection.
  Significance of BIMSTEC for India
 Allows India to pursue three core policies:
 Neighborhood First - primacy to the country’s immediate periphery;
 Act East - connect India with Southeast Asia; and
 Economic development of India’s northeastern states – by linking them to the Bay of
Bengal region via Bangladesh and Myanmar.
 Allows India to counter China’s creeping influence in countries around the Bay of Bengal due
to the spread of its Belt and Road Initiative.
 A new platform for India to engage with its neighbors with South Asian Association for
Regional Cooperation (SAARC) becoming dysfunctional because of differences between India
and Pakistan.

 How BIMSTEC is Different from SAARC?

SAARC BIMSTEC

1. A regional organisation
1. Interregional organisation connecting South Asia
looking into South Asia
and South East Asia.
2. Established in 1985 during
2. Established in 1997 in the post-Cold War.
the cold war era.
3. Members maintain reasonably friendly relations.
3. Member countries suffer for
mistrust and suspicion.
4. Core objective is the improvement of economic
cooperation among countries.
4. Suffers from regional
politics.
5. Balancing of power with the presence of Thailand
and India on the bloc.
5. Asymmetric power balance.
6. Intra-regional trade has increased around 6
6. Intra-regional trade only 5
precent in a decade.
percent.

 Way Forward
 Since the BIMSTEC region is notable for its diversity, the member states need to build on the
regional synergies and work towards utilising the available resources in the most optimal
manner. This would help build a stronger and a more dynamic BIMSTEC.
 Multilateral Discussions: Given the complexity of domestic and geopolitical factors, this
sphere will require sustained bilateral and group-level discussions to prevent problems such as
the Rohingya crisis from becoming impediments to the smooth delivery of economic and
security outcomes.
 India too will have to ensure equally sustained political engagement with partners such as
Nepal, Sri Lanka and Bangladesh to prevent any domestic political spillover from
affecting bilateral and group-level working relationships.
  India and other members will also need to be astute in managing Myanmar’s
engagement until the political situation in the country becomes normal.
 Boosting Connectivity and Cooperation: For India’s vision to bolster trade connectivity in the
grouping, an FTA spanning the maritime resource-rich members such as Myanmar and Sri
Lanka could bring dramatic gains for all members.
 A ‘coastal shipping ecosystem’ and an interconnected electricity grid, in addition to the
adopted Master Plan for Transport Connectivity, have the potential to boost intraregional
trade and economic ties.
 Also, BIMSTEC needs to generate additional funding and push for timely
implementation of the projects.
 India as the Torchbearer: For the revived grouping to realise its trade and economic potential,
India will have to take a leadership role in assuaging any apprehensions among the smaller
members of intragroup power imbalances and strive to facilitate greater cross-border
connectivity and flow of investments by lowering barriers to the movement of people and
goods.
 India Is the only country to offer additional funding to the Secretariat and also to support
the Secretary General’s proposal to establish an Eminent Persons Group (EPG) for
producing a vision document.
 Other countries need to emulate this sincere matching of words with action.
 Others Areas of Focus: BIMSTEC should focus more in the future on new areas such as
the blue economy, the digital economy, and promotion of exchanges and links among start-ups
and Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises (MSMEs).

 Conclusion
 The objective of such an alliance was to harness shared and accelerated growth through mutual
cooperation in different areas of common interests by mitigating the onslaught of globalisation
and by utilising regional resources and geographical advantages.
 BIMSTEC is a sector-driven cooperative organisation, unlike many other regional groupings.
Starting with six sectors- trade, technology, energy, transport, tourism and fisheries - for sectoral
cooperation, it expanded to embrace nine more sectors - agriculture, public health, poverty
alleviation, counter-terrorism, environment, culture, people to people contact and climate change
- in 2008.
 BIMSTEC operates with the objective of technological and economic cooperation among the
member states.
 The grouping functions according to the founding principles of BIMSTEC as laid down in the
Bangkok Declaration and directions given by the leaders of the member states.
 BIMSTEC aims to be a dynamic, effective and result-oriented regional organisation for
promoting a peaceful, prosperous and sustainable Bay of Bengal Region through meaningful
cooperation and deeper integration. For this, a fair, just, rule-based, equitable and transparent
international order and reaffirming faith in the multilateralism with the UN at the centre and the
rule-based international trading system is the key.
 India must not let politics of the past impact the connectivity of the future in the region.
 India is building connectivity infrastructure in the northeast and much of that is also linked to the
connectivity projects that BIMSTEC is backing to improve cooperation and connectivity in the
Bay of Bengal area
 India's Act East policy has also led to renewed focus on the Bay of Bengal Initiative for Multi-
Sectoral Technical and Economic Cooperation or BIMSTEC.

India has a very big role to play in BIMSTEC and India has been very committed.
 India's Blue Economy
As the world's seventh-largest country by land area, it's no surprise that India has a vast and
diverse maritime territory. From the bustling port cities along the Arabian Sea and Bay of Bengal to the
idyllic beaches of the Andaman and Nicobar Islands, the country's blue economy plays a vital role in its
economic growth and development.

The government has also launched a number of initiatives to support the growth of the blue economy,
including the SAGAR Mala Project, which aims to modernise India's port infrastructure and improve
connectivity to coastal areas, and the Blue Economy Program, which focuses on promoting sustainable
economic development in coastal areas.

There are a number of challenges related to the blue economy in India including climate change, marine
pollution and overexploitation of marine resources. Therefore, there is a need to scrutinise the potential of
the Blue economy to play a significant role in India's economic development and contribute to the
country's long-term prosperity.

 What is the Blue Economy?

 Blue economy refers to the sustainable use of marine resources for exploration, economic
growth, improved livelihoods, and transport while preserving the health of marine and coastal
ecosystems.
 In India, the blue economy encompasses a wide range of sectors, including shipping, tourism,
fisheries, and offshore oil and gas exploration.
 80% of world trade happens using the seas, 40% of the world’s population live near coastal
areas, and more than 3 billion people access the oceans for their livelihood.
 The blue economy is a vast socio-economic opportunity for coastal nations like India to utilise
ocean resources for societal benefit responsibly.

 What is the Significance of the Blue Economy?

 Transport: With an over 7,500-km-long coastline spread across nine coastal states, 12 major,
and 200 minor ports ports that handle approximately 1,400 million tons of cargo each year.
Besides, India’s Exclusive Economic Zone of over 2 million square kilometres has a bounty of
living and non-living resources with significant recoverable resources such as crude oil and
natural gas. Also, the coastal economy sustains over 4 million fisher folk and coastal
communities and its geography includes 1,382 islands. India's blue economy supports 95% of
the country's business through transportation and contributes an estimated 4% to its Gross
Domestic Product (GDP).
 Expansion of Shipping Industry: India is looking to expand its presence in the shipping
industry and increase its capacity as a hub for ship repair and maintenance, which can come
with various economic and geopolitical benefits.
 Offshore Energy Production: There are also opportunities to develop offshore wind and solar
energy in India, which could help to meet the country's growing energy needs.
 Aquaculture and Marine Biotechnology: The blue economy can support the growth of these
sectors, which have the potential to contribute to the country's food security and improve the
health of the ocean ecosystem.
 Synergy With SDG: It supports all of the United Nations’ Sustainable Development Goals
(SDGs), especially SDG14 ‘life below water’.
 Challenges Related to India’s Blue Economy
 Lack of Infrastructure: There is a lack of ports, airports, and other infrastructure in many
coastal areas of India, which can make it difficult to develop and expand economic activities in
these regions.
 Overfishing: Overfishing is a major challenge in India's coastal waters, as it can lead to the
depletion of fish stocks and harm the marine ecosystem. This can have negative impacts on the
fishing industry and other sectors of the blue economy.
 Marine Pollution: Pollution from sources such as oil spills, plastic waste, and industrial
effluent can harm marine ecosystems and have negative impacts on the blue economy.
 Climate Change: Rising sea levels, negative Indian Ocean dipole and other impacts of climate
change can pose risks to coastal communities and also have negative impacts on the blue
economy.
 India-Sri Lanka Fishing Conflict: The boundary between Indian and Sri Lankan waters in
the Palk Bay is not clearly defined, which has led to confusion and conflict between Indian and
Sri Lankan fishermen. To address this issue, both India and Sri Lanka have attempted to
negotiate agreements to regulate fishing in the Palk Bay and establish clear boundaries.
However, these efforts have not always been successful in resolving the issue.

 Way Forward
 Sustainable Resource Management: Implementing sustainable resource management
practices, such as setting catch limits, establishing marine protected areas, and enforcing
regulations to prevent overfishing and other forms of resource extraction, can help to ensure
the long-term viability of marine resources and the industries that rely on them.
 Investment in Infrastructure: Investing in infrastructure such as ports, airports, and other
facilities in coastal areas can help to support the growth and expansion of economic activities in
these regions.
 Research and Development: Investing in research and development to improve technologies
and practices in the blue economy can help to increase efficiency and reduce the negative
impacts on the environment. India must focus on marine ICTs, and transport (shipping) and
communication services, and the creation of a knowledge hub for marine research and
development.
 Partnerships and Collaboration: Working with other countries, international organisations,
and other stakeholders to exchange knowledge and expertise, and to collaborate on projects and
initiatives, can help to support the growth and development of the blue economy.Also, India
should not look at its oceans as just water bodies, but as a global stage for continued economic,
social, and cultural dialogue.

 Securing India’s Blue Economy: Role of the Indian Navy

 With India aiming to emerge as a $5 trillion economy, the only way to achieve this is to move
outwards as the oceans provide a vast resource pool that can be tapped to spur India’s economic
growth. The Blue Economy contributes about 4 per cent of India’s GDP; there is tremendous
potential to expand its contribution.
 The Indian Navy remains focused on contributing its might to support the Blue Economy efforts
of the Government of India. In this endeavour, the Navy aims to be, both, an enabler and an
element of national and regional Blue Economy efforts.
 The Navy has the resources, assets and domain expertise for mapping, characterising, monitoring
as well as enforcing good order at sea. The Navy aims to create an enabling ecosystem that
supports the Blue Economy.
  The Indian Navy is a key stakeholder in realising this vision and its strength lies in ensuring
safety, security and good order at sea. This is critical to enable commerce and for trade to thrive
in a stable and sustainable manner. The Navy’s efforts aim to contribute to the core objectives of
the UN Sustainable Development Goal 14 to preserve, protect and conserve ocean spaces and
resources.
 The oceans have an annual gross value of $ 2.5 trillion that makes it the 8th largest global
economy and ocean-based trade is likely to quadruple by 2050. “Two-thirds of the food
production will be farmed from the seas, and clean offshore wind energy will be the leading
power generation technology in the next few years.
 The Navy is also supporting organizations such as Indian Ocean Rim Association (IORA) in their
regional efforts towards developing a common vision in developing the blue economy. The 23-
member grouping has emphasised the development of the Blue Economy through a common
vision for balanced economic development in the Indian Ocean Rim. The Navy supports this
initiative through participation in various working groups, preparation of HADR SOPs, as also
information-sharing on critical issues through an MoU between the Navy and IORA Members.
 A Blue Economy needs a stable and secure environment to sustain and grow and this is enabled
through effective maritime security. With growing maritime interests, the growth of our Navy is
inevitable. The blue economy and maritime security are deeply intertwined and mutually
dependent on each other. India will be successful in moving ahead in a cohesive and coordinated
manner with a clear-eyed focus on the greater good at the national regional and global level.
 Blue Economy opportunities for India spans the entire spectrum from energy to ecology, fishing
to tourism. For instance, of a potential fish resource of 5.3 million metric tons in India’s Maritime
Zone, only about 70 per cent is fished. 90 per cent of this catch comes from fishing up to 50m
contour, highlighting opportunities for deep-sea fishing. India’s offshore wind energy generation
potential is more than 300 GW, 1/10th of which is currently planned to be tapped. Large Marine
Ecosystems in the Bay of Bengal comprise 8 per cent of the world’s Coral Reefs and 12 per cent
of Mangroves, opening opportunities for Coral Reef tourism, apart from ecological conservation.
 With 80 per cent of the world’s population residing within 200 km of the coast and the global
population requiring 30 per cent more water, 40 per cent more energy and 50 per cent more food
by 2030, a turn to the seas is inevitable and having a strong Navy assures India’s growth in all
aspects and the Indian Navy is playing its part to ensure a safe, secure and stable maritime
environment.

 Bright Prospects Ahead

 The Blue Economy in India is poised for significant growth in the next few years. Its Blue
Economy Mission undertaken by the government can lead to the sector becoming the next
economic multiplier, depending on the execution of the policies that have been decided. For e.g.,
the policies mentioned in the draft policy. The sector is the sixth dimension of the government’s
‘Vision of New India by 2030’; with the Blue Economy policies aiming for long-term economic
advantages in order to achieve the greater goals of growth, job creation, equity, and
environmental protection.
 Like the oceans, investment and growth in India’s blue economy is limitless. With the right plan
and proper initiatives by the government and private stakeholders, this conglomerate of sub-
sectors has the potential to grow exponentially thereby giving an edge to India in trade, tourism,
security and inclusive development.

The Blue Economy holds out a promise and hope as a

new frontier and engine of global growth.
 Security and Growth for All in the Region (SAGAR)
Security and Growth for All in the Region (SAGAR) is India’s policy or doctrine of maritime cooperation
in the Indian Ocean region. It is an increasing recognition of the increasing importance of maritime
security, maritime commons and cooperation.

Through SAGAR, India seeks to deepen economic and security cooperation with its maritime neighbours
and assist in building their maritime security capabilities. For this, India would cooperate on the exchange
of information, coastal surveillance, building of infrastructure and strengthening their capabilities.

Further, India seeks to safeguard its national interests and ensure Indian Ocean region to
become inclusive, collaborative and respect international law.

 Vision of SAGAR
The vision for the Indian Ocean Region is rooted in advancing cooperation in India’s region and to
use our capabilities for the benefit of all in our common maritime home. Based on this vision of the
SAGAR initiative can be defined under the following terms:
 Security: Enhancement of coastal security so that land and maritime territories can be
safeguarded with relative ease.
 Capacity Building: Deepening economic and security cooperation for smooth facilitation of
economic trade and maritime security.
 Collective Action: Promoting collective action to deal with natural disasters and maritime threats
like piracy, terrorism and emergent non-state actors.
 Sustainable Development: Working towards sustainable regional development through
enhanced collaboration
 Maritime Engagement: Engaging with countries beyond our shores with the aim of building
greater trust and promoting respect for maritime rules, norms and peaceful resolution of disputes.

 Why is SAGAR mission required?

The Security and Growth for all in the Region initiative is required for the following reasons:
 Leveraging Blue Economy: India can leverage on the Blue economy through this initiative. A
Blue economy presents an opportunity to meet its national socio-economic challenges. In
addition connectivity with its neighbours can be enhanced. India with an unprecedented
opportunity to meet its national socio-economic objectives (livelihood generation, achieving
energy security, building ecological resilience etc.) as well as strengthening connectivity with
neighbors.Oceans also provide a substantial portion of the global population with food and
livelihood, as well as transportation for 80% of global trade.
 Tackling Regional Issues: There is a need to strengthen efforts to provide humanitarian
assistance in wake of natural disasters and counter non-state actors engaged in piracy and
terrorism. Further, India seeks an integrated approach and cooperative future, which will result
in sustainable development for all in the region. An integrated approach and cooperative future
will become possible through the implementation of the SAGAR initiative.
 Checking Chinese Influence: China through its maritime silk route (part of BRI initiative) has
been increasing its influence in Indian ocean region (IOR). Moreover, Chinese investments in
India's neighboring countries are of dual nature i.e commercial with military
underpinnings. The string of pearls has caused strategic concerns for India. In this context,
SAGAR vision assumes much importance in countering such issues.
 Strength and Weaknesses of SAGAR vision
 Strengths: India’s greatest strength in the SAGAR initiative is its central location in the Indian
Ocean providing unrestricted access to the Indian Ocean Region. Along with this, it has immense
capabilities which it can share with its maritime neighbours – strong and capable maritime
security forces, shipyards capable of constructing aircraft carriers and submarines, vast industrial
complexes, financial institutions, space assets to name a few
 It was long understood by the political leadership that India’s best defences lie in strengthening
its maritime domain. There India has focused on issues that are of priority to the smaller nations –
security of natural resources, sustainable development, protection from natural disasters, and
controlling the ill-effects of marine pollution and climate change.

 Weaknesses: The weakness of the SAGAR initiative is due to its capacity and execution.
Although India has the capability to offer the maritime assets it has limited capacity to execute it.
The limitation of capacity, coupled with a lack of international coordination, will fail in living up
to the expectations of its maritime neighbours.
 It can also be argued that India has still not adequately harnessed its capability in military
diplomacy since it is careful in committing more assets and manpower, and due to its internal
governance mechanisms. The capacity of the private sector has not been guided along with the
SAGAR initiative.

 Significance of SAGAR Vision

 SAGAR provides a mechanism for India to expand strategic partnerships with other IOR
littorals in Asia and Africa.
 SAGAR indicates the leadership role and responsibilities India is ready to play in the region on
a long-term basis in a transparent manner through its capacity building and capability
enhancement programs.
 The key relevance of SAGAR emerges when seen in conjunction with India’s other policies
impacting the maritime domain like Act East Policy, Project Sagarmala, Project Mausam, India
as ‘net security provider’, focus on Blue Economy etc.This symbolises India’s maritime
resurgence, as maritime issues are now centre of India’s foreign policy.
 With effective implementation of all these policies, India can act as an enabler to create a
positive environment in the IOR.

 Conclusion
 SAGAR addresses a significant policy gap, brings maritime issues to the core of Indian foreign
policy, and emphasizes the vital connection between the blue economy, maritime security, and
maritime cooperation. SAGAR gives India a way to deepen its strategic alliances with other
IOR littorals in Asia and Africa.
 To establish a maritime order based on rules in the Indian Ocean region, it must be
institutionalized and vigorously promoted.
 India’s democratic, inclusive, and collaborative leadership can contribute to the region’s
security and sustainable progress for all.
 As maritime concerns are now at the forefront of India’s foreign policy, this represents the
country’s maritime renaissance. India must also take the lead in the region’s effort to ensure
sustainability and growth for everybody.

Through its capacity-building and capability upgrading programs, SAGAR

demonstrates the long-term, transparent leadership position and responsibilities
that India is prepared to assume in the area.
 SINO-INDIA DIPLOMATIC
RELATIONS
“ I am firmly convinced that in future years, China and India will join hands in playing
a more active role in maintaining peace and stability in the region and the world at large
and make due contribution to the human progress and development”
- LI PENG, Former premier of PRC

 The last few years have seen a considerable widening of differences between India and China over
issues such as the boundary dispute, the belt and road initiative, Indian membership to the NSG, and
China’s presence in South Asia and IOR. To discuss the future cooperation between India and
China, recent initiatives between both the countries are useful, timely and a necessary step because
the narrative on the relationship between India and China in the last few years has been increasingly
negative. As such it is an important signal of intent by both countries to revive the relationship and
better understand areas of convergence. Since there are informal summits, the purpose is not clearly
stated and therefore are no fixed outcomes. However, it is possible to provide a broad context to the
summits and outline future cooperation efforts.

 India and China are both part of a complex international situation that makes it necessary for them to
engage with each other. Both countries share a common periphery and are interested in keeping it
stable, and free from extremism and conflict. But from the Indian point of view, growing Chinese
interference in its neighbourhood including Nepal, Sri Lanka, Maldives etc has been a cause for
concern. While it is unrealistic to expect China to stop asserting its influence in the periphery, it is
possible to manage interests and look for an Area of Convergence.

 The simultaneous rise of India and China within the same geographical space has never been an easy
development. Hopefully the enhanced exchange between people will strengthen the pathway for an
enduring partnership. For mutual and maximum benefit, the Dragon and the Elephant have to be in
the same team.

 COMMON INTEREST BETWEEN TWO ASIAN GIANTS

 India and China have had a long history of relations dating back to the pre medieval times. The
new world order has had a plethora of converging interests between these two Asian giants. The
multipolar world has ensured that there is hegemony in diversity due to these aligning interests.
Some of the major common interests between these two countries are socio economic
upliftment, unfair trade practices of the developed nation with a greater role in the global
economy. Both India and China have taken a hard and united stand on these issues at various
world forums.

 Climate change and transition towards sustainable energy are other areas of common interests
for both the nations. Not only have both the countries taken concrete steps in individual capacity
in this regards but are also working in unison in this regard. Both the countries took a united
stand during the Paris agreement and spoke in a common voice.

 The rise of Muslim extremism and Islamic terrorism has not only affected India buthas also
become a concern for the Chinese. Therefore we can see the Chinese playing a major role in the
Afghan peace process today. This has therefore developed a new area of converging interest in
 the form of resolution of Afghan problem and also strict action against Islamic fundamentalists.

 With the rise of China and the new world order China has been gushing to improveties and solve
boundary disputes with most of its neighbouring countries. To understand that it can only
sustain its rapid economic growth if it has peace and tranquility along the LAC.

 CRISIS BETWEEN SINO-INDIAN RELATIONS

 Post-cold war India’s perspective on China is indecisive and complex. While ascertaining a
positive and realistic view of China, the Chinese threat is still lingering India’s thinking about
China.
 Border Issues
The difference in the perception of the international boundary led to the Chinese invasion of India
during 1962. The non-resolution of Aksai Chinand other boundary disputes, China has also laid
claim to 90,000 square km of Arunachal Pradesh and by not resolving the boundary dispute
China wants Indiato remain under strategic pressure. Burning issues of Doklam and Arunachal
Pradesh has made the environment for both countries more tense.
 Tibet Issue
China’s imposition of centralised state structure provoked aTibetan national uprising in 1959.
This resulted in the exodus of the Dalai Lama, Tibetan prominent religious leader and about
100,000 othesr to India, where they were given sanctuary.
 Support to Pakistan
China’s support to Pakistan’s stance on Kashmir, while Pakistan’s support to China on the issue
of Xinjiang, Tibet and Taiwan. Military cooperation has deepened with joint projects producing
armaments ranging from fighter jets to guided missile frigates. China’s cooperation with Pakistan
has reached an economic high point, with substantial Chinese investment in CPEC which makes
the relation between India and China more bitter.
 Strategic Encirclement
At the strategic level, China’s strategy of encirclement vis-à-vis India is increasingly becoming
evident in a three pronged manner- economic, military and diplomatic. OBOR and CPEC were
boycotted by India as it affected the sovereignty.
 Water dispute
China’s effort to portray itself, as a credible and peaceful neighbour has been unsuccessful in
more than one way. Nowhere it is more evident than in the case of water sharing of the
Brahmaputra river. The absenceof data sharing on the Brahmaputra during and after Doklam
standoff and lack of clarity on the intent behind the 1000km long tunnel to transfer water from
Yarlung,Tsangpo in Xinjiang betray China’s self declared responsible behaviour.
 Increasing relation between India and US
The growing relation between India and USA, China is threatened as it’s hegemony of an
Asian giant is at stake. The support of US in many international forums affects the relationship
between India and China. The defence development of India with the induction of new equipment
from US has put China at worry. International forums like QUAD and MALABAR has
made China to rethink its strategic relation with India.
 Trade war between China and USA
India needs to focus on becoming a new power house as a global hub for export to cash in on US-
China trade war. In the major trade standoff between China and US, many international firms that
have invested in China are examining options to spread their risks and shift some of their
existing and new investments to other countries.
 Space Warfare and Security
India must accept and deal with the reality that conflicts and Wars in today’s world will
be based and driven by the increasing inter dependence between conventional, nuclear and
 space war. Testing of ASAT byIndia and entering into the elite countries of having the
technology has affected the relation between India and China.
 East Asia Integration
India’s Act East policy has made great influence in the East Asian Countries and also made
China hesitant to accept Indian role in East Asian regional Integration.

 LATEST DEVLOPMENT BETWEEN TWO ASIAN GIANTS

 India and China are the two most popular countries and the fastest growing economies in the
world. Growth in diplomatic and economic influence has increased the significance of their
bilateral relationship. The full import of an“informal summit” it is something that few outside
hallowed diplomatic circle fully comprehend. Unlike a regular meeting of two heads of
government that usually produce a formal statement and a series of agreements, much of the
work in an informal summit rests in the realm of the intangible, results are apparent over a
period of time. Most people find it difficult to assess the success of high level meetings. The
fresh strains had started creeping into ties, the attempt of the two leaders is to stress the
convergence and give out a positive signal rather than highlight their differences.
 India and China must ensure that difference does not turn into dispute, but they must address
them. China is one of India’s largest trading partner and the two countries have also extended
their strategic and military relations.

 PROPOSAL FOR MAKING STRONG DIPLOMATIC RELATIONSHIP

 The Sino- Indian relations have entered a new phase, where the relationship should be of sound
& stable development. Under the current international circumstances, the two countries shoulder
increasingly important responsibilities in safeguarding global security and promoting
development. The next few years are going to be crucial for China and India to realise the
national rejuvenation. The measures can therefore be broadly divided at national and military
level.
 National level
Both the countries need to take a more sympathetic approach at teach other’s national ambitions
and should seek a solution that is fair, reasonable and acceptable to both sides. These can
therefore be summarized as follows:-
 Trade Gap.
o Ongoing US-China trade War made significant reduction in trade deficit of India with
China. However, India’s import from Hong Kong exponentially increased during the
same period. Following are some of the “Recommended”proposals:-
o Various high level Economic and Trade mechanisms should be incorporated in order to
enhance trade and commercial relations, as well as to better balance the trade between
two countries.
o Early negotiation of issues of Regional Comprehensive Economic Partnership (RCEP),
will help India to seek free trade zones among ASEAN member countries, China,
Au s t r a lia & New Zealand.
o Easing of Visas for the Businessmen and stringent industry policies of both the
countries will help in increasing the bilateral trade. Initiative’s like e-visa policy for
Chinese national will help in growing bilateral relations.
o Opening of SEZ by China for Indian IT firm will boost the IT sector with export of
software and import of hardware from China.

 Maritime Silk Route (MSR)

o This decade has seen a Chinese push for materializing its dream project of BRI &
OBOR with large scale investments in previously unknown territories. OBOR and BRI
 have both had their share of successes and hurdles however India has been steadfast in
its opposition of the same as it violates our territorial sanctity. However, the Chinese
initiative of a maritime silk route (MSR) has been seen with optimism in the Indian
bureaucratic and political circle. It would not only be a positive step in building our
slowed down economy but would also ensure an international integration of countries
like never before. However the issue to induct India into the MSR lacks clarity as also
the Chinese strategy of reviving the MSR.
o Some of the important proposals are as follows:-
 Definite objectives especially wrt India should be clearly defined.
 China needs to spell out clear initiatives for India per se.
 Indian private firms to be included in the programmes and vise versa,would
surely lead to invaluable FDI flow into the country.
o Few advantages are as under:-
 Expansion of Maritime Engagement and Cooperation.
 Convergence in Maritime Domain.
 Development of Maritime Infrastructure.
 India and China can also work together on the Humanitarian Assistance
and Disaster Relief partnership (HADR).

 Unilateral stand in International forum

o India and China have had a long history of relations dating back to the pre medieval
times. The new world order has had a plethora of converging interests between these
two Asian giants. The multipolar world has ensured that there is hegemony in
diversity due to these aligning interests.
o India and China have taken unilateral stand on a number of occasions and these are:
 IMF and WTO negotiation.
 Subsidy on agriculture.
 Asian Oil Premium.
 Tackling Iranian oil and US CAATSA.

o The “Recommended” proposals are:

 India and China need to undertake joint ventures in international forums.
 Joint undertakings in various aligning matters would go a long way.
 Jointness in UN forums and a common stand that is formalised by
documention.

 Tourism Sector
o The tourism sector has tremendous opportunities of bringing two nations together by
building public relations and image stabilization in domestic media.
o Some of the “Recommended” proposals are as follows:-
 Relaxation of travel rules and special traveling privileges and packages.
 Cultural Exchange programmes at various levels.
 Ease on tourist Visa is one of the primary privileges which would make
traveling comfortable for tourists.

 Religious
o They say the almighty has a way of solving even the most complex of issues.
Therefore religious approach to a few issues especially specific and pertaining to
Indo-Tibet boundary would play an important role in the friendship of the two
nations as also increase hegemony amongst the local populace.
 o Following are some of the important “Recommended” proposals with this regard-
 Restarting of Rinkor and Kinkor pilgrimage.
 Easing of movement to Mansrover pilgrimage.
 Joint ventures need to be undertaken.

 Military level
o The two countries need to effectively improve military & security exchanges and
cooperation. There is a need to promote military relations along the correct directions of
enhancing trust, dispelling doubts and strengthening friendly cooperation, carry out activities
including professional cooperation and joint training, continuously enhance mutual trust
between the two militaries, strengthen cooperation between law enforcement & security
departments. There is also a need to maintain regional securityand stability.

 Enhanced Military Level Cooperation

o In the forum of international relations, military cooperation or cooperation in the
military domain is the litmus test of a strategic relationship between any two countries.
Until and unless the two nations progress on a path of military cooperation the trust
factor required to develop and foster this relationship would always fall short.
o Following is a proposed road map with regards to the same-
 High Level Exchange Programmes-
 NCC Camps.
 Visit to academies.
 Attending of Military Courses.
 Joint Expeditions.
 Defence Ministry level meetings
· On half yearly/ yearly basis.
 Joint R&D in advance technology i.e. AI.
 Joint collaboration on space tech.
 Joint Expedition & cycling along the LAC.
 Mil Level games.
· Yearly basis - Once in each country – Volleyball,Handball etc.
· Small scale on half yearly basis near border locations.
 Mil Level Exercise-
o As already stated in the arena of military cooperation and engagements,
military exercises would be the final culmination or the high tide of fostering
strong strategic ties that would reaffirm much needed trust even amongst the
otherwise suspicious military domain.
o Some of the important proposals are as follows:-
 Military exercise should be conducted over the entire Sino- India boundary with
minimum one each in the Ladakh region, Central Sector and Arunachal Sector on both
sides.
 Joint training exercise can be conducted at various military establishments.
 Joint training courses to be conducted both in India and China.

 Boundary Issue
This has been a major bone of contention in the Sino Indian relations and has seen both the
nations take aggressive stance on a number of occasions. However over time the stance has
softened with a ray of hope of a solution to the burning issue. The boundary issue needs to be
tackled not only at the strategic level but needs to flow down to the very tacticallevel in order to
improve mutual trust and pave way for more cordial relations. Following are some of the
important steps that need to be taken:
 o Restart of senior level dialogue. Making of an independent committee from both
sides.
o Early resolution of issue along the LAC and agreement on thefinal boundaries.
o Sharing off patrolling programmes will reduce tensions among the Armed Forces of the
two countries.

 COVID 19 and the India-China Equation

India, one of the world's biggest drug makers, is ready to step up exports of fever medicines
and vaccines to China as it reels from a spike in COVID-19 cases.

 CONCLUSION
 It is important to understand Chinese motivation for improving the situation with India from
the perspective of geo-startegic kaleidoscope. Worsening trade situation with the U.S. and
the unpredictability as U.S. administration has made the Chinese leadership nervous. As
increasingly China has been making outreaches effort to countries in the periphery including
Japan, South Korea, Vietnam, and Indonesia among others. An attempt to thaw relations with
India should also be seen in this context.
 Internally, Chinese President Xi Jinping has also been facing problems. He has not
managed to implement the market reforms that he had promised in 2013; Chinese
society is also less manageable than before in terms of societal state control and obvious
negative social media could be indicative of strain on the domestic front.
 On the economic front, Chinese growth is already decelerating. China used to have the ability to
manipulate and control its trade flows, exchange rates and capital flows simultaneously. This
ability to keep its economy afloat through tight controls, without externalrepercussions, is
slowly unraveling.
 China has also been facing an increasing backlash, not from just India but other countries in
Europe and elsewhere, on the economic unviability of its investment under the belt and road
initiative, with no internal rates of return on these investments, the Chinese economic
system is under huge strain to cushion these shocks.
 Therefore, China has a special interest in pacifying its neighbourhood, while it deals with
its economic and socio-political issues . India therefore comes central to the solution to this
precarious problem. However we should move cautiously as it is important to learn from
history but also not be too pessimistic about the future.

India doesn’t have one problem with China, we

have a whole lot of problems pending with
China.
 The Effects of the China-Pakistan Economic
Corridor on India-Pakistan Relations
The China-Pakistan Economic Corridor (CPEC) constitutes one of the largest foreign investments China
has made in the framework of the “One Belt, One Road” initiative. The expenditures planned for the
coming years in the amount of approximately $46 billion will further intensify relations between China
and Pakistan. At the same time, Pakistan will assume a more prominent role in China’s foreign policy.
But CPEC also affects relations between India and Pakistan. The transport corridor between Pakistan and
China traverses Jammu and Kashmir, the status of which has been a subject of contention between India
and Pakistan since 1947. This constellation would seem to suggest a negative scenario whereby CPEC
could place additional strain on India-Pakistan relations. On the other hand, a positive scenario is also
conceivable, with a settlement of the Kashmir dispute even becoming possible in the long term.

CPEC plays a key role in China’s foreign policy, linking infrastructure measures aimed at establishing a
“New Silk Road” (one road) running through Central and South Asia with efforts to create a “Maritime
Silk Road” (one belt) in the Indian Ocean. The two routes are to meet in the Pakistani port city of Gwadar
in the Balochistan Province, the development of which China has been promoting for many years. Upon
completion, CPEC will form a network of roads, railways and gas pipelines encompassing approximately
3,000 kilometers in length. Around $11 billion is currently earmarked for infrastructure measures. The
bulk of the funding, however, about $33 billion, is slated for energy projects. The aim here is to alleviate
chronic energy shortages, stimulate economic development and establish new industrial parks.

The implementation of the CPEC project has fueled a series of domestic political debates in Pakistan.
Initially, a dispute arose between the provinces and the political parties over the road and railway routes
between Gwadar in the country’s southwest and China in the northeast. This dispute has since given way
to general agreement that there should be several routes benefitting as many provinces as possible.

But there is still ongoing debate over whether the “western” or the “eastern” route should be completed
first. A second issue concerns the safety of Chinese personnel. There are already several thousand
Chinese workers and experts in Pakistan and this number is likely to increase as CPEC proceeds. As
Chinese are regularly attacked or abducted, for example by separatist groups in Balochistan, the army is
in the process of deploying a special security division to protect them. A third issue is the dispute over the
tax exemptions the Chinese government has demanded in return for easing credit terms and importing
machinery from Pakistan.

CPEC and India-Pakistan Relations

CPEC will also have consequences for India- Pakistan relations. The corridor runs through the region of
Gilgit-Baltistan (GB) in northern Pakistan. This region belongs to Jammu and Kashmir, to which both
India and Pakistan have asserted claims. Since the accession of the former princely state to the Indian
Union in October 1947, New Delhi has claimed the entire area for India and insists on resolving the
dispute only with Islamabad. India invokes the 1972 Shimla Agreement, according to which disputes
between the two countries are to be resolved through bilateral negotiation. Pakistan, in contrast, invokes a
series of resolutions on Kashmir in the United Nations and views the former princely state as disputed
territory, the affiliation of which is to be decided by referendum. The Kashmir dispute has been the cause
of three of the four wars that India and Pakistan have waged against each other since 1947.
The Negative Scenario
The aim of CPEC is to improve economic development in Pakistan. In recent years, economic growth has
been weaker than in other South Asian countries such as India, Bangladesh and Sri Lanka. Improved
economic development could lead to an increase in Pakistan’s military spending. This would presumably
further fuel the arms race with India. So far, efforts to intensify economic relations with India have
foundered on the resistance of Pakistan’s armed forces. The political rapprochement connected with the
1999 Lahore process and the 2004 Composite Dialogue has been undermined by military adventures like
the 1999 Kargil War and major terrorist strikes like the 2009 Mumbai attacks.

A Pakistan economically strengthened by Chinese support would have little interest in expanding
economic cooperation with India. Pakistan could then more forcefully place the Kashmir dispute on the
foreign policy agenda, as it did intermittently in 2014/15.

Major terror attacks in India, with or without the knowledge of the security forces in Pakistan, could lead
to an escalation of the Kashmir dispute. This in turn would prompt the international community to
intervene, thereby playing into Pakistan’s hands.

If in the course of a renewed India- Pakistan conflict Chinese citizens were to be attacked, for example in
Balochistan, where separatist groups operate, partially supported by India, this could also produce a crisis
between New Delhi and Beijing. In this scenario, the economic and political effects of CPEC would
essentially prolong the negative cycle of India-Pakistan relations.

In this case the positive economic effects that CPEC would have for Pakistan would spur a military build-
up, which in turn would have negative effects on relations with India.

India’s position on the Belt and Road Inititave (BRI) from the time of its initial launch in 2013, India has
opposed the BRI because one of the core components of the initiative, the CPEC, is seen as violating
India’s sovereignty and territorial integrity. While the Indian position remains unchanged, China and
Pakistan are keen to invite third parties into the CPEC, highlighting China’s insensitivities to India’s
concerns. The initiative is planned to be completed by 2049, coinciding with the centennial of the
founding of the People’s Republic of China. But this has not received the kind of approval that China had
hoped for. India’s opposition to the BRI primarily stems from the CPEC. India has also been concerned
with the economic non-viability of many of the BRI projects that have led to “debt trap” situations in
countries like Sri Lanka.
India has explained its position, stating that China’s pursuit of the CPEC reflected its “lack of
understanding and appreciation of India’s concerns on the issue of sovereignty.” The statement further
clarified that the government had repeatedly articulated that “Pakistan has been in illegal occupation of
parts of the Indian state of Jammu & Kashmir since 1947. Government has conveyed to the Chinese side,
including at the highest level, its concerns about their activities in (Pakistan-occupied Kashmir) and asked
them to cease these activities.”

India has been consistent and unambiguous in its position on China’s BRI projects. That China had
decided to pursue these projects in the face of this position reflects a short-sighted view, thus pushing
India into an anti-China bloc much faster.

Overall, China-Pakistan projects, including the CPEC and its possible expansion to include third countries
in the coming years, could impact relations in the region. But since India is unlikely to react in any
meaningful manner to counter these developments, these are likely not be too serious.

India believes that “No country can accept a project that ignores its core concerns on sovereignty and
territorial integrity.” The articulation that connectivity projects such as the BRI “must be based on
universally recognized international norms, good governance, rule of law, openness, transparency, and
equality, and must be pursued in a manner that respects sovereignty and territorial integrity.”

The Positive Scenario

On the other hand, a positive scenario is also conceivable in which CPEC exerts a moderating influence
on India-Pakistan relations and the Kashmir dispute. In concrete terms, this would have an effect on the
constitutional status of the Gilgit- Baltistan region in Pakistan, on the one hand, and on relations between
China, Pakistan and India on the other.

As one would expect, the routing of the corridor through Gilgit-Baltistan, which is claimed by India, has
prompted protests by the government in New Delhi. Gilgit-Baltistan has a special status in Pakistan. As it
is part of Jammu and Kashmir, Pakistan officially considers it disputed territory and therefore refuses to
accord it the rights of a province.

The special status of Gilgit-Baltistan has repeatedly led to protests by the local population, who demand
more political participation and investments. Due to its strategic significance, the region is de-facto
controlled by the armed forces. Various Kashmiri rebel groups, which are supported by the armed forces
in their fight against India, are said to run training camps here.

Pakistani governments have improved regional self-government through a series of reforms. As part of
the last major reform in 2009, the former Northern Areas, among other areas, were renamed Gilgit-
Baltistan. At the same time a legislative assembly was established in the region, which in contrast to
provincial parliaments has only limited powers.

Were CPEC to improve Pakistan’s economic development, this could foment discontent in Gilgit-
Baltistan over the growing gap between the region and other provinces. If the government was to respond
to such protests by constitutionally upgrading the region to a province, it would simultaneously be
undermining its own official stance in the Kashmir dispute, since as a province of Pakistan, Gilgit-
Baltistan would no longer be a “disputed territory”. The dispute with India would thus be indirectly
ended, as both sides would have then completed the integration of the respective parts of Kashmir
controlled by them into their state entities.

The second positive aspect of CPEC lies in the effects it could have on relations between and among
China, Pakistan and India. The relationship with China has been extolled for many years as extremely
positive and described in metaphorical circumlocutions such as “higher than the Himalayas and deeper
than the ocean”. In formal terms, moreover, Pakistan is China’s only strategic partner, though closer
analysis shows that China is not the unconditionally reliable partner that Pakistan hopes for, above all in
the dispute with India.

First of all, China does not support Pakistan’s position on the Kashmir issue. Pakistan wants to resolve the
matter through internationalization. China, in contrast, along with the US and the EU, among others,
believes that the dispute should be resolved through bilateral talks. This stance corresponds to India’s
position. Second, during the 1999 Kargil War Beijing was not willing to stand with Pakistan against
India. Third, at the 2008 Nuclear Suppliers Group (NSG) negotiations, which took place in the framework
of the US-India Civil Nuclear Agreement, China voted for Indian exemptions that were heavily criticized
in Pakistan. Fourth, India-China relations have improved considerably since the 1990s. The bilateral
relationship continues to be marked by tensions, stemming for example from the unresolved border issue
in the Himalayas. Nevertheless, the two countries have significantly expanded their political and
economic cooperation in recent years, for example through participation in the BRICS group (Brazil,
Russia, India, China, South Africa). In international negotiation rounds they regularly agree on common
positions vis-à-vis the West. The accession of India (and Pakistan) to the Shanghai Cooperation
Organisation (SCO) will strengthen cooperation between New Delhi and Beijing even further.

As mentioned above, China’s participation in CPEC increases its vulnerability due to its substantial
investments and the danger posed to its own citizens in the eventuality of renewed India-Pakistan
hostilities. But as China’s cooperation with Pakistan is focused on its armed forces rather than its political
parties, China’s influence could have a moderating effect on Pakistan’s military. Military adventures like
the 1999 Kargil War would thus become less likely.

Conclusion
Pakistan places high economic hopes in CPEC. To what extent the project can really be carried out
remains unclear. There has always been a gap between official announcements and the funds actually
spent on Chinese projects in Pakistan. Nevertheless, in the medium to long-term CPEC is likely to have a
positive effect on the economic development of the country, for example by contributing to improving
Pakistan’s infrastructure and easing its chronic energy shortage.

CPEC strengthens the strategic alliance between Pakistan and China. At first glance, it would therefore
seem likely to exacerbate the dispute between Pakistan and India. But in Pakistan, too, there is a change
of thinking taking place. For example, in Islamabad there is a growing understanding that supporting
militant groups in order to achieve foreign policy objectives in neighboring countries such as India and
Afghanistan is increasingly counterproductive and has negative effects on Pakistan’s national security.
Moreover, China nourishes hopes that CPEC and its economic effects will also contribute to the
transformation of Pakistani society and the strengthening of moderate forces. China reasons that peaceful
development in Pakistan could in turn also have a positive influence on the region, for example with
regard to the situation in Afghanistan.

Securing Chinese trade routes by granting Gilgit-Baltistan the constitutional status of a province would
codify the status quo, thus indirectly bringing the Kashmir dispute to an end and closing a chapter in
global politics. India has already signaled in previous negotiations with Pakistan, for example in 2007,
that it is willing to accept the status quo in Kashmir, which evinces the current division of the territory.
After all there is still a possibility, however unlikely, that India may one day enendorse the
internationalization of the Kashmir dispute and a referendum. Were Kashmiris to then vote in favor of
accession to the Indian Union, CPEC would become obsolete overnight.
What is CPEC?
 CPEC is a 3,000-km long route of infrastructure projects connecting China’s northwest
Xinjiang Uygur Autonomous Region and the Gwadar Port in the western province of Balochistan in Pakistan.
 It is a bilateral project between Pakistan and China, intended to promote connectivity across Pakistan with a
network of highways, railways, and pipelines accompanied by energy, industrial, and other infrastructure
development projects.
 It will pave the way for China to access the Middle East and Africa from Gwadar Port, enabling China to access
the Indian Ocean and in return China will support development projects in Pakistan to overcome the latter’s
energy crises and stabilising its faltering economy.
 CPEC is a part of the Belt and Road Initiative (BRI).
 The BRI, launched in 2013, aims to link Southeast Asia, Central Asia, the Gulf region, Africa and Europe with
a network of land and sea routes.

What are CPEC’s Implications for India?

 India’s Sovereignty: India has continuously opposed the project since it passes through the Pakistan-occupied
Kashmir territory of Gilgit-Baltistan – a claim opposed by Pakistan.
 The corridor is also perceived to be an alternative economic road link for the Kashmir Valley lying on the
Indian side of the border.
 Most key players in the Indian state of Jammu and Kashmir, have expressed optimism about the project.
 There have been calls by local business and political leaders to declare Kashmir on both sides of the Line of
Control (LoC) a ‘Special Economic Zone’.
 However, a well-connected Gilgit-Baltistan that attracts industrial development and foreign investment, if
CPEC proves a success, will further consolidate the region’s perception as internationally recognised Pakistani
territory, diminishing India’s claim over the 73,000 sq km piece of land which is home to more than 1.8 million
people.
 Chinese Control Over Trade Via Sea: Major US ports on the East Coast depend on the Panama Canal to trade
with China.
 Once CPEC becomes fully functional, China will be in a position to offer a ‘shorter and more economical’ trade
route (avoiding travel through the entire Western Hemisphere) to most North and Latin American enterprises.
 This will give China the power to dictate the terms by which the international movement of goods will take
place between the Atlantic and the Pacific oceans.
 Chinese String of Pearls: China has been increasing its presence in the Indian Ocean with the ‘String of
Pearls’ ambition, A term coined by the Americans and often used by Indian defence analysts to refer to a
Chinese game-plan of encircling India through a network of airfields and ports. With an existing presence in
Chittagong port (Bangladesh), Hambantota port (Sri Lanka), Port Sudan (Sudan), Maldives, Somalia and
Seychelles, a control of Gwadar port establishes complete dominance of the Indian Ocean by the Communist
nation.
 Emergence of Pakistan as an Outsourcing Destination: It is poised to speed up Pakistan’s economic progress.
 Pakistani exports, mainly in the textile and construction material industry, compete directly with those of India
in the US and UAE – two of the top three trading partners of both countries.
 With the supply of raw material from China becoming easier, Pakistan will be suitably placed to become a
regional market leader in these sectors – mainly at the cost of Indian export volumes.
 Stronger BRI and Chinese Dominance in Trade Leadership: China’s BRI project that focuses on the trade
connectivity between China and the rest of Eurasia through a network of ports, roads and railways has been
often seen as China’s plan to dominate the region politically. CPEC is one giant step in the same direction.
 A China that is more accepted and integrated with the rest of the global economy will have a better say in
the United Nations and with individual nations, which may prove to be bad news for an India aspiring to acquire
a permanent seat at the UN Security Council.

The Way Forward

India should leverage its strategic location and further work with like-minded countries to participate in multilateral
initiatives like:
 The Asia-Africa Growth Corridor is an India-Japan economic cooperation agreement, it can provide India great
strategic benefits and counter China.
 Blue Dot network, which is being promoted by the USA.
 It is a multi-stakeholder initiative to bring together governments, the private sector and civil society to promote
high-quality, trusted standards for global infrastructure development.
 It is expected to serve as a globally recognized evaluation and certification system for roads, ports and bridges
with a focus on the Indo-Pacific region.

What is One Belt One Road (OBOR)?

 It is a multi-billion-dollar initiative launched in 2013.
 It aims to link Southeast Asia, Central Asia, the Gulf region, Africa and Europe with a network of land
and sea routes.
 It has been launched to undertake big infrastructure projects in the world which in turn would also
enhance the global influence of China.

Structure
They contain the following six economic corridors:
1. The New Eurasian Land Bridge which connects Western China to Western Russia.
2. The China-Mongolia-Russia Corridor which connects North China to Eastern Russia via Mongolia.
3. The China-Central Asia-West Asia Corridor which connects Western China to Turkey via Central
and West Asia.
4. The China-Indochina Peninsula Corridor which connects Southern China to Singapore via Indo-
China.
5. The China-Pakistan Corridor which connects South Western China through Pakistan to Arabia Sea
routes.
6. The Bangladesh-China-India-Myanmar Corridor which connects Southern China to India via
Bangladesh and Myanmar.
Additionally, the maritime Silk Road connects coastal China to the Mediterranean via Singapore-Malaysia, the
Indian Ocean, the Arabian Sea, and the Strait of Hormuz.
 Cryptocurrency
 What is Cryptocurrency?
 A cryptocurrency is a medium of exchange, such as the rupee or the US dollar, but is digital in
format that uses encryption techniques to both control the creation of monetary units and to verify
the exchange of money. The concept of cryptocurrency was shared with the world by Satoshi
Nakamoto, a pseudonym, in 2008. Nakamoto published a white paper called “Bitcoin: A peer-to-
peer electronic cash system” on the internet. The first cryptocurrency known as Bitcoin came into
existence in the following year. The basic idea behind digital currency was to exclude the third party
from the electronic transaction and let the sender and receiver have complete control over their
money.
 Cryptocurrency, also known as virtual currency or digital currency, has become the first digital asset
to be widely accepted as a legitimate form of payment online and offline across the globe. To use
cryptocurrencies, you need a cryptocurrency wallet. These wallets can be software that is a cloud-
based service or is stored on your computer or on your mobile device.
 A cryptocurrency is a digital or virtual currency that uses cryptography for security. A cryptocurrency
or crypto, is a virtual currency secured by cryptography. It is designed to work as a medium of
exchange, where individual ownership records are stored in a computerised database.
 Some examples of cryptocurrencies include Bitcoin, Ethereum, and Litecoin. Bitcoin is considered
to be the world’s best known cryptocurrency and is the largest in the world according to market
capitalisation..
 The defining trait of a cryptocurrency is that they are not issued by the government agency of any
country making them immune against any interference and manipulation from them and are
considered alternative currency or means of financial exchange that are outside the scope of state
monetary policy. However, In September 2021, El Salvador became the first country in the world to
introduce Bitcoin as legal tender.
 Cypto-currency has gained tremendous significance worldwide and especially after the COVID
pandemic. It is being considered as the next digital revolution with its underlying technology. There is
need for India to accept the same maybe with regulations and safety framework to ensure that like
earlier digital revolutions of smartphones, internet and semiconductors, the country does not lag
behind.

 How does a Cryptocurrency work?

 A cryptocurrency (or “crypto”) is a digital currency that can be used to buy goods and services, but
uses an online ledger with strong cryptography to secure online transactions. Much of the interest in
these unregulated currencies is to trade for profit, with speculators at times driving prices skyward.

 How is money made from cryptocurrency?

 The most common way of earning money from cryptocurrencies is buying coins such as Bitcoin,
Litecoin, Ethereum, Ripple, and more and wait until their value rises. Once their market prices rise,
they sell at a profit.

 Advantages and disadvantages of Cryptocurrency

 Cryptocurrency has the following advantages:
 Funds transfer between two parties will be easy without the need of third party like credit/debit
cards or banks.
 It keeps a check on corruption by tracking the flow of funds and transactions.
 It is a cheaper alternative compared to other online transactions.
 Payments are safe and secured and offer an unprecedented level of anonymity.
 Modern cryptocurrency systems come with a user “wallet” or account address which is accessible
only by a public key and pirate key. The private key is only know to the owner of the wallet.
 Fund transfers are completed with minimal processing fees.
  Cryptocurrencies have the following disadvantages
 The almost hidden nature of cryptocurrency transactions makes them easy to be the focus of
illegal activities such as money laundering, tax-evasion and possibly even terror-financing.
 Payments are not irreversible.
 They pose a threat to consumers are they are not a legal form of currency.
 Cryptocurrencies are not accepted everywhere and have limited value elsewhere.
 There is concern that cryptocurrencies like Bitcoin are not rooted in any material goods. Some
research, however, has identified that the cost of producing a Bitcoin, which requires an
increasingly large amount of energy, is directly related to its market price.

 What is the Legal Status of Cryptocurrency?

 Elsewhere:
 At present, El Salvador and the Central African Republic (CAR) are the only two countries in
the world where Bitcoin functions as a legal currency.
 However, many countries have taken steps to recognize and regulate the use of
certain cryptocurrencies, such as Bitcoin.
 Some countries, such as Japan and South Korea, have issued regulations for cryptocurrency
exchanges.
 Nations like Germany and Switzerland, have recognized Bitcoin as a "legal means of
payment."
 Other countries, such as China and Russia, have taken a more cautious approach and
have imposed restrictions on the use of cryptocurrencies.

 India:
 The legal status of cryptocurrency in India is currently in a state of flux.
 The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) has issued several warnings against the use
of cryptocurrencies, stating that they pose risks to investors and are not legal tender.
 In 2017, the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) issued a warning that virtual
currencies/cryptocurrencies are not a legal tender in India. However, no ban on virtual
currencies took place.
 In 2018 the Supreme Court struck down a circular of Reserve Bank of India, which bans
financial institutions from dealing in digital or cryptocurrencies.
 In 2019, RBI issued that trading, mining, holding or transferring/use of cryptocurrencies is
subject to punishment in India with a financial penalty or/and imprisonment up to 10 years. RBI
also declared that it may launch digital rupee as a legal tender in India in future.
 In 2020, the Supreme Court of India removed the ban on cryptocurrencies imposed by RBI.
 In 2022, the Government of India clearly mentioned in the Union budget 2022-23 that-the
transfer of any virtual currency/cryptocurrency asset will be subject to 30% tax deduction.
 Gifts in the form of virtual assets/cryptocurrencies will be taxed in the hands of the receiver.
 In July 2022, The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) recommended a ban on cryptocurrencies citing
‘destabilising effects’ for the country’s monetary and fiscal health.
 The Govt has also set up a panel to explore the potential use of blockchain technology and
issued a Central Bank Digital Currency (CBDC) on 1st Dec 2022.

 What is Digital Rupee and how is it different from Cryptocurrency ?

 The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) announced the launch of the first retail digital Rupee (e₹-R) pilot
on December 1, 2022. With the launch, India has joined a handful of nations to launch its own
blockchain currency that can underscore India’s pre-eminence in digitalised finance. Not even the
United States has launched their Central Bank Digital Currency (CBDC) yet.
 Digital Rupee is a form of digital token that represents legal tender.
 Unlike cryptocurrencies, the digital Rupee or e-Rupee is issued in the same denominations as paper
currency and coins. The value of crypto including Bitcoin is volatile, but digital Rupee’s value
remains the same all throughout.
  While users can invest in crypto, in the case of digital Rupee banks assign them to customers.
 According to the concept note, the Central Bank Digital Currency (CBDC) is the Reserve Bank of
India's official form of currency. The regulator stated that the RBI's CBDC, also known as the
Digital Rupee or e-Rupee, is interchangeable one-to-one at par with the fiat currency and is the same
as a sovereign currency.
 The similarity between CBDC and cryptocurrency ends at the fact that they both have blockchain as
the underlying technology. Therefore, with blockchain as a base, all transactions can be tracked on
the ledger with no ability to modify the past – leading to transparency and easy bookkeeping. Hence,
CBDC will be a technology-led currency of the RBI with control on the supply as well as usage side.
It won't be decentralized the way cryptocurrencies are.
 The one stark difference between the two is while there is no regulator for cryptocurrency, digital
rupee is a legal tender with RBI as the regulator. Here transactions may be a little more anonymous
than other digital transactions, as money moves from wallet to wallet after a one-time deduction
from the bank account, but still they can be tracked with RBI as the regulator.
 The RBI's decision to advance India in the race for virtual currencies is the primary justification for
the introduction of the digital rupee. And, of course, cryptocurrencies are becoming more and more
important.
 Users will be able to transact with e₹-R through a digital wallet offered by the participating banks
and stored on mobile phones / devices.
 Transactions can be both Person to Person (P2P) and Person to Merchant (P2M). Payments to
merchants can be made using QR codes displayed at merchant locations.
 As in the case of cash, it will not earn any interest and can be converted to other forms of money,
like deposits with banks
 The e₹-R would offer features of physical cash like trust, safety and settlement finality

 Way Forward
 Clarity on the legal status of cryptocurrencies is important for their widespread adoption and use.
When governments provide a clear framework for cryptocurrency, it creates a more stable
environment for businesses and individuals to invest in and use them. This can also encourage
innovation and growth in the industry.
 The examples of countries like El Salvador and the Central African Republic recognizing
cryptocurrencies as legal tender show that it is possible for governments to embrace this new
technology and create a favorable environment for it to thrive.
 The RBI has started a blockchain-based Central Bank Digital Currency (CBDC) pilot program. The
government should take this into consideration because cryptocurrency is based on blockchain
technology as well.
 Launching cryptocurrency with a strong regulatory framework can ensure its proper
use, prevent fraud and illegal activities, and increase consumer protection. On the other hand, a
complete restriction of cryptocurrency may stifle innovation and limit its potential benefits to
society.
 The classification of cryptocurrencies as either goods or asset classes is still unclear and subject to
change in many countries, including India. Currently, software is considered a good and can be
taxed as such under Indian law. Profits and earnings from the sale of cryptocurrencies are
considered taxable income, but only after the legalization of cryptocurrencies.
 Digital currency will also lead to a more efficient and cheaper currency management system.

India is currently on the cusp of the next phase of digital revolution and has the
potential to channel its human capital, expertise and resources into this revolution,
and emerge as one of the winners of this wave. All that is needed to do is to get the
policymaking right. Blockchain and crypto assets will be an integral part of the
Fourth Industrial Revolution; India shouldn’t be made to simply bypass it.
 Curbing Fake News
 What is Fake News?
 In the age of the internet, fake news has become the new social evil that is haunting us. The Internet
is an incredible resource for news and information, but unfortunately not everything online is
trustworthy.
 Fake news is news, stories or hoaxes created to deliberately misinform or deceive readers. Fake
news is any article or video containing untrue information disguised as a credible news source. While
fake news is not unique to the Internet, it has recently become a big problem in today’s digital world.
 Usually, these stories are created to influence people’s views, push a political agenda or cause
confusion and can often be a profitable business for online publishers.
 Fake news or hoax news refers to false propaganda published under the guise of authentic news. It is
deliberately created to misinform the readers.
 Fake news can be propagated through any media: print, electronic and social.
 Fake news can be related to anything:
 Commercially driven sensational content
 Nation-state sponsored misinformation
 Highly partisan news site
 Social media itself
 Satire or parody
 Some checks and balances exist in the mainstream media against fake news, but social media does not
have such a mechanism.
 Fake news is not a new phenomenon which is linked to the rise of social media, on the contrary from
the times of ancient Greece, the governments and political actors (anyone in the business of
mobilising public opinion) have always invested in disinformation campaigns to build narratives of
their choice.
 In recent years, however, fake news has been responsible for a great deal of misinformation because
more and more people have begun consuming and believing these articles without bothering to fact
check or even read beyond the headlines. This acceptance of incorrect information has led to
confusion, panic, and an inability to discuss the actual facts surrounding current events.
 The Indian government has been attempting to bring in several legal amendments to deal with fake
news, its creation, propagation and effects.
 Social media companies are also investing billions of dollars into technological solutions such
as Artificial Intelligence (AI) to identify fake news and its proliferation.

 Causes of Spread of Fake News In India

 Erosion of Media Ethics: News media is no longer seen as an arbitrator of the ‘real news’. Media is
alleged to be echo-chamber of the dominant political class. Thus, News Media have lost credibility
due to complicit and motivated reporting, which has become a source of fake news.
 Social Media: The advent of social media has decentralized the creation and propagation of fake
news. The sheer vastness of the internet (over 35 crore users in India) and social media users (an
estimated over 20 crore WhatsApp users alone) makes tracing the origin of fake news almost
impossible.
 Polarization of society: Increasing divide in the society on ideological lines has made the job of
spreading fake news easier.
 Lack of legislation: There is no specific law to deal with fake news in India. Free publication or
broadcast of news in India flows from the fundamental right to freedom of expression as enshrined
under Article 19 of the Constitution
 Confirmation Bias: Studies have confirmed that people don’t care about finding the ‘truth’ behind
a news item and instead look for evidence to support their preferred narrative.
 How did fake news become such a problem?
  A fake news article is designed to outrage and shock, causing some readers to share it on Facebook,
Twitter, or another type of social media platform without questioning it. Sharing the article exposes it
to more people who may be outraged by it, who also share it without question, and so on. This cycle
continues until a sizeable number of people believe this fake story is the truth.
 There is also a need for stronger laws against fake news in India and media organisations need to
make fact-checking a routine practice and create greater public awareness.

 Effects of Fake News

 With millions of people using social media in a country like India, fake news is no less than a
potential disaster.
 It can be used to influence public opinions, to gain popularity or to malign the image, character of
certain individuals or opponents or to defame them.
 It polarizes public opinion and affects political institutions, political disinformation campaigns in the
Indian electoral system could lead to the deepening of existing social discord, loss of civic trust in the
electoral system, and the compromise of basic democratic principles.
 It affects social & communal harmony by spreading extremists’ ideologies especially in sensitive
areas like radicalization of youths, inciting violence and hatred among the communities, swinging
public opinions etc.

 What are the Challenges in Curbing Fake News in India?

 Low Digital Literacy: India's digital literacy rate is still low, which makes it easy for fake news to
spread, as people often do not have the skills to verify the authenticity of news sources.
 Approximately 70% of the population has poor or no connectivity to digital services.
 Among the poorest 20% households, only 2.7% have access to a computer and 8.9% to
internet facilities.
 Political Use: Fake news is often used for political purposes in India, especially during elections.
Political parties use fake news to manipulate public opinion, which makes it challenging to control
the spread of fake news.
 Limited Fact-Checking Infrastructure: India has limited fact-checking infrastructure, and many
of the available fact-checking organizations (PIB fact check units) are small and poorly funded.
 Lack of Penalties: There are currently no strict penalties for the spread of fake news in India, which
makes it difficult to deter people from creating and disseminating fake news.
 Opacity of Social Media Platforms: Social media platforms are increasingly becoming the primary
ground for public discourse over which a handful of individuals have inordinate control. One of the
biggest hurdles in being able to curb misinformation is the lack of transparency by social media
platforms.
 Anonymity: The most famous reason for anonymity is to be able to speak the truth against
vindictive governments or to not let the views be tagged to the real person being spoken about, in the
offline world. Despite helping people share their views without any insecurity, it does more harm in
the sense that they may spread false information without any repercussions.

 How to deal with fake news?

 The current response to fake news primarily revolves around three prongs — rebuttal, removal of the
fake news item and educating the public.
 Rebuttal: It is a form of fact-checking wherein the fake news is debunked by pointing out errors
like mismatch, malicious editing and misattribution.
 Removal of Fake news: Technical companies like Facebook and YouTube uses algorithms to
proactively remove fake news from their platforms.Also, WhatsApp has put a limit on
forwarding messages, so as to limit the spread to fake news.
 Educating the end-users: to be more discerning consumers of news by informing them of
verification tools so that they can ascertain the accuracy of a news item before sharing it.
  Another method that is propagated by the government, concerns tracking the ‘source’ of fake
news. For this government proposes to de-anonymise all social media accounts. However, this
provision is criticized on account of the invasion of privacy, curbing of free speech, and creation of
surveillance state.

 What are the Initiatives taken in this Regard?

 Information Technology Rules 2021: The IT Rules 2021 proposes that social media platforms are
required to remove content that has been fact-checked by the PIB’s fact check unit and deemed
false. This rule aims to curb the spread of fake news and misinformation on social media platforms.
 IT Act 2008: Section 66 D of the IT Act 2008 regulates offences related to electronic
communication. This includes punishing individuals who send offensive messages through
communication services or social media platforms. This act can be used to penalize those who
spread fake news through electronic communication.
 Disaster Management Act 2005: The Disaster Management Act 2005 and the Epidemic Diseases
Act 1897 (especially during Covid-19) regulate the circulation of fake news or rumours that can
cause panic among citizens.
 Indian Penal Code of 1860: It regulates fake news that causes riots and information that causes
defamation. This act can be used to hold individuals accountable for spreading fake news that incites
violence or defames someone's character.

 What should be the Way Forward?

 Promote Media Literacy: Education and awareness are critical tools in combating fake
news. People need to be taught how to verify sources, fact-check claims, and understand the
difference between reliable and unreliable news sources.
 Strengthen Laws: India has some laws against fake news, but they need to be more robustly
enforced. Laws need to be updated to address the rapidly evolving online media landscape.
 Encourage Responsible Journalism Journalists need to adhere to ethical standards and be
accountable for their reporting. Media organizations can play a role in promoting responsible
journalism and fact-checking.
 Encourage Social Media Companies to Act: Social media platforms need to be more proactive in
identifying and removing fake news. They can use artificial intelligence tools to identify fake news
and work with fact-checking organizations to verify news stories. For example Facebook recently
announced that it has tied up with Boom Live, an Indian fact-checking agency, to fight fake news.
 Encourage Fact-Checking Organizations: Fact-checking organizations can play a critical role in
verifying news stories and educating people about fake news. These organizations need to be
encouraged and supported by the government and media.
 Encourage Responsible Social Media Use: Individuals need to take responsibility for their social
media use. They need to avoid sharing unverified news and be more critical of what they see online.
 Foster a Culture of Critical Thinking: Critical thinking skills need to be fostered in schools and in
society in general. People need to be encouraged to question what they read and hear and to seek out
reliable sources of information.
 Bring out policy: The government should bring out a draft seeking an opinion from stakeholders
regarding issues of controlling fake news. Any future guidelines on ‘fake news’ should target ‘fake
news and not try to regulate media in the name of ‘fake news’
 Authentic news: Official accounts of government organizations should also be present on social
media to spread authentic news. Social media houses should also come forward to bring in measures
to curb the menace of fake news such as

Combating fake news is a growing narrative of the technology platforms like

Facebook, Google, the news media, the government and an informed citizenry.
Fake news affects free speech and informed choices of the subjects of the
country, leading to the hijacking of democracy.
 Cyber Security
 What is Cyber?
 The term, ‘Cyber’ is used in relation to the culture of computers, information technology, and virtual
reality. The connection between internet ecosystems forms cyberspace. The threat to cyberspace leads to an
issue and gives rise to the need for cybersecurity

 Cyber Security
 It is protecting cyber space including critical information infrastructure from attack, damage, misuse and
economic espionage.
 Computer security, cybersecurity or information technology security (IT security) is the protection of
computer systems and networks from information disclosure, theft of or damage to their hardware,
software, or electronic data, as well as from the disruption or misdirection of the services they provide.
 The field is becoming increasingly significant due to the increased reliance on computer systems, the
Internet and wireless network standards such as Bluetooth and Wi-Fi, and due to the growth of “smart”
devices, including smartphones, televisions, and the various devices that constitute the “Internet of things”.

 Cyber Space
 A global domain within the information environment consisting of the interdependent network of
information technology infrastructures, including the Internet, telecommunications networks, computer
systems, and embedded processors and controllers.

 Critical Information Infrastructure

 According to Section 70(1) of the Information Technology Act, CII is defined as a “computer resource,
the incapacitation or destruction of which, shall have debilitating impact on national security, economy,
public health or safety”.

 Cyber Attack
 It is a malicious and deliberate attempt by an individual or organization to breach the information system
of another individual or organization.

 Threats to Cyberspace
 Interconnectedness of Sectors
 Increase in the number of exposure points
 Concentration of assets
 As per the NITI Aayog report, the threats to cyberspace have increased dramatically over the last 10 years.
The cyber attacks lead to the exposure of:
 Sensitive information
 Personal information
 Business information

 The need for Cyber Security

 Cyber Security protects the cyberspace from the following:
 Cyber Attacks  Misuse of Cyberspace
 Damage to Cyberspace  Economic Espionage

 Cyber Security – Who are the Cyber Attackers?

 There are kinds of cyber players who harm cyber security:
 Cyber Criminals  Cyber Espionage
 Cyber Terrorists  Cyber Hacktivist
 Cyber Attacks in India
 The topmost causes of cyber attacks are:
 Phishing and Social Engineering
 Malware
 Spear Phishing
 Denial of Service
 Out of Date Software Ransomware

 Motives behind Cyber Attacks

 To seek commercial gain by hacking banks and financial institutions.
 To attack critical assets of a nation.
 To penetrate into both corporate and military data servers to obtain plans and intelligence.
 To hack sites to virally communicate a message for some specific campaign related to politics and
society.

 Types of Cyber Attacks

 Malware: short for malicious software refers to any kind of software that is designed to cause damage to
a single computer, server, or computer network. Ransomware, Spy ware, Worms, viruses, and Trojans are
all varieties of malware.
 Virus: It is a malware that self-replicates and spreads by inserting copies of itself into other executable
code or documents.
 Hacking Websites: An unauthorized access to any website belonging in a personal or professional space
 Malicious Codes: It is a kind of security threat where any code present in software tends to bring harmful
effects, breach the security of the system, or bring damage to the system.
 Advanced Worm and Trojan: This is again a malware that camouflages as a regular software however
once accessed, brings damage to the hard drive, background systems and corrupts allocation systems
 Identity Theft and Phishing: It is a cyber attack involving fraudulent emails posing as authorized entities
in order to induce people to reveal their information (personal and professional.)
 Cyber Espionage: Usually when a government’s or important organization’s privacy is posed at risk due
to illegal use of computer networks to seek confidential information.
 Cyber Warfare: Deliberately attacking the information systems through the use of computer technology to
disrupt the state’s activities, especially for military purposes.
 Denial of Service attacks: A Denial-of-Service (DoS) attack is an attack meant to shut down a machine or
network, making it inaccessible to its intended users. DoS attacks accomplish this by flooding the target
with traffic, or sending it information that triggers a crash.
 Man-in-the-middle (MitM) attacks: also known as eavesdropping attacks, occur when attackers insert
themselves into a two-party transaction. Once the attackers interrupt the traffic, they can filter and steal
data.
 Social engineering: is an attack that relies on human interaction to trick users into breaking security
procedures in order to gain sensitive information that is typically protected.
 SQL Injection:
 SQL (pronounced “sequel”) stands for Structured Query Language, a programming language used to
communicate with databases.
 Many of the servers that store critical data for websites and services use SQL to manage the data in
their databases.
 A SQL injection attack specifically targets such kind of servers, using malicious code to get the
server to divulge information it normally wouldn’t.
 Cross-Site Scripting (XSS):
 Similar to an SQL injection attack, this attack also involves injecting malicious code into a website,
but in this case the website itself is not being attacked.
 Instead the malicious code the attacker has injected, only runs in the user's browser when they visit
the attacked website, and it goes after the visitor directly, not the website.
 Components of Cyber Security
 Application Security: It encompasses measures or counter-measures that are taken during an
application’s development process to protect it from threats that can come through flaws in the app
design, development, deployment, upgrade or maintenance.
 Information security: It is related to the protection of information from an unauthorized access to avoid
identity theft and to protect privacy.
 Network Security: It includes activities to protect the usability, reliability, integrity and safety of the
network.
 Disaster Recovery Planning: It is a process that includes performing risk assessment, establishing
priorities, developing recovery strategies in case of an attack.
 Need for Cyber Security
 For Individuals: Photos, videos and other personal information shared by an individual on social
networking sites can be inappropriately used by others, leading to serious and even life-threatening
incidents.
 For Business Organizations: Companies have a lot of data and information on their systems. A cyber
attack may lead to loss of competitive information (such as patents or original work), loss of
employees/customers private data resulting into complete loss of public trust on the integrity of the
organization.
 For Government: A local, state or central government maintains huge amount of confidential data
related to country (geographical, military strategic assets etc.) and citizens. Unauthorized access to the
data can lead to serious threats on a country.

 International Mechanisms Related to Cyber Security

 The International Telecommunication Union (ITU): is a specialized agency within the United Nations
which plays a leading role in the standardization and development of telecommunications and cyber
security issues.
 Budapest Convention on Cybercrime: It is an international treaty that seeks to address Internet and
computer crime (cybercrime) by harmonizing national laws, improving investigative techniques, and
increasing cooperation among nations. It came into force on 1 July 2004. India is not a signatory to this
convention.
 Internet Governance Forum (IGF): It brings together all stakeholders i.e. government, private sector
and civil society on the Internet governance debate. It was first convened in October–November 2006.
 Internet Corporation for Assigned Names and Numbers (ICANN): It is a non-profit organization
responsible for coordinating the maintenance and procedures of several databases related to the
namespaces and numerical spaces of the Internet, ensuring the network's stable and secure operation. It
has its headquarters in Los Angeles, U.S.A.
 UNGA Resolutions: The United Nations General Assembly established two processes on the issues of
security in the information and communication technologies (ICT) environment.
 The Open-ended Working Group (OEWG) through resolution by Russia
 The Group of Governmental Experts (GGE) through resolution by USA

 Laws related to Cyber Security in India

 Information Technology Act, 2000
 The act regulates use of computers, computer systems, computer networks and also data and
information in electronic format.
 The act lists down among other things, following as offences:
 Tampering with computer source documents.
 Hacking with computer system
 Act of cyber terrorism i.e. accessing a protected system with the intention of threatening the
unity, integrity, sovereignty or security of country.
 Cheating using computer resource etc.
 Strategies under National Cyber Policy, 2013
 Creating a secure cyber ecosystem.
 Creating mechanisms for security threats and responses to the same through national systems and
processes.
  National Computer Emergency Response Team (CERT-in) functions as the nodal agency for
coordination of all cyber security efforts, emergency responses, and crisis management.
 Securing e-governance by implementing global best practices, and wider use of Public Key
Infrastructure.
 Protection and resilience of critical information infrastructure with the National Critical Information
Infrastructure Protection Centre (NCIIPC) operating as the nodal agency.
 NCIIPC has been created under Information Technology Act, 2000 to secure India’s critical
information infrastructure. It is based in New Delhi.
 Promoting cutting edge research and development of cyber security technology.
 Human Resource Development through education and training programs to build capacity.
 National Cyber Security Strategy 2020: It seeks to improve cyber awareness and cybersecurity
through more stringent audits. Empanelled cyber auditors will look more carefully at the security
features of organisations than are legally necessary now.
 National Critical Information Infrastructure Protection Centre (NCIIPC): The NCIIPC, created
under Information Technology Act, 2000, operates as the nodal agency for protection and resilience of
critical information infrastructure
 Indian Cyber Crime Coordination Centre (I4C): It was setup in 2020 to deal with all types of
cybercrimes in a comprehensive and coordinated manner.
 Cyber Surakshit Bharat Initiative: It was launched in 2018 with an aim to spread awareness about
cybercrime and building capacity for safety measures for Chief Information Security Officers (CISOs)
and frontline IT staff across all government departments.
 National Cyber Crime Reporting Portal: It is a citizen-centric initiative which will enable citizens to
report cybercrimes online and all the complaints will be accessed by the concerned law enforcement
agencies for taking action as per law.
 Computer Emergency Response Team - India (CERT-In): It is an organization of the Ministry of
Electronics and Information Technology which collects, analyses and disseminates information on
cyber incidents, and also issues alert on cybersecurity incidents.
 Cybersecurity Treaties: India has already signed cybersecurity treaties with countries such as the US,
Russia, the UK, South Korea, and the European Union.
 India’s draft Digital Personal Data Protection Bill 2022: It seeks to ensure usage of personal data for
lawful purposes only and proposes a penalty of up to ₹500 crore for data breaches.
 Defence Cyber Agency (DCyA): It is created by Indian armed forces and is capable of offensive and
defensive manoeuvres.

 Recent Steps taken by Government

 Cyber Surakshit Bharat Initiative: It was launched in 2018 with an aim to spread awareness about
cybercrime and building capacity for safety measures for Chief Information Security Officers (CISOs)
and frontline IT staff across all government departments.
 National Cyber security Coordination Centre (NCCC): In 2017, the NCCC was developed. Its
mandate is to scan internet traffic and communication metadata (which are little snippets of information
hidden inside each communication) coming into the country to detect real-time cyber threats.
 Cyber Swachhta Kendra: In 2017, this platform was introduced for internet users to clean their
computers and devices by wiping out viruses and malware.
 Training of 1.14 Lakh persons through 52 institutions under the Information Security Education and
Awareness Project (ISEA): a project to raise awareness and to provide research, education and training
in the field of Information Security.
 International cooperation: Looking forward to becoming a secure cyber ecosystem, India has joined
hands with several developed countries like the United States, Singapore, Japan, etc. These agreements
will help India to challenge even more sophisticated cyber threats.

 Challenges
 Increased use of mobile technology and internet by people.
 Proliferation of Internet of Things (IoT) and lack of proper security infrastructure in some devices.
 Cyberspace has inherent vulnerabilities that cannot be removed.
 Internet technology makes it relatively easy to misdirect attribution to other parties.
  It is generally seen that attack technology outpaces defence technology.
 Lack of awareness on Cyber security.
 Lack of Cyber security specialists.
 Increased use of cyberspace by terrorists.
 India's digital economy has flourished because of citizens' digital integration, but it has also created a
vulnerability to data theft.
 In almost every sector, the rush towards digitisation has led to collaborations with application service
providers outside India, so that customers can access the best apps and services as quickly as possible.
 Having foreign-sourced hardware and software, or having terabytes of data parked on servers outside
India, pose a threat to our national cyberspace.
 AI is capable of producing autonomous lethal weapon systems that can kill and destroy lives and
targets without the involvement of humans.
 National security is also compromised by the vulnerability to illegal activities such as fake digital
currency and intellectual property thefts through use of the latest cyber technologies.
 China’s quantum advances expand the spectre of quantum cyberattacks against India’s digital
infrastructure, which already faces a barrage of attacks from Chinese state-sponsored hackers.
 India’s dependence on foreign, particularly Chinese hardware, is an additional vulnerability.

 Way Forward
 Real-time intelligence is required for preventing and containing cyber attacks.
 Periodical ‘Backup of Data’ is a solution to ransomware.
 Using Artificial Intelligence (AI) for predicting and accurately identifying attacks.
 Using the knowledge gained from actual attacks that have already taken place in building effective and
pragmatic defence.
 Increased awareness about cyber threats for which digital literacy is required first.
 India needs to secure its computing environment and IoT with current tools, patches, updates and best
known methods in a timely manner.
 The need of the hour for Indian government is to develop core skills in cyber security, data integrity and
data security fields while also setting stringent cyber security standards to protect banks and financial
institutions.
 To tackle emerging cross-border cyber threats and move towards a secure global cyberspace, India should
strengthen its diplomatic partnerships with advanced economies and techno-democracies.
 Education is one of the important sectors for dissemination of information on prevention of cyber-
crimes and reiterated that the young population can act as a force multiplier to be aware of their
engagement in cyberspace and create an ecosystem for cyber security and to prevent cyber-crimes.
 Police and public order are included on State Lists, so states must ensure that law enforcement is well-
equipped to deal with cybercrime.
 The centre and states must commit adequate funds to develop much-needed cyber infrastructure.
 International Cooperation
 It is of critical importance to ensure global cooperation through information sharing and
strengthening joint efforts in cybersecurity research and development as most cyberattacks originate
from beyond the borders.
 India can consider joining Budapest Convention along with Multilateral initiatives like QUAD.
 Plugging the Gaps
 It is important for the corporates or the respective government departments to find the gaps in their
organisations and address those gaps and create a layered security system, wherein security threat
intelligence sharing is happening between different layers.

As the dependency of humans on technology is increasing, cyber laws in India as

well as across the globe are in dire need of constant push and modifications.
Moreover, due to the pandemic, everything has been changed to work-from-home
modules. Cybercrimes can be brought under control only if the lawmakers of the
society and network provider work in correspondence with each other.
Developing India as a Hub for World Class Digital Talent
Over the past few decades, India has seen incredible progression in various technology-driven sectors, be
it the digital platforms, automobile, and pharmaceutical industries such as the Unified Payment Interface
(UPI) and Aadhaar. Much of these innovations have been through the disposition of the country's
domestic talent. At the same time, India is also a source of talent for the world. An overwhelming
number of corporations and institutes have engaged many Indian origin people, signifying that Indian
talent is in demand for their technical skills and labour in the global market.

Indian talent is promoting the economic growth of several other countries worldwide. The quality of the
advanced-level education accessible in India and the lack of lucrative job opportunities have a crucial role
in this adversity. From a nationwide perspective, this loss of talent profoundly impacts the country's
economic growth. This, in turn, hurts future job opportunities and demand for better education.

 Talent Acquisition and Retention

The shortage of digital talent in India is also leading to high attrition rates and increased wages. Still,
this crisis should be converted into an opportunity for India to take some steps and become a global
digital talent hub. Over the last few years, the most frequent concern heard from industry leaders has
been about talent acquisition and retention. Not just about a widening gap between the demand for
and supply of digital talent but the higher political and economic cost of lacking a digitally skilled
workforce. Rising attrition at companies and a shortage of talent is a global phenomenon.

A recent report by McKinsey & Co highlights that more than 19 million US workers have quit their
jobs since April 2021. The scenario for digital talent is even more dramatic. There is an estimated gap
of 6 million between the demand and supply of digital talent across eight countries, including the US,
China, India and parts of Europe. The pandemic has accelerated the digital transformation of
enterprises, creating enormous opportunities for all organisations. Given the customer-centricity of
the tech industry in India, the demand environment is highly positive. This sudden acceleration in
demand has led to a war for digital talent.

To address these talent wars, companies are adopting a multipronged approach - step up fresh hiring
so that the supply pool increases, enhance re-skilling programmes through online learning, deploy
adjacent talent skills for on-the-job learning, and, most of all, employees have holistic employment
experience, one that spans career development, education and wellness.

We must rethink to change India's age old talent development approach to retain its lead in the digital
era. The race to become and be seen as a talent hub is heating up worldwide. For instance, the UAE's
recent announcement to roll out green visas, expand eligibility for golden visas and attract top tech
workers for the country to become the preferred investment hub for technology companies. Several
other countries like the United Kingdom, the United States and Australia are realigning efforts to
attract high-skill talent, including accelerating visas for vulnerable sectors and promoting visas for
highly accomplished applicants. Also, skilling is no longer a unidimensional exercise.

Digital talent does not equate to education in the classic STEM disciplines: Science, technology,
engineering and mathematics. Instead, digital talent stems from a digital-first approach, which
comprises hard digital skills such as data analytics and soft digital skills. Despite its promising young
workforce, India still has a significant skills gap in securing a future of technological innovation.
India contributes 31.7% of the total STEM graduates in the world and has the 2nd largest annual
supply of STEM graduates. Still, it appears enough is not being done to skill them in the right areas.
Demand Supply Analysis conducted by NASSCOM in collaboration with drape estimates that India
 has a tech talent demand supply gap of 21.1%, which is the lowest among global tech leaders such as
the USA, China, UK, Japan, Canada, and Australia.

Recent employability surveys on engineers in India have shown that less than 4% have the technical,
cognitive, and language skills necessary for technology start-ups and even a lesser percentage have
the new-age skills such as artificial intelligence, machine learning, data science and mobile
development. India is also witnessing a constant brain drain of talent.

 Bridging the Skill vs. Employability Gap

As India targets and projects itself towards becoming a 'knowledge economy', it focuses on advancing
skills relevant to the emerging economic environment. The Government's mission has dual objectives
of economic growth and inclusive development. As the Indian talent migrates from the rural and
predominantly agricultural sector to other urban sectors, India realises that it needs a well thought-out
and executed strategy to provide a new set of skills through vocational training to absorb this
additional workforce and sustain economic growth effectually. However, it is necessary to also build
a robust infrastructure of institutes and academicians for the same.

The Skill India Mission, launched by PM Narendra Modi with the vision of increasing the
employment rate in the country, aims to train 400 millions of Indian youth in various skills. The
mission aims at vocational training and certification of Indian youth for a better livelihood and respect
in society.

Furthermore, the State Governments and other key stakeholders such as industry associations,
international organisations, and industry players are also contributing through various financial aid,
schemes and programmes to achieve the skill development objectives of the country. It is accepted
that skilling is the shared responsibility of the country's private and public sectors, and each should
leverage their expertise to work together and create a holistic skill environment for the nation's youth.

 Role of Industry in Bridging the Skill Gap

The Indian Tech Industry is one of the largest in the world. The potential of corporates to create a
skilled workforce by collaborating with academic and training institutes is enormous. Strategies for
the Industry and Academic Institutes to collaborate:
 Offering industry-oriented internships for students.
 Incorporate realtime learning under the guidance of expert trainers as a part of the curriculum.
 Upgrading the curriculum with a focus on the latest and emerging technologies.
 Mandate the upskilling of faculty and train them with the support of industry experts.

 Future Roadmap
With leading edge knowledge, competency and facilities, India needs to attract potential and harness
expertise available nationwide, thus fostering research innovation, world-class technology and
product development. India must also coordinate and build linkages with research institutes and labs
in India and abroad.The Government should work in close collaboration with industry to deliver
commercial technology and products and build a vibrant innovation ecosystem by providing a reliable
platform for technology-based firms and entrepreneurs to achieve the following objectives:

I. Knowledge Generation
 Generation of new knowledge through basic and applied research.
 Technology / Product Development and Commercialisation.
 Undertake expert-driven focused research for specific requirements of Industry, other
government verticals and International Collaborative Research Programmes.
  Translational work, by delivering technologies or technology solutions on the ground.
These Technology Innovation Hubs (TIHs) shall also work on lower TRLs.

II. Human Resource and Skill Development

 Development of highly knowledgeable human resources with top-order skills, including
graduate internships, postgraduate fellowships, doctoral fellowships, post-doctoral
fellowships, faculty fellowships, and chair professorships.
 Create an innovation and entrepreneurship-centric start-up ecosystem
 Enhance competencies, capacity building and training to nurture innovation and start-ups
 Support young and aspiring entrepreneurs by enabling the translation of ideas into
prototypes.
 Inspire the best talents to be entrepreneurs by providing fellowship, guidance, and co-
working spaces for developing their ideas into products.
 Initial funding assistance for student start-ups.
 Create linkages with existing Technology Business Incubators (TBI) or create new TBIs
in academic institutes.

III. International Collaboration

 Leverage international alliances which can add value to the chosen domain.
 Connect Indian research with global efforts in emerging domain areas.
 Participate in international projects and advanced facilities.

IV. Bringing back Indian talent

 The Visiting Advanced Joint Research Faculty (VAJRA) scheme of the Department of
Science and Technology, Government of India, has been primarily instituted to enable
non-resident Indians and the overseas scientific community to participate and contribute
to R&D in India through collaborative research.
 Such faculty is allowed to work in S&T priority areas for the nation, and publicly funded
academic institutions and national laboratories are also eligible to host such faculty.
 A collaborative effort from all the actors in this space, including the Government,
institutions and industry, would make such initiatives more efficient and push them to the
scale it needs.

V. Building a National Database of Skills

 A rich and comprehensive skills database can help build India as a talent hub.
 There is a need to review and renew all educational qualifications annually
 The skill base creates an opportunity of using technology to align people to the relevant
jobs or professions.
 The said platform will help employers to identify and hire people with the right skills.

VI. Investment in Research & Development

 In the long run, India will have to develop the capability to mobilise resources. As such, a
symbiotic relationship between R&D and commercialisation has to grow.
 Both public and private investment in science and technology R&D needs to increase.
 Correspondingly, a well-planned roadmap with revenue channels has to be worked out
for the developed technologies, innovations, products or services.
 Focus on Intellectual property management and licensing.
 Regular training and consulting sessions.
 Databank creation across strategic areas of focus.
 VII. Incentives and Recognition
 Making science, technology and innovation a remunerative and lucrative career option.
 Improving career progression through developing progressive HR policies based on
performance assessment.
 Encourage collaboration between and among institutions, industry, universities, start-ups
and other stakeholders.
 Re-skilling, re-training, and leadership training for talent throughout the career.

 Implementation Strategy
For India to emerge as the world's talent hub for digital skills, the following strategies are to be
adopted:
 Identifying areas of national importance
Identify areas of national significance for building world-class talent in India. Based on the
emerging areas, collaborations with top overseas higher education institutions that have
developed expertise in teaching-learning and research could be considered in a customised
format. Emerging technologies will lead to aparadigm shift in technology that can exponentially
spur growth and development in the following domain areas:
 Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning.
 Technologies for Internet of Things and Everything (IoT & IOE), Sensors, Activators and
Control
 Databanks & Data Services, Data Analytics
 Advanced Communication Systems
 Robotics & Autonomous Systems
 Cyber Security and Cyber Security for Physical Infrastructure

 Implementing the National Education Policy on priority

It is essential to have a long-term focus, and we must teach the right attitudes. Continuous
learning, skill credits, worldclass academic institutes, experiential learning, and faculty training
must focus on excellence and outcomes.

 Building alternate talent pools

Engineers have been at the core of our talent strategy, but all tech skills don't require a fouryear
degree. India needs to build digital capabilities in smaller towns, get more women to join the
work stream with hybrid work norms, and revamp vocational education from industrial training
institutes and polytechnics. We can leverage corporate-socialresponsibility funding from the
industry for these programmes.

 Incentivising Skilling
In the early days of the tech sector, tax incentives played a crucial role in building a global
footprint of multinational corporations in India. We must now create schemes that incentivise
skilling for corporates, not just for their own needs but across the ecosystem.

 Exploring innovative learning models

Use apprenticeship programmes at scale, not just for a certificate, but coupled with assessments.
Invest in building world-class free content that anyone can leverage and align with a credible
certification system.
  Women empowerment
Encouraging more women to participate in the work stream with mixed work standards.
Reforming industrial training institutes and polytechnic’s vocational education.

 Democratising training
We must remove all hurdles for people to get skilled. Unnecessary entry qualifications and
eligibility criteria should be dropped. Let's have no barrier to entry but a qualitycontrolled exit
process.

 A Global Market Potential

The greatest opportunity for India is to build digital talent for the future world. We are going to be
among the world's most talented leaders. India's greatest competitive edge will be its workforce.
Businesses will go where the talent is, and their investment decisions will be based on that.

People-led innovation may help India change the rules of the game. We can tackle the numerous
crises if we look at innovation as more than just another technological tool but a problem solver.
Artificial intelligence is one subject that will rule the tech world. India can lead the way in thinking
about how to create and utilize technology responsibly.

 Conclusion
As a result, we can claim India to be a Digital Skills hub for the world and create more opportunities
for our skilled citizens. Creating a healthy digital talent ecosystem would allow us to be more future-
ready and capitalize on the prospects of a digital future.

India has a chance to become the world's digital talent hub in an evolving technology environment.
By 2025, the demand for expertise in advanced technologies like AI, robots, and data science will be
20 times larger than the supply. This creates enormous opportunities, since technology is now
incorporated into every area of our lives. The way countries accept and use technology is becoming
increasingly important to national economies.

In India, digital skills and AI are already assisting in the rapid transformation of core sectors such
as healthcare, citizen services, MSME, agriculture, and manufacturing. These skills are also helping
in the creation of a trustworthy and secure environment to promote innovations. In a digital age, trust
is essential, and organizations will require trustworthy digital and data ecosystems to continue to
expand securely.

India must look at strategies to increase home-grown talent and attract the best global talent to
catalyse the next decade of growth and innovation. This requires constant investments in reskilling
and embracing a culture that promotes skill development. Improving incentives, ease of doing science
and educational systems will be vital in improving the attraction and retention of Indian S&T talent.
These will be the foundation for the success of any programs or policies for retaining and attracting
talent. Creating a robust digital talent ecosystem would further enable us to be future-ready and
leverage the opportunities of a digital future.

We live in a hyper-digital, contactless environment, which will continue for some time. And
technology has been a lifeline, particularly in the field of education. Technology is only a tool; much
relies on how we employ it. The epidemic has taught us that the world will be a combination of
humans and technology, each having a role to perform. The difficulty is comprehending people's
functions, which will require a considerable shift in skills, perspective, and attitudes. We'll have to
adjust to this new digital environment.
The Transforming Face of India's Agriculture Role of
Digital Tools in Farming
 Digital agriculture essentially promotes the use of information and communication technologies (ICT)
and data systems to develop and deliver targeted information and services to make farming more
profitable and sustainable. New and emerging technologies such as Internet of Things (IoT), drones,
remote sensing, block chain, artificial intelligence etc. are poised to transform traditional agriculture
into a data-driven precision farming system. More than 40 critical farming and allied activities have
been identified in which application of digital technologies may significantly enhance efficiencies.

 At the pre-harvest stage, digital applications have been found very effective in crop and input
selection based on soil health records and weather forecasts. During the crop growth stage, pest and
disease monitoring management, irrigation scheduling and timely weather advisories are key areas in
which digital technologies have proven their efficacy. At the post-harvest stage, digital platforms help
farmers by real-time data transmission on domestic and overseas markets. Producers also get region
specific facilitation on processing, value addition and transportation. Digital applications also provide
guidance and facilitation for securing best credit and crop insurance facilities and also help farmers in
availing benefits of various Government schemes.

 Adoption of digital technologies modernise production practices and leads to reduced risk of crop
failure, increased and sustainable yields, and stable annual returns. In addition to farming community,
digitisation of agriculture opens up new opportunities for non-traditional players in the agriculture
value chain, such as software/App developers, data analysts, digital agriculture entrepreneurs, etc.

 The Vision
 In 2015, Government of India launched a very comprehensive Digital India Programme to
transform the country into a digitally empowered society and knowledge economy. Concerted
and targeted efforts under the mission have led to establishment of a safe, secure and stable
digital infrastructure across the nation including difficult rural areas.

 Over 1.72 lakh Gram Panchayats have been made service-ready with broadband infrastructure to
provide digital services to farmers and other rural communities. More than 5.58 lakh villages
have now wireless broadband coverage. Over 50 percent of the 692 million active internet users
in India are from rural pockets, according to a report by the Internet and Mobile Association of
India. The report further points out 'much of the growth continues to be driven by rural India (351
million users) as urban India seems to have hit a plateau (341 million users). The report estimates
there will be 900 million internet users in India by 2025. Another study says India will have 1
billion smartphone users by 2026 with a major push coming from rural areas. India had around
1.2 billion mobile subscribers of which 750 million used smart phones. Backed by a robust digital
infrastructure in rural areas, the Government is implementing a Digital Agriculture Mission
(2021-25) to enhance efficiency, transparency and productivity in agriculture sector.

 Besides promoting digital technologies, the Mission strives to develop a Farmers Database,
Unified Farmers Service Interface and a host of other farmer-friendly online platforms. The
Farmers Database will help Government in better planning and management of schemes and cash
benefit transfers. Government would be able to communicate with the farmers directly and vice-
versa. Central and State Governments and their respective schemes, and financial institutions and
banks will be brought on a single platform. This will help farmers to avail full benefits of all the
schemes in a transparent manner.
  Recently, the Government finalised the core concept of India Digital Ecosystem of Agriculture
(IDEA) framework. The IDEA would serve as a foundation to build innovative agri-focused
solutions leveraging emerging digital technologies. It is a major step towards creating AgriStack
in the country that will provide end-toend services across the agriculture food value chain.
Basically, AgriStack is a collection of technologies and digital databases focusing on farmers and
agriculture sector as a whole. The digital repository will aid precise targeting of subsidies,
services and policies. Under the programme, a unique Farmers ID will be created with linkages to
their land records, area of cultivation, financial status etc. This will bring transparency and
accuracy in cash benefit transfers, and precise estimate of beneficiaries.

 Government is also implementing a National Egovernance Plan in Agriculture in which funds are
released to States/Union Territories for the projects involving use of new digital technologies
such as AI (artificial intelligence), Blockchain, IoT, drones etc. States are also getting funds for
customisation/shifting of web and mobile applications already developed by the states to the new
digital platform.

 Meanwhile, a farmers' portal (farmer.gov.in) is serving farmers as 'one stop shop' for getting all
relevant information on specific subjects around his village/block/district or State. This
information is delivered in the form of text, SMS, e-mail and audio/video in the preferred
language. Another portal (mKisan.gov.in) provides centralised 2-way extension system wherein
farmers get information through SMS in their local language specific to their location. Farmers
can also raise their queries on specific issues. The portal maintains a repository of advisories on
many common issues and had now been integrated with various farmercentric services.

 Kisan Call Centres harness digital technologies to answer queries of farmers on a telephone call.
KCCs are working in 14 locations covering all states and UTs and provide information in 22 local
languages. To improve digital awareness, 'Pradhan Mantri Gramin Digital Saksharta Abhiyan'
(PMG-DISHA) has been launched to make persons in rural areas digitally literate.

 Means and Modes

 Keeping pace with modern digital tools, the Government has launched 'Kisan Suvidha' app which
already has about 100 million registered users. This smart app provides useful information and
integrates all agricultural schemes/services under one umbrella. This is a robust app with security
certificate and under cloud hosting. It provides critical information on various relevant issues
such as weather of the current day and next five days, market prices, input dealers, agro-
advisories and plant protection methods. Currently, the app is providing information in seven
languages, but many more are to be added shortly.

 Various government schemes and services such as crop insurance, e-market, land records etc.
have their own mobile apps to facilitate farmers and other stakeholders. Presence of apps in
individual smart phones help farmers in taking informed decisions quickly and facilitates
interaction with service providers/experts on real-time basis.

 The Indian Council of Agricultural Research (ICAR), an apex public sector R&) institution, has
developed over 300 mobile apps across the entire spectrum of agriculture and allied enterprises.
Many of these apps provide advice and information in regional/local language on region specific
crops. This enables farmers to take care of the entire value chain, right from sowing to harvesting
through agri-business and marketing. Some of these apps offer digital monitoring of fields by
taking regular updates on the health of the farm through pictures.
  In view of the high number of apps, ICAR has developed KISAAN 2.0 (Krishi Intergrated
Solution for Agri Apps Navigation) to facilitate farmers in navigation of desired apps. This app
integrates more than 300 mobile apps developed by ICAR in aggregator mode. KISAAN 2.0 app
provides a single interface in multiple regional languages for farmers to access agricultural
knowledge in various related disciplines including agricultural education and extension.

 In addition, a large number of companies in private sector have floated mobile apps in business
mode. These apps mostly provide information on market intelligence, weather forecasting, pest
and disease management and processing and value addition.

 Artificial Intelligence (AI)

 Use of AI in agriculture and allied activities is revolutionising the processes in the interest of
farmers by providing accurate advisories on related issues and challenges.

 In view of its infinite potential, NITI Aayog has prepared a national strategy (2018) and roadmap
for implementation of AI in various sectors in India. The strategy recognises agriculture as one of
the priority sector area for implementation of AI driven solutions. Government of India has
allocated funds to the tune of ₹1756.3 crores and ₹ 2722.7 crores to the states for introducing new
technologies, including AI, in various agricultural activities.

 AI applications and machine learning are enabling remote sensing technologies to identify and
manage plants, weeds, pests and diseases. An AI based sowing app sends sowing advisories to
participating farmers on the optimal date to sow. Farmers need not install sensors in the field,
they get text messages on smart phones.

 AI solutions are enabling farmers not only reduce wastage, but also improve quality and ensure
faster market access for the produce.

 Internet of Things (IoT)

 IoT driven solutions have huge potential in agriculture sector mainly for improving supply chains
and farm practices.

 IoT is poised to revolutionise the way farmers sow, fertilise and harvest the crop in the next
decade. IoT device and solution providers are focusing on low-cost sustainable solutions to
reduce the cost of farming.

 In the IoT policy of Government of India agriculture sector has been outlined and its potential
uses in smart agriculture have been enumerated.

 Use of Drones
 Unmanned Aerial Vehicles, popularly called drones, have recently registered a strong presence in
agriculture sector due to their many uses in farming activities. Drones/Kisan drones are generally
used for aerial spraying of pesticides and fertilizers, monitoring fields for crop health, detecting
outbreak of crop disease or insects/pests at an early stage, field mapping, and assessment of crop
damage.

 Drones are well equipped with multi-spectral camera, sensors, precise sprayers and other
sophisticated electronic gadgets to gather data accurately which is analysed on real-time basis
 using Artificial Intelligence technology. Many agri-startups have developed drone based planting
systems which allow drones to shoot pods, their seeds and spray vital nutrients into the soil.

 Drones have been found very effective to increase consistency and efficiency in crop
management, besides reducing cost and increasing income of farmers. Increasing use of drones in
agriculture is creating ample employment opportunities in rural areas.

 Government of India has implemented a slew of measures to promote use of drones in

agriculture. The demand for drone pilots and engineers is increasing in rural areas which is an
opportunity for rural youth to take up employment in their home tract. Government has also
released Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) for use of drones in pesticides application and
spraying of nutrients.

 The subsidies/financial assistance to promote use of drones in agriculture include:

 50 % or maximum ₹. 5 lakh subsidy to SC-ST, small and marginal, women and farmers of
northeastern states to buy drones. For other farmers, financial assistance upto 40% or
maximum of ₹ 4 lakh.

 Farmer Producers Organisations (FPOs) are provided grants @ 75% for purchase of drones
for its demonstration on the farmers' fields.

 Financial assistance @40% of the basic cost of drones and its attachments or ₹ 4 lakhs,
whichever is less, is provided for purchase of drone by Custom Hiring Centres (CHCs) under
Co-operative Society of farmers, FPOs and rural entrepreneurs

 Agriculture graduates establishing CHCs are provided financial assistance @50% of the cost
upto a maximum of ₹ 5 lakh.

 Financial assistance @100% of the cost of drone together with the contingent expenditure is
provided for its demonstration on the farmers' fields to identified institutes (ICAR and its
Institutes, KVKs, State Agricultural Universities and Farm Machinery Training and Testing
Institutes).

 Applications and Advances

 National Agriculture Market in e-mode (eNAM)
 In a bid to eliminate middlemen and provide best prices to farmers for their produce,
Government of India in 2016 launched eNAM. It's a pan-India electronic trading portal that
networks existing APMC (Agricultural Produce Marketing Committee) mandis and thus
facilitates the farmers to sell their produce without barriers and at best prices.
 It's a digital platform that enables farmers to sell their produce through online competitive
and transparent price discovery system and online payment facility. Since the launch of
eNAM portal, 1260 mandis from 22 states and three UTs have been integrated on the
platform and 1000 more mandis will be integrated soon. It's a hugely popular platform with
1.76 crore farmers and traders on board
 In addition, around 2200 FPOs (Farmer Producer Organisations) have also been registered for
commercial trading benefitting a huge number of farmers. Currently, over 200 commodities
are being traded across the country.
 Based on digital innovations, a Platform of Platforms (PoP) has been launched to integrate
the various platforms of service providers operational in the agriculture value chain.
  eNAM is now a multilingual (12 languages) trade portal and a robust mobile app, is also
available free of cost for all stakeholders, through which stakeholders can track progress of
respective lots online. To promote eNAM further, the Government provides financial
assistance upto ₹ 75 lakh per mandi for development of related hardware and infrastructure
including various equipments needed for electronic trading.

 Startups
 Agritech startups/ companies are foraying into digital technologies providing services in
blockchains, weather and crop advisories, marketing, finance, input supply, processing and
value chain.
 Most of the agri-tech startups are providing services mainly in marketplace segment with
quality assurance. In most of the cases, they supply fresh and organic fruits/ vegetables to
consumers procured directly from farmers. Some startups supply organic milk and dairy
products on daily basis through specific mobile apps.
 But recently many startups have started providing innovation and sustainable solutions for
smart and more profitable agriculture. Startups are now providing solutions such as biogas
plants, solar powered cold storage, fencing and water pumping, weather forecast, spraying
machines, etc. These startups are acting as a missing link between the farmers, input dealers,
wholesalers, retailers and consumers connecting each other and providing strong market
linkages and quality produce on time.
 To promote agritech startups using digital technologies, Government is implementing a
programme called Innovation and Agri entrepreneurship Development in which selected agri-
tech startups are provided financial and technical support with mentoring/hand-holding
services. Government has recently launched a ₹ 500 crore accelerator programme for taking
forward and popularizing the successful initiatives of agri startups. Digital technologies are
creating immense opportunities for employment and self employment in rural areas,
particularly for youths. From production to inspection, storage, transportation, and finally
marketing and consumption, digital technologies are generating livelihood opportunities for
diverse group of professionals at different tiers. Besides, benefits of digital agriculture
include food security, better quality of soil, air and water; better economic returns; and
ultimately a better quality of life for farmers and other partners.
 Agriculture certainly stands to gain with digital disruption. No wonder, this sector is
attracting large conglomerates, leading IT companies, investors and young innovators and
entrepreneurs. Digitisation of agriculture promises high and inclusive growth in a sustainable
manner. To conclude, digitisation is poised to change the scene of Indian agriculture in future
and guarantee higher income to farmers and reduce distress.

One important aspect of changing India is digital agriculture. This is our

future and the talented youth of India can make a great contribution in this
regard. There have been relentless efforts to empower the farmers of India
with digital technology. There is the increasing use of technology and artificial
intelligence in crop assessment, digitisation of land records, spraying of
insecticides and nutrients through drones.
 Disaster Management In India
 What is a Disaster?
 A disaster is defined as a disruption on a massive scale, either natural or man-made, occurring in short
or long periods. Disasters can lead to human, material, economic or environmental hardships, which
can be beyond the bearable capacity of the affected society.
 A disaster leads to sudden disruption of normal life, causing severe damage to life and property to an
extent that available social and economic protection mechanisms are inadequate to cope.
 It is an undesirable occurrence resulting from forces that are largely outside human control. It strikes
quickly with little or no warning and requires major efforts in providing emergency service.

 Classification of Disasters
 Disasters are of two types as per origin, into natural and man-made disasters. As per
severity, disasters are classified as minor or major (in impact).

 Natural disasters are sudden ecological disruptions or threats that exceed the adjustment capacity
of the affected community and require external assistance. They are:
 Water and Climate Disaster: Flood, hail storms, cloudburst, cyclones, heat waves, cold waves,
droughts, hurricanes.
 Geological Disaster: Landslides, earthquakes, volcanic eruptions, tornadoes
 Biological Disaster: Viral epidemics, pest attacks, cattle epidemic, and locust plagues
 Industrial Disaster: Chemical and industrial accidents, mine shaft fires, oil spills,
 Nuclear Disasters: Nuclear core meltdowns, radiation poisoning

 Man-made disasters can include hazardous material spills, urban and forest fires,
groundwater contamination, transportation accidents like oil spill, structure failures, mining
accidents, explosions and acts of terrorism.

 Causes for Occurrence of Disaster

 Environmental degradation: Removal of trees and forest cover from a watershed area have
caused, soil erosion, expansion of flood plain area in upper and middle course of rivers and
groundwater depletion.
 Developmental process: Exploitation of land use, development of infrastructure, rapid urbanization
and technological development has caused increasing pressure over the natural resources.
 Political issues: War, nuclear power aspirations, fight between countries to become super power and
conquering land, sea and skies. These have resulted into wide range of disaster events such as
Hiroshima nuclear explosion, Syrian civil war, growing militarisation of oceans and outer space.
 Industrialization: This has resulted into warming of earth and frequency of extreme weather events
has also increased.

 Impacts of Disaster
 Disaster impacts individuals physically (through loss of life, injury, health, disability) as well
as psychologically.
 Disaster results in huge economic loss due to destruction of property, settlement, infrastructure etc.
 Disaster can alter the natural environment, loss of habitat to many plants and animals and cause
ecological stress that can result in biodiversity loss.
 After natural disasters, food and other natural resources like water often becomes scarce resulting
into food and water scarcity.
 The disaster results in displacement of people, and displaced population often face several
challenges in new settlements, in this process poorer becomes more poor.
 Disaster increases the level of vulnerability and hence multiplies the effects of disaster.
 What is Disaster Management?
 The Disaster Management Act of 2005 defines Disaster Management as an integrated process of
planning, organizing, coordinating and implementing measures which are necessary for-
 Prevention of threat of any disaster
 Reduction of risk of any disaster or its consequences
 Readiness to deal with any disaster
 Promptness in dealing with a disaster
 Assessing the severity of the effects of any disaster
 Rescue and relief
 Rehabilitation and Reconstruction

 Agencies involved in Disaster Management

 National Disaster Management Authority (NDMA):- The National Disaster Management Authority
is an apex body for disaster management, headed by the PM of India. It is responsible for the
supervision, direction, and control of the National Disaster Response Force (NDRF).
 National Executive Committee (NEC):- The NEC is composed of high profile ministerial members
from the government of India that include the Union Home Secretary as Chairperson, and the
Secretaries to the Government of India (GoI)like Ministries/Departments of Agriculture, Atomic
Energy, Defence, Drinking Water Supply, Environment and Forests, etc. The NEC prepares the
National Plan for Disaster Management as per the National Policy on Disaster Management.
 State Disaster Management Authority (SDMA):- The Chief Minister of the respective state is the
head of the SDMA. The State Government has a State Executive Committee (SEC) which assists the
State Disaster Management Authority (SDMA) on Disaster Management.
 District Disaster Management Authority (DDMA):- The DDMA is headed by the District
Collector, Deputy Commissioner or District Magistrate depending on the situation, with the elected
representatives of the local authority as the Co-Chairperson. The DDMA ensures that the guidelines
framed by the NDMA and the SDMA are followed by all the departments of the State Government at
the District level and the local authorities in the District.
 Local Authorities:- Local authorities would include Panchayati Raj Institutions (PRI), Municipalities,
District and Cantonment 11 Institutional and Legal Arrangements Boards, and Town Planning
Authorities which control and manage civic services.

 Vulnerability Profile of India

 India is vulnerable, in varying degrees, to a large number of disasters. Around 59% of the landmass
is prone to earthquakes of moderate to very high intensity.
 About 12% (over 40 million hectares) of its land is prone to floods and river erosion.
 Close to 5,700 kms, out of the 7,516 kms long coastline is prone to cyclones and tsunamis.
 68% of its cultivable area is vulnerable to droughts; and, the hilly areas are at risk from landslides
and avalanches.
 Moreover, India is also vulnerable to chemical, biological, radiological and nuclear (CBRN)
emergencies and other man-made disasters.
 Disaster risks in India are further compounded by increasing vulnerabilities related to changing
demographics and socio-economic conditions, unplanned urbanization, development within high-
risk zones, environmental degradation, climate change, geological hazards, epidemics and
pandemics.
 Clearly, all these contribute to a situation where disasters seriously threaten India’s economy, its
population and sustainable development.

 Worst Disasters in India

 Kashmir Floods (2014) affected Srinagar, Bandipur, Rajouri etc. areas of J&K have resulted into
death of more than 500 people.
  Uttarakhand Flash Floods (2013) affected Govindghat, Kedar Dome, Rudraprayag district of
Uttarakhand and resulted into death of more than 5,000 people.
 The Indian Ocean Tsunami (2004) affected parts of southern India and Andaman Nicobar Islands,
Sri Lanka, Indonesia etc., and resulted in the death of more than 2 lakh people.
 Gujarat Earthquake (2001) affected Bhuj, Ahmedabad, Gandhinagar, Kutch, Surat,
Surendranagar, Rajkot district, Jamnagar and Jodia districts of Gujarat and resulted in death of more
than 20,000 people.
 The Great Famine (1876-1878) affected Madras, Mysore, Hyderabad, and Bombay and resulted
into death of around 3 crore people. Even today, it is considered as one of the worst natural
calamities in India of all time.
 Bhopal Gas tragedy (December, 1984) is one of the worst chemical disasters globally that
resulted in over 10,000 losing their lives (the actual number remains disputed) and over 5.5 lakh
persons affected and suffering from agonizing injuries.

 Stages in Disaster Management

 Disaster Management efforts are geared towards disaster risk management.
 Disaster Risk Management implies the systematic process of using administrative decisions,
organisation, operational skills, and capacities to implement policies, strategies and coping
capacities of the society and communities to lessen the impact of natural hazards and related
environmental and technological disasters.
 These comprise all forms all activities including structural and non- structural measures to avoid
(prevention) or to limit (mitigation and preparedness) adverse effects of hazards.
 There are three key stages of activities in disaster management:
 Before a disaster: to reduce the potential for human, material, or environmental losses caused by
hazards and to ensure that these losses are minimised when disaster strikes;
 During a disaster: to ensure that the needs and provisions of victims are met to alleviate and
minimise suffering; and
 After a disaster: to achieve rapid and durable recovery which does not reproduce the original
vulnerable conditions.

 Disaster Risk Reduction (DRR)

 Disaster risk reduction is the concept and practice of reducing disaster risks through systematic
efforts to analyse and reduce the causal factors of disasters.

 Pre-Disaster risk reduction includes-

 Mitigation: To eliminate or reduce the impacts and risks of hazards through proactive
measures taken before an emergency or disaster occurs.
 Preparedness: To take steps to prepare and reduce the effects of disasters.

 Post-Disaster risk reduction includes-

 Rescue: Providing warning, evacuation, search, rescue, providing immediate assistance.
 Relife: To respond to communities who become victims of disaster, providing relief measures
such as food packets, water, medicines, temporary accommodation, relief camps etc.
 Recovery: This stage emphasises upon recovery of victims of disaster, recovery of damaged
infrastructure and repair of the damages caused.

 Challenges in Disaster Risk Reduction

 There are insufficient levels of implementation for each monitored activity. For example, Disaster
risk management plans or a risk sensitive building codes exist but they are not enforced because of a
lack of government capacity or public awareness.
 There is lack of local capacities to implement disaster risk management. Weak capacity at the local
levels undermines the implementation Disaster preparedness plans.
  Absence of integration of climate change into Disaster risk management plans.
 There is divergence of obtaining political and economic commitments due to other competing
needs and priorities such as poverty reduction, social welfare, education etc. require greater attention
and funding.
 Due to poor coordination between stakeholders, there is inadequate access with respect to risk
assessment, monitoring, early warning, disaster response and other Disaster related activities.
 Insufficient investment in building disaster resilient strategies, also private sector are least
contributors in the share of investment.

 Way Forward
 Policy guidelines at the macro level are needed to inform and guide the preparation and
implementation of disaster management and development plans across sectors.
 Operational guidelines should be formed for integrating disaster management practices into
development.
 Efficient early warning systems coupled with effective response plans at district, state and national
levels is the need of the hour.
 Involve Community, NGOs, CSOs and the media at all stages of disaster management.
 Climate risk management should be addressed through adaptation and mitigation.
 A dynamic policy is required to develop disaster-resilient infrastructure through proper
investment in research. ISRO, NRSA, IMD and other institutions have to collectively provide
technological solutions to enhance capabilities to tackle disasters.
 India should learn from best global practices.

 Armed Forces Contribution to Disaster Relief And Humanitarian Assistance

 Another area where the army periodically occupies centre stage is humanitarian assistance and disaster
relief. The Navy has played a stellar role in providing critical help on foreign shores and also
evacuation of Indian citizens in distant lands during times of natural as well as human crisis. The Air
Force is vital during such disasters due to its speed and reach with both rotary and fixed wing air
efforts. However, it is the army with its pan-India presence, especially in the far-flung areas of our
country, which is omnipresent during any disaster relief efforts. Ideally, the various organs of state
and central governments should come into play before the resources of the army are tapped for such
eventualities. But invariably it ends up being not only the most potent responder but also the first
responder due to its ingrained capabilities, equipment and disciplined application. The army’s network
of field hospitals, its transportation assets, engineer plant equipment and reconnaissance and
communication resources with its nationwide reach, has saved countless lives and provided succor to
the people of India, during any natural calamity.

 The nation has always counted on the military in every disaster-affected situation. If it is not an
earthquake in some state, it is floods somewhere or a cyclone in a coastal area. India has seen
earthquakes, COVID 19 pandemic, cyclones, landslides and heavy floods almost every year. Despite
the raising of disaster management organisations and forces, the armed forces are acknowledged as the
most dependable rescue and relief organisation in such circumstances. They are effectively the
nation’s chief rescue and relief forces.

We learn from every natural disaster. Whether it’s a fire or a flood, we

learn something from it so we can respond to the next one better.
DRONES IN INDIAN ARMED FORCES
Drones are more formally known as unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV) commonly known as a drone, is an
aircraft without a human pilot on board. UAVs are a component of an unmanned aircraft system (UAS),
which include additionally a ground-based controller and a system of communications with the (UAV).

PURPOSE OF DRONES
Surveillance, reconnaissance for intelligence gathering and even carrying out combat missions behind
enemy lines, without risking pilots or soldiers on the ground in tough mountainous terrains, would be the
key objectives of these unmanned aerial vehicles.

The synergy derived from the combination of technology with operational art is taking warfare to new
realms which were never anticipated. While there are many challenges, but there are also unbounded
opportunities. Some are evolutionary-and some are truly revolutionary. For example in the aerospace
realm even as fifth-generation aircraft like the F/A-22, the F-35, and the Sukhoi PAK-FA, become
operational, increasingly capable unmanned aerial vehicles (UAVs) are carving out their own niche. This
brief review examines UAV functions, their expanding missions and the capabilities of some of the
current UAVs in use in various militaries.

FUNCTIONS
UAVs perform a wide variety of functions. The majority of these functions pertains to reconnaissance and
is some form of remote sensing.

 Remote Sensing
Remote sensing functions include electromagnetic spectrum sensors, biological sensors, and chemical
sensors. Electromagnetic sensors typically include visual spectrum, infrared, or near infrared cameras as
well as radar systems. Other electromagnetic wave detectors such as microwave and ultraviolet spectrum
sensors may also be used, but are uncommon. Biological sensors are sensors capable of detecting the
airborne presence of various microorganisms and other biological factors. Chemical sensors use laser
spectroscopy to analyze the concentrations of each element in the air.

 Counter – IEDs
Vertical Take Off and Landing (VTOL ), UAVs operated in Afghanistan and Iraq have shown their
usefulness in counter improvised explosive device (C-IEDs) tasks. Vertical takeoff and landing UAVs are
especially versatile in locating IEDs with the air vehicle capable of hovering at a distance to find and
locate IEDs.

 ISTAR and SEAD

UAVs additionally offer an alternative to manned strike aircraft providing both intelligence, surveillance,
target acquisition and reconnaissance (ISTAR) capability as well as suppression of enemy air defences
(SEAD) and deep penetration capability where there is high threat from enemy air defences.

 Land Border Surveillance

In the domain of land border surveillance, there is a wide spectrum of possible technical means that can
be employed to provide effective surveillance including: daylight and infrared cameras, ground radars,
fixed ground sensors, mobile systems, manned aircraft and satellites. However, Unmanned Aerial
Vehicles (UAVs) could also play an important role in further enhancing border surveillance in the future,
though they face a number of technical and other challenges.
 Exploration Missions
UAVs can be used to perform geophysical surveys, in particular geomagnetic surveys where the
processed measurements of the differential Earth’s magnetic field strength are used to calculate the nature
of the underlying magnetic rock structure. A knowledge of the underlying rock structure helps trained
geophysicists to predict the location of mineral deposits. The production side of oil and gas exploration
and production entails the monitoring of the integrity of oil and gas pipelines and related installations.
Monitoring activity could be performed using digital cameras mounted on one, or more, UAVs.

 Transport
UAVs can transport goods using various means based on the configuration of the UAV itself. Most
payloads are stored in an internal payload bay somewhere in the airframe. For many helicopter
configurations, external payloads can be tethered to the bottom of the airframe. With fixed wing UAVs,
payloads can also be attached to the airframe, but aerodynamics of the aircraft with the payload must be
assessed.

 Scientific Research
Unmanned aircraft are also used for scientific research in areas which may be too dangerous for piloted
craft. Examples are of use during Hurricanes or in extreme cold and severe climates.

 Armed Attacks
UAVs armed with missiles are now used as platforms for hitting ground targets in sensitive areas. Armed
UAVs are being used by the US military for hitting militants and terrorist leaders. The advantage of using
an unmanned vehicle, rather than a manned aircraft in such cases is to avoid a diplomatic embarrassment
should the aircraft be shot down and the pilots captured. Use of MQ-1 Predator UAVs armed with
Hellfire missiles in Afghanistan and in tribal areas of Pakistan and in Yemen by the US, are now well
known. Similarly Israel is using UAVs armed with missiles in Palestine. Many cases of targeting civilians
have also been reported by the media proving that targeting without proper verification can lead to
collateral damage.

 Search and Rescue

UAVs play a very significant role in search and rescue and this is likely to increase in the future. This was
demonstrated by the successful use of UAVs during the 2008 hurricanes that struck Louisiana and Texas.
It is believed that Predators, operating between 18,000–29,000 feet above sea level, have performed
search and rescue and damage assessment. The Predator’s synthetic aperture radar (SAR) is a
sophisticated all weather sensor capable of providing photographic- like images through clouds, rain or
fog, and in daytime or nighttime conditions; all in real-time.

UAV DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT

UAV design and production is a global activity, with manufacturers all across the world. The United
States and Israel were initial pioneers in this technology, and US manufacturers had a market share of
over 60 per cent in 2006. The share is due to increase by 5-10 per cent through 2016. Northrop Grumman
and General Atomics are the dominant manufacturers in this industry, on the strength of the Global Hawk
and Predator/Mariner systems. Israeli and European manufacturers form a second tier due to lower
indigenous investments, and the governments of those nations have initiatives to acquire US systems due
to higher levels of capability. European market share represented just 4 per cent of global revenue in
2006.
 Miniature and Micro UAVs
Smaller, tactical UAVs are being developed to support tactical units with very short range “over the hill”
and “around the corner” intelligence, and assist in force protection. While each mission requires a
different profile and capabilities, the man portable Miniature Aerial Vehicles (MAVs) are designed to
provide reasonably good performance at an affordable price. To effectively support the field troops,
smaller UAVs are designed, ranging from man portable (back packable) systems to insect-sized
“mesicopters”, and miniature “smart dust” sensors. They could be launched by hand, deployed by larger
UAVs, or ejected from artillery or mortar projectiles, as expendable sensors. These systems are broadly
designated as MAV.

 Endurance UAVs
As far as unmanned aircraft systems have come in the past decade, the emerging race to satisfy the US
military’s demand for unblinking sensor and communications relay coverage over vast areas will push
designs and technology for unmanned aircraft even further. The latest endurance record for an unmanned
aerial vehicle flight now officially belongs to Zephyr, the solar powered UAV. The Zephyr UAV
achieved three world records in July 2010. The UAV stayed aloft for 14 nights (336 hours 22 minutes) at
an altitude of 70,740ft (21,561m).

EMPLOYMENT IN THE FUTURE

The military role of unmanned aircraft systems is growing at unprecedented rates. In 2005, tactical- and
theater-level unmanned aircraft alone had flown over 1,00,000 flight hours in support of Operation
Enduring Freedom and Operation Iraqi Freedom, in which they were organised under Task Force Liberty
in Afghanistan and Task Force ODIN in Iraq. Rapid advances in technology are enabling more and more
capability to be placed on smaller airframes, which is spurring a large increase in the number of small
unmanned aircraft systems (SUAS) being deployed on the battlefield.
As the capabilities grow for all types of UAS, nations continue to subsidize their research and
development, leading to further advances and enabling them to perform a multitude of missions. UAS no
longer only perform intelligence, surveillance, and reconnaissance missions, although this still remains
their predominant type. Their roles have expanded to areas including electronic attack, drone strikes,
suppression or destruction of enemy air defense, network node or communications relay, combat search
and rescue, and derivations of these themes. These UAS range in cost from a few thousand dollars to tens
of millions of dollars, with aircraft weighing from less than half kilogram to over 18 tons.

INDIA’S UNMANNED MUSCLE

UAVs are low-cost, low-risk, high payoff intelligence, surveillance and reconnaissance (ISR) and target
acquisition (TA) systems. UAVs can be deployed quickly to cover vast areas and, hence, enhance
responsiveness. The employment of UAVs improves situational awareness, helps to increase the
operational tempo and reduces the sensorto- shooter time lag. When employed in conjunction with other
sensors, UAVs assist in confirming or negating the efficacy of information gathered and, thus,
qualitatively improve the intelligence available to commanders. Some of the UAVs in use or being
developed are given below:

 Nishant
It is an Unmanned Aerial Vehicle (UAV) developed by India's ADE (Aeronautical Development
Establishment), a branch of DRDO for the Indian Armed Forces. The Nishant UAV is primarily tasked
with intelligence gathering over enemy territory and also for reconnaissance, training, surveillance, target
designation, artillery fire correction, damage assessment. The UAV requires rail-launching from a hydro-
pneumatic launcher and recovered by a parachute system. The 380kg Nishant is one of the few UAVs in
the world in its weight-class capable of being catapult-launched and recovered by using a parachute. This
eliminates the need for a runway as in case of the conventional takeoff and landing with wheels.

 Heron
India already had about 12 Heron-1 drones and they played a crucial part in search and rescue operations
following the Indian Ocean tsunami in December 2004. IAI Searcher tactical UAVs and their high-end
Heron UAV counterparts were used to locate trapped survivors and missing bodies near the Andaman and
Nicobar islands, relaying clear live feed photographs while in flight, and allowing immediate response as
soon as survivors or victims were identified on screen.

The Heron UAV is reportedly capable of flying for over 24 hours at a time at altitudes around 32,000 feet.
IAI lists flight time as >40 hours, and says that it has demonstrated 52 hours of continuous flight. It has a
maximum range of about 3,000 km and can carry a maximum payload weighing 250 kg/550 lbs. As a
large MALE (Medium Altitude, Long Endurance) UAV, it’s built to carry multiple payloads at a time for
a variety of missions.

The Indian government had approved the purchase of armed UAVs from Israel Aerospace Industries,
following a fast tracking of the program. The $400 million acquisition will see ten IAI Heron TP drones
join other Israeli designs operated by the Indian Air Force, with Harpy loitering munitions. It seems that
Heron is now being operated by all three Services i.e. Army, Navy and the Air Force.

 Harpy
The IAI Harpy is a loitering munition produced by Israel Aerospace Industries. The Harpy is designed to
attack radar systems and is optimised for the SEAD role. It carries a high explosive warhead. It has a
maximum speed of 185 km/hr and 500 km range of flight. The Harpy has been sold to several foreign
nations, including South Korea, Turkey, India, and China.

 Searcher
All three Services operate the Searcher series of UAVs. The Indian Army has reportedly deployed its first
batch of 25 Israeli-made Searcher Mark II unmanned aerial vehicles (UAVs) over its frontiers with
Pakistan and China. India had purchased 100 of the reconnaissance drones at a cost of $750 million. The
Indian Army operates both Searcher Mk I and II. The Searcher Mark II is produced by Israel Aircraft
Industries. It can remain airborne for 16 hours and has a maximum range of 150 kilometers at the
relatively high altitude of 18,500 feet, making it especially suitable for missions over the Himalayas.
Developed by Israel, this UAV can attain a speed of 200km/hour and can fly up to 18 hours at the
relatively high altitude of 18,500 feet, making it especially suitable for missions over the Himalayas.
Indian Army, Navy and Air Force are the users in Indian armed forces. It performs the role of
reconnaissance in the armed forces.

 Rustom
It is an unnamed combat air vehicle, a production of DRDO dedicated to all three services of Indian
armed forces. * It is a Medium Altitude Long Endurance uncrewed air vehicle (UAV) developed by
DRDO for the Armed forces. Rustom has three variants like Rustom-I, Rustom-H, Rustom-II. Payload
capacity of 95 kgs and have a length around 5.12m. This pilotless target aircraft is manufactured by HAL
and Aeronautical Development Establishment (ADE) of DRDO for the primary use of Army, Navy and
qAirforce. The main purpose of its development is target acquisition and reconnaissance. It has a rocket
assisted launch and lands through a parachute. The glamour of this UAV attracted many countries like
Singapore, Israel, etc.
 Imperial Eagle
This is an Indian light-weight mini-unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV) developed by the DRDO alongside
Aeronautical Development Establishment, and the National Aerospace Laboratories and supported by
private vendors. Its primary users will be the National Security Guard and the military services. The
Imperial Eagle weighs 2.5 kg and can carry either a daylight camera or thermal night vision camera.
Designed to be carried in soldier’s backpack, be hand-launched and recoverable through a soft landing.
The primary advantage of the vehicle is that it functions on autopilot. Its orientation can be controlled
using a dedicated real-time operating system (RTOS).

 Netra
The Netra is an Indian, light-weight, autonomous UAV for surveillance and reconnaissance operations.
The DRDO Research and Development Establishment (R&DE), and Idea Forge, a Mumbai-based private
firm developed Netra. Netra can also is launched from a small clearing, and it can fly up to a distance of
2.5 km from its take-off point. It can carry out surveillance in an area of 1.5 km Line of Sight (LOS) at
the height of 300 m, for 30 minutes on a single battery charge. It has a high-resolution camera with zoom
to facilitate more comprehensive surveillance and can also carry a thermal camera for night operations.

 Lakshya-Pilotless Target aircraft

This pilotless target aircraft is manufactured by HAL and Aeronautical Development Establishment
(ADE) of DRDO for the primary use of Army, Navy and Airforce. The main purpose of its development
is target acquisition and reconnaissance. It has a rocket assisted launch and lands through a parachute. The
glamour of this UAV attracted many countries like Singapore, Israel, etc.

FUTURE MILESTONES

 Aura/Ghatak
In a major step forward for what is by far India’s most ambitious aviation exercise, the first budgetary
funds have begun to flow into Project Ghatak. The project began as the DRDO’s Autonomous Unmanned
Research Aircraft – AURA.

Ghatak is likely to be powered by a modified dry thrust version of the Kaveri engine. It will have a flying
wing planform with internal weapons and will sport stealth characteristics developed wholly in-house.
While the Aeronautical Development Agency (ADA ) is overseeing the programme along with the Gas
Turbine Research Establishment (GTRE), the real R&D is being front footed by two academic
institutions: IIT Bombay and IIT Kanpur.

 UAV Panchi
Punchi is a wheeled version of Unmanned Aerial Vehicles Nishant which is undergoing trials. UAV
Panchi has some plus points as compared to UAV Nishant. It doesn’t contain parachutes and landing bags
which reduces its weight and increases its endurance and its small size as compared to Nishant makes it
hard to find in the enemy’s sky.

 Predator Guardian Drones from US

The US has cleared the sale of predator Guardian drones to India. India is looking to buy 22 predator
Guardian drones from the US for $2 billion. India is buying the unarmed Guardian unmanned aircraft
system (UAS) which was developed by the US Office of Air and Marine (OAM ) in partnership with the
US Coast Guard. The Guardian has been modified from a standard Reaper with structural, avionic and
communication enhancements and an added Raytheon SeaVue Marine Search Radar. Its Electro-
optical/Infrared Sensor is optimized for maritime operations.
The General Atomics MQ-9 Reaper (sometimes called Predator B) is an unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV)
capable of remotely controlled or autonomous flight operations, developed by General Atomics
Aeronautical Systems (GA-ASI) primarily for the United States Air Force. The engine of the aircraft is
integrated with Digital Electronic Engine Control (DEC). It enhances the performance of the engine and
increases its capability to prevent wasteful consumption of fuel at lower altitudes. Currently the drone is
being used by Australia, Dominican Republic, France, Italy, the Netherlands, Spain, United Kingdom and
the United States. The aircraft can be flown for over 27 hours in the air at a maximum altitude of 50,000
feet and a maximum speed of 240 KTA S. With a fault tolerant, triple-redundant flight control system, the
drone has more than 90 per cent system operational availability.

WHAT MAKES UAVs NEEDED IN THE INDIAN ARMED FORCES

Military experts say armed drones will scale up the Indian military’s offensive capabilities against China
in the Himalayan borders and terrorist hideouts in PoK.

India has been using drones for intelligence, surveillance and reconnaissance sorties along the Line of
Actual Control (LAC), over the Bay of Bengal, Andaman and Nicobar Islands and Arabian Sea, and areas
around Maldivian waters. Indian military planners claim that after having armed drone capability, the
Indian forces will be able to launch remote-controlled operations and surgical strikes, such as on terrorist
hideouts in Pakistan-occupied Kashmir, and engage targets on the Himalayan borders with China. To
date, the Indian military only operates drones from Israel for surveillance and reconnaissance missions.

Considering China’s developments in this field, the day is not far when the illogically hostile Pakistan
will receive these Chinese built aerial systems. India’s present holdings of UAVs are extremely low and
there is a need for greater quantities to meet battlefield requirements for the future. The versatility of the
UAVs has been demonstrated particularly in strikes against terrorist camps in Iraq and Afghanistan. The
Indian Armed Forces have to judiciously examine their future requirements of UAVs. Various
development issues, including technology milestones, could be examined by the three Services in
conjunction with DRDO.

The US and Israel, the leading edge manufacturers of unmanned systems, should be persuaded to partner
with Indian private sector entities for the development of indigenous unmanned systems. Of course, there
would be resistance from the well entrenched but grossly incompetent public sector and that is where the
government has to show resolve, if India has to move forward in this arena.

Recent forays into the UAV domain by private Indian entities appear to be encouraging; the most
significant being the setting up of Adani Elbit UAV manufacturing facility in Hyderabad. This is a JV
between Adani Defence and Aerospace, part of Adani group and Israel-based Elbit Systems. It is the first
private UAV manufacturing unit in India and the first one outside Israel to manufacture an Israeli UAV,
namely, the Hermes 900 MALE and later, the Hermes 450.

The steadily increasing role that drones are playing in warfare of all hues is self-evident, and there is a
need for importance to be given to arming the IAF with UAVs/UCAVs in larger numbers and with
greater potency.

The need for the Indian Armed Forces to buy or lease UAVs immediately is critical and cannot be
deferred nor held hostage to Atmanirbhar and Make-in-India programmes.

Increasingly capable UAVs, both in the combat and reconnaissance roles, are carving their own niche.
The Indian Armed Forces apparently have a clear road map and all the three Services should have a
substantial numbers of UAVs/ UCAVs/ UAS in their inventories.
E-governance in India: Concept, Initiatives and Issues
 What is e-Governance?
 The “e” in e-Governance stands for ‘electronic’. Thus, e-Governance is basically associated with
carrying out the functions and achieving the results of governance through the utilization of ICT
(Information and Communications Technology).
 e-Governance can be defined as the application of information and communication technology
(ICT) for providing government services, exchange of information, transactions, integration of
previously existing services and information portals.
 While Governance relates to safeguarding the legal rights of all citizens, an equally important
aspect is concerned with ensuring equitable access to public services and the benefits of economic
growth to all. It also ensures government to be transparent in its dealings, accountable for its
activities and faster in its responses as part of good governance.
 However, this would require the government to change itself – its processes, its outlook, laws,
rules and regulations and also its way of interacting with the citizens. It would also require
capacity building within the government and creation of general awareness about e-Governance
among the citizens
 In India, e-Governance originated during the 1970s with a focus on in-house government
applications in the areas of defence, economic monitoring, planning and deployment of ICT to
manage data intensive functions related to elections, census, tax administration etc.
 The main thrust for e-Governance was provided by the launching of NICNET in 1987 – the
national satellite-based computer network.
 This was followed by the launch of the District Information System of the National Informatics
Centre (DISNIC) programme to computerize all district offices in the country for which free
hardware and software was offered to the State Governments. NICNET was extended via the
State capitals to all district headquarters by 1990. In the ensuing years, with ongoing
computerization, tele-connectivity and internet connectivity established a large number of e-
Governance initiatives, both at the Union and State levels.

 Reasons for Opting e-Governance

 Governance per se has become very complex.
 Increase in citizens’ expectations from the government.

 Types of Government Interaction in e-Governance.

 G2G: Government to Government
 Information is exchanged within the government i.e. either between the central government,
state government and local governments or between different branches of the same
government.
 G2C: Government to Citizen
 The citizens have a platform through which they can interact with the government and get
access to the variety of public services offered by the Government.
 G2B: Government to Business
 The businesses are able to interact with the government seamlessly with respect to the
services of the government offered to businesses.
 G2E: Government to Employee
 The interaction between the government and its employees occurs in an efficient and speedy
manner.
 Objectives
 Better service delivery to citizens.
 Ushering in transparency and accountability.
 Empowering people through information.
 Improve efficiency within Government i.e between centre-state and inter-states.
 Improve interface with business and industry.

 Pillars of e-Governance
 People
 Process
 Technology
 Resources

 Initiatives Taken for e-Governance in India

 Government to Government (G2G) Initiatives
 Khajane Project in Karnataka: It is a comprehensive online treasury
computerization project of the Government of Karnataka. The project has resulted in
the computerization of the entire treasury related activities of the State Government
and the system has the ability to track every activity right from the approval of the
State Budget to the point of rendering accounts to the government.
 SmartGov (Andhra Pradesh): SmartGov has been developed to streamline
operations, enhance efficiency through workflow automation and knowledge
management for implementation in the Andhra Pradesh Secretariat.

 Government to Citizen (G2C) Initiatives

 Bhoomi Project (Karnataka) - Online Delivery of Land Records: Bhoomi is a self-
sustainable e-Governance project for the computerized delivery of 20 million rural land
records to 6.7 million farmers of Karnataka.
 e-Seva (Andhra Pradesh): Designed to provide ‘Government to Citizen’ and ‘e-Business to
Citizen’ services. All the services are delivered online to consumers /citizens by connecting
them to the respective government departments and providing online information at the point
of service delivery.
 e-District: It aims at delivery of high volume, citizen-centric services at the District level
such as the issue of birth/death certificate, income and caste certificates, old age and widow
pension, etc.
 e-Courts: It aims at utilizing technology for improved provisioning of judicial services to
citizens.
 e-Mitra Project in Rajasthan: e-Mitra is an integrated project to facilitate the urban
and the rural masses with maximum possible services related to different state
government departments through Lokmitra-Janmitra Centers/Kiosks.
 Admission to Professional Colleges – Common Entrance Test (CET):
With the rapid growth in the demand as well as supply of professional education, the
process of admission to these institutions became a major chall enge in the early
1990s. Recourse was then taken to ICT to make the process of admission transparent
and objective. One of the pioneering efforts was made by Karnataka. The State
Government decided to conduct a common entrance test based on which admission to
different colleges and disciplines was made.
  Government to Business (G2B) Initiatives
 e-Procurement Project in Andhra Pradesh and Gujarat: To reduce the time and
cost of doing business for both vendors and government.
 MCA 21: By the Ministry of Corporate Affairs. The project aims at providing easy
and secure online access to all registry related services provided by the Union
Ministry of Corporate Affairs to corporates and other stakeholders at any time and in
a manner that best suits them.

 Government to Employee (G2E) Initiatives

 e-Office: It aims at significantly improving the operational efficiency of the Government by
transitioning to a "Less Paper Office".
 e-learning methods: Consolidating the employee and sharing of knowledge among
the employees.
 Make interactions fast and efficient: Improve effectiveness and efficiency, eliminating
delays in processing and improving employee satisfaction and retention. Internal efficiency
and effectiveness, adopting commercial best practices in government operation in areas such
as supply chain management, financial management and knowledge management and thus
increases the satisfaction levels of employees in various government agencies.

 Digital India Initiatives

 It is an umbrella program to prepare India for a knowledge-based transformation.
 It weaves together a large number of ideas and thoughts into a single comprehensive vision so
that each of them is seen as part of a larger goal.
 It has been launched by the Ministry of Electronics and Information Technology.
 Vision Areas
 Digital infrastructure as Utility to Every Citizen.
 Governance and services on demand.
 Digital empowerment of citizens.
 Various Initiatives under Digital India Initiatives
 MyGov: It aims to establish a link between Government and Citizens towards meeting the
goal of good governance.
 DigiLocker: It serves as a platform to enable citizens to securely store and share their
documents with service providers who can directly access them electronically.
 e-Hospital-Online Registration Framework (ORF): It is an initiative to facilitate the
patients to take online OPD appointments with government hospitals.
 National Scholarships Portal (NSP): It provides a centralized platform for application and
disbursement of scholarship to students under any scholarship scheme.
 DARPAN: It is an online tool that can be used to monitor and analyze the implementation
of critical and high priority projects of the State..
 PRAGATI (Pro-Active Governance and Timely Implementation): It has been aimed at
starting a culture of Pro-Active Governance and Timely Implementation. It is also a robust
system for bringing e-transparency and e-accountability. I
 Mobile Seva: It provides government services to people through mobile phones and tablets.
 Jeevan Pramaan: It is an Aadhaar based Biometric Authentication System for Pensioners.
 The system provides authenticity to Digital Life Certificate without the necessity of the
pensioner being present in person before his/ her Pension Dispensing Authority (PDA).
 National e-Governance Plan (NeGP): It takes a holistic view of e-Governance initiatives
across the country, integrating them into a collective vision and a shared cause. It comprises
of 31 Mission Mode Projects, approved in 2006, but later it was integrated into Digital India
Program.
 e-Kranti: National e-Governance Plan 2.0
 It is an essential pillar of the Digital India initiative.
 It was approved in 2015 with the vision of “Transforming e-Governance for Transforming
Governance”.
 There are 44 Mission Mode Projects under e-Kranti, which are at various stages of
implementation.
 Thrust Areas of e-Kranti
 e-Education: All schools will be connected to broadband. Free WiFi will be provided in all
secondary and higher secondary schools (coverage would be around 250,000 schools).
 PMGDISHA: Pradhan Mantri Gramin Digital Saksharta Abhiyaan aims to make six crore
people in rural India digitally literate.
 SWAYAM: It includes Massive Online Open Courses (MOOCs) for leveraging e-
Education. It provides for a platform that facilitates hosting of all the courses, taught in
classrooms from Class 9 till post-graduation to be accessed by anyone, anywhere at any
time.
 e-Healthcare: e-Healthcare would cover online medical consultation, online medical records,
online medicine supply, pan-India exchange for patient information, etc.
 Farmers: This would facilitate farmers to get real-time price information, online ordering of
inputs and online cash, loan, and relief payment with mobile banking.
 Security: Mobile-based emergency services and disaster-related services would be provided to
citizens on a real-time basis so as to take precautionary measures well in time and minimize loss
of lives and properties.
 Financial Inclusion: Financial inclusion shall be strengthened using mobile banking, Micro-
ATM program, and CSCs/ Post Offices.
 Justice: Interoperable Criminal Justice System shall be strengthened by leveraging several
related applications, i.e. e-Courts, e-Police, e-Jails, and e-Prosecution.
 Planning: National GIS Mission Mode Project would be implemented to facilitate GIS-based
decision making for project planning, conceptualization, design, and development.
 Cyber Security: National Cyber Security Co-ordination Centre has been set up to ensure a safe
and secure cyber-space within the country.

 Significance of e-Governance
 Post COVID era: The government stressed the need for right and optimum use of e-Governance
initiatives especially in the post COVID era. It has provided flexible timings and helped people
especially employees during COVID pandemic.
 Ease of life: The purpose of e- governance is to bring ease of life for common citizens.
 One nation-one portal: Over grievances and redressal, the linking of the Centralized Public
Grievance Redress and Monitoring System with that of the states is almost done realizing Prime
Minister’s vision for one nation-one portal.
 Simplification: To support and simplify governance for government, citizens, and businesses.
 Transparent and accountable: To make government administration more transparent and
accountable while addressing the society’s needs and expectations through efficient public
services and effective interaction between the people, businesses, and government.
 Corruption: To reduce corruption in the government.
 Speedy delivery: To ensure speedy administration of services and information.
 To reduce difficulties: for business, provide immediate information and enable digital
communication by e-business.
 Challenges to e-Governance
 Different Language: India is a country where people with different cultures and
different religions live. The diversity of people in context of language is a huge challenge
for implementing e-Governance projects as e-Governance applications are written in
English language.
 User friendliness of government websites: Users of e-Governance applications are often
non-expert users who may not be able to use the applications in a right manner.
 Services are not accessible easily: Even if the users of Internet are growing but still
there is a major part of Indian population which is not able to access e-Governance
activities for variety of reasons.
 Population: Population of India is probably the biggest challenge in implementing e-
Governance projects.
 Lack of integrated services: Most of the e-governance services which are offered by the
state or central government are not integrated.
 Cost: In developing countries like India, cost is one of the most important obstacles in
the path of implementation of e-Governance where major part of the population is living
below poverty line which leads to lack of accessibility.
 Privacy and Security: A critical obstacle in implementing e-Governance is the privacy
and security of an individual’s personal data that he/she provides to obtain government
services. It gives rise to the risk of personal data theft and leakage
 Lack of computer literacy: India is still a developing country and a vast majority of the citizens
lack computer literacy which hinders the effectiveness of e-Governance.
 e-Governance results in a loss of human interaction: As the system becomes more
mechanized, lesser interaction takes place among people.
 e-Governance leads to a lax administration: The service provider can easily provide excuses
for not providing the service on technical grounds such as “server is down” or “internet is not
working”, etc
 Infrastructure: Lack of basic infrastructural facilities like electricity, internet, etc
 Digital Divide: Huge gap between users and non-users of e-govt. services. The digital divide
takes form in rich-poor, male-female, urban-rural etc segments of the population.The gap needs to
be narrowed down, then only the benefits of e-governance would be utilized equally.

 Advantages of e-Governance
 Improves delivery and efficiency of government services.
 Improved government interactions with business and industry.
 Citizen empowerment through access to information.
 More efficient government management.
 Less corruption in the administration.
 Increased transparency in administration.
 Greater convenience to citizens and businesses.
 Cost reductions and revenue growth.
 Increased legitimacy of government.
 Flattens organisational structure (less hierarchic).
 Reduces paperwork and red-tapism in the administrative process.
 Results in better planning and coordination between different levels of government.
 Improved relations between the public authorities and civil society.
 Re-structuring of administrative processes.
 Improves accessibility as society becomes more mobile, e-government services can be accessed
by citizens from anywhere in the country, at any time of the day. This increases the accessibility
of public services and improves the overall customer experience.
 What should be the Way Forward?
 Deployment of Intermediaries
 For ensuring strategic coherence among planners and beneficiaries. e-Governance is expected
to maximize citizen satisfaction by not just improving responsiveness of public service
delivery mechanisms but also by augmenting citizens’ participation in governance
mechanisms.For instance, inclusion of locals in policy implementation that will bridge the
communication gap between the government and people.
 Incentivizing implementers for local initiatives.
 Demand Driven Services
 With bottom-up approach of planning through separate urban-rural level socio-economic
databases ,there is a need for a holistic and integrated approach from government ministries
that includes identifying, evaluating, formulating, implementing and redressing data driven
policies to meet the needs of the population at the earliest.
 Focus on Local e-governance
 e-Governance needs to transform all levels of Government but the focus should be on local
governments since local governments are the closest to citizens, and constitute for many,
the main interface with government.
 Better Digital Infrastructure and Connectivity
 Special attention should be given to improve digital infrastructure especially in rural areas
along with better internet connectivity.
 e-Governance through regional languages
 It is appreciable for nations like India where people from several linguistic backgrounds
are the participants.
 Understanding the E-readiness
 Different States in India are at different levels of e-readiness; while implementing e-
Governance reforms in different parts of the country, this aspect has to be kept in mind.
 Today, there are a number of successful projects running in the country but there are very
few which are on a nation-wide basis. There is a need to replicate and upscale successful
models evenly throughout the country.

 Conclusion
 E-governance is the best solution to the problem of slow delivery of services by increasing
the efficacy of government offices. It also provides the time-bound delivery of service,
transparency in the work, cost effective delivery of service for both government and citizens.
e-governance is the key to improvement in the delivery of services with accountability of
officers. Utilisation of available resources is at best the key component of e-governance. The
Government of India has already taken many mission mode projects to convert the
government offices into e-offices for the faster delivery of service. It is a good sign for India
towards the aim of a developed society where service providers are more accountable.
 E-Governance is getting momentum in India, but public awareness and the digital divide are
important issues to be addressed. The success of e-Governance measures largely depends
on the availability of high-speed internet, be it through broadband or mobile connectivity.
 Thus, e-Governance has led to better access to information and quality services for citizens;
Simplicity, efficiency and accountability in the government and expanded reach of
governance.

E-governance is easy governance, effective governance, and also

economic governance. E-governance is the only way to move from good
governance to proactive pro-people good governance
 Empowering Girls For A Better Tomorrow
Introduction
To ensure empowerment in the true sense, we have to build the scope and outreach for girls to make
choices through better skills, capabilities, and self-esteem; help them develop equitable relations within
the family, the community and other stakeholders in the society.

Girls or women mean half the humanity. Needless to say, no society can be considered truly developed if
its women are not active participants and contributors. They are the key catalysts for socio-economic
change. However, it is sad to see that despite advancements in other sectors, women still face numerous
challenges in not being able to access rightful entitlements or gainful employment. A United Nations
Development Programme (UNDP) report found that more women have enrolled in higher education, from
7.5 percent in 2002-03 to 20 percent in 2012-13. According to an ILO paper on employment trends for
women in India, about 85 per cent of rural and 59 per cent of urban women workers are illiterate or
literate only up to primary level. It further states that just a small percentage of women have benefited
from higher education.

A majority of women in India who are regularly employed are with the informal sector, undertaking
domestic, household work, with no fixed, fair wages or facilities, limited social security benefits, no
rights or entitlements and most importantly, no safety. This is perhaps the reason why many girls today
are not being receptive to the idea of “working” or “being employed”.

India also has the lowest workforce participation rate of women among the BRICS nations at 29 percent.
But if we look at agriculture, construction, manufacturing or other home-based occupations such as
cottage industries making papads, baskets, pickles, bidi rolling, handloom and crafts, they provide
employment to a large percentage of women and girls. Their occupational share compared to men has
increased due to the latter migrating to cities and taking up other forms of employment but these are low-
paying and do not ensure growth. The economic boom of liberalisation in India has significantly bypassed
many women as only some have made it to white collar jobs, while many drops out of school at early
ages are unable to learn skills to earn dignified, economically viable livelihoods. Providing quality
education with skill development in a safe environment is still an unreached goal. Limitations on
women’s mobility, lack of property ownership and enforcement of laws related to girls and women,
unrecognised and unpaid work, unequal wages, multiple forms of violence against women, lack of many
safe and secure options to work, all of these are key socio-cultural constraints preventing women from
working.

National Girl Child Day is celebrated in India every year on January 24 with the aim of generating
awareness on the issue of skewed Child Sex Ratio (CSR) and creating a positive environment around
valuing the girl child.

The broad objectives of celebrating National Girl Child Day are to highlight the inequalities faced by girls
in the country, promote awareness about the rights of a girl child, and generate awareness on the
importance of girl education, health and nutrition.

The Government of India is implementing various programmes/ schemes and legislations to address
various forms of gender discrimination. For instance, the Bill on Prohibition of Child Marriage
(Amendment) Act, 2021 was introduced in the Winter Session of Lok Sabha for raising the age of
marriage of women from 18 years to 21 years.
Female gender, poverty, geographic residence, and sociopolitical climates that favor masculinity add to
the plight of the girl child. However, progress is being made to improve the status of girls and women
through the initiatives put forth by many governmental and nongovernmental agencies throughout the
world. Allowing the newly adopted Sustainable Development Goals to guide unified global action for
gender equality and the empowerment of all women and girls offers an opportunity to rise in the society

The root cause of gender discrimination is the patriarchal mind set prevalent in society. Though this
mindset is changing with urbanisation and education, there is still a long way to go for a permanent
change in the scenario. Following are the various schemes and initiatives launched by the government to
empower the girl child:

 Beti Bachao Beti Padhao

 Beti Bachao Beti Padhao Scheme (Celebrate Girl Child, Enable Her Education) was launched on
January 22, 2015, at Panipat, Haryana to address the declining CSR. The CSR, defined as a
number of girls per 1000 boys in the age group of 0-6 years, declined sharply from 976 in 1961 to
918 in Census 2011. This is a tri-ministerial initiative of Ministries of Women and Child
Development, Health & Family Welfare, and Education, with a focus on awareness and advocacy
campaign for changing mindsets, multisectoral action in select districts, enabling girls’ education,
and effective enforcement of the Pre-Conception & Pre-Natal Diagnostic Techniques (PCPNDT)
Act.

 The scheme aims to prevent gender-biased sex selective elimination, ensure survival and
protection of the girl child, build the value of girl child, and ensure education and participation of
the girl child.

 The scheme also envisages sensitising the masses with the help of nation-wide media campaigns,
which among others include social media campaigns, radio spots/ jingles in Hindi and regional
languages, video spots, SMS campaigns, community engagement through mobile exhibition vans,
and field publicity, mailers, handouts, brochures and other information education communication
(IEC) material.

 The scheme has stirred up collective consciousness about changing the mindset of the nation
towards valuing the girl child. It has resulted in increased awareness, sensitisation and
consciousness building around the issue of the declining CSR across the country. This is reflected
in the improvement of the Sex Ratio at Birth (SRB) by 19 points at the National level, from 918
in 2014-15 to 937 in 2020-21(HMIS of MoHFW).

 Sukanya Samriddhi Yojna

 Sukanya Samriddhi Yojana is a small deposit scheme of the Government of India meant
exclusively for a girl child and is launched as a part of the Beti Bachao Beti Padhao Campaign.
The scheme is meant to meet the education and marriage expenses of a girl child.

 Under this scheme, girls have been economically empowered by opening their bank accounts. A
minimum of Rs 1000 and a maximum of Rs 1,50,000 can be deposited in a financial year.

 Some of the benefits associated with opening the account under the yojana include highinterest
rate, savings on income tax, and when an account reaches the maturity age, account balance
including the interest will be paid to the policyholder.
 Scheme for Adolescent Girls
 Adolescence is a crucial phase as it is an intermediary between childhood and woman-hood. It is
the most eventful phase for mental, emotional and psychological well-being. A special
intervention for adolescent girls called SAG was devised in the year 2010 using the ICDS
(Integrated Child Development Services) infra-structure with an aim at breaking the
intergenerational life-cycle of nutritional and gender disadvantage thus providing a supportive
environment for the self-development of adolescent girls.

 Realising the multi-dimensional needs of out of school adolescent girls (11-14 years) and with an
aim to motivate these girls to join the school system, the Government approved the
implementation of restructured Scheme for Adolescent Girls (SAG) to focus on out of school
adolescent girls in the age group of 11-14 years in the year 2017-18.

 The key objective of the scheme is to facilitate, educate and empower Adolescent Girls (AGs) so
as to enable them to become self-reliant and aware citizens.

 The scheme aims to enable the AGs for self-development and empowerment, improve their
nutrition and health status, promote awareness about health, hygiene, nutrition, support out of
school AGs to successfully transition back to formal schooling or bridge learning/skill training,
upgrade their home-based skills and life skills, provide information/ guidance about existing
public services.

 National Education Policy, 2020

 NEP 2020 has introduced the ‘Gender Inclusion Fund’ for targeting the development of girl child
by providing quality and equitable education for all girls. The fund will focus on ensuring 100%
enrolment of girls in schooling and a record participation rate in higher education, decrease in
gender gaps at all levels, practicing gender equity and inclusion in society and improving the
leadership capacity of girls through positive civil dialogues.

 The Fund will also enable States to support and scale effective community-based interventions
that address local context-specific barriers to girls and transgender students.

 NEP 2020 also focuses on the safety and security of school-going girls, both inside and outside of
the campus. The schools have to ensure harassment-free, discrimination-free, and domineer-free
campus before enlisting for yearly accreditation. Additionally, the Policy will identify social
mores and gender stereotypes that prevent girls from accessing education and causing regular
dropouts.

 CBSE Single Girl Child Scholarship

 The scheme envisages providing scholarships to the meritorious single girl student, who is the
only child of the parent and has passed CBSE Class X examination with 60% or more and is
continuing her further education of Class XI and XII.

 The scheme is aimed to recognize the efforts of the parents in promoting education among girls
and provide encouragement to meritorious students. The Scholarship awarded shall be renewed
for a period of one year i.e. successful completion of Class XI. Good conduct and regularity in
attendance are required for continuance of scholarship. A Scholarship once cancelled shall not be
renewed under any circumstances.
 Samagra Shiksha Abhiyan
 Department of School Education and Literacy, Ministry of Education (MoE), is implementing
Samagra Shiksha Abhiyan— an Integrated Scheme for School Education (ISSE) under which
various interventions have been targeted for girls’ education. Bridging gender and social category
gaps at all levels of school education is one of the major objectives of the Samagra Shiksha
Abhiyan. In order to ensure greater participation of girls in education, various interventions under
Samagra Shiksha have been targeted.

 These interventions include the provision of free textbooks and uniforms to girls up to Class VIII,
provision of gender segregated toilets in all schools, teachers’ sensitisation programmes to
promote girls’ participation, pro-vision for self defence training for the girls from Class VI to XII,
stipend to CWSN (Children with Special Needs) girls from Class I to XII, and provision of
incinerator and sanitary pad vending machines.

 In addition to this, to reduce gender gaps at all levels of school education and for providing
quality education to girls from disadvantaged groups, Kasturba Gandhi Balika Vidyalayas
(KGBVs) have been sanctioned in Educationally Backward Blocks (EBBs) under the scheme.

 National Scheme of Incentive to Girls for Secondary Education

 The centrally sponsored National Scheme of Incentive to Girls for Secondary Education
(NSIGSE) was launched in May 2008, to give incentive to students enrolled in Class IX. The
scheme is now boarded on the National Scholarship Portal (NSP).

 The objective of the scheme is to establish an enabling environment to promote enrolment and
reduce drop out of girls belonging to SC/ST communities in secondary schools and ensure their
retention up to the 18 years of age.

 The scheme covers all girls belonging to SC/ST communities who pass Class VIII and all girls
who pass Class VIII examination from KGBVs (irrespective of whether they belong to SC/ST),
and enroll in Class IX in State/ UT Government, Government-aided and Local Body schools.

 School Curriculum
 The National Council of Educational Research and Training (NCERT) has developed syllabus
and textbooks across the subjects to promote gender sensitization in the school curriculum. The
textbooks at all stages of school education prioritise gender sensitization in designing
activities/exercises.

 Gender sensitive messages have been incorporated in the inside of cover pages of the textbooks
and the other supplementary material. The Central Board of Secondary Education (CBSE) has
also prepared guidelines for gender sensitivity in textbooks and textual material, including
question papers.

 Balika Samriddhi Yojana

 The scheme of Balika Samriddhi Yojana was launched with the objective of raising the overall
status, education level, and age at marriage of the girl-child and bringing about a positive change
in family and community attitudes.

 The scheme covers up two girl children born on or after 15th August 1997 in a family living
below poverty line as defined by the Government of India. BMS is given as a one time grant of
Rs.500/- to a mother giving birth to a girl child of BPL families and thereafter, scholarships for
 each successfully completed year of schooling to be deposited in an interest-bearing account to be
opened in the name of the beneficiary girl child.

 On the girl child attaining eighteen years of age and on production of a certificate from the Gram
Panchayat/Municipality that she is unmarried on her 18th birthday, the implementing agency
would authorize the bank or the post office authorities concerned to allow her to withdraw the
matured amount standing in her name in the interest-bearing account.

 Sports
An exclusive component of the Khelo India Scheme focuses on barriers faced by girls and women to take
part in sporting activities and creating mechanisms to overcome these and increase participation. There
was a 161% increase in women participation at the Khelo India Games from 2018 to 2020.

Conclusion
Discrimination based on sex is so deeply rooted in our society that no amount of movements or
resources could change this mentality. The only way anything could possibly change is by constantly
teaching and being a model to the kids for generations that there is no real difference between male and
female and this equality needs to start from home in all aspects. With gender inequality, girls feel
slighted; that makes them question themselves, their ideas and opinions. It becomes ingrained in their
heads that men know what’s best. It comes to a point where they can’t think and decide for themselves,
creating a weak personality. Environment and education help girls gain some much-needed perspective.
Educated women often have better analytical thinking abilities and contribute more to the society.

The fact that we still have to think of girl empowerment as a separate issue highlights the plight of girls
in today’s world. Equal gender and education rights still looks far-fetched. This is because of the
internalised notion that girls have to be disposed of for marriage, making it a bad investment for their
parents. So, the first step is to create awareness about the importance of empowerment of the girl child.

The term ‘Empowerment of women refers to the process of providing equal rights, opportunities,
responsibilities and power positions to women so that they are able to play a role on par with men in society.
In a society which is developed and prosperous, Gender equality and empowerment of women are crucial
factors. A new born female is least welcome in the family though in India the tradition is to respect women
from the early ages. To ensure empowerment in the true sense, we have to build the scope and outreach
for girls to make choices through better skills, capabilities, and self-esteem; help them develop equitable
relations within the family, the community and other stakeholders in the society. There have to be
enabling conditions with progressive policies and ensure these are implemented effectively. It is essential
to adopt a lifecycle approach for girls, as the needs vary in each phase of their lives – right nutrition at
birth and very young ages, quality early childhood education and care, capacity to address discrimination
and help them recognize their rights.

When we educate a girl, we are not just educating her, but also the children that she will be a mother to,
who in turn will educate their families. Our nation can never progress until both the genders are provided
with adequate education and opportunities. We must target the mindset of the society so that they
understand the importance of treating men and women equally. Only then will we see concrete and long-
lasting changes.

A country cannot grow and flourish socially unless it gives equal

opportunities to all its members. Empower the girl child.
Empower the nation.
 Enhancing Cooperation in South Asia
South Asia is the southern region of Asia, which is defined in both geographical and ethno-cultural terms.
The region consists of the countries of Afghanistan, Bangladesh, Bhutan, India, Maldives, Nepal,
Pakistan, and Sri Lanka.

As Afghanistan, Bangladesh, Bhutan, India, Maldives, Nepal, Pakistan, and Sri Lanka recover from the
COVID-19 pandemic, greater regional cooperation can help build back better with climate resilience,
inclusive economic growth, and more opportunities.

South Asia is one of the least integrated regions in the world in terms of trade and people-to-people
contact. Putting aside traditional concerns and taking joint action can develop cross-border solutions to
shared issues, strengthen regional institutions, improve infrastructure and connectivity, and advance trade
policy.

India's vision of regional economic integration in South Asia is based on enhanced intra-regional trade,
investment flows and regional transport and communication links in South Asia. South Asian Association
for Regional Cooperation (SAARC) and India’s Neighbourhood First Policy are the two vehicles in this
process.

Culturally, there are many similarities, but there are a number of cross-sub regional challenges like
political and economic instability (Sri Lankan Crisis and Afghanistan Crisis) , high inflation,
depleting foreign exchange reserves (Pak’s forex reserves have fallen to USD 4.3bn -its lowest since
2014) and domestic unrest that continue to simmer in the South Asian region, which hosts around a
quarter of the world's population.

 What is India’s Neighbourhood First Policy?

 India's Neighbourhood First policy embodies India's vision of building a Vasudhaiva
Kutumbakam (the world as one family).

 Development Assistance
 The Indian government has allocated INR 62,920 million in its budget for 2022-23 for
development assistance to countries in India’s neighbourhood and Africa and Latin
America.

 Vaccine Diplomacy
 As part of India’s neighbourhood First policy, India, through its vaccine
diplomacy (Vaccine Maitri), extended help to many countries of the world especially
neighbouring countries during the Covid-19 pandemic.

 What is the Benefit of Regional Cooperation for South Asia?

 Economic Cooperation
 Regionalism can lead to increased trade and investment among countries in the region,
which can lead to economic growth and development.

 Political Stability
 Regional cooperation can lead to greater stability and security in the region by promoting
dialogue and understanding among countries.
  Cultural Exchange
 Regionalism can foster greater cultural exchange and understanding among the people of
South Asia, which can lead to greater tolerance and harmony in the region.

 Infrastructure Development
 Regional cooperation can lead to greater investment in infrastructure, such as
transportation and energy projects, which can improve connectivity and economic growth.

 Regional Integration
 Regionalism can help to integrate the economies of the countries in the region and make
them more competitive in the global market.

 Shared vision
 Regionalism can help the countries of South Asia to develop a shared vision for their
future and work together to achieve common goals.

 What are the Challenges with Regional Cooperation in South Asia?

 Low Inter-Regional Trade
 South Asia’s intra-regional trade is the lowest globally, constituting only 5% of the
region’s total trade. The current economic integration is just one-third of its potential with
an annual estimated gap of 23 billion dollars.

 External Influence in South Asia

 Smaller neighboring countries are quite predictable in seeking to balance India's influence
through closer relations with external powers, in the past this was the US at the moment it
is China.

 Recent Chinese actions and policies in South Asia as well as its maritime neighbours,
including Indian Ocean island nations, have made it necessary for India to take its
neighbours very seriously.

 Territorial Issues
 Territorial disputes in South Asia remain a challenge to the peace, stability, and prosperity
of the region.

 Of all interstate disputes, those over territory tend to be more likely to lead to armed
conflict.

 Inefficient Management of Global Supply Chain

 South Asia’s international trade integration is lower than the global average, and it is way
less integrated into global value chains compared to East Asia.

 The countries have abysmally low exports due to the low productivity of many countries
in this region.

 Political Tensions
 Historical conflicts, border disputes, and ongoing political tensions between countries in
the region make it difficult to foster cooperation and regional integration.
  Economic Disparities
 Significant economic disparities between countries in the region make it difficult to
establish a level playing field for trade and investment.

 Different levels of Economic Development

 South Asia is home to some of the world's most economically advanced countries as well
as some of the least developed. This makes it difficult to establish a common economic
agenda.

 Security Concerns
 The region is plagued by various security concerns, including terrorism, extremism, and
separatist movements, which can make regional cooperation and integration difficult.

 Small Size of Markets

 Most of the countries in the region are small in terms of population, area, and GDP. This
makes it difficult for businesses to operate and for regional trade to thrive.

 Lack of Trust:
 Lack of trust between countries in the region is a major obstacle to regional cooperation
and integration.

 How India can Lead South Asia Development?

 Boosting Regional Trade
 India can leverage regional trade, connectivity and investment, and strengthen the South
Asian Free Trade Agreement as a game-changer for the region.
 Galvanizing economic energies, which would lower barriers to intra-regional food trade
and encourage regional supply chains.

 Providing Ecological Blueprint

 South Asian countries can benefit from India's eco-blueprint by focusing on the protection
of biodiversity and responding to the climate crisis. The linkage between effective
governance and sustainable development also needs to be acknowledged in South Asian
countries.

 Highlight the Need of Food Security

 Regional food security is another area that India could take a major initiative in with an eye
to the future and can be an integral facilitator and component to this economic bloc for food
security.
 Increasing the capacity of the SAARC Food Bank that currently stands at less than
500,000 MT.

 Promoting Sub-Regional Initiatives

 India can increase the convening capacity of sub-regional initiatives such as the Bay of
Bengal Initiative for Multi-Sectoral Technical and Economic Cooperation (BIMSTEC).
 The border regions can be effective partners in shaping India’s regional engagement by
steering sectoral regional dialogues on cross-border trade, transport and health.
 By extending necessary assistance, India can strengthen its position in the region and
achieve both economic and strategic depth vis-à-vis China.
  Voice of South Asia in International Forums
 To promote the interests of South Asian nations as a group, India can be the voice of South
Asia in international forums. A secure regional environment will also help India reach its
ambitious development goals.

 What can be the Way Forward?

 Strengthening Existing Associations
 Existing associations like South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation (SAARC)
haven’t been able to significantly advance regional cooperation here.
 Delinking domestic sentiments from the economic rationale, engaging in diplomacy to
allay concerns should be the way forward for South Asian countries which do have
qualms about the integration.

 Towards Self-Reliant South Asia

 Self-reliance of South Asia range from offers of freer transit trade through the region, the
development of supply and logistic chains, digital data interchange, single-window and
digitized clearance systems, risk assessment and minimisation measures, wider use of trade
lines of credit (presently abysmally low), denser connectivity, smoother cross-border
inspections.

 People-to-people Connect
 Priority should be given to people-to-people connections and deep cultural affinities for
sustained cordiality and stability. Further, focus should be given to prompt delivery of
multilateral commitments for the overall development of the region.

 Countering Terrorism
 Countries in the region need to improve their cooperation on intelligence sharing and law
enforcement, in order to more effectively target terrorist networks and disrupt their
operations.
 Additionally, addressing poverty and inequality, and promoting economic development
and opportunities for marginalized groups, can help to reduce the appeal of extremist
ideologies.

 Conclusion
 South Asia is one of the emerging economies and most dynamic regions of the world. It is home
to almost 20 percent of the world’s population, including 40 percent of the world’s poor; yet it
accounts for only three percent of the global Gross Domestic Product (GDP) and less than two
percent of world trade. Despite the geographical proximity shared by South Asian countries,
intra-regional trade (two percent approx.) is abysmally low. As these countries shares a common
history, culture and preferences, the region has huge potential for economic cooperation, but
because of political tensions and mistrust, efforts at regional inclusiveness and integration have
been in the lurch. Rise in internal conflicts, political mistrust between neighboring countries, low
connectivity, and substantial trade barriers will continue to weaken South Asia’s regional
integration efforts as well as its identity as a region. Removal and harmonization of all such
problems is of high importance for a remarkable South Asia.

 It has often been pointed out that South Asian countries may not be natural trading partners due to
their limited trade complementarities leading to a pessimistic outlook towards formal trade.
However, there are high volumes of informal trade. Most estimates suggest that the volume of
informal trade in South Asia is much higher than formal trade. Presence of numerous tariff and
 non-tariff barriers, trade restricting regulations and significantly high border trade costs have
resulted in cross-border informal trade. Bilateral mistrust, conflict and lack of political will for
cooperation at the regional level have also been some other major obstacles to regional
integration.
 The power dynamics among countries in South Asia have been complex due to longstanding
political tensions among neighboring countries, and these political problems have made regional
inclusiveness very difficult. Thus, in order to strengthen South Asia’s regional identity and
growth as a region, it is necessary for all countries in the region to have political stability, a
decent economic growth rate and a feeling of mutual benefit.
 One of the key measures to facilitate trade is the call for substantial development of inland
transport infrastructure. Transport infrastructure is important because intra-regional trade
(because of geographical closeness) takes place through the land route via land corridors. Along
with infrastructure, the transit policy for cross border movement of goods and vehicles and
mutual harmonization is important.
 The fast growing Indian economy could play an important role in driving South Asia forward.
The smaller South Asian members can benefit from India’s dynamic scale of growth, however, it
is essential for them to first strengthen their own supply capacities, improve infrastructure and
remove border impediments to take advantage of the growing markets in the region.
 India is a major emerging economy with substantial economic and political clout, not only in
South Asia but also in the world. Pakistan, Sri Lanka and Maldives are developing nations, while
Afghanistan, Bhutan, Bangladesh and Nepal are least developed member states. Additionally
while Sri Lanka and the Maldives are small island states, Afghanistan, Bhutan, and Nepal are
landlocked nations. Given that the members are on different stairs of the development ladder,
their structural composition and trade baskets do not completely overlap. Exploiting this diversity
and seeking complementarities in trading structures would be the key to increase intra-regional
trade. Above all, addressing political challenges and non-tariff barriers are crucial for increasing
regional integration through trade.
 India, being the major power among SAARC countries, must take necessary action to speed-up
reforms and enhance regional harmony.Escalation in efforts and sticking to the agenda of reforms
is much required; the current emphasis on economic development and regional cooperation is
likely to ameliorate trade relations and other associations within the region.
 Over the last 50 years, South Asian countries have undergone substantial transformations and
successfully integrated into the world economy. Regional dynamics have also changed to some
extent, over time, with the presence of various institutional mechanisms. A number of institutions
are working exclusively to make changes in the region, but their speed is appallingly slow.
Regional cooperation initiatives began with the formation of SAARC in 1985, which led to the
establishment of SAARC Preferential Trading Arrangement (SAPTA) in 1995 for enhancing
regional cooperation through trade. In order to deepen regional integration through increased
trade flows, the South Asian Free Trade Agreement (SAFTA) came into force in 2006. SAFTA is
confined only to trade in goods and has constricting conditions, such as lack of substantive tariff
reduction offers, exclusion of many items through negative lists, and long time frames for tariff
liberalization. Thus, in order to have regional inclusiveness to a greater extent, developed
economies of South Asia will have to extend their support to push the pace of efforts towards
making South Asia one unit and conceptualizing “unionism”. Cooperative endeavors are required
from all SAARC members, with an objective of making South Asia an ideal region with a motive
to benefitting all.

South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation (SAARC) and India's Neighbourhood
First Policy are the two vehicles in this process to enhance links in South Asia.
 G4
 Who are the Group of Four (G-4) Countries?
 The G4 is a grouping of Brazil, Germany, India and Japan which are aspiring to become
permanent members of the UNSC.
 The G4 countries are supporting each other’s bids for permanent membership of the UNSC.
 The G4 nations traditionally meet on the sidelines of the annual high-level UN General
Assembly session.
 Unlike the G7, where the common denominator is the economy and long-term political motives,
the G4's primary aim is the permanent member seats on the Security Council.
 Each of these four countries have figured among the elected non- permanent of the council since
the UN's establishment. Their economic and political influence has grown significantly in the last
decades, reaching a scope comparable to the permanent members (P5).

 Why is there a Need for UNSC Reforms?

 UN represents a larger world and the irony is that it has only 5 permanent members in its
important body.
 The current composition of the Security Council represents the post-World War II realities and
thus is not in pace with the changing balance of power in the world.
 At the time of the formation of the UNSC, big powers were given privileges to make them part
of the council. This was necessary for its proper functioning as well as to avoid failure like that
of the organization ‘League of Nations.
 The regions like Far East Asia, South America, and Africa have no representation in the
permanent membership of the council.

 Why is India Demanding the Permanent Membership of the UNSC?

 Overview
 For the first 40 years of the UN Security Council's formation, India never asked for
permanent membership.
 Even in 1993 when India submitted its written proposal to the UN in response to the
General Assembly resolution related to reforms, it did not specifically state that it wants
permanent membership for itself.
 It is only from the last few years that India has started asking for permanent membership
in the council.
 India deserves a permanent place in the council considering the size of its economy,
population and the fact that it is the largest democracy in the world.
 India has become a major player not only in Asia but also in the world.
 The Security Council would be a more representative body if India would be there in it
as a permanent member.
  Need
 By having veto power, one can enjoy enormous powers.
 Since 2009, India was trying to designate Masood Azhar as a global terrorist. One veto
power of China kept delaying it.
 India will be able to work better for its interests.
 There was a time when the USSR actually started boycotting the UNSC and that was the
time when US managed to get the resolution passed for the Korean War. From that time
onwards USSR realized that it doesn’t make sense to boycott the UN. It needs to keep
veto if at all resolution is against them.
 India’s presence as a permanent member will be an acknowledgement of its rise as a
global power, ready to play a key role in the council’s objectives of international peace
and security.
 India will be able to enjoy the 'prestige’ associated with the permanent membership of the
council.

 International View Point: G-4 Membership

 The United Kingdom and France have backed the G4's bid for permanent
seats on the United Nations Security Council.
 Japan has support from the United States and the United Kingdom also.
 China has adopted a stand which opposes India’s bid for the UNSC. It I unlikely to support
India’s bid for permanent membership in the UNSC.
 Pakistan opposes any additional permanent members. Italy/Pakistan-led Uniting for
Consensus (UfC) group has proposed a new category of members, not permanent but with
longer duration and a possibility to get re-elected once.

 Chinese Position
 China is part of the veto-wielding permanent five members which also include the US,
Russia, France and the UK.
 G4 members had earlier said they were willing to forgo veto power for UNSC membership.
 As India pushed hard for the reform of the UNSC in the last few years, staking its claim for
the permanent membership, China struck an ambivalent stand saying that it understands New
Delhi's aspiration to play a bigger role in the UN but has remained non-committal on its
support.

 Way Forward
 Global power hierarchies are changing and the P5 needs to realize that this is high time to
initiate UNSC reforms. The declining powers should either give away their membership or
should expand the size of the UNSC, opening the doors for new emerging powers.
 Other reforms might succeed earlier than the expansion of P5. None of the so-called powerful
nations wants to expand the table and share their pie with another nation.
 India needs to focus on strengthening itself economically, militarily & diplomatically in order to
participate in major conversations and groupings. Steadily, the UNSC will itself deem India fit
to become a part of the UNSC.
 India’s Contribution to the United Nations
 India was among the select members of the United Nations that signed the Declaration by
United Nations at Washington on 1 January 1942 and participated in the historic UN
Conference of International Organization at San Francisco from 25 April to 26 June 1945.

 As a founding member of the United Nations, India strongly supports the purposes and
principles of the UN and has made significant contributions to implementing the goals of
the Charter, and the evolution of the UN’s specialized programmes and agencies.

 India’s deepening engagement with the United Nations is based on its steadfast
commitment to multilateralism and dialogue as the key for achieving shared goals and
addressing common challenges. India strongly believes that the United Nations and the
norms of international relations that it has fostered remain the most efficacious means for
tackling today's global challenges including those related to sustainable development,
poverty eradication, environment, climate change, peace building and peacekeeping,
terrorism, disarmament, human rights, migration and health and pandemics.

 India favours a comprehensive reform of the United Nations and its institutions, to make
them reflective of 21st century realities, thereby facilitating stronger collective action.

 Indian Contribution to United Nations Peacekeeping

 India has a long and distinguished history of service in UN peacekeeping, having
contributed more personnel than any other country. To date, more than 244,500 Indians
have served in 49 of the 71 UN peacekeeping missions established around the world since
1948.
 Medical care is among the many services Indian peacekeepers provide to the communities
in which they serve on behalf of the Organization. They also perform specialized tasks such
as veterinary support and engineering services
 India has a long tradition of sending women on UN peacekeeping missions. In 2007, India
became the first country to deploy an all-women contingent for Formed Police Unit to the
UN peacekeeping mission in Liberia.
 The Indian contingent in South Sudan has gone the extra mile by providing vocational
training and life-saving medical assistance, as well as carrying out significant road repair
work.
 India has also provided 15 Force Commanders to various missions, and was the first
country to contribute to the Trust Fund on sexual exploitation and abuse, which was set up
in 2016.
 India’s longstanding service has not come without cost. 170 Indian peacekeepers have paid
the ultimate price while serving with the United Nations. India has lost more peacekeepers
than any other Member State.

 Reform & Restructuring of the UN

 India strongly advocates the process of reform and restructuring of the UN to make it better
equipped to effectively respond to the evolving needs of its membership, particularly developing
 countries. The expansion of the Security Council and improvement of its working methods must
be integral part of Security Council Reform.

 Terrorism
 The international effort against terrorism is a key priority for India in the UN. Terrorism is a
global phenomenon whose destructive potential and lethal reach is enhanced by linkages to illicit
trafficking in drugs and small arms, and international money laundering operations.
 Domestic measures alone cannot deal with terrorism as long as countries continue to provide safe
havens for terrorists, therefore, to be effective, the fight against terrorism must be long- term,
sustained and global; it must tackle not just the perpetrators of the acts but also those who sponsor
them.

 Human Rights
 On human rights, India advocates a holistic and integrated approach that emphasizes the inter-
dependence, inter-relatedness, indivisibility and university of human rights. India’s position
reinforces the inter-relationship between democracy, development, human rights and international
cooperation for development. India’s participation in debates within the UN on this topic are
guided both by India’s status as the world’s largest democracy, and by its experiences as a large
developing country.

 Representation in UN Bodies
 India enjoys strong goodwill and support at the UN and has been elected to several UN bodies. In
the last few years, India was elected to the Human Right Council (HRC), Economic and Social
Council (ECOSOC), International Narcotics Control Board (INCB), International Court of Justice
(ICJ), UN Board of Auditors, Committee on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights (CESCR),
International Tribunal for the Law of the Sea (ITLOS), International Law Commission (ILC) and
Joint Inspection Unit (JIU), among others.

 Development and Economic issues

 Over the decades, India has urged the UN to play a more active role and be more effective in
pursuing a more equitable international order and an economic environment that is conducive to
rapid economic growth and development in developing countries. In the context of the new
globalized system, India has also actively urged the UN to work to ensure that developing
countries can harness the benefits of these processes in an equitable manner.

 Conclusion
 The United Nations is facing different kinds of challenges of current humanitarian and economic
losses with the changed geopolitical order. The UN needs to be more responsive with timely and
relevant reforms to strengthen its effectiveness and credibility as a multilateral organisation.

 India can conserve its diplomatic capital at the UN and expend it on building domestic capacity
and influencing the way in which the UN functions and this perhaps will allow India to exercise
the kind of influence it desires at the UN, with or without reforms
 G7
 Who are the Group of Four (G-7) Countries?
 G-7 is a bloc of industrialized democracies i.e. France, Germany, Italy, the United Kingdom,
Japan, the United States, and Canada.
 The world's biggest population and second-biggest economy, China has relatively low levels of
wealth per head of population. Thus it is not considered as an advanced economy like other G7
members. Hence, China is not a member of G7.
 It is an intergovernmental organisation that was formed in 1975.
 The bloc meets annually to discuss issues of common interest like global economic governance,
international security and energy policy.
 The G7 was known as the ‘G8’ for several years after the original seven were joined by Russia in
1997.
 The Group returned to being called G7 after Russia was expelled as a member in 2014 following
the latter’s annexation of the Crimea region of Ukraine.

 Membership
 France, West Germany, Italy, Japan, the United Kingdom, and the United States formed
the Group of Six in 1975 to provide a venue for the industrialized democracies to address
pressing economic concerns.
 In 1976, Canada was also invited to join the group and the first meeting with all G-7 nations
was hosted by the United States which was held in Puerto Rico in 1976.
 The European Union has participated fully in the G-7 since 1981 as a "non
enumerated" member.
 It is represented by the presidents of the European Council, which represents the EU member
states leaders, and the European Commission (the E.U.’s executive branch).
 The G-7 was known as the G-8 for several years after the original seven were joined by Russia
in 1997. The inclusion of USSR in G-7 was meant as a signal of cooperation between East and
West after the Soviet Union’s collapse in 1991.
 The group returned to being called G-7 after Russia was expelled as a member in 2014
following the annexation of the Crimea region of Ukraine.
 There are no formal criteria for membership, but participants are all highly developed
democracies.

 How does the Summit Participation take place?

 Summits are held annually and hosted on a rotation basis by the group's members. The host
country not only holds the G7 presidency but also sets the agenda for the year.
 Invitation to Global leaders is sent by the host nation to participate in summit as special
invitees. Countries like China, India, Mexico and Brazil have attended the summits on various
occasions.
 The leaders of important international organizations like European Union, IMF, World Bank
and the United Nations are also invited.
 Challenges and Concerns
 Internally the G7 has a number of disagreements, e.g. clash of the USA with other members
over taxes on imports and action on climate change.
 The organisation has also been criticised for not reflecting the current state of global politics or
economics.
 There are no G7 members from Africa, Latin America or the southern hemisphere.
 It is also facing a challenge from fast-growing emerging economies, like India and Brazil are
not members of the G7.

 What is the Difference between G-7 and G-20?

 G-20 was founded in 1999 after the Asian financial crisis in 1997-1998, it initially started off as
a meeting of finance ministers and central bank governors.
 However, as a response to the financial crisis of 2008, the G-20 was upgraded to head of state
level in an inaugural summit in Washington, D.C.
 While the G-7 mainly has to do with politics, the G-20 is a broader group that focuses on the
global economy.
 It’s also known as the “Summit on Financial Markets and the World Economy” and G20
members represent more than 80% of the global GDP.
 Apart from the G-7 countries, the G-20 comprises Argentina, Australia, Brazil, China, India,
Indonesia, Mexico, Russia, Saudi Arabia, South Africa, South Korea, and Turkey.

 India and G-7

 India is a natural ally for the G7.
 The Prime Minister of India called for a “one earth, one health” approach to deal with the global
pandemic of COVID-19 and also highlighted India’s commitment to finding a “collective”
solution to global health situations.
 In order to boost vaccine production in countries like India, he emphasized maintaining open
supply chains for procuring vaccine raw materials. The Prime Minister also sought support from
G7 nations for the TRIPS waiver proposal moved by India and South Africa at the WTO. The
waiver is expected to increase the production of vaccines in India.
 The participation of India in the summits is a reflection of deepening strategic partnership and
recognition of India as a major economic power.
 While India has found the European Union a difficult jurisdiction to navigate diplomatically, a
better relationship between India and EU is emerging as a policy priority under G7.
 India’s ability to safeguard its core sovereign concerns such as trade, Kashmir issue and India’s
relations with Russia and Iran can be discussed with G7 members.
 India raised issues on climate change and at meetings which signaled India’s growing
willingness to lead on issues that are points of contention for countries like China and the USA.
 In 2020, US President Donald Trump talked about the expansion of the G-7 into the group to
include countries like India, South Korea, and Australia.
 Its 45th G-7 Summit in August 2019 was held in France’s Biarritz, which was attended by
Prime Minister Narendra Modi as a special guest.
 Earlier Indian Prime Minister Manmohan Singh has attended G-7 meetings 5 times.
 The economic rise of countries such as India, China, and Brazil over a few decades has reduced
the relevance of G-7 globally and the G-7 group's share in global GDP is steadily decreasing. In
such a situation, the existence of the group is threatened. In this situation, India has become
extremely important for G7 nations.
 Way Forward
 G-7 must focus on the key international issues like terrorism, climate change, trade and internal
conflicts between the countries.
 As a platform it must reflect the solutions for the pressing issues and global concerns like
elimination of poverty and diseases.
 It should support the economies at the global level and help to establish the equal levels for each
country.

 Associated Challenges With G-7 & India

 Clash of Interests: The growing convergence of interests between India and the West does not
mean the two sides will agree on everything. After all, there are many areas of continuing
divergence within the West — from the economic role of the state to the democratic regulation
of social media and the technology giants.
 Internal Tussle Within G-7: An evaluation of the G-7’s effectiveness as a multilateral forum
thus far is needed, given deep member differences on issues including climate change, security
contributions, Iran, etc.
 Emerging New Cold War: Despite its border tensions with China, India must also consider its
objectives in attending a grouping that appears aimed at fuelling a new Cold War between the
U.S. and China.

 Relevancy of the G-7 group to India

 Between India and the European Union, there has been a tense situation on many issues such as
data security, changing the political situation of Jammu and Kashmir. The G-7 group will provide
a separate forum for dialogue between India and the European Union.
 The three countries of this group are permanent members of the UN Security Council, which
provides global political power to this group, which India can get benefited.
 If India becomes a member, then India can help get membership of this organization of its
traditional partner Russia.
 Through this organization, India can promote principles like the democratization of global
institutions to the world.
 Increased trade relations with these countries will provide employment opportunities to the
population of India.
 India now can’t escape the conclusion that China is the greatest obstacle to India’s global
aspirations. Thus, forming a western pivot which includes strong bilateral strategic cooperation
with the US, France, UK, EU as well as the QUAD can help India counter China. India is also
eager to emerge as a critical node in future supply chains oriented to the democratic world,
including in the area of vaccine production.

 Conclusion
 Undoubtedly the call for India in G-7 meetings and the demand for inclusion in it is indicative of
India's growing power. The establishment of G-7 indicates the world's most advanced economy
and today India is one of the fifth largest economies in the world. At the same time, India's
selection as a temporary member of the UN Security Council is also an indicator of India's
growing power. Therefore, G-7 members will now have to pay attention to the expansion of the
group.
 While India continues to strengthen its partnerships in Asia and the global south, a more
productive partnership with the West helps secure a growing array of India’s national interests
and adds a new depth to India’s international relations.

India has become a regular invitee to G7, The Exclusive Club of Rich Nations.
 G-20
 What is G20?
 The Group of Twenty (G20) is an informal group of 19 countries and the European Union, with
representatives of the International Monetary Fund and the World Bank.
 The G20 membership comprises a mix of the world’s largest advanced and emerging
economies, together, the G20 members represent more than 80% of world GDP, 75% of
international trade and 60% of the world population.

 Who are the Members of G20?

 The members of the G20 are Argentina, Australia, Brazil, Canada, China, France, Germany,
India, Indonesia, Italy, Japan, Republic of Korea, Mexico, Russia, Saudi Arabia, South Africa,
Turkey, the United Kingdom, the United States, and the European Union.

 How did G20 come into Existence?

 The G20 was formed in 1999 in the backdrop of the financial crisis of the late 1990s that
hit East Asia and Southeast Asia in particular.
 It aims to secure global financial stability by involving middle-income countries.
 1997-1999 ASIAN Financial Crisis
This was a ministerial-level forum which emerged after G7 invited both developed and
developing economies. The finance ministers and central bank governors began meeting in
1999.
 Amid 2008 Financial Crisis
The world saw the need for a new consensus building at the highest political level. It was
decided that the G20 leaders would begin meeting once annually.
 To help prepare these summits, the G20 finance ministers and central bank governors continue
to meet on their own twice a year. They meet at the same time as the International Monetary
Fund and The World Bank.

 How G20 Works?

The work of G20 is divided into two tracks:
 The Finance Track
This comprises all meetings with G20 finance ministers and central bank governors and their
deputies. Meeting several times throughout the year they focus on monetary and fiscal issues,
financial regulations, etc.
 The Sherpa Track
This focuses on broader issues such as political engagement, anti-corruption, development,
energy, etc. Each G20 country is represented by its Sherpa; who plans, guides, implements,
etc. on behalf of the leader of their respective country.

 What is the Structure and Functioning of G20?

 The G20 Presidency rotates annually according to a system that ensures a regional balance over
time.
 For the selection of presidency, the 19 countries are divided into 5 groups, each having no more
than 4 countries. The presidency rotates between each group. Every year the G20 selects a
country from another group to be President. India is in Group 2 which also has Russia, South
Africa, and Turkey.
  The G20 does not have a permanent secretariat or Headquarters. Instead, the G20 president is
responsible for bringing together the G20 agenda in consultation with other members and in
response to developments in the global economy.
 Every year when a new country takes on the presidency, it works hand in hand with the
previous presidency and the next presidency and this is collectively known as TROIKA. This
ensures continuity and consistency of the group’s agenda.

 Mandate
 The G20 has no permanent secretariat. The agenda and work are coordinated
by representatives of the G20 countries, known as ‘Sherpas’, who work together with the
finance ministers and governors of the central banks.
 The primary mandate of the grouping is for International Economic cooperation with
particular emphasis to prevent future financial crises across the world.
 It plays a significant role in shaping the global economic agenda.
 From 1999-2008 the forum exalted from a grouping of Central bank governors and finance
ministers to Heads of states.

 What about the Cooperation with and within G20?

 In Toronto in 2010, leaders declared it to be the premier forum for global economic co-
operation.
 The work of G20 members is supported by several international organisations that provide
policy advice. These organisations include:
 The Financial Stability Board (FSB). The FSB, which was established by G20 leaders
following the onset of the global financial crisis.
 The International Labour Organization (ILO).
 The International Monetary Fund (IMF).
 The Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD).
 United Nations (UN).
 World Bank.
 The World Trade Organization (WTO).
 The G20 also regularly engages with non-government sectors. Engagement groups from
business (B20), civil society (C20), labour (L20), think tanks (T20) and youth (Y20) are holding
major events during the year, the outcomes of which will contribute to the deliberations of G20
leaders.

 What Type of Issues are Addressed by G20?

 The G20 focuses on a broad agenda of issues of global importance, although, issues pertaining
to the global economy dominate the agenda, additional items have become more important in
recent years, like:
 Financial markets  Climate Change
 Tax and fiscal policy  Global Health
 Trade  Anti-terrorism
 Agriculture  Inclusive entrepreneurship
 Employment  Advancement of women in job
 Energy market
 Fight against corruption  COVID 19
 2030 agenda for Sustainable  Eradication of poverty and
development hunger
 What are the Strengths/Achievements of G20?
 Coordinated action
The G-20 has also played a crucial role in strengthening the international financial regulatory
system, including better coordination across countries.
 Flexible
With only 20 members, the G20 is agile enough to make prompt decisions and to adapt to new
challenges.
 Inclusive
The inclusion every year of invited countries, international organizations and civil society
organization through engagement groups allow for a broader and more comprehensive
perspective when assessing global challenges and building consensus to address them.
 Facilitated an increase in lending
 From multilateral development banks of US$235 billion at a time when private sector
sources of finance were diminished.
 Major achievements of the G20 include quick deployment of emergency funding during the
2008 global financial crisis.
 It also works for reforms in international financial institutions by improving oversight of
national financial institutions. Such as G20 driven reforms to the international tax system,
through the G20/OECD Base Erosion and Profit Shifting (BEPS) project and
implementation of tax transparency standards.
 G20 played a critical role in the ratification of the Trade Facilitation Agreement, with the
WTO estimating it could contribute up to somewhere between 5.4 and 8.7% to global GDP
by 2030 if the agreement were fully implemented.
 Better Communication
G20 bring World’s top developed and developing countries together to bring consensus and
reasoning into decision making through discussion.
 In the 2021 (November) G20 summit, the leaders made a commitment to reach carbon
neutrality by or around mid-century.
 They have adopted the Rome Declaration.
 Earlier, the G20 Climate Risk Atlas was released which provides climate scenarios,
information, data and future changes in climate across the G20 countries.

 What are the Challenges Faced by G20?

 No Enforcement mechanism
The G20’s toolkit ranges from simple exchanges of information and best practices to agreeing
common, measurable targets, to coordinated action. None of this is achieved without consensus,
nor is it enforceable, except for the incentive of peer review and public accountability.
 Not legally binding
The decisions are based on discussions and consensus which culminates in the form of
declarations. These declarations are not legally binding. It’s just an advisory or consultative
group of 20 members.
 Polarisation of Interests:
 The U.S. has already demanded to not invite Russian President, or U.S. and European
countries would boycott his address.
 China’s strategic rise, NATO’s expansion and Russia’s territorial aggression in Georgia
and Crimea and now Russia Ukraine Conflict in 2022 changed global priorities.
 Globalisation is no longer a cool word, and multilateral organisations have a credibility
crisis as countries around the world pick being ‘G-zero’ over the G-7, G-20, BRICS, P-5
(UNSC Permanent Members) and others.
 India and G-20
 India’s participation in the G20 process stems from the realization that as a major developing
economy, it has a vital stake in the stability of the international economic and financial system.
 India has been actively involved in the G20 preparatory process both at the Sherpas Track and the
Financial Track since its inception. The Indian PM has participated in all G20 summits till date.
 India’s agenda at the G20 Summits is driven by the need to bring in greater inclusivity in the
financial system, to avoiding protectionist tendencies and above all for ensuring that growth
prospects of developing countries do not suffer.
 India has strived to ensure that the focus of the global community remains on the need to ensure
adequate flow of finances to emerging economies to meet their developmental needs.
 India has worked to maintain the dynamism and credibility of G20 deliberations for establishing
a framework for strong, sustainable and balanced growth, strengthening international financial
regulatory systems, to refocus the energies of the group towards growth, jobs, fiscal
consolidation, rebalancing demand from the public sector to the private, and to risks arising from
internal imbalances within the Eurozone.
 India remains committed to the G20 process for achieving a stable, inclusive and representative
global economic and financial system.

 What are India's Priorities in G20 Summits?

 Checking tax evasion to fight corruption
 Choking terror funds
 Cutting the cost of remittances
 Market access for key drugs
 Reforms in the World Trade Organisation to improve its functioning
 “Full implementation” of the Paris Agreement
 Inclusive, Equitable and Sustainable Growth
 LiFE (Lifestyle For Environment)
 Women’s Empowerment
 Digital public infrastructure and tech-enabled development in areas ranging from health,
agriculture and education to commerce
 Skill-mapping, culture and tourism, climate financing, circular economy, global food security,
energy security, green hydrogen, disaster risk reduction and resilience
 Developmental cooperation, fight against economic crime, and multilateral reforms.

 Way Forward
 The G20 cannot be a panacea for the world’s problems. But over the past 10 years, the G20 has
been an important forum for international cooperation.
 Effective global governance, like the G20, is essential as rising powers seek opportunities to
influence and contribute to the global order.
 The G20 must strengthen the partnership with international organisations such as the IMF,
the OECD, the WHO, the World Bank and the WTO, and delegate them the task of monitoring
progress.
 Global Cooperation should be given priority over individual interest for the benefit of all the
member countries.
 Use of Dialogue and Diplomacy should be carried out to resolve issues like Ukraine - Russia
conflict and differences between Russia and the west.
 India should focus upon utilizing the G20 as a platform to raise discussions on issues such as
aggressive trade barriers/ sanctions, inter country conflicts and advocate for global peace and
cooperation.
 India’s G -20 Presidency
 India holds the Presidency of the G20 from December 1, 2022 to November 30, 2023. The 43
Heads of Delegations- the largest ever in G20-will be participating in the final New Delhi
Summit in September 2023.
 The G20 Logo draws inspiration from the vibrant colours of India’s national flag – saffron, white
and green, and blue. It juxtaposes planet Earth with the lotus, India’s national flower that reflects
growth amid challenges. The Earth reflects India’s pro-planet approach to life, one in perfect
harmony with nature. Below the G20 logo is “Bharat”, written in the Devanagari script.
 India's G20 Presidency will work to promote this universal sense of one-ness. Hence our
theme - 'One Earth, One Family, One Future'.

 The theme of India’s G20 Presidency - “Vasudhaiva Kutumbakam” or “One Earth · One Family ·
One Future” - is drawn from the ancient Sanskrit text of the Maha Upanishad. Essentially, the
theme affirms the value of all life – human, animal, plant, and microorganisms – and their
interconnectedness on the planet Earth and in the wider universe.
 The theme also spotlights LiFE (Lifestyle for Environment), with its associated, environmentally
development, leading to globally transformative actions resulting in a cleaner, greener and bluer
future.
 For India, the G20 Presidency also marks the beginning of “Amritkaal”, the 25-year period
beginning from the 75th anniversary of its independence on 15 August 2022, leading up to the
centenary of its independence, towards a futuristic, prosperous, inclusive and developed society,
distinguished by a human-centric approach at its core.
 A new working group on Disaster Risk Reduction will be established under India's Presidency to
encourage collective work by the G20, undertake multi-disciplinary research and exchange best
practices on disaster risk reduction.
 India’s special invitee guest countries are Bangladesh, Egypt, Mauritius, Netherlands, Nigeria,
Oman, Singapore, Spain and UAE.
 G-20’s invited international organisations are UN, IMF, World Bank, WHO, WTO, ILO, FSB,
OECD, AU Chair, NEPAD Chair, ASEAN Chair, ADB, ISA and CDRI.
 G20 meetings will not be limited only to New Delhi or other metropolises. Drawing inspiration
from its G20 Presidency theme of "Vasudhaiva Kutumbakam'-"One Earth One Family One
Future, as well as the PM’s vision of an 'all of government" approach, India will host over 200
meetings in over 50 cities across 32 different workstreams, and would have the opportunity to
offer G20 delegates and guests a glimpse of India's rich cultural heritage and provide them with a
 unique Indian experience. The Presidency is also a chance for the G20 Secretariat to provide the
country's citizens with the unique opportunity be a part of India's G20 story.
 The Indian G20 presidency has also planned a year-long India Experience' for G20 member
countries, special invitees, and others.

 What are India's G20 Priorities?

 Green Development, Climate Finance & LiFE
 The opportunity to lead G20 comes at a time of compounding existential threat, with the
COVID-19 pandemic having exposed the fragilities of our systems under the cascading
impacts of climate change. In this regard, climate change is a key priority for India’s
presidential Presidency, with a particular focus towards not only climate finance and
technology, but also ensuring just energy transitions for developing nations across the world.
 Understanding that the issue of climate change cuts across industry, society, and sectors,
India offers the world LiFE (Lifestyle for Environment) -a behaviour-based movement that
draws from our nation's rich, ancient sustainable traditions to nudge consumers, and in-turn
markets, to adopt environmentally-conscious practices. This ties closely with India’s G20
theme: 'Vasudhaiva Kutumbakam' or 'One Earth. One Family. One Future.

 Accelerated, Inclusive & Resilient Growth

 An accelerated, resilient and inclusive growth is a cornerstone for sustainable development.
During its G20 Presidency, India aims to focus on areas that have the potential to bring
structural transformation. This includes an ambition to accelerate integration of MSMEs in
global trade, bring in the spirit of trade for growth, promote labour rights and secure labour
welfare, address global skills gap, and build inclusive agricultural value chains and food
systems etc.

 Accelerating progress on SDGs

 India's G20 Presidency collides with the crucial midpoint of the 2030 Agenda. As such, India
acknowledges the detrimental impact of COVID-19, which changed the current decade of
action into a decade of recovery. In line with this perspective, India wants to focus on
recommitting G20's efforts to achieving the targets laid out in the 2030 Agenda for
Sustainable Development

 Technological Transformation & Digital Public Infrastructure

 As G20 Presidency, India can foreground its belief in a human-centric approach to
technology, and facilitate greater knowledge-sharing in priority areas like digital public
infrastructure, financial inclusion, and tech-enabled development in sectors ranging from
agriculture to education

 Multilateral Institutions for the 21st century

 India's G20 priority will be to continue pressing for reformed multilateralism that creates
more accountable,inclusive just, equitable and representative multipolar international system
that is fit for addressing the challenges in the 21st century.

 Women-led development
 India hopes to use the G20 forum to highlight inclusive growth and development, with
women empowerment and representation being at the core of India's G20 deliberations. This
includes a focus on bringing women to the fore, and in leading positions, in order to boost
socio-economic development and achievement of SDGs.
 Opportunities and Challenges of India’s G20 Presidency
 The core purpose of the G20 has always been to recognize the importance of collective action and
inclusive collaboration among major developed countries and emerging economies around the
world. And as a leading multilateral platform, it holds a strategic role in securing future global
economic growth and prosperity, as its members represent over 85 percent of global GDP, 75
percent of global trade and two-thirds of the world’s population.
 India assumed the G20 presidency in 2022 and, not surprisingly, the ongoing Ukraine conflict,
the COVID-19 recovery and global economic stability will all continue to be part of the major
discourse for 2023. While at the helm of framing the platform’s priorities, however, India now
has the chance to play an important role in shaping and strengthening global architecture and
governance on all major international economic issues.
 During the pandemic India’s ‘Vaccine Maitri’ has shown her commitment to the most-needy
global citizens in fighting the health crisis.
 The war in Ukraine and its implications — including food and energy security — has figured
particularly highly. However, as expected, no diplomatic headway was made to arrive at a
substantive breakthrough, despite the fact that most countries deplore Russia’s aggression, which
is causing immense human suffering and exasperating existing fragilities in the global economy
— constraining growth, increasing inflation, disrupting supply chains, heightening food and
energy insecurity and elevating financial stability risks.
 Supply of fertilisers and foods, another major policy challenge, is affected due to the Russia-
Ukraine war and the following restrictive trade practices and high energy prices cutting off the
supplies of Russian and Ukrainian nitrogen and potash from the global fertiliser markets. Russia
and Belarus produce about 40 per cent of potash globally, and Russia about 23 per cent of traded
ammonium nitrate globally, but the war has restricted their outflow supplies. India and several
countries suffered from this to the extent of risking food security and starving the planet. India
depends heavily on imports of fertiliser requirement of nitrogen, phosphorus and potash for the
country. However, one solution cannot serve the needs of all countries.
 From a geopolitical perspective, this means India could take the opportunity to leverage its
historical and amenable ties with Russia, and bring a more isolated Moscow to the discussion and
diplomacy roundtable of over 200 G20 meetings to follow. It could use its platform to address the
Ukraine conflict, strategizing for peace and a path toward reconciliation as much as possible.
After all, the G20 communique that “today’s era must not be of war” echoes Prime Minister
Narendra Modi’s message to Russian President Vladimir Putin.
 And while it’s recognized that the G20 isn’t necessarily the forum to resolve security issues, it’s
evolved into a leading platform for economic cooperation. Such matters still have significant
consequences for the global economy. Hence, it’s incumbent upon the G20 to address these issues
as much as possible, particularly when the U.N. and other bilateral interventions have failed to
diffuse the conflict.
 G20 provides a collaborative platform for re-affirming the promises of several multilateral
organisations. It also plays a complementary role in implementing the policies for these bodies,
for instance, working towards reinforcing the measures for effective implementation of the Paris
Agreement in the UN COP27 climate summit held in Egypt in November 2022 to bring the global
temperature down to 1.5 degree Celsius. The Sherpa declared that ‘climate change and vast
targets for net zero by 2050 is a huge opportunity and not a challenge’. India is offering her rich,
ancient and sustainable traditions in favor of environment-friendly practices over market-based
consumerism embodied in the concept of LiFE (lifestyle for Environment). Green growth will be
promoted through climate finance and technology along with just energy transitions for
developing countries. However, it requires a huge capital for the generation of which G20 can
coordinate with IMF and World Bank.
 This is another way in which India’s role can be critical, as it can reflect upon the hits and misses
of the Bali summit in 2022 and learn how to make this multilateral forum more relevant. And
even though the Ukraine conflict, coupled with heightening geopolitical tensions due to the rise
of an assertive China, will test India’s leadership and its ability to revive the G20’s credibility in
an otherwise declining era of multilateralism, India aspires to a presidency that will be “inclusive,
ambitious, decisive and action-oriented.
 India is also at the center of a TROIKA of G20 presidencies — of Indonesia, India and Brazil,
respectively — all of them emerging economies, thus, providing a greater voice for making the
concerns of the “Global South” heard at a very crucial juncture for the international community.
This could be another anchor for India, bridging the gap between the West and the Global South
on issues such as climate change, trade facilitation and health care resilience support.
 Whether at climate talks, negotiating for a fairer deal in terms of technological and financial
support for developing countries; at the World Trade Organization, on issues related to lowering
tariff and non-tariff barriers for vulnerable economies; or at the World Health Organization, for a
patent waiver on COVID-19 vaccines, India has championed the cause of low-income nations in
the past — and it could now do so again. This time, working toward adopting a Sustainable
Development Goals stimulus package to provide these governments with investments and
liquidity, offering debt relief and restructuring.
 Its Task Force complements the global pandemic new financial intermediary fund for pandemic
prevention, preparedness and response (PPR) architecture hosted by the World Bank in
improving the global health governance system, without further duplicating and disintegrating it.
In order to ensure food security, the Bali Summit also supported the Black Sea Grain Initiative of
Turkey and the UN for an unimpeded delivery of grain, foodstuffs and fertilisers from Ukraine
and Russia.
 Continuing to underscore these issues, India has identified six shared priorities in areas including
public digital goods and digital infrastructure; climate action, climate finance and technology
collaborations; the clean, sustainable and inclusive energy transition; accelerated progress on
sustainable development goals; women-led development; and multilateral reforms.
 Prime Minister Modi also suggested that “data for development” will be an integral part of
India’s presidency. The digital transformation shouldn’t be confined to a small part of humanity,
and its greater benefits will be realized only when digital access becomes truly inclusive. India’s
own experience in the past few years has shown that if digital architecture is made widely
accessible, it can bring about socioeconomic transformation.
 Thus, under its presidency, India will have to navigate a delicate balance, overcoming partisan
pressures from both sides to bridge the East-West conflict. And it will have to do so while
carefully wading through issues central to its own strategic self-interests as well as those of the
global community, creating an archetype for substantive talks, implementation and outcome for
the G20 next year, culminating with a leader’s summit to be held in New Delhi in September
2023.
 Championing the virtue of “Vasudhaiva Kutumbakam” — the world is one family — as its G20
theme, India needs to skillfully manage this disorderly family in the year ahead. And through this
leadership role, it must give priority to a developmental agenda, while creating a blueprint for a
faster, more resilient and inclusive global economic recovery.
 The G20 presidency gives India an unprecedented opportunity to test its clout and credibility in
tackling the fragmented global order — and now it needs to embrace it.

THE G20 PRESIDENCY GIVES INDIA AN OPPORTUNITY

TO SHOW THE WORLD IT’S READY TO LEAD.
 G20 Women Engagement Group W20
 What is W20?
 The Women 20 (W20) was officially created in 2015 under Türkiye's Presidency of the G20, with
the objective of focusing on gender equity.
 The primary objective of W20 is women's empowerment, advocating for the rights of women,
and raising their voices in society.
 Its primary objective is to ensure that gender considerations are mainstreamed into G20
discussions and translated into the G20 Leaders’ Declaration as policies and commitments that
foster gender equality and women’s economic empowerment.
 It was founded on the idea that domestic initiatives needed to be incorporated into an
international strategy to see any appreciable changes because progress toward gender equality had
been too slow and peripheral.
 W20 aims to ensure that gender considerations are mainstreamed into G20 discussions and
translate into the G20 Leaders' Declaration as policies and commitments that foster gender
equality and women's economic empowerment.
 W20 has approximately 100 delegates representing the 19 countries and EU which works
collaboratively and intensely on the five task forces, the policy recommendations and drafting of
the Communique.
 W20 India took over the presidency from Indonesia on 12th December 2022.

 W20 India
 Under India's Presidency, W20 is focused on actualising the concept of 'women-led development'
with the vision to create a world of equality and equity where every woman lives with dignity and
where every woman gets the opportunity to thrive, transcend and transform their lives and those
of others.
 Chaired by Dr. Sandhya Purecha, Chairperson of Sangeet Natak Akademi, the primary objective
of W20 2023 is focusing on removing barriers to women-led development and ensuring an
enabling environment and ecosystem for women to realise their full potential.
 Since taking over the Presidency from W20 Indonesia, W20 India has signed more than 15
MOUs with various organisations as knowledge and network partners, and has conducted Jan
Bhagidari programmes with thousands of women across 10 states in India.
 With a visionary zeal to enable women and foster change at the grassroots, the W20 is
accommodating key stakeholders in the conversation from tribal and rural areas, agriculture,
handloom & handicrafts sector, micro & nanoenterprises, Self Help Groups, Anganwadis, along
with adolescent girls, women living in urban slums and homemakers to ensure intersectional
representation.
 The goal that has been set by the W20 2023 is to ensure continuity of the W20 agenda from the
past presidencies while establishing a stronger W20 global and national network. These inclusive
consultations and actions will be feeding into the W20 Communique and G20 Leaders'
Declaration.
 W20 2023 aims to ensure that the W20 Communique is representative and comprehensive and
will provide solutions to enhance the status of women across the globe.
 There are five priority areas which are the focus of W20 under India's Presidency. These include:
 Women in Entrepreneurship.
 Women Leadership at Grassroots.
 Bridging the Gender Digital Divide.
 Education & Skill Development.
 Women and Girls as Changemakers in Climate Resilience Action.
 Agendas at the Inception Meet
 W20 India organised its Inception Meeting in Chhatrapati Sambhaji Nagar (formerly known as
Aurangabad), Maharashtra on 27-28 February, 2023.
 The Women 20 Inception Meeting officially initiated the work of the task forces under India's
presidency of W20. The theme of W20 Inception Meet 2023 was 'In pursuit of Gender Equality
and Equity for Women-Led Development'. The Inception Meet discussed the role of women vis-
à-vis SMEs, climate action, education and skilling, gender digital divide and grassroots level
leadership. The aim was to discuss, deliberate and develop a cogent strategy to target gender-
related issues. Reiterating India's vision of establishing a world of equity, equality, and dignity.
 W20 India launched the iWN365 initiative during the session on 'Empowering Women in Nano,
Micro, and Startup Enterprises'. iWN365 is a women's startup initiative by iCreate that aims to
aid and assist women in setting up their own enterprises and achieving financial freedom.
 The subsequent sessions discussed various other agendas to position women as active participants
of the country's developmental goals. These included sessions on:
 'Role of Women as Changemakers in Climate Resilience Action', which highlighted the need
for introducing a gendered-lens to policy designing at the global level;
 'Creating an Enabling Ecosystem for Women Leaders at the Grassroots', identifying
challenges and pathways to ensuring equal participation by girls and women in political and
public leadership at the grassroots level;
 'Improving Access Through Infrastructure & Skill to bridge the Gender Digital Divide',
focused on bridging the gender-digital divide, leveraging technology and the IoT (Internet of
Things) to enable women to break the barriers and institute themselves as core architects of
human society. The emphasis was on India's exponential transformation in the digital
Infrastructure that allows citizens to realise their potential and which has been utilised for the
public good.
 'Creating Pathways for Women through Education & Skilling', with the stress on the need for
empowering women and girls through skill development and education in order to create
pathways for them to take up available income-generating opportunities and also create new
entrepreneurial setups, which in turn will contribute to structural transformation and
economic growth.
 'Enablers for Women-led Development: Policy & Legal Frameworks'.
 Women-led Development in India', a special session focusing on India as a nation where
"prosperity is represented by Goddess Lakshmi and courage is represented by Goddess Durga
and knowledge is represented by Goddess Saraswati". The stories of unconventional women
in India breaking barriers in different fields including in the Indian Navy, in grassroots
entrepreneurship, etc., were also shared.

 W20 International Meet at Jaipur

 The Inception Meet was followed by another W20 International Meet at Jaipur, Rajasthan on
13th-14th April, 2023. The two-day meeting brought together 120 women leaders from 18 G20
countries to address gender inequality issues and promote women's economic empowerment
globally.
 The session discussed the need of the hour to empower women economically, socially and
politically and the steps to be taken in this regard by the Government. It was also observed during
the session that India's rapid progress towards women-led development and India's G20
Presidency can unite the entire world in pursuit of common goals demonstrating the true spirit
of 'Vasudhaiva Kutumbakam'.
 Addressing the key priority area of 'Bridging the Gender Digital Divide', Mission Digital
Women was launched in W20 Jaipur meet to reach out to 1 million women in 3 years. The
mission aims to empower women through financial and business literacy as well as digital
 proficiency. Apart from this, it also intends to increase the access of women to digital and
financial tools and the local ecosystem, hence they can start their own enterprises and expand
their businesses.

 The Importance of Women-led Digital Solutions

 Data on Digital Disparity:
 According to a UNICEF report, as many as 90% of the jobs in the world today have a
digital component. These jobs, however, are available only to the digitally able, and
to more men than women.
 According to the report, in developing countries, only 41% of women have access to
the internet compared with 53% of men.
 Women are 20% less likely to own a smartphone and are more likely to borrow
phones from a male family member.
 Another report by the Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development
revealed that the gender gap in internet use is widening. Software development
remains a male-dominated field, with women comprising only 15% of software
designers.

 Examples of how digital literacy helps in tackling issues:

 The FoSafMDM application by the United Nations World Food Programme (WFP) in
partnership with the Governments of Odisha and Rajasthan has rolled out technology-
based training modules.
 This helps in strengthening the capacity of the community in ensuring that proper
hygiene and safety measures are followed so that children reap the full benefits of the
nutrition that these school meals offer.
 Young women known as ‘Digital Sakhis’ from Madhya Pradesh are upturning
discriminatory social norms through the use of smartphones .

 Indian situation:
 India accounts for half the world’s gendered digital divide given that only a third of
all Internet users in the country are women.
 In Asia-Pacific, India has the widest gender gap of 40%. Less than 32% of women in
India own a mobile phone compared to over 60% of men.

 Way Forward
 Today India is witnessing a rapid transition from women’s development to women-led
development. The country is moving with the vision of Hon’ble Prime Minister of a new India
where women are equal partners in the sustainable development of the country. India is
committed towards nurturing a society where empowered women live with dignity and contribute
as equal partners.
 Women can harness digital tools for improving nutrition schemes and initiatives, while
also using them to create economic opportunities that ensure long-term food and nutrition
security.
 Women20—the G20’s official engagement platform to promote gender equity—identifies
“bridging the gender digital divide” as one of its five priorities that need to be
mainstreamed as part of the G20 agenda.

W20 meetings are envisaged to play a pivotal role in driving collaboration and
providing further impetus to gender equity and women’s economic empowerment.
 Global Warming
Impact on the Global Climate
 What is Global Warming?
 Global warming is the gradual increase in temperature near the earth's surface due to an increase
in greenhouse gases. Carbon dioxide, methane, and ozone are examples of greenhouse gases that
trap solar energy.
 This phenomenon has been observed over the last century. This change has disrupted the Earth's
climatic pattern. There are several causes of global warming, all of which have a negative impact
on humans, plants, and animals. These causes may be natural or the result of human activity.
 Melting of glaciers, increase in diseases like skin cancers, etc. are some of the consequences of
Global Warming.
 Global Warming is a world phenomenon and a great threat to the world. This phenomenon has
the potential to put an end to the human race.

 How Global Warming Works?

 The term "global warming" refers to the overall climate change on Earth. It is the significant
increase in the Earth's temperature caused by human activity over a relatively short period of
time.
 Even a one-degree increase in temperature is considered global warming. An increase of 0.4
percent over the course of 100 years would be considered concerning.
 The IPCC (Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change), a group of 2500 scientists, has tracked
the Earth's rising temperature and concluded that it has warmed 0.6 degrees in the last decade..
 The Earth's climate has doubled in the last decade compared to 100 years ago.

 Major Causes of Global Warming

 Carbon Footprints: An increase in carbon footprints generally refers to an increasing population
of humans and other living creatures who contribute to the rise of carbon levels in the atmosphere
by releasing carbon into the environment ( like when humans enhance their lifestyles, it is
responsible for more release of carbon).
 Pollution: Another major contributor to global warming is rising pollution levels. Pollution
occurs when different elements of the atmosphere, such as hydrogen, nitrogen, carbon dioxide,
carbon monoxide, and so on, rise or fall unnaturally.
 Deforestation: One of the primary causes of the unnatural rise in global temperatures is
deforestation. Cutting trees and destroying forests have become common practises as modern
society thrives and the project of a more civilised environment gains priority. Trees play a critical
role in regulating carbon dioxide levels in the atmosphere. However, fewer trees indicate a higher
level of carbon dioxide, which causes temperature to rise.
 Greenhouse gases: such as carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide, and CFCs are naturally present in
the atmosphere. Nonetheless, abnormally high levels of these gases cause an unnatural rise in
temperature.
 Industrial causes: It is well known that industrial wastes are responsible for the majority of
pollution on the planet. They also emit a large amount of greenhouse gases, which contribute to
global warming.
 Agricultural causes: Today, many farmers use chemical-based pesticides and fertilisers for
agricultural purposes, which are extremely harmful to our environment and pollute the air, water,
and soil. As a result, they bear a great deal of responsibility for global warming
  Chlorofluorocarbon: The large-scale use of refrigerators and air conditioners release large
amounts of CFCs into the environment, which damages the atmospheric ozone layer. The
function of the ozone layer is to block the harmful ultraviolet rays entering the earth’s surface.
The CFCs lead to depletion of the ozone layer and thus increase the temperature of the earth.
 Excessive Use of Motor Vehicles: The gaseous emissions from different vehicles harm the
atmosphere as these vehicles run with the help of fossil fuels which emits carbon dioxide and
other toxins into the environment. This causes a rise in the earth’s temperature.

 Natural Causes of Global Warming

 Volcanoes: Volcanoes are one of the most significant natural contributors to global warming. The
ash and smoke emitted by volcanic eruptions enter the atmosphere and affect the climate.
 Water Vapour: Water vapour is a type of greenhouse gas. As the earth's temperature rises, more
water evaporates from bodies of water and enters the atmosphere, contributing to global warming.
 Melting Permafrost: Permafrost is frozen soil that has been trapped in it for several years and is
found beneath the Earth's surface. It can be found in glaciers. As permafrost melts, gases are
released back into the atmosphere, raising Earth's temperature.
 Forest Fires: Forest fires emit a large amount of carbon-containing smoke. These gases are
released into the atmosphere and raise the temperature of the Earth, resulting in global warming.

 Effects of Global Warming

 Global Warming caused certain climatic changes. Various climatic imbalances, like some areas,
face floods while others suffer from droughts, are the immediate result of Global Warming.
 The patterns of heat and humidity also experience fluctuations due to Global Warming. Such
fluctuations cause the movement of mosquitoes with the spread of diseases. Global Warming
causes a high mortality rate due to an increased number of natural calamities like earthquakes,
floods, and tsunamis.
 Global Warming is hampering the lives of people in some way or the other. In such conditions as
the increase in the earth’s temperature, the animals migrate from their natural habitat to other
places for their survival. During this process, many animals become extinct.
 The earth's temperature has risen dramatically as a result of global warming. The earth's
temperature has risen by 1 degree Celsius since 1880.
 As the heat waves, droughts, and floods associated with climate change become more frequent
and more intense, communities suffer and death tolls rise. If we are unable to reduce our
emissions, scientists believe that climate change could lead to the deaths of more than 250,000
people around the globe every year and force 100 million people into poverty by 2030.
 Disappearing glaciers, early snowmelt, and severe droughts will cause more dramatic water
shortages and continue to increase the risk of wildfires.
 Forests, farms, and cities will face troublesome new pests, heat waves, heavy downpours,
and increased flooding. All of these can damage or destroy agriculture and fisheries.
 Disruption of habitats such as coral reefs and alpine meadows could drive many plant and
animal species to extinction.
 Allergies, asthma, and infectious disease outbreaks will become more common due to increased
growth of pollen-producing ragweed, higher levels of air pollution, and the spread of conditions
favorable to pathogens and mosquitoes.
 This has resulted in an increase in glacier melting, which has led to an increase in sea level. This
could have disastrous consequences for coastal areas. Rising sea levels will lead to even more
coastal flooding.
 Global warming has harmed coral reefs, potentially resulting in the extinction of plants and
animals. The deterioration of coral reefs has been exacerbated by rising global temperatures.
  Climate change has resulted from global warming. There are droughts in some areas and floods in
others. The cause of this climatic imbalance is global warming.
 Heat and humidity patterns change as a result of global warming. This has resulted in the spread
of mosquitos, which carry and spread diseases.
 The average death toll usually rises as floods, tsunamis, and other natural disasters become more
common. Furthermore, such events can result in the spread of diseases that endanger human life.
 Several plants and animals lose their habitats as a result of global climate change. In this case, the
animals must leave their natural habitat, and many of them become extinct. This is yet another
significant effect of global warming on biodiversity.

 Global Warming and Ozone Layer Depletion

 Global warming and ozone depletion are two environmental phenomena that are inextricably
linked. The term ozone hole refers to ozone layer depletion.
 This layer acts as a protective layer of the earth, absorbing excessive amounts of UV rays, CFCs,
Halon gas, and other harmful substances to the earth's living creatures. The ozone layer's
depletion can cause a variety of serious health problems.
 Increased greenhouse gases, heat, pollution, and other factors are contributing to global warming
and ozone layer depletion.
 Furthermore, UV rays entering the earth's atmosphere as a result of ozone layer depletion raise
the temperature of the planet.
 Both of these concerning environmental phenomena are the result of human activities such as
pollution, carbon release, deforestation, increased Greenhouse gases, and so on.

 Global warming vs Climate change

 Although these expressions are occasionally used interchangeably, they are not the same.
 Changes in global weather patterns and growing seasons are referred to as climate change. It also
refers to the rise in sea level brought on by melting ice sheets and glaciers and the expansion of
warmer oceans.
 Climate change brought on by global warming poses a severe threat to life on earth in the form of
catastrophic weather events and extensive flooding.
 Climate change is a long-term change in the average weather patterns that have come to define
Earth’s local, regional and global climates. These changes have a broad range of observed effects
that are synonymous with the term.
 Human activities, especially the burning of fossil fuels, which raises the concentrations of heat-
trapping greenhouse gases in Earth’s atmosphere and thus increases the planet’s average surface
temperature, are to blame for the climate changes that have been observed since the middle of the
20th century.
 In addition to internal variability (such as cyclical ocean patterns like El Nino, La Nina, and
the Pacific Decadal Oscillation) and external forcings (such as volcanic activity, changes in the
Sun’s energy output, and variations in Earth’s orbit), natural processes that have been outweighed
by human activities can also contribute to climate change.
 Key indicators of climate change are:
 Global land and ocean temperature increases.
 Rising sea levels.
 Ice loss at Earth’s poles and in mountain glaciers.
 Frequency and severity changes in extreme weather such as hurricanes, heatwaves, wildfires,
droughts, floods, and precipitation.
 Cloud and vegetation cover changes.
  The gradual increase in the planet’s surface temperature is known as global warming. Although
this warming trend has been around for a while, the burning of fossil fuels has greatly accelerated
its pace over the past century. The amount of fossil fuels burned has increased along with the size
of the human population.
 Burning fossil fuels such as coal, oil, and natural gas results in the “greenhouse effect,” which
affects the atmosphere of Earth.
 The greenhouse effect is when the Sun’s rays penetrate the atmosphere, but when that heat is
reflected off the surface cannot escape back into space.
 Gases produced by the burning of fossil fuels prevent the heat from leaving the atmosphere.
 These greenhouse gasses are carbon dioxide, chlorofluorocarbons, water vapor, methane,
and nitrous oxide.
 The excess heat in the atmosphere has caused the average global temperature to rise over time,
otherwise known as global warming.
 Global warming is one of the causes of climate change.

 Global Warming And Its Impacts On Climate Of India

 India is the second most populous country of the world with a population over 1.2 billion. It
shares a coast line of 7517 km with the Indian Ocean, the Arabian Sea and the Bay of Bengal. It
has land boundaries with Pakistan, China, Nepal, Bhutan, Burma and Bangladesh.
 Climate of India
 India exhibits a wide diversity of temperatures. The Himalayas participate in warming by
preventing the cold winds from blowing in, and the Thar desert attracts the summer monsoon
winds, which are responsible for making the majority of the monsoon season of India.
However, the majority of the regions can be considered climatically tropical.
 The climate of India is dominated by the monsoon season, which is the most important
season of India, providing 80% of the annual rainfall. The season extends from June to
September with an average annual rainfall between 750–1,500 mm across the region.
The monsoon of India is regarded as the most productive wet season on the earth.
 Impacts of Global Warming on Climate of India
 The effect of global warming on the climate of India has led to climate disasters as per some
experts. India is a disaster prone area, with the statistics of 27 out of 35 states being disaster
prone, with foods being the most frequent disasters. The process of global warming has led to
an increase in the frequency and intensity of these climatic disasters.
 According to surveys, in the year 2007-2008, India ranked the third highest in the world
regarding the number of significant disasters, with 18 such events in one year, resulting in the
death of 1103 people due to these catastrophes.
 The anticipated increase in precipitation, the melting of glaciers and expanding seas have the
power to influence the Indian climate negatively, with an increase in incidence of floods,
hurricanes, and storms.
 Global warming may also pose a significant threat to the food security situation in India.
 According to the The Indira Gandhi Institute of Development Research, if the process of
global warming continues to increase, resulting climatic disasters would cause a decrease in
India’s GDP to decline by about 9%, with a decrease by 40% of the production of the major
crops. A temperature increase of 2° C in India is projected to displace seven million people,
with a submersion of the major cities of India like Mumbai and Chennai.
 Increase in Temperatures and Heatwaves
 Evidence suggests that summers have gotten hotter and more prolonged in India. And
science predicts they will get worse. According to studies, the frequency of summer
(April–June) heat waves over India is projected to be three to four times higher by the
 end of the 21st century compared to the 1976–2005 baseline period. The average duration
of the heatwave is also set to double. This could be an all-India phenomenon.
 According to the Indian Meteorological Department (IMD), average temperatures have
increased by 0.6°C between 1901-10 and 2009-18. At an annual level, this may sound
relatively tiny, but future projections paint a scary picture. The World Bank estimates that
if climate change continues at the same pace, average temperatures in India could reach
as high as 29.1°C by the end of the century. They are currently at 25.1°C.
 The west coast and south India are known for their moderate temperatures during
summer, but this could change in the coming decades. A slight shift could mean these
regions moving to higher temperature ranges, affecting the living conditions, agriculture,
environment, etc.
 Monsoons Will Become More Erratic
 Research shows that the annual monsoon rainfall in India has seen a steady decline. But
at the same time, there has been an increase in the frequency of heavy rainfall events.
 According to the World Bank, a 2°C rise in the world’s average temperatures will make
India’s summer monsoon more unpredictable. Since India heavily depends on the
monsoon rains for water supply in the rivers and agriculture, an erratic monsoon could
affect every aspect of life.
 Most farmers in India depend on monsoon rain to grow crops, and if the rains get
unpredictable, it will threaten India’s food security. Take rice, for instance. While rice
yields have increased due to improved varieties, rising temperatures and erratic rain could
mean a fall in yields– with potentially grave consequences for over one billion people’s
well-being, economy, food systems, and agriculture.
 Increase in Droughts And Floods
 Several studies, including the ones by India’s government, have shown a higher
frequency of droughts and expansion of drought-affected areas since 1950. Drought is
also a humanitarian crisis as people face a shortage of water and food. A drought could
further result in internal migration, with people leaving their homes in search of
livelihoods.
 Incidences of flooding have also increased in India. These have been mainly due to short-
duration, intense rainfall. Such events may increase as the monsoon gets more erratic.
 Not just the rain, but the melting of glaciers because of warming could also threaten the
higher reaches of the Himalayas, which will see an increased flow of water in the rivers,
resulting in higher flood risks. The Indus, Ganga and Brahmaputra basins are considered
particularly at risk of increased flooding.
 Rise in Sea Levels
 Coastal regions in India have been witnessing the effects of climate change with sea
levels rising. Coastal mangrove forests have played an essential role in protecting human
habitats from storm surges, but with sea levels rising, many mangroves have been wiped
out in the western and eastern parts of the country.
 Some experts say that the destruction of mangroves and unplanned construction in
Mumbai near the sea has only increased flooding. Mangroves have borne the brunt of
advanced construction and rising sea levels.
 The Sundarbans mangrove forest in West Bengal and Bangladesh have for long protected
the region against tropical storms, but increased sea levels have meant that many parts of
the Sundarbans have submerged. The destruction has resulted in tropical storms getting
more ferocious, leading to loss of life and livelihood.
 The rise in sea levels has also led to the degradation of groundwater quality, an uptick in
diseases as some bacteria thrive in saline water, and loss of livelihood for people living in
the coastal areas.
  More Devastating Tropical Storms
 Powerful cyclonic systems making landfall on both the coasts of India were known, but
they were rare events. But research has shown that the frequency of tropical storms has
increased in the last decade. Global warming is cited as the main reason for this.
 Category 4 and 5 cyclonic storms have been battering the coasts of India in recent years,
and even stronger cyclones are predicted in the coming years leading to more loss of life
in the coastal areas of India. These could also affect the weather patterns.
 Global heating had contributed to the increased frequency of extremely severe cyclonic
storms over the Arabian Sea. India is especially vulnerable as 14% of its 1.3 billion
population live in coastal districts, and the number living in coastal areas below 10
metres elevation is forecast to rise threefold by 2060.

 How Does India Taken A Leadership Role In Tackling Climate Change?

 India’s Efforts
 Updated Nationally Determined Contributions (NDCs)
 India now stands committed to reducing the emissions intensity of its GDP by 45 percent
by 2030 from its 2005 levels, as per the updated NDC. The country will also target about
50 percent of cumulative electric power installed capacity from non-fossil fuel-based
energy resources by 2030.
 To create an additional (cumulative) carbon sink of 2.5-3 gigatonnes of carbon dioxide
equivalent by 2030 through additional forest and tree cover.
 To further a healthy and sustainable lifestyle, 'LIFE' 'Lifestyle for Environment' as a key
to combating climate change" has been added to India's NDC.
 The update is also a step towards achieving India’s long term goal of reaching net-zero
by 2070.
 Adaptation and Mitigation
 The Government has launched many schemes and programs to scale up India’s actions on
both adaptation and mitigation.
 Appropriate measures are being taken under these schemes and programs across many
sectors, including water, agriculture, forest, energy and enterprise, sustainable mobility
and housing, waste management, circular economy and resource efficiency, etc.
 As a result of the aforesaid measures, India has progressively continued decoupling of
economic growth from greenhouse gas emissions.
 Focus on Renewable Energy
 The government has set the targets and reiterated that the Indian government is
committed to increasing the share of renewable energy in India’s total energy share.
Initially, the target for renewable energy was set at 175 GW, but now it has been further
revised to 450 GW by 2030.
 It will lead to an overall increase in green jobs such as in renewable energy, clean energy
industries- in automotives, manufacturing of low emissions products like Electric
Vehicles and super-efficient appliances, and innovative technologies such as green
hydrogen, etc.
 Mobilisation of Resources
 India is earmarking a large part of its developmental resources to the fight against climate
change.
 This is a stupendous effort as compared to the western countries, which are already at the
advanced stages of development.
 International Solar Alliance (ISA)
 ISA is a global alliance being initiated by India as well as headquartered in India.
  It is aimed at promoting research to develop more efficient, low-cost solutions to the
global energy requirements, by leveraging advanced technology as well as providing
incentives and regulation of solar power.
 Currently, it has 88 members.

 Challenges for India

 Reducing India’s Coal Dependency
 According to one estimate, 68% of India’s greenhouse gas emissions come from energy
production, which remains largely reliant on coal power plants.
 Given coal’s centrality to the country’s power, it will be difficult to completely displace it
with renewable energy.
 Climate-insensitive Agriculture Policy
 A significant chunk of India’s fiscal resources are directed towards the minimum support
price combined with helpful electricity and fertilizer subsidies, encouraging farmers to
grow water-intensive crops.
 Taken together, India’s agricultural policies aggravate water shortages, encourage crop
burning and do little for climate change mitigation.
 Impact on Urban Livelihood
 Climate change is already impacting health, livelihood and infrastructure in India's urban
areas.
 The impact will be felt more by economically and socially marginalized urban residents,
who live in informal settlements.
 Balancing Growth and Environment
 Ultimately, tackling climate change is a balancing act between the present and the future.
 Like governments everywhere, the Indian government will have to strike a balance on
inter-generational equity.

 Way Ahead for India

 Shift to green economy
 India needs to ensure policies and investments shift from the grey to green economy,
giving up fossil fuel and making societies and people more resilient to climate shocks.
 Decarbonise emission-intensive sectors
 More efforts are required to reduce emissions in heavy industries like iron and steel,
chemicals and cement.
 An ‘ecosystem-based’ approach, which looks at greening both ‘supply’ and ‘demand’, is
the way ahead.
 Climate-smart agriculture
 Considering the rapid population growth and globalization, there is an urgent need to
identify and promote sustainable farming practices and tools, using inputs more
efficiently and effectively to grow more from less.
 More Carbon Sinks
 India’s efforts to reduce emissions must be complemented with creation of more carbon
sinks, areas that store carbon, like forests, oceans and wetlands. This is where the role of
local communities is vital.
 Role of the indigenous community
 Indigenous communities could play a strategic role in mitigating climate change.
 It is high time to acknowledge their traditional wisdom on climate variability and deep-
knowledge of environmental cycles, which could substantially enrich modern scientific
knowledge and reinforce the effectiveness of adaptation activities worldwide.
  Importance of Private Sector
 Businesses bring investments, innovation and the ability to transform challenges into
opportunities — all essential weapons in our fight against climate change.
 Companies need to come forward and deliver on their responsibility towards the people
and the planet.
 Initiatives in Agriculture to Reduce Global Warming
 Farmers are using solar panels in their fields, so that they can avoid diesel for
groundwater pumps.
 Climate-friendly agriculture offers new income sources and is more sustainable and
India’s carbon emissions could drop by 45-62 million tonnes annually.
 India has about 20-39% vegetarians and 70% of the population eat meat — mainly
chicken, mutton and fish. India, with its many rivers, has a vast coastline which is rich in
fishes and fishes have high nutritional value and help in reducing carbon footprint.

 Conclusion
 Global warming is a major issue in today's world. The unnatural rise in temperature and ozone
layer depletion are primarily to blame for the current environmental crisis.
 This also has a negative impact on the living conditions. It has a significant impact on the
seasonal cycle, rainfall, and air quality. Humans are primarily to blame for this unusual peak in
heat and climate crisis. It is up to us to take the necessary steps to protect our environment from
destruction.
 The Indian economy is considered as one of the fastest growing major economies. However, the
country is plagued by climatic disasters that continue to wreak havoc on its economy. As a result,
majority of the people of India continue to live in poverty, with malnutrition and diseases
corroding the society. In this light, a comprehensive mitigation and adaptation plan needs to be
drafted and implemented for better preparation and response to such climate disasters that are
generated as a result of global warming.
 Finally there is a need to recognize that even if countries do undertake immediate and rapid action
to reduce emissions, some degree of climate change6 is inevitable. If India considers the fact that
India have very limited abilities to deal with weather extremes in the present day, the situation
may get worse in the future.
 Therefore, India needs to significantly improve its ability to plan and adopt to extreme events
such as floods, droughts, cyclones and other meteorological hazards. Any robustness that we
build in to the system in this regard will always stand us in good stead, no matter what climate
change actually transpires.

Climate change is the most significant problem facing the world.

Global warming is increasing day by day. If we cannot prevent it as
soon as possible, our world will face undesirable consequences.
 GOVERNMENT SCHEMES & MISSIONS
Ayushman Bharat Digital Mission
Introduction
Ayushman Bharat Pradhan Mantri Jan Arogya Yojana was launched in 2021 and continuing with the
process of universal health care for all, Prime Minister had launched the National Digital Health Mission
pilot project on 15 August 2020,which is presently being implemented in the six Union Territories. On
successful completion of the same, the pan India implementation was launched on 28 September 2021
and being called as Ayushman Bharat Digital Mission (ABDM).

Key Features of the Mission

 Mission
To develop the backbone necessary to support the integrated health infrastructure of the country. This
will allow to close loop all the stakeholders through digital technology within the healthcare
ecosystem.
 Vision
 To provide universal health coverage to all the citizens of India using digital technology at the
same time ensuring security, privacy and confidentiality to the health-related information of
individuals. National Health Authority (NHA) will be the implementing agency.
 Every citizen of India will have a unique health ID and the digital platform will hold the digitized
personal health records with information on doctors and health facilities.
 Scheme is planned under AB PM-JAY. There are six building blocks namely Health ID,
Healthcare Professionals registry, Health facility Registry, Personal health records, e-Pharmacy
and Telemedicine.
 The NHA is responsible for designing, building, rolling-out and implementation of the mission
pan India. The Health ID, Healthcare Professionals registry and Health facility Register will be
owned, operated and maintained by the Government.
 The Health ID card will store the complete medical history of the individual to include
prescriptions, treatment, diagnostic reports and discharge summaries.
 Health ID will be a randomly generated 14-digit number for unique identification of an
individual, authenticating them and sharing the health records with multiple stakeholders only
after giving individual consent. Only one time access can be given to doctors and health providers
while visiting for consultation.
 Benefits of the Mission
 Patients will have their personal health records in one place and will be able to access it and share
if consented. The patients will also have more accurate data about healthcare professions and
facilities before taking a conscious decision.
 There will be an option of remote healthcare services in terms of e-pharmacy and
teleconsultation.
 Healthcare professional will have access to complete medical history about the patients which
will assist in delivering better and timely professional services, which currently is provided by the
patients who may forget past health incidences or omit deliberately.
 Currently few private hospital chains maintain the patients’ medical history, which is available
locally. But the new system will allow the global availability of data for better diagnosis and
treatment. Further the patients don’t have to carry physical reports for consultation.
 Government can monitor the nation’s health and life style having the complete health records
these preventing diseases and saving medical cost. This is turn helps lowering health insurance
premiums.
PM Ayushman Bharat Infrastructure Mission
 Introduction
The health infrastructure has always been a matter of concern in the rural part of the country both in terms
of primary and tertiary healthcare. The Covid 19 pandemic exposed this vulnerability largely when the
primary healthcare system failed completely and the private medical infrastructure system exploited this
weakness and profited at the expense of the population of the country. The health infrastructure budget
expenditure is the fourth lowest in the world as a percentage of the total budget, which needed urgent
attention.

The government has acted promptly by stressing the need for development of healthcare infrastructure at
all levels and allotment of Rs 64,000/- Crores for the purpose over five years. This was announced during
the budget of 2021-22, but the second wave of the pandemic hit the country soon thereafter to delay the
implementation process. The process is ongoing and the implementation has recommenced with the same
time frame.

 Key Features of the Mission

The objectives of the mission are: -
 To ensure adequate public health infrastructures in both urban and rural which are capable of
responding to health emergencies and disease outbreaks.
 To create an IT based disease surveillance system by creating network of laboratories and at block,
district, regional and national levels.
 To enable all the testing laboratories to be connected through a common portal and the same to be
extended at state and Union Territories level.

 The multi modal and multi-dimensional interventions proposed to be achieved are:

 Focus on primary and critical care.
 Create network of 29,000 health and wellness centres.
 Create specialized critical care hospital blocks in all districts with 37,000 beds with ICUs,
ventilators and oxygensupport.
 Over 4,000 block and district level public health units and labs.
 Full range of diagnostic services at all districts.
 IT enabled disease surveillance systems.

 The institutional approach for holistic healthcare will be achieved by:

 Creating one National Institute for One Health.
 Creating four national Institute for Virology.
 Creating a regional research platform for WHO South EastAsia region.
 Creating 15 Biosafety Level 3 Labs.
 Creating five new Regional National centres for disease control.
 Creating health units at 50 international entry points for prevention of public health emergencies
and disease outbreaks.

Diagnostic tests of 134 different types will be done free of cost at district level which will save cost to the
rural people and prevent inconvenience.

Government wants to create two container-based hospitals located at Chennai and Delhi which can be
transported by air or rail. Each mobile will have 22 containers of 100 beds each capable of responding to
any calamity or disaster in any part of the country.
The National Centre for Disease Control (NCDC) will be strengthened by adding three new divisions
namely climate change division, occupational health division and disaster management division. Five
regional branches will also be established of the NCDC.

The Government wants to adopt the Saturation approach of healthcare infrastructure wherein all blocks,
district state and national levels will be seamlessly connected for affordable and quality healthcare.By the
end of 2022, plan to create 150,000 health and wellness centres offering full range of services to cover
both rural and urban areas. Each centre to cover five villages in the rural areas.

 Advantages
 Make India’s health system future ready by creation of National platform for One Health, to
detect and diagnose new infections and ring-fence India from new infectious diseases and public
health outbreaks. India would then be considered as equal to many advanced countries .
 Health Infrastructure would make Ayushman Bharat a reality by including the Ayushman Bharat-
Health and Wellness Centres, Ayushman Bharat-PMJAY and Ayushman Bharat Digital Mission
launched in the last three years. All put together will cover all domains of health.
 India will be self-sufficient for detection, prevention and containment of disease outbreaks
backed with IT ecosystem at Block, District, Regional and National levels.

 Challenges
 The share of Centre to States is 60:40 for all Ayushman Bharat health initiatives. Ensuring
deployment of funds from States may pose a challenge post Covid 19 when each state is facing a
finance crunch.
 The annual health budget needs to be matched in every budget to ensure success of the mission
otherwise the initiative will fail. Minimum allotment should be 2.5 percent of the GDP.
 Need for more health professionals both in terms of doctors and nurses which at present is grossly
inadequate. More colleges need to be opened at district levels.

Need for Ayushman Bharat Health Infrastructure Mission

India lags other developed countries in terms of healthcare infrastructure and manpower. To address this,
the National Health Policy launched in 2017 highlighted the need to boost India’s public healthcare
spending to meet the rising demand for healthcare infrastructure & services. India spent 1.8% of its GDP
on public health expenditure in 2020-21. The government aims to increase the spending to 2.5% of the
GDP by 2025to improve public access to health services and meet the spiralling demand for healthcare
infrastructureand services, the government has introduced several schemes such as ‘Ayushman Bharat’
(in 2018)—including Ayushman Bharat-Health & Wellness Centres, Ayushman Bharat-PMJAY (Pradhan
Mantri Jan Arogya Yojana) and Ayushman Bharat Digital Mission (September 2021). These schemes
were introduced to make healthcare services more accessible and affordable to citizens.

Current state of the coronavirus pandemic has also catalysed the long-term attitude of citizens towards
personal health and hygiene, contributing to further rise of the healthcare services demand in India. Due
to the accelerating demand, the healthcare sector has become one of the most attractive job markets

Healthcare is becoming one of the largest growth sectors in India, both in terms of revenue and
employment. The Indian government aims to further boost the sector by strengthening the infrastructure
and providing universal access to affordable healthcare services in the country. Strengthening
infrastructure would not only improve the well-being of citizens, but also boost employment opportunities
in the sector and contribute to the economic growth of India. The Pradhan Mantri Ayushman Bharat
Health Infrastructure Mission (PM-ABHIM) is one of the largest pan-India health schemes for
strengthening healthcare infrastructure.
PM-CARES Fund
 Introduction
The Covid 19 pandemic has caused widespread misery to the completenation. The first and second wave
caused innumerable number of deaths and left many children across the country orphaned either having
lost both parents or left with the lone surviving parent or legal guardian or adoptive parents. The
Government of India has set up a special fund to care for their education needs till they are of age to earn
reasonably and stand on their own feet.

 Key Features of the Scheme

 The corpus is being created under the Prime Minister’s Citizen Assistance and Relief in
Emergency Situations Fund (PM-CARES Fund).

 It is a public charitable fund under the Chairmanship of the Prime Minister.

 The fund allows micro donation of smallest of denominations, foreign contribution and allows
full exemptions for IT purpose and contributions from Corporates falls under the gambit of CSR.

 The district officials have been entrusted with the responsibility of endorsing the names of the
children in the online tracking portal “Bal Swaraj (COVID-Care)” for children in need of care
and protection.

 Fixed Deposit
The scheme will create a fixed deposit for each child when they reach the age of 18 with a corpus
of Rs 10 lakh. The child will be paid a monthly stipend till the age of 23 and thereafter the lump
sum Rs 10 Lakh will be given to the child for professional and personal use.

 Health Insurance
Each child will be insured for a sum of Rs five lakh under Ayushman Bharat Scheme and the
scheme will pay the premium till the child reaches the age of 18.

 Children Below 10 Years

The child will be given admission to Kendriya Vidyalaya or Private school and the school fees
including the cost of uniforms and books and notebooks will be borne by the scheme.

 Children between Ages 11 - 18 Years

The child will be admitted in any of the Central Government Residential schools or continue as
day scholar in KVs or Private school if the child is under the care of grandparents, guardian or
extended family. The scheme will bear the cost of education including cost of uniforms, books
and notebooks.

 Higher education
The child will be assisted in obtaining an education loan and the scheme will be responsible for
paying the interest on the loan. Others will be provided with Scholarship equivalent to the cost of
tuition fees or course fees. If those not eligible for the same will be paid an equivalent
scholarship.
Gati Shakti Scheme
 Introduction
Prime Minister launched PM Gati Shakti - National Master Plan for Multi-modal Connectivity,
essentially a digital platform to bring 16 Ministries including Railways and Roadways together for
integrated planning and coordinated implementation of infrastructure connectivity projects. The multi-
modal connectivity will provide integrated and seamless connectivity for movement of people, goods and
services from one mode of transport to another. It will facilitate the last mile connectivity of infrastructure
and also reduce travel time for people.

It is well known that for economic development to take place the first and foremost need is to develop
infrastructure. India has now made a great stride in this direction. The Government took the right decision
in creating a common platform involving all the infrastructure related ministries, where all the
infrastructure projects be integrated. This has been termed as the Gati Shakti Master Plan.

 PM Gati Shakti is based on six pillars

 Comprehensiveness: It will include all the existing and planned initiatives of various Ministries
and Departments with one centralized portal. Each and every Department will now have visibility
of each other's activities providing critical data while planning & execution of projects in a
comprehensive manner.
 Prioritization: The different Departments will be able to prioritize their projects through cross-
sectoral interactions.
 Optimization: The National Master Plan will assist different ministries in planning for projects
after identification of critical gaps. For the transportation of the goods from one place to another,
the plan will help in selecting the most optimum route in terms of time and cost.
 Synchronization: Individual Ministries and Departments often work in silos. There is lack of
coordination in planning and implementation of the project resulting in delays. PM Gati Shakti will
help in synchronizing the activities of each department, as well as of different layers of
governance, in a holistic manner by ensuring coordination of work between them.
 Analytical: The plan will provide the entire data at one place with GIS based spatial planning and
analytical tools having 200+ layers, enabling better visibility to the executing agency.
 Dynamic: All Ministries and Departments will now be able to visualize, review and monitor the
progress of cross-sectoral projects, through the GIS platform, as the satellite imagery will give on-
ground progress periodically and progress of the projects will be updated on a regular basis .

 Key Features of the Scheme

 Aim
 To institutionalize holistic planning of all infrastructure projects both at the Centre and states
level in terms of designing and execution with a common vision. To include the entire
existing and projected infrastructure projects.
 The scheme connects 16 Ministries to include the ministries of Roads and Highways,
Railways, Shipping, Petroleum and Gas, Power, Telecom, Aviation.
 The scheme will cover the economic zones like textile clusters, pharmaceutical clusters, two
defence corridors in Uttar Pradesh and Tamil Nadu, 11 Industrial corridors, electronic parks,
and agri parks to improve the connectivity and make businesses more competitive and make
India a global business destination.
  The need was felt as the current sys of planning and execution of infrastructure projects were
resulting in loss of tax payers’ money, lack of coordination between different stakeholders,
lethargic approach towards execution of projects, and each implementing ministry working in
silos, time overruns and wasteful expenditure.
 India plans to double its gas pipeline network from the present 17000 km, add over 200
airports, helipads and water aerodromes. Expand the length of national highways to 2 lakh
km, increase cargo capacity to 1759 MMPTA from current 1282 MMPTA in ports. Cargo
movement to 92 million MT from current 74 million MT, and on the Ganga from current 9
Million MT to 29 Million MT over the next four years. To ensure last mile connectivity to
economic zones.

 Advantages
The advantages considered by adoption of the common infrastructure platform are:
 Leverage technology extensively by using the satellite imagery data for real time monitoring
of projects, planning and obtaining various clearances.
 Centralised tracking of all the projects being executed by different ministries especially those
which are multi-sectoral and multi-regional in real time.
 Minimum human intervention as most projects will be cleared or monitored through the
portal and need for meetings and consultations will be reduced to a large extent.
 The portal will help in prioritizing the projects and allow cross sectional interactions this
reduce time and obtain different clearances.
 The development of infrastructure projects will boost direct employment and also indirectly
improve economy as many more industrial zones and economic zones can be created with
better last mile connectivity thus increasing demands for goods and services and major
private investments.
 Help in reducing implementation overlaps as currently, when a highway is built, the water
ministry decides to lay water pipelines or railways build overpass. Now all agencies will be
able to oversee the projects and plan connected infrastructures concurrently.
 Help in achieving optimum utilization of resources and save cost and time overruns due to
centralized planning and coordination of projects.

 Challenges
There are few challenges which needs to be overcome for the improving the effectiveness of the
scheme and reach the goals outlined:
 Multi regional infrastructure needs investments from both centre and states. The current post
COVID-19 scenarios have reduced the availability of funds at state level. This may result in
delay in implementation of the projects.
 A major factor which needs to be addressed is land acquisition which has been a drawback
for many projects over time and the connected litigation issues, alienation of local
communities over different reasons. This results in delay and cost overruns.
 Lack of interest of private funding for infrastructure projects as the policies and regulations
are not constant thus hesitation on part of both the private and global investors.
 Low credit take off both in part of private investment and nationalized banks, who are scared
of investments turning into Non-Performing assets.
 Improve the performance of the national highways by ensuring automatic monitoring of
traffic, use of drone technology for monitoring and maintenance of roads.
 The establishment of infrastructure projects should be planned to ensure balanced regional
development and multiple urban clusters are not concentrated in certain areas for political
reasons. The infrastructure development should develop roads feeding into railway lines
which in turn feeds into ports. Thus, efficient movement of goods from hinterland to ports.
Nipun Bharat
 Introduction
Government of India launched the National Education Policy 2020 which is designed for transformational
reforms in schools and the higher education systems. It replaces the erstwhile policy document issued in
1986, which had become outdated considering the changes in vogue in the developed countries education
systems. As part of the policy, Government is introducing the National Initiative for Proficiency in
Reading with Understanding and Numeracy (NIPUN) Bharat program. The idea is to promote
foundational literacy amongst children.

 Key Features of the Program

 Objective
Every child should achieve the foundational literacy and numeracy meaning that by Grade III and not
later than Grade Every child should attain desired learning competency in writing, reading and
numeracy. The program is designed to be achieved by 2026-27 o ensure universal acquisition of
foundational literacy.

 Focus Area
The primary focus area of the program are: -
 Retaining the children during the foundational period till Grade III.
 Capacity building of the teachers.
 Developing high quality and appropriate student and teachers Resources/Learning materials.
 Tracking the progress of each student to evaluate the outcome.

At the end of Grade III, expected outcome of every child is ‘Learn to read’ which will transition into
‘Read to Learn’. Grade III is the inflexion point.

Being launched by Samagra Shiksha Abhiyan (SSA) at National, State, District, Block and School level.
The target age group is 3 – 9 years from pre-school to Grade III. The Program may continue for Grade IV
and V if the child has not attained the desired foundation level.

Foundation literacy and numeracy (FLN) is being developed by NCERT under the guidance of National
Initiative for School Heads and Teachers holistic advancement (NISHTHA), an organization responsible
for capacity building program for improving quality of school education through integrated teachers
training. They propose to train 25 Lakh preprimary and primary teachers for FLN this year.

 Foundation literacy
Development of oral language. Child can listen, comprehend, learn oral vocabulary and extended
conversational skills. Also deciphering written words based on understanding relation between
symbols and sounds. Develop a level of fluency in reading and writing.

 Foundation numeracy
Ability to reason and apply simple numerical concepts in daily life problem solving.

 Benefits of the Program

 Overall Development of Child
 Inclusive classroom environment by incorporating play, activity-based pedagogy and linking
to daily life situation of a child including home language. To develop a motivated,
independent child engaged in reading and writing.
  High quality teachers learning material in the language understood by the children.
 Quality teachers who would be trained with better, innovative and technologically proficient
modes of teaching.
 The program is outcome based which will help in development of children at early age and
improve the overall literacy rate.

 Administrative Approaches
National Mission: Implementation Mechanism A five-tier Implementation mechanism for the Mission
will be set up at the NATIONAL-STATE-DISTRICT-BLOCK-SCHOOL level.

 Role of various Stakeholders & Institutions in the Mission

 States and UTs have a critical role to play to achieve the goal of foundational literacy and
numeracy by 2025-26, in mission mode.

 A successful mission to improve foundational learning of all children in our country cannot be
envisaged without an active role played by several Institutions, Teachers, Parents, Community,
Local Bodies, etc. Each stakeholder plays a valuable role in the mission

 Community Involvement
Organise various activities supported by teacher & Aanganwadi sevika/sahayika ie:
 School readiness melas.
 Gunotsava/ Pravashotsav for children and their mothers.
 Reading, quiz competitions, awards and recognitions.

 Local Bodies/Panchayats
This will encourage children and ensure community involvement ie:
 Undertake Baseline analysis as prescribed by the State to identify struggling learners and
status school/class wise.
 Ensuring 100% enrolment of all children in the Panchayat in schools at appropriate levels.
 Ensuring ZERO drop out and NO out of school children.
 Ensuring all children in foundational years achieve basic minimum proficiency in Literacy
and Numeracy.
 Connecting volunteer parents to schools to help the school achieve the FLN goals.

 Expected outcomes of the NIPUN Bharat Mission

 Improved foundational skills of children to reduce dropouts.
 Increase the number of students clearing the primary, upper primary and secondary stages.
 It envisions an enhanced education quality due to conducive and activity-based teaching.
 Practice of toy-based and unique pedagogies or experimental teaching to make the sessions
fun and interesting.
 Forming a training module that focuses on developing motor and physical skills, emotional
and social skills, cognitive., numeracy, literacy, life skills and more.
 Ensure holistic development of every child, which will be tracked down in reports.
 Encourage children to achieve steep learning for future needs like employment and life
decisions.
 Create creative assessments such as quizzes, games, polls, etc.

Individuals should encourage eligible children to avail benefits of this scheme. This would ensure
they receive a quality education. NIPUN Bharat focuses on transforming the monotonous
education system into an integrated, enjoyable, all-inclusive and engaging.
Swatch Bharat Mission– Urban 2.0
 Introduction
The sustainable development goals 2030 envisage solid waste management and water management be
achieved by the year 2030 to ensure sustainable growth of a nation. In this direction the Government in
October 2014 had announced the Swach Bharat Mission-Urban (SBM-U) and in 2015 the Atal Mission
for Rejuvenation and Urban Transformation (AMRUT). On 01 Oct 2021 the second phase of the Mission
was launched for achieving the second phase targets for both the missions.

 Key Features of SBM-U 2.0

 Objective
 The objective of SBM-U 2.0 is to eradicate open defecation in all cities and ensuring 100
percent scientific management of municipal solid waste and carrying out behavioral change
in the population through the process of jan andolan.
 Access to sanitation facilities were provided to the population of urban India. Over 70 lakh
household, public and community toilets were constructed and over 3000 cities were declared
Open defecation free (ODF).

 SBM-U 2.0
 To improve the sanitation facilities in the urban cities by construction of more toilets over the
next five years, considering the migration of workers from rural to urban.
 Ensure liquid waste management to cities with population less than one lakh by ensuring the
waste water in contained, transported and collected in a manner, so that the water bodies are not
contaminated.
 Set up waste processing and material recovery facilities to ensure single use plastic is phased out.
 All statutory cities to be at least ODF plus.
 For solid waste management, all cities to achieve minimum 3-star garbage free certification.
 All sanitation workers to be provided personal protective equipment, safety kits and included in
all Government welfare schemes.
 The outlay for the phase is approximately 1.41 Lakh Crores.

 AMRUT 2.0
 Objective
 To provide water supply to all households in about 4700 Urban Local Bodies.
 Up scaling from 500 cities with one lakh plus population covered currently to include all
4732 cities covering 100 percent India.
 Property tax to be related to circle rates and to be increased periodically and similarly for user
charges for operations and maintenance.
 Rainwater harvesting to be mandatory for all institutional buildings with at least 20 percent
reuse of treated waste waterand 40 percent of water to meet industrial water demand.
Rejuvenation of water bodies and limit free water supply to 20 percent population.
 Pey Jal Suvekshan to be implemented to ensure equitable distribution of water, reuse of waste
water and mapping of water bodies.
 Adopt the principle of circular economy and promote rejuvenation and conservation of
ground water and surface water.
 The outlay for the mission is approximately 2.87 lakh crores.
 Swatch Bharat Mission–Grameen Phase II
 Introduction
Swachh Bharat has been a showcase initiative of the Government. They have spread the
awareness of health and hygiene through prevention of open defecation in the villages, provided
monetary incentives for the construction of household toilets, and organized competitions to
sustain the enthusiasm amongst the population and have achieved great success.

Covid 19 in this regard has been largely instrumental in sensitizing the importance of health and
hygiene. But the program needs to be further progressed to the next phase to sustain and include
other elements of health and sanitation in a progressive manner.

 Aim
To devise a community led and people-oriented program aimed at universalizing safe sanitation.
In spite of Covid 19, 1249 villages have been declared open defecation free plus.

 Objective
To sustain the Open defecation plus status of villages and improve the classification of villages
by providing adequate facilities for solid and liquid waste management activities.

The objective can be achieved through communication, behavioral changes and capacity
strengthening by constructing individual household toilets and through panchayats Community
managed sanitary complex.

The solid and liquid waste management would be monitored through the four key indicators
through the output-output model: -
 Plastic waste management.
 House hold waste water management.
 Biodegradable solid waste management including animal waste management.
 Fecal sludge management.

The share of funding for the program between centre and states are 90:10 for North Eastern states
and J&K, 60:40 for other states and 100:0 for all other Union Territories.

 Advantages
 Generation of employability for local youths for the construction of household toilets,
Community toilets, as well as composite pits, soak pits waste stabilization ponds as part of
solid and liquid waste management.
 Secondly, to improve the health and sanitation facility in the villages. Thirdly to educate the
villagers on the health related issues connected to safe sanitation.

The Clean India Green India program is Unique because it involves children and youth, the future citizens
as engine of change. Is is well said that Clean India as a path to Green India the next step after
maintaining cleanliness is preserving and conserving the greenery.

The conclusion from the goals and objective we have seen above that CLEAN INDIA GREEN INDIA is
far from reality because one can predict the bright future of India. But the goal is far away from the
reality. What we need is not only the new plans but also its implementations both strongly and forcefully
(if necessary) with lawful ways. Moreover, it is the duty and strong sense of responsibility of the citizens
to be a role model to accomplish the mission and vision of Green and Clean India. They must respect the
objective and goals which is set by the Indian government.
Pradhan Mantri Swasthya Suraksha Nidhi
 Introduction
The Union Cabinet has approved the Pradhan Mantri Swasthya Suraksha Nidhi (PMSSN) as a single non-
lapsable reserve fund for Health from the proceeds of Health and Education Cess.

The proceeds of Health and Education Cess are levied under Section 136-b of Finance Act, 2007.
 Background
Health is vital for improved developmental outcomes. From an economic standpoint, better health
improves productivity, and reduces losses due to premature death, prolonged disability and early
retirement. Health and Nutrition also directly impact scholastic achievements and have a bearing on
productivity and income. Health Outcomes depend substantially on public spending on health. One extra
year of population life expectancy raises GDP per capita by 4%, Investment in health creates millions of
jobs, largely for women, through a much needed expansion of the health workforce

 Salient Features of the Pradhan Mantri Swasthya Suraksha Nidhi (PMSSN)

 It is a non-lapsable reserve fund for Health in Public Account. Proceeds of share of health in
Health and Education Cess will be credited into PMSSN.
 Accruals into the PMSSN will be utilized for the flagship schemes of the Ministry of Health &
Family Welfare namely, Ayushman Bharat – Pradhan Mantri JanArogyaYojana(AB-PMJAY);
AyushmanBharat-HealthandWellnessCentres(ABHWCs);National Health Mission; Pradhan
Mantri Swasthya Suraksha Yojana(PMSSY) and Pradhan Mantri Swasthya Bima Yojana.
 Emergency & disaster preparedness and responses during health emergencies.
 Any future programme/scheme that focuses on achieving progress towards Sustainable
Development Goals (SDGs) and the targets set out in the National Health Policy (NHP) 2017.
 Administration and maintenance of the PMSSN is entrusted to the Ministry of Health & Family
Welfare (MoHFW).
 In any financial year, the expenditure on such schemes of the MoHFW would be initially incurred
from the PMSSN and thereafter,from Gross Budgetary Support(GBS).

 Benefits of PMSSN
 Enhanced access to universal & affordable health care through availability of earmarked
resources, while ensuring that the amount doesnot lapse at the end of financial year.
 From an economic standpoint, better health improves productivity and reduces losses due to
premature death,prolonged disability and early retirement.
 One extra year of population life expectancy raises GDP per capita by 4%,investment in health
creates millions of jobs, largely for women, through a much needed expansion of the health
workforce.

 Significance on Spending on Healthcare

 Improved Developmental Outcomes
From an economic standpoint, better health improves productivity, and reduces losses due to
premature death, prolonged disability and early retirement.

 Enhanced Opportunities
One extra year of population life expectancy raises GDP per capita by 4%, investment in
health creates millions of jobs, largely for women, through a much needed expansion of the
health workforce.
E-SANTA
 Introduction
The Union Commerce and Industry Ministry has inaugurated an electronic market place providing a
platform which will connect aqua farmers and the buyers named e-SANTA.

 E-SANTA
 The term e-SANTA was coined for the web portal, meaning Electronic Solution for
Augmenting NaCSA farmers' Trade in Aquaculture.
 e-SANTA is a digital bridge to end the market divide and will act as an alternative marketing
tool between farmers & buyers by eliminating middlemen.
 The farmers can freely list their produce and quote their price while the exporters have the
freedom to list their requirements and also to choose the products based on their requirements
such as desired size, location, harvest dates etc.
 The Platform is available in many languages, which will help the local population.

 Significance
e-SANTA will RAISE income, lifestyle, self-reliance, quality levels, traceability, and provide new
options for aqua farmers by:
 Reducing Risk.
 Awareness of Products & Markets by the fishermen.
 Increase in Income.
 Shielding Against Wrong Practice.
 Ease of Processes.
 Removal of middlemen.
 It will enable the farmers and buyers to have greater control over the trade
 Enables them to make informed decisions.
 It will provide a cashless,contactless sand paperless electronic trade platform between farmers
and exporters.
 e-SANTA can become a tool to advertise collectively the kind of product sthe buyers,
fishermen & fish producing organisations are harvesting.
 It will help people in India & internationally to know about the products availability and has
the potential of becoming an auction platform in the future.

 How it will work

 After crop listing and online negotiation, a deal is struck, advance payment is made and an
estimated invoice is generated.
 Once the harvest date is fixed, the buyer goes to the farm gate and the produce is harvested in his
presence.
 Once the harvest is completed, the final count, quantity of material is verified, the final amount is
decided and delivery challan is issued.
 Once the material reaches the processing plant, the final invoice is generated and the exporter
makes the balance payment.
 This payment is reflected in the escrow account.
 NaCSA verifies it and accordingly releases the payment to farmers.
 Green Energy - The Way Forward
 What is Green Energy?
 Green energy is a term for energy that comes from renewable sources. Green energy is often
referred to as clean, sustainable, or renewable energy.
 The production of green energy does not release toxic greenhouse gases into the atmosphere,
meaning it causes little or no environmental impact.
 Some important green energy sources include power produced by solar, wind, geothermal,
biogas, low-impact hydroelectricity, and certain eligible biomass sources.
 Renewable energy or green energy is energy obtained from the sources which are essentially
consumed from nature and are not replenished during the course of time. Examples of renewable
resources include wind energy, solar energy, geothermal energy, tidal energy, biofuel and
hydroelectric energy. The most important feature of renewable energy is that it can be harnessed
without the release of harmful toxic pollutants.

 India and Renewable Energy

 Why Renewable Energy
 Sustainable
Energy generated from renewable sources will be cleaner and greener and more sustainable.
 Employment opportunities
Inclusion of a newer technology simply means more employment opportunities for the
working population of the country.
 Market assurance
From the economy point of view, renewable sources provide the market and revenue
assurance which no other resources can provide.
 Power supply
Providing 24*7 power supply to 100% of the households, sustainable form of transports are
some of the goals that can only be achieved through sustainable power that comes from
renewables.

 How is India Facilitating the Green Energy Transition?

 India is the world’s third-largest energy consuming country. Energy use has doubled since
2000, with 80% of demand still being met by coal, oil and solid biomass. On a per capita
basis, India’s energy use and emissions are less than half the world average.
 A historic rise was seen in CO2 emissions in 2021 due to a sudden spike in oil and coal
consumption.
 With just 2% of pandemic recovery finance spent on clean energy, emissions are expected to
reach an all-time high in 2023.
 Although an energy economy founded on clean pathways is emerging, energy transformation
has a long way to go.

 Efforts Towards Green Energy Transition

 In 2019 India announced that it would take up its installed capacity of renewable energy to
450 GW by 2030.
 The Production Linked Incentive Scheme (PLI) scheme is another initiative of the
Government of India with respect to enhancing the manufacturing sector for the production of
raw materials for renewable energy.
  The PM- KUSUM (Pradhan Mantri-Kisan Urja Suraksha evam Utthaan Mahabhiyan) aims to
provide financial and water security to farmers through harnessing solar energy capacities of
25,750 MW by 2022.
 Solarisation of water pumps is a step in distributed power provided at the doorstep of the
consumer.
 The Ministry of New and Renewable Energy on its website also hosts Akshay Urja
Portal and India Renewable Idea Exchange (IRIX) Portal. IRIX is a platform that promotes the
exchange of ideas among energy conscious Indians and the Global community.

 What are the Challenges Related to India’s Energy Sector?

 Energy Poverty and Inequality
 Access to energy is a tremendous problem in India and major inequalities of access plague
the country. Around 77 million households in India still use kerosene for lighting.
 The problem is even more acute in rural India where up to 44% of households lack access
to electricity.
 While India has undertaken various programs and initiatives to address energy poverty,
they have been faced with logistical problems and inadequate implementation locally.

 Import Dependence and Weaponization of Supply Chain

 India's crude oil import bill surged 76% to USD 90.3 billion in the first half of 2022-23 and
total import quantity increased by 15%.
 With its growing dependency on imported oil, India's energy security is under severe
strain, and the current disrupted global supply chain due to disturbed geopolitics is
compounding the problem.
 In terms of renewable energy, India is also largely dependent on foreign countries like
China for solar modules.
 Backward integration in the solar value chain is absent as India has currently no capacity
for manufacturing solar wafers and polysilicon, which is hindering clean energy
transition.

 Climate Change Induced Energy Crisis

 Climate change directly affects fuel supply, energy requirement as well as the physical
resilience of current and future energy infrastructure.
 Heatwaves and disturbed monsoon due to climate change are already putting existing
energy generation under stress, making it even more important to reduce fossil fuel
emissions.

 Women’s Health at Risk

 Women tend to take an active part in household activities and are at risk when long-term
household energy is derived from non-clean resources such as firewood, coal, and cow
dung.
 The use of non-clean energy sources increases women’s risk of respiratory,
cardiovascular, and psychological diseases and also increases maternal and infant
mortality.

 Widening Gap Between Demand and Supply of Coal

 Data from the Ministry of Coal in 2021 reveal that the gap between demand and domestic
supply of coal is widening. Despite the availability of adequate reserves, coal extraction has
been declining in the larger coal producing States.
  Owing to the rising prices and unresolved pending contractual issues with power plants is
worsening the issue.

 Increasing Demand, Increasing Energy Cost

 With an increasing rate of urbanisation and industrialisation, the International Energy
Agency said in its World Energy Outlook report that the need for energy in India alone
would rise by more than 3% annually.
 At the same time, there is a sharp increase in costs of petroleum globally.

 Impact on Environment
 While RE generation is zero-carbon (barring some biofuels), there are emissions at other
points of its lifecycle, such as during raw material extraction and equipment manufacturing.
There are also RE’s detrimental impacts on biodiversity and ecology.

 Shortage of Skilled Personnel

 India’s power sector has always faced shortage of skilled personnel, not only in the private
sector but also within DISCOMs, grid management companies, regulators and
policymakers and this problem is being compounded further in the current scenario.

 Capacity building within India

 Through skill development is of utmost priority. Well-developed training programmes are
the need of the hour in India.

 Installation Cost Issue

 The high initial cost of installation is one of the major hurdles in the development of
renewable energy. Although the development of a coal plant requires high investment, it is
known that wind and solar power plants also require huge investment.
 In addition to this, storage systems of the generated energy are expensive and represent a
real challenge in terms of megawatt production.

 Resource Locator
 Most renewable energy plants that share their energy with the grid require large areas of
space. In most cases, renewable energy sources are dictated by location which can be off-
putting to users.
 Firstly, some renewable energy sources are simply not available in different regions.
 Secondly, the distance between the renewable energy source and the grid is a major
aspect in terms of cost and efficiency.
 In addition to this, renewable energy sources depend on weather, climate and geographical
location, therefore meaning that one type of energy generation is not appropriate for the
region.

 Way Forward
 Global Partnerships
 Global partnerships can open new channels of support through technology or financial
resources being shared.
 For science and technology to inform climate action policies, developing countries need
ambitious, concrete research and development (R&D) funding and supportive funding
infrastructure.
 Developing countries can also integrate cost-effective indigenous technologies into energy
planning.
 Identification of areas
 Renewable resources specially wind cannot be set up everywhere, they require specific
location.
 Identification of these specific locations, integrating them with the main grid and
distribution of powers; A combination of these three is what will take India forward.

 Exploration
 More storage solutions need to be explored.

 Agriculture subsidy
 Agricultural subsidy should be rectified in order to ensure that only the required amount of
energy is consumed.

 Interlinking Women Empowerment with Green Energy

 Women’s empowerment and leadership in the energy sector could help accelerate the
transition to a low-carbon economy by promoting clean energy.
 The “just transition” should also include a gender perspective, to guarantee equal
opportunities in green jobs for both men and women in the workforce.
 Particularly in the household as responsible mothers, wives and daughters, women can
also play an important role in the green energy transition in entrepreneurship and policy
making.

 Diversifying Green Supply Chain

 Supply chains for clean energy need to be diversified to a much larger number of countries
rather than just confined to developed countries.
 In this regard, COP27's agenda of climate finance can be used as a carrier. As traditional
energy sources get replaced, revenues and employment will shift from certain geographies
to others and this will need to be carefully managed.

 Incentivising in Least-Cost Energy Solutions

 India can encourage university-level innovations that help India pursue an economically
viable clean energy transition. Thus, India's demographic dividend can also be utilised and
students will be pushed more toward research and innovation than traditional education.
 For example, the Unnat Jyoti by Affordable LEDs for All (UJALA) program decreased
the unit cost of LED bulbs by over 75%.
 The Ministry of Environment, Forestry and Climate Change, along with the United
Nations Development Programme (UNDP), jointly launched ‘In Our LiFEtime’, a
campaign that both urges and encourages young people between the ages of 18 to 23 years
to adapt and promote sustainable lifestyles is also a good step in this direction.

 Focusing on Green Transport

 There is a need to rethink and restore confidence in public transport, including the
procurement of more buses, the adoption of e-buses, bus corridors and bus rapid transit
systems with digitization of public transport.
 Emission norms should be tightened as well as biofuels should replace fossil fuels.
 The development of several electric freight corridors to promote electrification is also
crucial to reaping the benefits of electric vehicles.
 Hydrogen fuel cell based vehicles and Electric vehicles. These are the most suitable options
when it comes to shifting towards renewable sources of energy, that’s where we need to
work upon.
  Multisectoral Approach to Energy Transition
 In India, future growth will demand resilience on multiple fronts, such as energy system
design, urban development, industrial growth and internal supply-chain management, and
the livelihoods of the underprivileged.
 India can gradually reduce its exposure to commodity imports and foreign supply
chains through distributed energy systems and the promotion of domestic manufacturing.
 India’s manufacturing prowess and technology leadership present an opportunity to
leverage Make in India to turn India into a more self-sufficient green economy and
globally competitive green energy export hub over time.
 Circular economy solutions linked with green energy should become a core feature of
India’s future economy.

 Conclusion
 A well planned road map is needed, for which NITI Aayog is coming up with Energy Vision
2035 to achieve India's clean energy goals.
 Diversified energy mix is what India needs to focus on, no doubt solar and wind have a lot of
potential, Hydrogen would be a game changer in Indian energy transition space.
 India should be working on areas like investment in infrastructure, capacity building and better
integration in the near and immediate future. Renewable sources of energy are expected to
replace fossil fuels by 2050.
 India is committed towards clean and green energy sources and National Hydrogen Mission is a
leap in that direction. The objective of using green energy sources is to reduce the pessimistic
environmental effects associated with non-renewable energy sources such as coal, oil and natural
gas. Opting to use a renewable energy source will not only translate into cost savings over the
long-term, but will also help protect the environment from the risks of fossil fuel emissions.
 Energy conservation awareness campaigns must be initiated at government level to make people
aware of the importance of conserving energy by adopting energy audit. Moreover, power
generating units should gradually resort to the use of renewable resources as they are profuse and
will never deplete.
 Social media can play a key role by augmenting awareness amongst people about green energy
sources and their utilization. Public should be made aware about green good deeds on energy
conservation and utilisation.
 There is no hesitation in saying that people are becoming increasingly conscious of the
importance of using renewable sources of energy but still a lot of work needs to be done in this
domain. For instance, awareness programs must be started in various regions by intellectuals and
subject experts to make people responsive of the importance of alternative energy technologies.
They must also discourage them to use fossil fuels due to their evident demerits to the
environment and living beings.
 Courses on renewable or green energy are introduced in the syllabus at school, college and
university levels in order to make them realise their significance and to increase their knowledge
in this sphere. Green jobs from different sectors on clean and green energy vs. fossil fuels, public
transportation vs. roads, electric vehicles vs. internal combustion engine vehicles, and nature-
based solutions vs. oil and gas production draws attention now a days.
 A renewable energy economy is desired and the next decade is going to be the era of renewable
energy. Private sector support and international cooperation are needed to strengthen government
policy initiatives. This requires programs that promote technology transfer, capacity building and
collaborative research and development. Innovation in green energy sources will enable
developing countries to leapfrog to modern and sustainable energy systems and technologies.
Innovation in green energy sources will enable developing countries to leapfrog to modern and
sustainable energy systems and technologies. India is committed towards clean and green energy.
 Hybrid Warfare
 Introduction
 Hybrid warfare refers to the use of unconventional methods as part of a multi-domain war
fighting approach.
 A shift in the arena of violence from military to political, economic and technological is
called hybrid warfare.
 In Hybrid warfare, apart from conventional military tactics, non-military tools are used to
achieve dominance or damage, subvert or influence.
 It targets individuals and institutions in politics, government, business, technology,
media, and civil society.
 It refers to the use of unconventional methods as part of a multi-domain war fighting
approach. These methods aim to disrupt and disable an opponent’s actions without
engaging in open hostilities.
 It’s a blend of traditional and unorthodox tactics employed against a far more powerful
opponent in order to achieve political goals that would be impossible to attain through
traditional warfare. Identifying the perpetrators is frequently difficult.
 Non-state actors are frequently used by the state accountable for the activities in hybrid
warfare, allowing it to conceal accountability. However, many cyber attacks on
institutions and businesses in recent years have been far more sophisticated than “lone
wolves” strikes and exhibit the characteristics of actions carried out with the help or
approval of a hostile government.
 These tools may include information pollution, perception management and propaganda.
These methods aim to disrupt and disable an opponent’s actions without engaging in
open hostilities.
 Hybrid warfare has a variety of activities and covers the use of different instruments to
destabilise society by influencing its decision making. Frequent instruments are:
 Interference in electoral processes: An enemy might employ a variety of tactics,
including as media and social media campaigning and securing financial resources for
a political party, to influence the outcome of an election in a way that suits the
enemy’s political objectives.
 Disinformation and false news: Falsehoods can be used to foster societal
disintegration by an adversary who creates a parallel world. The goal is to confuse the
public and make it difficult for the government to obtain public approval for a certain
operation or policy.
 Cyber attacks: Threats of deadly cyber assaults aimed at civilians can be used by an
adversary to persuade NATO governments not to come to each other’s aid in times of
crisis. Attacks against hospital networks, as well as electrical and water sources, are
examples.
 Drone attacks: Cyber attacks are comparable to this, although on a smaller scale. An
adversary can inflict agony on civilians by impeding the operations of airports, air
ambulances, and police helicopters using remotely controlled platforms. In the early
stages of a conflict, such attacks can potentially stymie military aerial activities.
 Characteristics of Hybrid Warfare
 Multi Domained: This warfare is a combination of activities, including disinformation,
economic manipulation, use of proxies and insurgencies, diplomatic pressure and military
actions.
 Maximum Damage With Minimum Effort: It tends to target areas which are highly
vulnerable and where maximum damage can be caused with minimum effort.
 Deploying Non-State Actors: It usually involves non-state actors indulging in
subversive roles supported by states in order to exonerate themselves of any involvement
if their activities are detected.

 Threats Emanating From Hybrid Warfare

 Cyber Attacks: This may include attacks on critical infrastructure like power grids,
water supplies, business systems, and defence systems. These may be used to disrupt
economic activities, undermine institutions, and discredit political leadership and the
intelligentsia.
 Evolving Nature of Terrorism: The idea of Hybrid Warfare encourages new forms of
terrorist attacks such as ‘lone-wolf’ attacks and creation of ‘sleeper cells’. These attacks
are extremely difficult to detect. Adversary could also act on the lines of radicalization of
the population, which leads to issues like Communalism, Naxalism and Separatism in the
long run.
 Undermining Democracy: The foreign government may manipulate the data, spread
propaganda and misinformation and influence democratic systems like elections through
use of social media, websites, advertisements etc. Use of techniques from campaigning
through the media and social networks to securing financial resources for a political
group may indirectly influence the outcome of an election in a direction that favors the
adversary's political interests.
 Disinformation and Fake News: An adversary can create a parallel reality and use
falsehoods to fuel social fragmentation. It could disorient the public and make it difficult
for a government to seek public approval for a given policy or operation.

 Holistic Responses to Combat Hybrid Warfare

 Adopting multinational frameworks: Threats from hybrid warfare are an international
issue, so should be the response. National governments should coordinate a coherent
approach amongst themselves to understand, detect and respond to hybrid warfare to their
collective interests. Multinational frameworks should be developed to facilitate
cooperation and collaboration across borders.
 Institutional measures: To keep vulnerabilities in check and estimate possible hybrid
threats, conducting self-assessments of critical functions and vulnerabilities across all
sectors and ensuring regular maintenance. For example, regularly upgrading critical
Fintech systems in the country.
 Strengthening the democratic institutions: This helps the government negate various
forms of hybrid warfare such as disinformation and radicalization. Inclusion of Civil
Society Institutions such as think tanks multiply the government’s capabilities to counter
such threats.
  Investing in Journalism to raise media literacy: It has been often reported that uses of
the term “hybrid threats” by the media are often inaccurate. As a result, investing in
journalism will indirectly help citizens in understanding the threat in a better way.
 Training of armed forces: In hybrid warfare, armed forces have a dual role in protecting
civilian population and disabling enemy. Thus it needs to upgrade itself by adopting the
following:
 Training in special battle techniques, as well as conditioning to overcome urban
combat stress.
 Training in use of technological tools such as smart robots, Unmanned Aerial
Vehicles (UAVs)
 Deploying Intelligence tools like Real Time Situational Awareness (RTSA) for
precise operations.

 Recent Usage
 Israel-Lebanon War (2006): In this war Hybrid warfare was used by the Hezbollah
group. It employed a host of different tactics like guerilla warfare, innovative use of
technology and effective information campaigning.
 By China: Unrestricted Warfare, a publication by China’s People’s Liberation Army,
talked about hybrid warfare and the need for a shift in the arena of violence from military
to political, economic and technological.Recently it was reported that the Chinese
company Zhenhua Data Information Technology Co. Limited is monitoring over 10,000
Indian individuals and organisations in its global database of foreign targets.
 By Russia:
 In 2014 Hybrid warfare techniques were deployed against Ukraine in the annexation
of Crimea. It involved a combination of activities, including disinformation,
economic manipulation, use of proxies and insurgencies, diplomatic pressure etc.
 In January 2022, a major cyber attack hit Ukrainian government websites that
warned the Ukrainians to “be afraid and expect the worst”. Further, Russia’s
intelligence and military agencies have also been accused by Ukraine’s military
intelligence for providing tanks, mobile artillery, fuel, etc. in areas in eastern
Ukraine.
 In fact, the Russians have honed the use of cyber attacks to achieve their
geopolitical objectives. A similar use of cyber attacks was seen in 2007 in
Estonia, when Russia launched a series of cyber attacks against Estonian banks and
government sites. Similarly, in 2008, in a dispute with Georgia, even before Russian
forces attacked, there were cyber attacks and disinformation tactics which
significantly impacted Georgian security establishment.

 Conclusion
 The governments across the world should establish a process to develop a national
approach of self-assessment and threat analysis. Institutionalizing a process regarding
threat and vulnerability information will enhance hybrid warfare early warning efforts,
assist resiliency efforts, and may even have a deterrent effect.
 Ultimately, good governance, economic freedom, and trusted law enforcement and
security services are the best bet to stop a hybrid war before it even starts.
 India's Arctic Policy
 What is the Arctic?
 The Arctic is a polar region located at the northernmost part of Earth.
 Land within the Arctic region has seasonally varying snow and ice cover.
 It consists of the Arctic Ocean, adjacent seas, and parts of Alaska (United States), Canada,
Finland, Greenland (Denmark), Iceland, Norway, Russia, and Sweden.
 The Arctic region has long been known for its harsh environment, but in recent years, it has
emerged as a new frontier for geopolitical competition. As global warming thaws the Arctic ice
and opens up new shipping routes and resource extraction opportunities, countries around the
world are jockeying for position in this strategically vital region.
 The Arctic is already witnessing a surge in economic activities like oil and gas production,
mining, shipping, fishing, aquaculture, and tourism, augmenting the potential for extensive
development through infrastructure investments, tax revenues, and employment generation.
While acknowledging that such economic activities have undoubtedly contributed to the region's
development, and future economic initiatives hold immense potential, the world leaders also
shoulder the responsibility of mitigating the environmental and social challenges that accompany
these activities. The prudent handling of these challenges is crucial to ensure that the region's
natural resources and benefits endure, sustain the Arctic communities, and promote the welfare of
humanity.
 Against this backdrop, India has taken steps to formulate its own Arctic policy, recognising the
growing importance of this region to its national interests. India's strategic interests in the Arctic
are substantial, as evinced by its Observer status among the thirteen nations that comprise the
Arctic Council. This esteemed inter-governmental forum is dedicated to grappling with the
multifarious challenges confronting the Arctic Governments and the indigenous peoples
inhabiting the region.

 What is the Background?

 India's engagement with the Arctic began when it signed the Svalbard Treaty in 1920 in Paris
between Norway, the US, Denmark, France, Italy, Japan, the Netherlands, Great Britain, and
Ireland, and the British overseas Dominions and Sweden concerning Spitsbergen.
 Ever since then, India has been closely monitoring all the developments in the Arctic region.
 India initiated its Arctic research program in 2007 with a focus on climate change in the region.
 The objectives included studying teleconnections between Arctic climate and Indian monsoon,
to characterise sea ice in the Arctic using satellite data, to estimate the effect on global
warming.
 India also focuses on conducting research on the dynamics and mass budget of
Arctic glaciers and sea-level changes, carrying out an assessment of the flora and fauna of the
Arctic.

 What are the Major Provisions of India's Arctic Policy?

 Six Central Pillars:
 Science and research.
 Environmental protection.
 Economic and human development
 Transportation and connectivity.
 Governance and international cooperation.
 National capacity building.
 Objectives:
 It aims to strengthen national capabilities and competencies in science and exploration,
climate and environmental protection, maritime and economic cooperation with the Arctic
region.
 It seeks to strengthen institutional and human resource capacities within the government
and academic, research and business institutions through inter-ministerial coordination in
pursuit of India’s interests in the Arctic.
 It seeks to enhance understanding of the impact of climate change in the Arctic region on
India’s climate, economic and energy security.
 It aims to promote better analysis, prediction and coordinated policymaking on the
implications of ice melting in the Arctic on India’s economic, military and strategic
interests related to global shipping routes, energy security and exploitation of mineral
wealth.
 It seeks to study the linkages between polar regions and the Himalayas and deepen the
cooperation between India and the countries of the Arctic region under various Arctic
forums, drawing expertise from scientific and traditional knowledge.
 The policy also seeks to increase India’s participation in the Arctic Council and improve
understanding of the complex governance structures in the Arctic, relevant international
laws and geopolitics of the region.
 Relevance of Arctic for India?
 The Arctic region is significant due to the shipping routes that run through it.
 According to an analysis the adverse effects of the Arctic are not just impacting the
availability of mineral and hydrocarbon resources, but also transforming global shipping
routes.
 According to the Ministry of External Affairs, India can play a constructive role in
securing a stable Arctic.
 The region holds immense geopolitical importance as the Arctic is projected to be ice-free
by 2050 and world powers making a beeline to exploit the region rich in natural resources
 Objectives of India's Arctic Policy
 Strengthen national capabilities and competencies in science and exploration, climate and
environmental protection, and maritime and economic cooperation.
 Enhance institutional and human resource capacities within government, academic, research, and
business institutions.
 Foster inter-ministerial coordination to advance India's interests in the Arctic.
 Improve understanding of the impact of climate change in the Arctic on India's climate,
economic, and energy security.
 Contribute to better analysis, prediction, and coordinated policymaking on the implications of ice
melting in the Arctic on India's economic, military, and strategic interests.
 Study the linkages between Polar Regions and the Himalayas.
 Deepen cooperation with countries in the Arctic region through various Arctic forums, drawing
upon both scientific and traditional knowledge.
 Increase its participation in the Arctic Council, and improve its understanding of the complex
governance structures in the Arctic, relevant international laws, and geopolitics of the region.

 Rationale Behind India's Arctic Policy

 India recognizes the importance of the Arctic as a global commons, and has pledged to work with
other countries to address environmental challenges such as climate change and melting ice. As
part of this effort, India has committed to reducing its greenhouse gas emissions and promoting
renewable energy sources.
 India is also keenly aware of the strategic implications of the Arctic region, particularly in terms
of its impact on global trade and energy security. The melting of the Arctic ice is opening up new
shipping routes, such as the Northern Sea Route, which could significantly reduce shipping times
between Asia and Europe.
 India also recognises the potential for resource ex[1]traction in the region, particularly in the
areas of oil and gas exploration and mining.
 India emphasises that any commercial activities must be carried out in a sustainable and
responsible manner, with due consideration for the environmental and social impacts.

 Relevance of the Arctic

 The relevance of Arctic can be broadly explained under three categories:
 Scientific Research, Climate Change and Environment
 The repercussions of the changes underway in the Arctic are not yet fully comprehended,
but their impact on global weather patterns, climate systems, and ecosystems, including
India's monsoons, is unmistakable. The monsoons, which provide over 70% of India's
yearly precipitation, are a vital component of the country's agricultural sector, which
sustains nearly 58% of its populace and contributes approximately 20% to its GDP.
Consequently, any disruption to the monsoon season can have far-reaching consequences
for India's economy, food security, and social stability.
 Moreover, the reduction in Arctic snow cover and sea ice extent by 21% and 43%,
respectively, from 1971 to 2019, coupled with the loss of land ice in all Arctic regions,
has resulted in a significant rise in global sea levels. This escalation is primarily due to
the loss of land ice in the Arctic, which can have a profound effect on India, particularly
its 1,300 island territories and maritime features. The impact of rising sea levels on these
vulnerable areas could be catastrophic, leading to detrimental environmental, economic,
and social consequences.
 The Arctic and the Himalayas, though separated by vast distances, are not dissimilar in
their pressing concerns. The Arctic meltdown, while posing a serious threat to the planet,
has also provided the scientific community with valuable insights into the glacial melt in
 the Himalayas, a region often referred to as the 'third pole' and boasting the largest
freshwater reserves after the North and South poles. This region, the source of India's
major rivers such as the Ganga and the Brahmaputra, is critical to the livelihoods of
millions of people who depend on its waters for sustenance and survival. The Ganga and
Brahmaputra basins alone support a population of approximately 600 million and 177
million, respectively, and contribute over 40% to India's GDP.
 Given the vital role these glaciers play in the survival and prosperity of India, it is
imperative that the scientific community closely examines the Arctic and its melting ice.
The study of the Arctic is crucial to Indian scientists, as it can provide them with a better
understanding of the processes affecting the Himalayas and the potential consequences of
further glacial melting. The two regions may be separated by vast distances, but their
interconnectivity and shared concerns demand that we approach them as integral
components of a larger planetary system, where changes in one area can have far-
reaching implications for others.
 Economic and Human Resources
 India, as the third-largest energy-consuming country in the world, is heavily reliant on
imported oil and gas, with the latter catering to almost half of the country's total gas
consumption. Despite this, India's gas mix in its energy basket amounts to a mere 6%,
significantly lower than the world average of 24%.
 However, India aims to increase this to 15% by 2030, highlighting the country's pressing
need for sustainable and reliable sources of energy. The Arctic region's vast hydrocarbon
resources, coupled with its rich deposits of rare earth minerals, hold significant potential
for addressing India's energy security needs and strategic mineral deficiencies. As the
Arctic's resources become increasingly accessible due to melting ice, India may find itself
in a unique position to benefit from this region's vast potential. However, as India
considers the Arctic's potential contribution to its's energy mix, it is crucial that it takes
into account the environmental and social implications of resource extraction.
 Therefore, India's Arctic Policy seeks to approach the region's resources with care and
consideration, ensuring that our actions are sustainable and responsible, both for the sake
of the planet and the well-being of its inhabitants.
 Geopolitical and Strategic Significance
 China
o The current state of the Arctic ice sheet has not only resulted in its gradual melting
but has also escalated geopolitical competition to a level not witnessed since the Cold
War. In January of 2018, China's White Paper on the Arctic boldly asserted its status
as a "Near Arctic State" and identified trans Arctic shipping routes as the "Polar Silk
Road," designating it as the third transportation corridor for the Belt and Road
Initiative (BRI). This assertion has been fiercely challenged by the US, which has
vehemently refuted China's claim in the Arctic by declaring that "there are only
Arctic States and Non-Arctic States. No third category exists, and claiming otherwise
entitles China to exactly nothing.
o “Despite the US's objections, China has made substantial investments in the Arctic
region, primarily in infrastructure and energy sectors. China has also embarked on
the construction of nuclear ice-breakers, a project that no other country apart from
Russia has undertaken. These developments have greatly alarmed the US and other
Arctic countries, who view China's growing presence in the region as a significant
threat to their national security and interests.
 Russia
o Russia's Arctic domain is unparalleled, encompassing almost half of the region's
territory, coastline, population, mineral resources, and hydrocarbon reserves. Despite
its sparse population, the Russian Arctic region's economic significance cannot be
 overstated, contributing a staggering 15% to the nation's GDP and 20% to its exports.
With such substantial stakes, Russia's Arctic interests are of paramount importance,
particularly during a period of economic and political sanctions. Therefore, Russia is
actively seeking funding and collaboration to develop the Arctic's infrastructure and
the Northern Sea Route (NSR). However, the US opposes Russia's regulatory
approach to the NSR, which includes treating portions of it as internal waters,
controlling merchant ship traffic, and restricting foreign warship passage.
o The commencement of new shipping routes and the potential for increased resource
extraction have sparked a frenzy of activity among the world's major players,
including the formidable trio of the US, China, and Russia, as well as NATO. This
has led to a race for strategic positioning and influence in the region, as evident by
conduct of military exercises in the region.
 Boundary Disputes
o Beyond the fierce struggle for strategic control, the Arctic States remain embroiled in
unresolved boundary disputes, further complicating the geopolitical landscape.
Notably, the US finds itself at odds with both Canada and Russia over continental
shelf overlap.
o Moreover, the maritime boundaries of the US and Canada remain undetermined,
fueling additional discord, as does their disagreement over the legal classification of
the North West Passage, which Canada, like Russia with the Northern Sea Route,
asserts as its internal waters. Adding to this already intricate web of disputes, Canada
and Denmark remain locked in a territorial conflict over Hans Island, further
complicating the delicate balance of power in this volatile region.

 Way Forward
 India's strategic importance in the Arctic region has amplified in recent years, reflecting its rising
global status and growing economic power.
 India's growing interest in the Arctic is not only driven by its quest for energy security but also by
its commitment to scientific research, environmental protection, and sustainable development.
 India's Arctic policy acknowledges the region's importance as a vital component of the global
climate system and underscores the need for international cooperation to address the challenges
and opportunities presented by the Arctic's evolving environment.
 India’s Arctic Policy is timely and is likely to provide a direction to India’s policy-makers on
contours of India’s engagement with the region. It is the first step towards developing a whole-
of-government approach on India’s engagement with the region.
 The Policy is also likely to raise awareness about the Arctic within India and vice-versa through
conduct of programmes, seminars and events in India and in the Arctic.
 Constituting a dedicated expert committee to plan, monitor, steer, implement and review India’s
Arctic policy may help streamline the country’s approach in a better manner.
 Moreover, India's engagement in the Arctic region has the potential to bring significant
economic benefits to both India and the Arctic states.
 India's expertise in various fields, including information technology, renewable energy, and
pharmaceuticals, could be leveraged to foster new economic opportunities in the Arctic region.
 Similarly, the Arctic's vast untapped natural resources, including oil, gas, and minerals, could
provide India with a new source of energy to fuel its growing economy.

It is an opportune time to take stock and plan for the future. India
has the credentials and increasingly the heft, to play a stabilising
role in the region, for delivering greater global good.
 India-Egypt Strategic Partnership
Navigating Challenges, Embracing Opportunities
 History
 The history of contact between India and Egypt, two of the world’s oldest civilizations, can be
traced back to at least the time of Emperor Ashoka. Ashoka’s edicts refer to his relations
with Egypt under Ptolemy-II.
 In modern times, Mahatma Gandhi and the Egyptian revolutionary Saad Zaghloul shared the
common goal of independence from British colonial rule.
 The joint announcement of establishment of diplomatic relations at Ambassadorial level
was made on 18th August 1947.
 India and Egypt signed a friendship treaty in 1955. In 1961, India and Egypt along with
Yugoslavia, Indonesia and Ghana established the Non-Aligned Movement (NAM).
 In 2016, the joint statement between India and Egypt identified political-security
cooperation, economic engagement and scientific collaboration, and cultural and people-people
ties as the basis of a new partnership for a new era.
 The recent developments in India Egypt relations indicate a renewed commitment to
strengthening ties and exploring mutual opportunities.
 With careful navigation of challenges and a focus on realistic objectives, both countries can build
a robust relationship that aligns with their respective interests in a rapidly evolving global
landscape.
 India and Egypt share a historical connection dating back to the era of the Non-Aligned
Movement (NAM). However, in subsequent years, political upheavals and shifts in foreign policy
priorities created a gap in their relationship.
 In the past few years, India and Egypt have been steadily pursuing enhanced bilateral
cooperation. This positive trajectory was set in motion by visits from India's Foreign Minister,
Defence Minister, and military chiefs.
 Egypt experienced significant political upheaval during the Arab Spring in 2010, which led to the
ousting of President Hosni Mubarak's 30-year rule. Egypt's political landscape witnessed the rise
of the Muslim Brotherhood, raising concerns for many countries, including India. However, the
subsequent ousting of the Muslim Brotherhood regime and President Abdel Fattah El-Sisi's
renewed ties with Abu Dhabi and Riyadh provided an opportunity for India to rekindle its ties
with Cairo and capitalise on the changing dynamics.
 Presently, India's growing economic influence is defined by its status as the world's most
populous nation and the fifth largest economy, surpassing the United Kingdom. Meanwhile,
Egypt holds the position of being the second largest economy in Africa and is ardently competing
with Nigeria for the top rank.
 Egypt presents itself as a promising hub for trade and manufacturing activities, serving as a vital
gateway for India to access African markets within the framework of the African Continental
Free Trade Area. This positions Egypt as an indispensable nucleus, offering India a strategic
avenue to establish its presence and engage in commercial endeavors across the African
continent. Against this backdrop, the signing of an agreement between the two countries to
elevate the bilateral cooperation to the level of "strategic partnership" has laid a strong foundation
for a renewed collaborations and partnerships between the two countries.
 A multitude of collaborative opportunities exist in various fields such as agriculture, technology,
defence, green finance, South-to-South cooperation, and countering terrorism and violent
extremism. For instance, there is potential for providing IT solutions and technology to the
Egyptian military. However, it's important to acknowledge that expanding military ties requires a
 gradual process of building trust and acceptance within the Egyptian military, which has
historically relied on American military aid and pursued American defence technologies.
 This partnership also encompasses non-tangible aspects such as cultural exchanges and people to
people ties. This emphasis on cultural exchange can promote tourism and create opportunities for
collaboration in the hospitality and tourism sectors.

 Geopolitical Significance
 India and Egypt are situated on opposite sides of the Arabian Sea, and Egypt's dominant presence
in the Red Sea and control over the Suez Canal holds geopolitical importance for India.
 The Suez Canal serves as a crucial link between the Mediterranean Sea and the Red Sea, enabling
access to global markets in Europe and America.
 This makes Egypt a strategic partner for India, facilitating trade and connectivity to vital regions.

 Cultural Relations
 India and Egypt share deep cultural and historical ties that date back to ancient times. These ties
play a significant role in fostering mutual understanding and people-to-people connections,
enhancing the overall relationship.
 The Maulana Azad Centre for Indian Culture (MACIC) was established in Cairo in 1992. The
centre has been promoting cultural cooperation between the two countries.

 Economic Aspects
 India and Egypt are working towards achieving a bilateral trade target of $ 12 billion within the
next five years. India, being one of the fastest-growing major economies globally, seeks to
expand its manufacturing capabilities and views Egypt as a potential market and source of
imports for raw materials and energy resources.
 Currently, India is the sixth largest trading partner of Egypt, while Egypt is the 32nd trade partner
of India.
 Both India and Egypt aim to achieve a bilateral trade target of $12 billion within the next five
years, highlighting their commitment to enhancing trade relations. Indian companies have shown
a significant interest in investing in Egypt. In the past six months, Indian companies have
invested around $200 million in Egypt spanning across various sectors, including infrastructure
development, road and transport, telecommunications, education, and the fast-growing energy
sector. This demonstrates the confidence Indian businesses have in Egypt's economic growth and
potential while showcasing the broad range of opportunities that both countries can explore for
mutual benefit.
 Egypt's significant discoveries of gas fields in the Mediterranean have positioned the country as a
potential source of energy for India. India, as a growing economy, requires a stable energy
supply, and Egypt's natural gas resources can help meet this demand.
 Additionally, Egypt's large agricultural sector presents an opportunity for India to import raw
materials, such as wheat, to meet its domestic needs.

 Defence and Security Cooperation

 Egypt has been seeking new international security partners due to the changing dynamics in the
Middle East and North Africa region.
 Egypt faces challenges from domestic and global terrorist groups, as well as conflicts in
neighboring countries. Therefore, Egypt is keen to modernise its armed forces by acquiring
advanced weapons, technology, and training.
 In 2022, a pact was signed between the two countries that have decided to also participate in
exercises and cooperate in training.
  India, with its growing defence manufacturing capabilities, has become an attractive partner for
Egypt. Both countries have engaged in joint military exercises, and Egypt has shown interest in
procuring Indian defence equipment, including the Tejas light combat aircraft, radars, and
military helicopters.
 The two Air Forces collaborated on the development of fighter aircraft in the 1960s, and Indian
pilots trained their Egyptian counterparts from the 1960s until the mid-1980s.
 Both the Indian Air Force (IAF) and Egyptian Air Force fly the French Rafale fighter jets.
 However, there are certain challenges that need to be addressed for a successful defence
cooperation between India and Egypt. India is still in the early stages of developing its defence
manufacturing capabilities and needs to enhance its logistical support and quality assurance.
 Additionally, Indian industries need to strive to become more competitive in the international
defence trade market, where major players are predominantly based in the US, Europe, and
Russia. Overcoming these challenges will require sustained engagement, improved cooperation
with external manufacturers, increased investments in research and development, and the
adoption of best practices in the field.

 Maritime Security
 The Indian Ocean and the Red Sea are closely interlinked in terms of security. For India, the
security of the Indian Ocean is directly related to the security of the Red Sea, which is controlled
by Egypt.
 Similarly, Egypt recognises that the security of the Suez Canal, a vital artery of international
trade, is influenced by the security situation in the Indian Ocean.
 This mutual interdependence emphasises the need for collaboration and cooperation in maritime
security between India and Egypt. With India's growing emphasis on enhancing its maritime ties,
Egypt's strategic location and control over key waterways make it a valuable partner for India.
 Due to this, both countries have been actively cooperating in this domain.
 Joint naval exercises and sharing of information have played a key role in countering piracy,
smuggling, and other maritime threats. India has provided training and expertise to Egyptian
naval personnel, particularly in coastal surveillance systems.
 By enhancing Egypt's capabilities in maritime surveillance, India contributes to the overall
security of the Red Sea region. Given Egypt's strategic location and control over key maritime
routes, strengthening maritime ties with Egypt is crucial for India.
 The existing collaborations, including joint naval exercises, information sharing, and capacity-
building initiatives, have already contributed to enhancing maritime security in the region.
 As India aims to boost its exports to Europe and America, leveraging Egypt's role as a bridge and
hub becomes increasingly important.
 Therefore, India should continue to explore avenues to deepen its maritime security cooperation
with Egypt to ensure the stability and security of vital maritime trade routes.

 Opportunities for India

 Combat Religious Extremism and Enhancing Counter-Terrorism Cooperation
 India aims to combat Religious Extremism by supporting moderate countries in
the region and promoting social reforms.
 India has identified it as a key player in the Gulf Region since it maintains a
moderate stance on religion, enjoys strong relations with the UAE and Saudi
Arabia (which have made substantial investments in Egypt).
  There is strong convergence between India and Egypt in the fight against religious
extremism and terrorism. Given the global challenge posed by these issues,
cooperation in this area is significant for both nations.
 Strategically Located
 Egypt holds a strategically significant position with the Suez Canal, through
which 12% of global trade passes.
 By enhancing bilateral relations with Egypt, India hopes to advance its goals in
the region.
 Indian Investment
 Egypt seeks investments in infrastructure — Metro projects in Cairo and
Alexandria, a Suez Canal economic zone, a second channel of the Suez Canal,
and a new administrative capital in a Cairo suburb..
 More than 50 Indian companies have invested more than $ 3.15 billion in Egypt.
 Economic potential
 Trade relations between India and Egypt are expanding, with India now among Egypt’s
top ten trading partners. Further, the potential for India to expand its presence in the Suez
Canal Economic Zone (SCZONE) offers exciting opportunities for growing economic
relations. Egypt holds huge potential for the domestic industry in various sectors like
agri-products, steel items and light vehicles.
 Similar Socio-Economic Conditions
 Prolonged economic instability may lead to mass discontent and movement similar to the
2011 revolution.
 Egypt is a large country (population 105 million) and economy ($ 378 billion). It
is politically stable, and its socio-economic conditions are quite similar to India.
 Egypt’s largest imports are refined petroleum, wheat (world’s largest importer),
cars, corn and pharmaceuticals — all of which India has the potential to supply.
 Regional influence
 Egypt, as the largest country in the Arab world and home to the Arab League’s
headquarters, exerts considerable influence in the Middle East and North Africa. An
enhanced relationship with Egypt can aid India’s engagement with the broader region.
 Defence cooperation
 The bilateral defence cooperation has seen a fair bit of activity with joint exercises and
high-level visits. As India shifts its focus towards defence exports, Egypt could be a
potentially significant market.
 During 2015-19, Egypt was the world’s third-largest arms importer. These present
opportunities for India
 Education and knowledge sharing
 The presence of an Indian Centre for Excellence in IT at Cairo’s prestigious Al Azhar
University is indicative of the potential for further educational collaboration and
knowledge sharing between the two nations.

 Challenges
 Economic Crisis in Egypt
 The huge financial commitments of the Egyptian economy have coincided with a static
economy, pandemic, global slowdown and the Ukraine conflict.
 Consequently, tourism has dropped and imports such as cereals have become costly.
Annual Inflation is above 30% and the currency has lost more than half its value.
  Domestic economic instability
 Egypt Government is battling high inflation of 21%, which has resulted in historically high
prices of commodities and daily-use items.
 Its foreign debt is over $163 billion (43% of the GDP) and its net foreign assets are minus
$24 billion.
 Prolonged economic instability may lead to mass discontent and movement similar to the
2011 revolution.
 Political differences
 There have been differences on key international issues. For instance, Egypt has not always
shared India’s position on the United Nations Security Council (UNSC) reforms.
 Regional instability
 Egypt’s geographical location in North Africa places it in proximity to several unstable
regions and conflict zones, including Libya and Sudan.
 This instability can indirectly impact India-Egypt relations by creating uncertainties in areas
of mutual interest such as regional security and economic investment.
 Navigating regional politics
 Both India and Egypt have complex regional relationships to navigate. Balancing these
relationships, particularly as they pertain to issues such as Kashmir for India or the Israeli-
Palestinian conflict for Egypt, could pose challenges.
 China’s growing influence
 China’s growing economic presence in Africa, including Egypt, is another significant
challenge.
 China’s Belt and Road Initiative has been making significant inroads in Africa and this has
increased China’s influence in the region.
 Balancing relations with China while trying to increase India’s economic engagement in
Egypt and the broader African region could be a tricky diplomatic challenge for India.
 Competition with other powers
 Apart from China, there are other global and regional powers also engaging actively with
Egypt, including the United States, European Union countries, Russia, and Gulf States.
 Managing the relationship with Egypt in the face of competition from these powers can pose
diplomatic challenges for India.

 Conclusion
 Presently, India and Egypt find themselves in a world where their interests align in maintaining
safe spaces with the growing competition between the United States and China and safeguarding
their national interests amid Russia's conflict with Ukraine.
 However, this alignment does not come without complexities, as countries like the United Arab
Emirates and Saudi Arabia also aspire to play significant roles in a multipolar order.
 While there may be a temporary alignment of interests to counterbalance major powers, there will
inevitably be an undercurrent of competition among these countries within the global order.
Contrary to some views, this healthy competition can drive positive outcomes rather than being
detrimental.
 The two sides are also pursuing closer cooperation in green energy, pharmaceuticals and
defence, with MoUs in agriculture, archaeology and antiquities, and competition law.
 India needs to carefully balance its exposure to Egypt with the opportunities on hand.

Bolstered by historical ties, and buffeted by present-day geopolitical turmoil,

it is clear that India and Egypt are now essaying a closer relationship, one
that looks both at future economies and autonomous foreign policies.
 India-France Partnership
 India France Relations Historical Aspect
 In the 17th century, Mughal Emperor Aurangzeb had a French physician named François Bernier.
 The French were the last colonial power to enter into trade with India. It was only in the seventeenth
century that they did so, decades after the English and the Dutch entered into India for commercial
purposes.
 Like all colonial powers of that time, the French came in as traders but had greater aspirations.
 The French East India Company was founded in 1664.
 They started meddling in the internal politics of the subcontinent and played their cards to their advantage.
Even though they had a few successes in the beginning and were able to establish trading posts, the English
ultimately ended up as the supreme power in the Indian subcontinent.
 The French were left with a few disparate colonies, all of which combined were called French India. These
places were Pondicherry, Mahe, Yanam, Karaikal and Chandannagar.
 During the Indian freedom struggle against the British, many freedom fighters, such as Aurobindo Ghosh
and Subramanya Bharathi took refuge in French India to escape from the British.
 In 1947, France established diplomatic relations with an Independent India.
 In 1948, an agreement was signed between both countries that stated that the people of French India were
free to choose their political future.
 In August 1962, as per the Treaty of Cession signed in 1956, the French ceded all their possessions in India
to the Indian government. Accordingly, all the former French colonies were administered as the Union
Territory of Puducherry.
 The Cold War clamped limitations on the partnership. However, when the Cold War ended, Paris decided
that its preferred partner in the Indian Ocean region would be India.
 In January 1998, President Jacques Chirac declared that India's exclusion from the global nuclear order was
an anomaly that needed to be rectified.
 After the nuclear tests in May 1998, when India declared itself a nuclear-weapon State, France was the first
major power to open a dialogue and displayed a far greater understanding of India's security compulsions,
compared to the rest of the world.
 It was the first P-5 country to support India’s claim for a permanent seat in an expanded and reformed UN
Security Council.
 The original three pillars of the strategic partnership were:
 Nuclear  Space  Defence
 Gradually, others were added:
 Counterterrorism  Addressing the climate crisis
 Intelligence sharing  Renewables and green energy resources
 Cyber security  Urban planning
 Tackling radicalisation  Developing public-private partnerships for
 Maritime cooperation urban infrastructure.

 Significance of India-France Relationship

 Strategic Dialogue
 France is the first country with which we initiated a Strategic Dialogue after our 1998 nuclear tests
when France refused to impose bilateral sanctions on India and displayed a far greater understanding
of India’s security compulsions compared to other countries.

 Brexit
 In the past, Indian companies saw the UK as the entry point to Europe; but now with Brexit, France
can position itself as India's entry point for Europe and Francophonie.
 Opening an Indian consulate in Marseille and a French office in Hyderabad will help, together with
more direct flights.
 Trade between two countries
 With an annual trade volume of $15 billion, France is our fifth-largest trading partner in the European
Union.
 The two sides also recognised the importance of fast tracking the discussions on an India-EU trade and
investment agreement.
 There are nearly 1,000 French companies present while over a hundred Indian businesses have
established a presence in France and (FDI) is estimated to be $10 billion.

 Defence
 Defence cooperation began in the 1950s when India acquired the Ouragan aircraft and continued with
the Mysteres, Jaguar (Anglo-French), Mirage 2000 as well as Alize and Alouette helicopters.
 While the earlier defence purchases were straight acquisitions, the new focus is on developing
domestic capabilities.
 An agreement for building six Scorpène submarines in India with French help was signed in
2005.Technology sharing and acquisitions of short-range missiles and radar equipment were
concluded.
 Joint exercises between the air forces (Garuda series) and the armies (Shakti) were instituted in 2003
and 2011, respectively. Some of them are:
o Exercise Shakti (Army) o Exercise Pegas
o Exercise Varuna (Navy) o Exercise Desert Knight (Air Force)
o Exercise Garuda (Air Force)
 Similarly, the agreement for acquiring 36 Rafale aircraft concluded in 2016 carried a requirement of
50% offsets amounting to ₹ 28,000 crores.
 A new agreement for 26 Rafale Marine for the aircraft carrier is under discussion.
 On the civilian side, Indigo and Air India have signed a deal for 750 Airbus aircraft, and Airbus is
expanding its network of Indian original equipment manufacturers (OEMs) as well as considering
establishing maintenance, repair and operations (MRO) facilities.
 Both countries are developing a roadmap for defence-industrial cooperation to strengthen the defence
pillar.

 Tourism
 While there are only about 20 flights a week between India and France, there are four times as many to
Germany and 10 times as many to the UK.
 So the number of flights between India and France has to be increased.

 Maritime cooperation
 In 2018, the two countries agreed on a joint strategic vision for cooperation in the Indian Ocean that
has now been extended to the Pacific, with the new Indo-Pacific road map. Unlike other European
countries, France, with its overseas territories of Reunion Island, New Caledonia and French
Polynesia, is a resident power in the region.
 The new road map is broader and covers preservation of marine biodiversity, sustainable development
of maritime resources, deployment of renewables such as solar energy in the region, helping small
island States develop resilient infrastructure and establishment of an Indo-French health campus.
 China’s angle
o Like India, France has expressed concern about China’s growing presence in the Indian Ocean
Region.
o French overseas territories in the Indian and the Pacific Oceans provide it with the second-largest
exclusive economic zone globally. It has long maintained bases in Reunion Islands and Djibouti
and established one in Abu Dhabi in 2009.
o Strengthening cooperation with France, particularly in the western Indian Ocean Region makes
eminent strategic sense even as India develops its presence in Oman (Duqm) and Seychelles
(Assumption Island).
o More synergy between the two navies in the Gulf area where France has a base (in Abu Dhabi)
and better mutual understanding of the implications of a Chinese base in Gwadar is important for
India.
 Energy Sector
 An agreement was signed about a decade ago for building six EPR (European Pressurized Reactors)
nuclear power reactors with a total capacity of 9.6 GW for which negotiations have been on-going
between the Nuclear Power Corporation of India (NPCIL) and Areva.
 On green energy The International Solar Alliance is set in motion jointly by India and France.
 France offered an extra $ 870 million for solar projects in developing countries.

 Space
 Earlier France assisted India to set up the Sriharikota launch site in the 1960s.
 Today, it is a relationship of near equals and the ‘vision statement’ refers to world-class joint missions
for space situational awareness, high resolution earth observation missions with applications in
meteorology, oceanography and cartography.
 Inter-planetary exploration and space transportation systems are cutting edge science and technology
areas that have also been identified.
 Collaboration for Mission Gaganyaan as Space agencies of India and France inked an agreement for
cooperation for the country’s first human space mission Gaganyaan.

 Education
 The most significant agreement is the focus on youth and student exchanges.
 An estimated 6000 Indian students study in France
 Currently, about 2,500 Indians go to France annually to pursue higher education, compared to more
than 250,000 from China.
 The most significant development at the people-to-people level is the growth in the number of Indian
students and their newfound ability to get two-year work visas after their education.
 The target of 10,000 students a year by 2025 has been met and now for postgraduate students, the visa
has also been extended to five years.

 Environment
 India and France had launched the Indo-French Year of the Environment in January 2021 to strengthen
cooperation on these issues and ensure coordination ahead of these multilateral events.
 With the objective to strengthen Indo-French cooperation in sustainable development, increase the
effectiveness of actions in favour of global environment protection and give them greater visibility.
 It is also a platform for engaging in discussions on critical areas of collaboration relating to the
environment and allied areas.
 The Indo-French Year of the Environment is based on five main themes:
o Environmental protection
o Climate change
o Biodiversity conservation
o Sustainable urban development
o Development of renewable energies and energy efficiency

 Climate Change
 France and India are strengthening their cooperation for the environment and the fight against
climate change. The Agence Française de Développement (AFD) started working in India in
2008, and has a mandate focused on the preservation of global public goods.
 The International Solar Alliance (ISA), jointly launched by France and India in November
2015 during COP21, promotes the development of solar energy
 The blue economy and coastal resilience are shared priorities for France and India, which
intend to strengthen cooperation in the field of marine scientific research and their mutual
knowledge of the oceans.
 Cultural Cooperation
 Indian culture enjoys wide admiration among the people of France. The Indian Council of
Cultural Relations (ICCR) regularly sends Indian cultural troupes to France.
 India and France organize reciprocal festivals, aiming to promote their culture.
 In France, the Namasté France festival is held while in India, Bonjour India is organized.
  Science and Tech
 The Indo-French Centre for the Promotion of Advance Research (CEFIPRA), formed in 1987, funds
joint proposals for research in the sciences. Its research has led to several patents.
 Since 2013, CEFIPRA also awards Raman-Charpak scholarships to scholars of Indian and French
origins.

 Indian Diaspora in France

 There are more than 1 lakh NRIs in France, chiefly originating from the former French colonies.
 A good number of Indian origin persons also live in the French Overseas Territories of Reunion Island,
Martinique, Guadeloupe and Saint Martin. Most of them were taken to these territories as indentured
labourers during colonial times.

 Challenges in India-France Relations

 Absence of Free Trade Agreement (FTA)
 Despite having good relations, France and India don’t have a Free Trade Agreement
(FTA) between them.
 Further, no progress is being made on the India-EU Broad based Trade and Investment agreement
(BTIA) as well.

 Defence and Security Cooperation

 Despite a strong defence partnership, the two countries have different priorities and approaches
towards defence and security cooperation.
 India's focus on its neighborhood and its "non-aligned" policy can sometimes clash with France's
global interests.

 Trade Imbalances
 Despite being significant trade partners, there is a trade imbalance between India and France, with
France exporting more to India than the other way around.
 This imbalance has been a source of concern for India, and both countries are looking for ways to
address it.

 Intellectual Property Rights

 India has been criticized by France for not adequately protecting intellectual property rights, which
has affected French businesses operating in India.

 China’s Factor
 China's increasing dominance in the Indian Ocean region has become a source of concern for both
India and France, as it has the potential to disrupt the regional balance of power and undermine
regional stability and security.

 Political Cooperation
 France’s commitment to Belt & Road Initiative is in stark contrast to India’s stand as well;
hence the strategic differences between the two nations
 Also, the cooperation on Indo-Pacific is merely symbolic, which need further review in the
comnig years

 Way Forward
 Increased Trade and Investment
 The two countries can work towards increasing bilateral trade and investment.
 This can be done through measures like setting up joint ventures, expanding trade agreements, and
promoting cross-border investment.
  Defence Cooperation
 India and France have a strong defense relationship, and this can be further strengthened through
increased cooperation in areas like joint military exercises, defense technology transfers, and
collaboration in defense production.

 Cultural Exchange
 Encouraging cultural exchange between the two countries through programs like student
exchanges, arts and cultural events, and language programs can help to deepen the relationship and
foster mutual understanding.

 Climate Change and Energy

 India and France can work together to address the global challenges of climate change and energy
security.
 This can be done through collaboration on clean energy research and development, promoting the
use of renewable energy, and reducing carbon emissions.

 Scientific and Technological Cooperation

 The two countries can collaborate in areas of science and technology, including research and
development, innovation, and the transfer of technology.
 This can help to enhance the competitiveness of their economies and create new opportunities for
growth.

 Conclusion
 France is a crucial partner for India, and needs to play a key role in terms of India’s strategy in
the Indo-Pacific, honouring climate commitments, combatting challenges to the global tech order
and rebuilding resilience in multilateralism.
 By reinforcing shared values and commitments to these challenges, the France -India partnership
can be taken to a new level this decade.
 Similarities between India and France’s definition of the Indo-Pacific strategy being one of
inclusivity, sovereignty, engagement and freedom of navigation creates room for cooperation
 By building coalitions to constrain behaviour fr om China and defending values of multilateralism,
India and France must translate their converging views on the Indo-Pacific into action
 France and India can work towards building strengthened coalitions within existing multilateral
systems.
 The two countries must continue to work together in areas such as maritime domain awareness,
terrorism, cybercrime, piracy, disaster relief and the blue economy. Engagement on a multilateral
level through the QUAD, ASEM and trilateral engagements such as the India -Australia-France
dialogue must also take place.
 France and India are making strategic commitments to each other for the long term.
 These two middle powers share a similar worldview. Both nations pursue independent foreign policies and
value strategic autonomy, as they believe it will empower them to influence a multipolar world.
 Importantly, both countries recognize that their collective efforts will significantly enhance the likelihood
of achieving this goal.
 There are immense opportunities for greater collaboration in diverse sectors such as trade and investments,
defence and security, health, education, research and innovation, energy and climate change.

The French connection has both deepened and broadened, and

reflects a reassuring stability in a world marked by increasing
uncertainties and new rivalries. One of India’s oldest friendship
must now train it’s eyes on the next decade.
 Inflation
 Inflation
 Inflation refers to the rise in the prices of most goods and services of daily or common
use, such as food, clothing, housing, recreation, transport, consumer staples, etc.
 Inflation measures the average price change in a basket of commodities and services
over time.
 The opposite and rare fall in the price index of this basket of items is called ‘deflation’.
 Inflation is indicative of the decrease in the purchasing power of a unit of a country’s
currency. This is measured in percentage.
 Evaluation:
 In India, inflation is primarily measured by WPI (Wholesale Price Index) and CPI
(Consumer Price Index), which measure wholesale and retail-level price changes,
respectively.
 The Monetary Policy Committee (MPC) uses CPI data to control inflation.
 MPC, led by the RBI governor, is responsible for reducing inflation to 4% over the
medium term, while maintaining it between 2% and 6% in the long run.

 Types of Inflation
 Demand-Pull Inflation: This type of inflation is caused due to an increase in aggregate
demand in the economy.
 Causes of Demand-Pull Inflation:
 A growing economy or increase in the supply of money – When consumers feel
confident, they spend more and take on more debt. This leads to a steady increase in
demand, which means higher prices.
 Asset inflation or Increase in Forex reserves– A sudden rise in exports forces a
depreciation of the currencies involved.
 Government spending or Deficit financing by the government– When the government
spends more freely, prices go up.
 Due to fiscal stimulus.
 Increased borrowing.
 Depreciation of rupee.
 Low unemployment rate.
 Effects of Demand-Pull Inflation:
 Shortage in supply
 Increase in the prices of the goods (inflation).
 The overall increase in the cost of living.
 Cost-Push Inflation: This type of inflation is because of decrease in aggregate supply of
goods and services results into increase in cost of production. It is caused due to various
reasons such as:
 Increase in price of inputs  Crude oil price fluctuation
 Hoarding of commodities  Defective food supply chain
 Defective Supply chain  Low growth of Agricultural sector
 Increase in indirect taxes  Food Inflation
 Depreciation of Currency  Interest rates increased by RBI
  Cost pull inflation is considered bad among the two types of inflation because
the National Income is reduced along with the reduction in supply in the Cost-push type
of inflation.
 Built-in Inflation: This type of inflation involves a high demand for wages by the workers
which the firms address by increasing the cost of goods and services for the customers.

 Factors Causing Inflation

 Demand Side inflation is caused by high demand and low production or supply of
multiple commodities create a demand-supply gap, which leads to a hike in prices due
to increase in consumption; Also, Increase in exports which undervalues rupee; Also,
the excess circulation of money leads to inflation as money loses its purchasing power
With people having more money, they also tend to spend more, which causes
increased demand.
 Cost Pull inflation is caused by shortage of factors of production like labour, land,
capital etc. and also due to artificial scarcity created due to hoarding.

 Measurement of Inflation
 Wholesale Price Index (WPI): It is estimated by the Ministry of Commerce & Industry
and measured on a monthly basis.
 Consumer Price Index (CPI): It is calculated by taking price changes for each item in the
predetermined lot of goods and averaging them.
 Producer Price Index: It is a measure of the average change in the selling prices over time
received by domestic producers for their output.
 Commodity Price Indices: It is a fixed-weight index or (weighted) average of
selected commodity prices, which may be based on spot or futures price
 Core Price Index: It measures the prices paid by consumers for goods and services without
the volatility caused by movements in food and energy prices. It is a way to measure the
underlying inflation trends.
 GDP deflator: It is a measure of general price inflation.

 Effect of Inflation on Indian Economy

 The effect of inflation is not distributed evenly in the economy. There are chances of
hidden costs for different goods and services in the economy.
 Sudden or unpredictable inflation rates are harmful to an overall economy. They lead to
market instability and thereby make it difficult for companies to plan a budget for the
long-term.
 Inflation can act as a drag on productivity as companies are forced to mobilize resources
away from products and services to handle the situations of profit and losses from
inflation.
 Moderate inflation enables labour markets to reach equilibrium at a faster pace.
 The purchasing power of a currency unit decreases as the commodities and
services get dearer.
 This also impacts the cost of living in a country. When inflation is high, the cost
of living gets higher as well, which ultimately leads to a deceleration in economic
growth.
 A certain level of inflation is required in the economy to ensure that expenditure
is promoted and hoarding money through savings is demotivated.
  Inflation Targeting In India
 Inflation is measured by a central government authority, which is in charge of
adopting measures to ensure the smooth running of the economy. In India, the
Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation measures inflation.
 RBI through its Monitory Policy Committee Controls Inflation with its tools to
control Money supply in the market.

 Pros and Cons of Inflation Targeting In India

 Inflation targeting is a monetary policy in which a central bank has an explicit target
inflation rate for the medium term and announces this inflation target to the public. It will
have price stability as the main goal of monetary policy.
 Many central banks adopted inflation targeting as a pragmatic response to the failure of
other monetary policy regimes, such as those that targeted the money supply or the value
of the currency in relation to another, presumably stable, currency.
 Pros:
 It will lead to increased transparency and accountability.
 Policy will be linked to medium/long term goals, but with some short term
flexibility.
 With inflation targeting in place, people will tend to have low inflation
expectations. If there was no inflation target, people could have higher
inflation expectations, encouraging workers to demand higher wages and firms
to put up prices.
 It also helps in avoiding boom and bust cycles.
 If inflation creeps up, then it can cause various economic costs such as
uncertainty leading to lower investment, loss of international competitiveness
and reduced value of savings. This can also be avoided with targeting.
 Inflation targets can have various benefits, especially during ‘normal’
economic circumstances.
 Cons:
 It puts too much weight on inflation relative to other goals. Cent ral Banks
Start to Ignore More Pressing Problems like unemployment.
 Inflation target reduces “flexibility”. It has the potential to constrain policy in
some circumstances in which it would not be desirable to do so.
 Cost-push inflation may cause a temporary blip in inflation.
 It cannot help remove supply bottlenecks and shortages .
 It cannot help external shocks, exchange rate might suffer in the short run
 Growth and employment might take hits in the short run.

 Various Methods of Combating Inflation

 Monetary Policy (Contractionary policy)
 Monetary policy is one of the most commonly used measures taken by the
government to control inflation. It uses tools like – Bank rate, Repo Rate, Open
market operations, etc.
 The monetary policy of the RBI is aimed at managing the quantity of money in order to
meet the requirements of different sectors of the economy and to boost economic growth.
  This contractionary policy is manifested by decreasing bond prices and increasing
interest rates. This helps in reducing expenses during inflation which ultimately helps halt
economic growth and, in turn, the rate of inflation.
 Fiscal Policy
 The two main components of fiscal policy are government revenue and
government expenditure. In fiscal policy, the government controls inflation either
by reducing private spending or by decreasing government expenditure, or by
using both. It reduces private spending by increasing taxes on private businesses.
 When private spending is more, the government reduces its expenditure to control
inflation. However, in present scenario, reducing government expenditure is not
possible because there may be certain on-going projects for social welfare that
cannot be postponed.
 Monetary policy is often seen separate from fiscal policy which deals with taxation,
spending by government and borrowing. Monetary policy is either contractionary or
expansionary.
 When the total money supply is increased rapidly than normal, it is called an
expansionary policy while a slower increase or even a decrease of the same refers to a
contractionary policy.
 It deals with the Revenue and Expenditure policy of the government.
 Tools of fiscal policy:
 Direct Taxes and Indirect taxes – Direct taxes should be increased and indirect taxes
should be reduced.
 Public Expenditure should be decreased (should borrow less from RBI and more
from other financial institutions)
 Price Control
 In this method, inflation is suppressed by price control, but cannot be controlled for
the long term. The historical evidences have shown that price control alone cannot
control inflation, but only reduces the extent of inflation.
 Supply Management measures
 Import commodities that are in short supply.
 Decrease exports.
 Government may put a check on hoarding and speculation.
 Distribution through Public Distribution System (PDS).
 Fuel duty cut
 Further duty cuts by some amount atleast ₹5 per litre according to experts.
 It has immediate and secondary impact on electricity, transport cost..
 Food Prices:
 Crackdown on supply side if hoarding happens.
 Ease import limits on pulses, oil seed.
 More duty cuts:
 More duty cuts for edible oil imports is required.
 Buffer stock:
 Prepare to use buffer stock if inflation spills over to cereals.
 1% rise in WPI primary food prices can go up CPI by 48 bps.
 Other measures:
 Press for faster growth
 Address supply bottlenecks.
 Boost income generating capacity to reduce burden on low income households.
 Government Steps to Control Inflation
 Controlling inflation has been a priority area for the Central Government. Every year the
Government takes number of steps to control inflation:
 Advisories are being issued, as and when required, to State Governments to take
strict action against hoarding & black marketing and effectively enforce the
Essential Commodities Act, 1955 & the Prevention of Black-marketing and
Maintenance of Supplies of Essential Commodities Act, 1980 for commodities in
short supply.
 Regular review meeting on price and availability situation are being held at the
highest level including at the level of Committee of Secretaries, Inter Ministerial
Committee, Price Stabilization Fund Management Committee and other
Departmental level review meetings.
 Higher MSP has been announced so as to incentivize production and thereby
enhance availability of food items which may help moderate prices.
 A scheme titled Price Stabilization Fund (PSF) is being implemented to control
price volatility of agricultural commodities like pulses, onions etc.
 The Government approved enhancement in buffer stock of pulses from 1.5 lakh
MT to 20 Lakh MT to enable effective market intervention for moderation of retail
prices. Accordingly, a dynamic buffer stock of pulses of upto 20 lakh tones has
been built.
 Pulses from the buffer are being provided to States/UTs for PDS distribution,
Mid-day Meal scheme etc. The requirement of pulses by Army and Central Para -
military Forces.
 States/UTs have been advised to impose stock limit on onions. States were
requested to indicate their requirement of onions so that import of requisite
quantity may be undertaken to improve availability and help moderate the prices.

 Conclusion
 Inflation in a controlled manner is for the better good of the country’s growth.
 CPI and WPI usually measure inflation.
 If inflation is not regulated, it causes volatility in inflation and leads to an imbalance in the
country’s economy.
 There are various causes of inflation in India that can’t be overlooked due to their effect on
the Indian economy.
 During inflation in the country, the intensity of the people’s purchasing reduces to the
increased prices of the goods and services. The value of currency units decreases during high
inflation rates, and the cost of living also increases, leading to poor economic growth.
 Hence, measures to control inflation against the rapid increase in its rate must be followed to
monetise the country’s economy and people’s welfare.

Inflation helps as it aims to check and measure the overall

changes in price for a large set of services and products. It
also allows representation of the increasing price of goods
for a certain period for a single value.
 Judicial Reforms in India
 Judicial Reform
 Judicial reform refers to changes or improvements made to the legal system, including the court
system, laws, and procedures.
 These reforms aim to increase the efficiency, transparency, and effectiveness of the justice
system, ensuring that it upholds the rule of law and provides fair and timely justice to all citizens.
 Judicial reforms may involve changes to laws and regulations governing the legal system, the
structure and organization of the court system, the appointment and training of judges, the
procedures and rules of evidence used in trials, and the use of technology to improve court
operations.
 The justice system is the principal instrumentality in satisfying the undertakings in the
Constitution.
 The average citizen has greater trust and confidence in the judiciary.
 Speedy justice is a prerequisite for maintaining the rule of law and delivering good governance.
 Therefore, judicial reforms should be made the prime development agenda.

 Need for Reforms

 Backlog of cases: One of the major issues facing the Indian judiciary is the backlog of cases,
with over 30 million pending cases across all courts in the country. This leads to a delay in justice
delivery and denies people their right to a timely resolution of their disputes
 Lack of access to justice: A large section of the population in India, especially the marginalized
and vulnerable groups, faces difficulties in accessing justice due to various factors such as
distance, cost, and complexity of legal procedures. This leads to a denial of justice and
perpetuates social inequality.
 Quality of judgments: There are concerns about the quality of judgments being delivered by the
Indian judiciary, with some judgments being criticized for their lack of reasoning, coherence, and
consistency.
 Infrastructure and technology: The Indian judiciary also faces challenges in terms of
infrastructure and technology, with many courts lacking basic facilities and using outdated
technology, leading to inefficiencies and delays.
 Appointment and accountability of judges: There have been concerns about the transparency
and accountability of the process of appointment of judges, as well as the performance and
conduct of judges themselves.

 Present Issues
 Delay in Justice.
 Low Performance of India on ease of doing business because of lag in 'enforcement of contract'
largely due to the inefficient judicial system.
 The National Judicial Data Grid shows there are 2.54 crore cases pending in subordinate courts..
 The system is unable to keep pace with new cases being instituted in our diverse economy.
 Barring the metros and state capitals, most of the subordinate courts lack basic infrastructure for
judges, court staff and litigants.
 Judicial procedure is very complex and costly putting the poor at a distance from justice.
 Judicial overreach.
  Judicial ineffectiveness is to a great extent responsible for the increase in crimes like rape,
murder, looting, cheating and so on.
 Supreme Court had quashed the government's attempt to form National Judicial Appointments
Commission (NJAC) to expedite the appointment process.
 The logjam between Judiciary and Executive can only result in distress for the public.
 Financing of the judicial system has not been adequate.
 An increase in crimes against women and increase in the reporting of criminal activities, have
contributed to rise in the workload of the judiciary.
 Thus reforms both at lower and higher levels of judiciary are urgently required to keep the pillars
of democracy stronger and powerful.

 Aspects of Judicial Reforms

 Modernization of the legal system: The Indian government has been implementing various
technological initiatives to modernize the legal system. This includes digitization of court records,
online filing of cases, and e-court services. This has helped to reduce delays and improve access
to justice.
 Increase in the number of judges: There is a severe shortage of judges in India. The
government has taken steps to increase the number of judges in the courts by creating new
positions and filling vacancies. This is expected to help reduce the backlog of cases pending in
the courts.
 Alternative Dispute Resolution: Alternative Dispute Resolutions were founded in Indian
Constitution under Article 14 and Article 21 which mention Equality for law and the Right to Life
and Personal Liberty. The government has been promoting alternative dispute resolution
mechanisms such as mediation and arbitration as a means of resolving disputes outside of the
court system. This helps to reduce the burden on the courts and provides a quicker and less
expensive means of dispute resolution
 Legal aid: The Indian government has been providing legal aid (Article 30A) to those who
cannot afford to hire a lawyer. This helps to ensure that everyone has access to justice, regardless
of their financial status.
 Fast-track special courts: The government has established fast-track courts to deal with cases
involving crimes against women and children, as well as other cases that require speedy
resolution.
 Reforms in the criminal justice system: The government has been implementing various
reforms in the criminal justice system to ensure that the innocent are not wrongly convicted, and
the guilty are not let off. This includes measures such as improving forensic capabilities, ensuring
timely investigation and prosecution, and protecting the rights of the accused.

 Judicial Appointment
 In India, there are two main ways of judicial appointment:
 Collegium System
o The Constitution alludes to the procedure of appointment of judges to the SC and HCs in
Article 124 and Article 217 respectively. The Collegium System is a system of
appointment of judges in the higher judiciary, which includes the Supreme Court and the
High Courts.
o It is a system where the Chief Justice of India and a group of senior-most judges of the
Supreme Court recommend the names of judges for appointment to the President of
India.
o This system was introduced by a series of judgments by the Supreme Court in the 1990s
and has been in operation since then.
  National Judicial Appointments Commission (NJAC)
o In 2014, the Parliament of India passed the National Judicial Appointments Commission
Act under the 99th Amendment of the Indian Constitution, which sought to replace the
Collegium System with a Judicial Appointments Commission.
o The JAC was a body that consisted of the Chief Justice of India, two senior-most judges
of the Supreme Court, the Union Minister of Law and Justice, and two eminent persons
nominated by a committee consisting of the Prime Minister, the Chief Justice of India,
and the Leader of Opposition in the Lok Sabha.
o However, the Supreme Court struck down the Act in 2015, ruling that it was
unconstitutional.

 Criticism of Collegium System

o Lack of transparency: The Collegium system operates largely in secrecy, with no public
disclosure of the criteria used for the appointment or transfer of judges. This lack of
transparency can lead to allegations of favouritism and nepotism. It also is a violation of
Article 74 of the Indian Constitution which requires proper scrutiny and accountability.
o Lack of accountability: Since the appointment of judges is entirely in the hands of the
Collegium, there is no external oversight or accountability. This can lead to a situation
where judges are appointed based on personal biases or political affiliations.
o Dilution of executive power: The Collegium system has been criticized for diluting the
power of the executive branch of the government in the appointment of judges. This can
lead to a situation where the judiciary becomes dominant over the other branches of the
government.
o Limited diversity: The Collegium system has been criticized for not ensuring adequate
representation of marginalized communities, including women, Dalits, and minorities, in
the higher judiciary.
o Uncle Judges Syndrome: This means that senior judges make recommendations for the
appointment of other judges. It refers to the alleged tendency of judges to favour their
own protégés or relatives for appointments. Critics argue that this undermines the
principle of merit-based appointments and creates a culture of nepotism and favouritism.

 Judicial Accountability
 Judicial accountability refers to the concept that judges should be held accountable for their
decisions and actions in a fair, transparent, and impartial manner.
 In India, the Constitution provides for the independence of the judiciary and the principle of
judicial accountability. However, in recent years, there have been concerns about the lack of
accountability of judges, particularly in higher judiciary.
 Areas of Conflict
 Separation of powers: The Constitution provides for a clear separation of powers between
the judiciary and the other branches of government. While the judiciary should be
accountable, it should not be subjected to political interference or influence.
 Judicial independence: The independence of the judiciary is crucial for maintaining the
integrity and impartiality of the judicial process. However, complete independence can
sometimes lead to a lack of accountability. Therefore, striking a balance between judicial
independence and accountability is crucial.
 Transparency: Transparency is essential for ensuring accountability. However, the judiciary
operates in a highly sensitive and complex environment, and complete transparency can
sometimes compromise the confidentiality and security of the judicial process. Therefore,
balancing the need for transparency with the need for confidentiality is a delicate task.
  Right to privacy: Judges, like other citizens, have a right to privacy, and their personal lives
should not be subjected to undue scrutiny. However, in cases of judicial misconduct, there
may be a need to investigate their personal lives to establish the facts. Balancing the right to
privacy with the need to investigate can be a challenging task.
 Judicial hierarchy: The judiciary operates in a hierarchical structure, with senior judges
having more power and authority than junior judges. This can sometimes lead to a lack of
accountability, with senior judges having the power to influence appointments and
disciplinary proceedings. Ensuring accountability in such a structure requires a robust system
of checks and balances.

 Reforms
 Judicial Standards and Accountability Bill: The Judicial Standards and Accountability Bill,
2010 was introduced in the Lok Sabha to regulate the conduct of judges and to establish a
mechanism for investigating complaints of misconduct against them. The bill provides for the
establishment of a national judicial oversight committee to investigate complaints of misconduct
and to recommend action against erring judges.
 Disciplinary proceedings: The Supreme Court has laid down the procedure for initiating
disciplinary proceedings against judges. The procedure provides for the appointment of a
committee to investigate complaints of misconduct and to recommend action against the erring
judge. The Supreme Court can also initiate suo moto proceedings against a judge for misconduct.
 Public scrutiny: Public scrutiny of judicial decisions and actions can act as a check on the
judiciary. The media and civil society can play a crucial role in holding judges accountable by
reporting on cases of judicial misconduct and highlighting instances of corruption or bias in the
judiciary. The live streaming of Supreme Court proceedings is a means of public scrutiny and
transparency, allowing citizens to observe the court’s proceedings and decisions in real-time. This
can enhance public trust in the judiciary and promote accountability.
 Judicial education: Judges need to be trained in ethics and the principles of judicial conduct.
Regular training and education programs can ensure that judges are aware of their responsibilities
and are equipped to discharge them in a fair and impartial manner.

 Judicial Pendency
 Judicial pendency refers to the backlog of cases that are pending in courts. In India, judicial
pendency is a significant issue that affects the efficiency and effectiveness of the judicial system.
There are several reasons for judicial pendency, including:
 Lack of judicial infrastructure: One of the main reasons for judicial pendency is the lack of
judicial infrastructure, including courts, judges, and support staff. There is a significant
shortage of judges and courtrooms, which results in delays in the disposal of cases.
 Delay in the appointment of judges: There is often a delay in the appointment of judges,
which further exacerbates the problem of judicial pendency. The delay in appointment can be
attributed to various factors, including bureaucratic red tape, lack of political will, and
disputes between the executive and judiciary over the appointment process.
 Procedural delays: Procedural delays, such as adjournments, continuances, and transfer of
cases, can also contribute to judicial pendency. These delays are often caused by the absence
of witnesses, lawyers, or judges, and can result in cases dragging on for years.
 Lack of technology: The lack of technology in the Indian judiciary, such as digitization of
records and online filing of cases, can also contribute to judicial pendency. This can result in
delays in accessing records and in the processing of cases.
 Government is the biggest litigant: The government is involved in a large number of legal
disputes as a party, either as a plaintiff or a defendant. Thus, the government should invest in
modernizing and upgrading the judicial system to reduce delays and backlogs.
 Way Forward
 Increase in the number of judges
 The shortage of judges is a significant cause of judicial pendency. Therefore, increasing the
number of judges in the courts can help reduce the backlog of cases.
 The government should fill up the vacancies in the courts and increase the number of judges
in proportion to the number of pending cases.
 Appointment of ad hoc or additional judges to clear pending cases.
 Use of technology
 The use of technology can help streamline court procedures, reduce paperwork, and increase
the efficiency of the judicial system.
 Digitization of court records, online filing of cases, and virtual hearings can help reduce
delays and speed up the disposal of cases.
 Just like automation powered by AI is already helping doctors, it can also be leveraged to
assist judges and lawyers
 Alternative dispute resolution mechanisms
 Alternative dispute resolution mechanisms, such as mediation and arbitration, can help reduce
the burden on courts and speed up the disposal of cases.
 Encouraging parties to settle disputes outside of court can help reduce the backlog of cases.
 Case management
 Effective case management can help reduce delays in the disposal of cases.
 The courts should develop a robust case management system that tracks the progress of cases,
identifies cases that require priority attention and sets realistic deadlines for disposal of cases.
 There should be a mechanism to regulate frivolous litigations.
 Increase in the number of courts
 The number of courts should be increased to ensure that the judicial system can handle the
volume of cases, reduce the backlog of cases and increase the efficiency of the judicial
system.
 More judges, streamlining procedures using technology and increase the judge-population
ratio to reduce delays and cut costs.
 State and Union governments should work hand in hand to address the shortage of basic
infrastructure such as courtrooms and essential facilities for judges.
 Action against corrupt judges
 Constitute a Performance Commission with powers to take consequential action. Many US
States have such commissions, which examine complaints about the conduct of a judge.
 Creation of a transparent, full-time independent judicial complaints commission to investigate
complaints against judges.
 Time-bound disposal of cases
 Need for speedy delivery of justice and unburdening higher courts.
 The time-bound disposal of cases can help reduce the backlog of cases. The government
should set realistic timelines for the disposal of cases and ensure that the courts adhere to
these timelines. Time limits for taking decision are to be prescribed like Slovak republic
where disposal of cases in less than 60 days.
 Set up specialized commercial fast track courts to expedite the enforcement.

These changes must be brought on urgent basis,

As justice delayed is justice compromised.
 KHELO INDIA
NATIONAL PROGRAMME FOR DEVELOPMENT OF SPORTS
 Sports is an extremely important component for the overall development of our nation. India, in the
last few years has made steady progress in the field of sports. This tremendous potential needs to be
showcased at a global platform. It’s time we inspire young talent, give them top-notch infrastructure
and training of the highest level. We need to inculcate a strong spirit of participation in sports that
enables players to demonstrate their true potential. Only then can India realise its dream of becoming
a sports superpower.
 The importance of sports and fitness in one’s life is invaluable. Playing sports inculcates team spirit,
develops strategic & analytical thinking, leadership skills, goal setting and risk taking. A fit and
healthy individual leads to an equally healthy society and strong nation.
 The Khelo India programme has been introduced to revive the sports culture in India at the grass-root
level by building a strong framework for all sports played in our country and establish India as a great
sporting nation.

 What is the Khelo India Programme?

 About
 Khelo India, which translates to ‘Let’s play India’, was proposed by the government of
India in 2017 to revive India’s sporting culture by engaging with children at the grassroots
level.
 The initiative also focused on building better sporting infrastructure and academies across
the country for various sports.
 It is implemented by the Ministry of Youth Affairs and Sports.
 Competitions Under Khelo India
 Under this movement, the Khelo India Youth Games (KIYG), the Khelo India University
Games (KIUG) and the Khelo India Winter Games were set up as annual national sports
competitions where youngsters, representing their states and universities, respectively,
showcased their skills and competed for medals.
 Significance
 Reviving Traditional Sports:
 Khelo India has played a crucial role in restoring the prestige of India's traditional
sports.
 The government has provided scholarships to promote and encourage indigenous
sports such as Gatka, Mallakhamb, Thang-ta,and Yogasan. This initiative has helped
preserve and popularise these traditional sports among the youth.
 Integration of Sports in Education:
 Khelo India aligns with the proposal of the National Educational Policy 2020 to
incorporate sports as a subject within the curriculum and the construction of the
country’s first National Sports University will further strengthen the cause.
 Empowering Women Athletes:
 Khelo India has taken significant steps towards promoting women's participation in
sports through initiatives like the Khelo India Women's League.
 Organised in several cities, this league has witnessed the active participation of
approximately 23,000 women athletes.
 Centres of Excellence:
 Khelo India also supports the establishment of state-of-the-art sports facilities across
India, called Khelo India State Centres of Excellence (KISCE).
  These centres aim to provide basic facilities for sportspersons with potential and
cater to three sporting disciplines each.
 Some of the KISCEs are:
o Rajiv Gandhi Stadium, Aizawl
o Kalinga Stadium, Bhubaneshwar
o Khuman Lampak Sports Complex, Imphal
 To accomplish the above objectives, Khelo India programme has been divided into 12
verticals:
 Play field development
 Community coaching development
 Support to National, regional, state sports academics
 Physical fitness of school children
 Promotion of sports amongst people with disabilities
 Sports for women
 State-level Khelo India Centres
 Annual sports competition
 Sports for peace and development
 Talent search and development
 Utilisation and creation or upgradation of sports infrastructure
 Promotion of rural and indigenous or tribal games

 Objectives Of the Khelo India Programme

 The main objectives of the Khelo India Programme launched by the central government are:
 The Khelo India Programme intends to promote "Sports for Excellence" as well as "Sports
for All".
 Mass youth participation in annual sports competitions through a structured competition
 Identification of sports talent in individuals and nurturing and guidance of the talent through a
new set of existing sports academies either by the Central Government, state government or
in Public-Private Partnership (PPP) mode.
 Creation of sports infrastructure at district, mofussil, tehsil, state levels, etc.
 Creation and Upgradation of Sports Infrastructure
 Sports Competitions and Talent Development
 Khelo India Centres and Sports Academies
 Fit India Movement
 Promotion of Inclusiveness through Sports
 It works to promote “Sports for All” and “Sports for Excellence”.
 It aims at creating an active nation with healthy citizens.

 Creating Champions
 Khelo India aims to identify talented athletes, establish and enhance sports infrastructure at the
block, district, and state levels, and encourage widespread participation of young individuals in
annual sports competitions through well-planned tournaments.
 The monitoring and development of potential sportspersons are facilitated by existing sports
institutions, as well as newly established ones by both state and central governments or through
public private partnerships.
 Identifying sports potential at an early stage is invaluable as it allows for the training of children
with the greatest aptitude for a specific sport from a young age.
 For this purpose, the Khelo India Mobile App is utilised to assess over 2.3 million school-aged
children, ranging from 5 to 18 years old. Moreover, more than 66,000 physical education
instructors have been trained to evaluate the athletic abilities of children.
  The most crucial aspect of identifying talent correctly lies in creating a competent pool of skilled
coaches at the grassroots level. Consequently, efforts have been made to enhance the skill sets of
physical education teachers and equip them with knowledge as community coaches, following
international best practices.
 Through the Khelo India Scheme, over 30,000 physical education instructors have been trained as
community coaches.

 Post-COVID Recovery Initiatives

 The COVID-19 pandemic exerted a significant impact on athletic endeavors in India, as the
outbreak of the virus compelled the cancellation or postponement of the majority of events and
competitions.
 The Indian sports industry suffered substantial financial losses due to these event cancellations,
with estimates suggesting that the epidemic could cost the sector up to ₹ 90 billion. Nevertheless,
in the face of this crisis, the Indian sports industry displayed resilience and gradually commenced
its recovery in the latter half of 2020.
 Moreover, in July 2020, the government unveiled the Khelo India State Centre of Excellence
(KISCE) initiative, aiming to provide top-tier training and coaching facilities to young athletes in
the nation. This plan has facilitated the enhancement of the country's training infrastructure.
 Significant facilities developed under the Khelo India program involve allocating monthly
financial assistance to chosen athletes, as well as providing support for coaching, training,
equipment, diet, and nutrition. Specialised sports academies have been established to focus on
Olympic achievements.
 Furthermore, in collaboration with National Sports Federations, assistance has been extended to
500 private academies through the Khelo India Plan, ensuring that athletes have access to sports
facilities nationwide and can train at convenient locations.
 The number of sports infrastructure projects has seen a remarkable surge, rising sharply. Some
noteworthy infrastructure developments include the refurbishment and improvement of
Bhubaneswar's Kalinga Stadium for the 2018 Men's Hockey World Cup. The stadium currently
stands as a state-of-the-art sports venue with cutting-edge facilities. Likewise, the Jawaharlal
Nehru Stadium in New Delhi underwent renovations to meet global standards in preparation for
the 2019 South Asian Games. It now serves as a multi-sport complex, housing facilities for
athletics, football, and various other sports.
 Furthermore, the Sports Authority of India (SAI) has established multiple training centers across
the country, offering young athletes access to world-class training amenities such as swimming
pools, gymnasiums, and sports science laboratories.

 Challenges And Issues

 There is a dearth of supporting infrastructure.
 Absence of encouragement to young people to participate in sports.
 Lack of organized system of talent search.
 Gender bias against girls and women.
 Lack of remuneration and job security.
 Administrative issues due to lack of codification of rules and lack of transparency.

 Benefits Of Khelo India Programme

 Khelo India scheme strengthens and revamps the sports culture of India at the grassroots level.
 Khelo India Programme promotes "sports for all" and "sports for excellence".
 It is a Pan-Indian sports scholarship programme that annually awards funding to the 1000 most
talented players across all sports.
  Sporting culture is developed by identifying, developing and encouraging talent in sports
discipline.
 Athletes who got selected are given scholarships of ₹ 5 lakhs for 8 consecutive years.
 This scheme encourages schools and colleges to organize sports events and competitions of a
high standard.
 It advertises 20 universities across the nation as a centre for athletic achievement.
 The program facilitates deprived and poor youth to engage in sports rather than in unproductive
work.
 The scheme covers around 200 million children between 10 to 18 years under a massive National
Physical Fitness Drive.

 Employment Benefits to Khelo India Participants

 While the primary objective of the Khelo India program is to develop sporting prowess, it can
also have an indirect impact on participants' career prospects.
 Engaging in the program enhances their likelihood of securing positions in the armed forces,
securing scholarships or sponsorships, and advancing their education and life skills.
 Moreover, certain entities within the sports and fitness industry offer additional advantages for
employment opportunities. A notable illustration is the Sports Authority of India (SAI), which
considers participation in the Khelo India Youth Games and Khelo India University Games as
desirable qualifications for various positions.

 Effect of Khelo India Programme

 The Khelo India Programme has a wide-ranging impact on various aspects of the sports
environment in India, including facilities, coaching, recognition programmes, effective
functioning, sports economics, and competitive structure.
 The Khelo India Scheme has established a framework for fostering a sporting culture in India by
providing annual competition platforms and creating sports infrastructure nationwide.
 The Khelo India Youth Games, Khelo India Winter Games, and Khelo India University Games
provide a platform for young athletes in the under 17 and 18 age categories to compete at the
national level. Through these games, young athletes can showcase their skills and talent and
compete with other athletes from different parts of the country.
 The scheme provides financial assistance for developing sports infrastructure, such as
playgrounds, stadiums, and training facilities.
 The Khelo India Programme has implemented specific programmes to support and empower
women in sports, giving them equal opportunities to showcase their talent and excel in their
chosen sport.
 The Khelo India Programme provides various benefits to athletes, including out-of-pocket
allowances and access to training resources for indigenous sports in elite facilities.
 Further, improved training facilities and cash assistance provided to divyangs or physically
challenged people have contributed to a more inclusive and supportive environment for these
athletes.
 The Khelo India Programme also aims to improve coaching standards by providing training to
coaches at various levels.

 Impact of Khelo India Scheme

 A comprehensive mechanism was created through Khelo India to build a sporting culture by
identifying and developing talent by providing annual competitive platforms, infrastructure across
the country.
 Through the annual Khelo India Youth Games and University Games, athletes of age groups of
U17 and U21 have got a chance to showcase their sporting talent annually, at the national level.
  The Khelo India MobileApp launched by Hon’ble PM in 2019 has assessed the fitness parameters
of more than 23 lakh school children, thus identifying future sporting talent from the age of 5
years.
 Special scheme to promote indigenous games and athletes. Athletes of indigenous games are
given Out-of-Pocket Allowance (OPA), training facilities in top-end centres.
 Specific schemes were put in place to empower women to make a mark in sports, as well as
strengthened support to divyangs in the form of financial grants, better training facilities.

 Other Schemes For Promoting Sports

 National Centre of Sports Sciences and Research (NCSSR)
 It aims to support high-level research, education, and innovation with respect to the high
performance of elite athletes.
 The scheme has two components: One is setting up of NCSSR and the other is focused on
funding the creation of Sports Sciences Departments in Six Universities and Sports Medicine
Departments in Six Medical Colleges.
 Target Olympic Podium Scheme (TOPS)
 Its goal is to find, develop, and get ready future medal contenders for the Olympic and
Paralympic Games. In accordance with this program, athletes and sportspeople will receive
specialized instruction from renowned coaches at cutting-edge sports facilities and
institutions.
 A similar program called Junior TOPS, which targets kids as young as 10 to 12 years old and
aims to create Olympic champions in 2028, was also introduced by the government in 2020.
 National Sports Development Fund (NSDF)
 It was founded in November 1998 in accordance with the Charitable Endowments Act of
1890 in order to promote sports and games across the nation.

 India’s Progression In Sports

 The nation has been taking home more medals from international competitions.
 Government backing for the sport has grown, and that must be acknowledged. For the purpose of
promoting India’s sports industry, the government has started a number of projects.
 The sport now has more private sector participation. Additionally, the expansion of private
academies that are involved in sport development at different levels is strengthening the resources
accessible to our athletes.
 Businesses have stepped up to sponsor talented athletes individually, displaying a level of
dedication that was previously lacking.

 Conclusion
 Khelo India Programme is related to the promotion of sports development. It is a central sector
scheme. India is taking essential steps in promoting sports and athletes; therefore, it's time to
encourage youthful talent and provide them with the best facilities and training available.
 Sports participation must be strongly encouraged in order for players to reach their full potential;
only then can India fulfil its dream of becoming a sports superpower-dominated country.
 There are many untapped potentials in Indian sports that haven’t yet been realised.
 However, now is the ideal time to reconfirm our commitment, alter the way we view sports, and
transform India’s sports landscape.

Khelo India programme is essential for modification of the athlete and for the
development of sports culture of India. And it also help full for the athlete for
his/her all round development- mentally and physically.
 Kisan Drones
Introduction
The annual budget 2022-23 has given a push for the use of drones in farming, public-private partnership
PPP model to deliver digital and high-tech services and chemical free natural farming. This is a new
chapter in direction of modern agricultural facilities of 21st century and open the sector to unlimited
possibilities. The Prime Minister flagged off 100 kisan drones remotely in different towns and cities in
order to help the farmers in spraying of pesticides in their farms.

Kisan Drones will be used to boost the agricultural sector in the country, the use of Kisan Drones will be
promoted for crop assessment, digitization of land records and spraying of insecticides and nutrients.

The development of the drone market in India will generate fresh employment and new opportunities for
the youth. And this step was taken as the government aims to promote chemical-free national farming.

Kisan Drone will usher in a new edge revolution as high capacity drones will be used to carry vegetables,
fruits, fishes to the market directly from the farms. "These items will be supplied directly to the market
with minimal damage, consuming lesser time, resulting in more profits to farmers and fishermen,"

Steps Taken by the Government to Promote Kisan Drones

The Drone Shakti scheme was pushed in the budget where start-ups were encouraged for manufacturing
of drones and facilitate Drone-as-a-service (DrAAS). ITIs to start skilling for large scale employment
opportunity. In this direction, the Sub-Mission on Agricultural Mechanization (SMAM) took the initiative
to make drones more accessible to the farmers. The financial aid and grants are as under:-
 100 percent or Rs 10 Lakhs, whichever was less as grant to Farm Machinery Training and testing
Institutes, Indian Council of Agricultural Research institutes and State Agricultural Universities.
 Agricultural graduates setting up Custom Hiring Centres (CHCs) will get 50 percent or up to Rs 5
Lakhs as grant.
 Existing CHCs, or being set up by Cooperative society of farmers, Farmers Producers Organizations
(FPOs) and rural entrepreneurs to get 40 percent or up to Rs 4 Lakhs as grant. Rural entrepreneurs are
people who have passed Class X and have remote pilot license from DGCA recognized institute.
 FPOs will get 75 percent as subsidy if drones purchased for demonstration purpose.
 Rs 6,000 per hectare will be given to implementing agencies hiring drones for demonstration purpose
and Rs 3,000 per hectare if purchased for same purpose.
 Subsidy in this sector will make the technology affordable and widespread adoption and help
domestic production.

Use of Drones in Agriculture Sector

 Assessment of crops yield and losses due to calamities.
 Digitization of land records.
 Spraying of insecticides and nutrients.
 Help is precision agriculture which is an IT based farm management being followed worldwide. This
will help in inspiring efficiency, reduce cost and better quality.
 Planting of seeds in the future.
 Transportation of vegetables, fruits and flowers to minimize cost and time in the future.
Advantages of Using Drones in Agriculture
 Enhanced production due to accurate measurement, soil mapping, segments of various crops, which
in turn help better farm management, monitoring and adaption to environmental changes.
 Effective and adaptive techniques by using drones which will allow less wastage of resources and
better adaptability to weather variance.
 Creater safety to farmers as manual spraying leads to health issues.
 Useful for insurance claims as drone’s data will be accurate and trustworthy for crop damage claims.

Challenges in Using Drones for Agriculture

 Flight time and flight range is a limitation. The present drones have a flight time of approximately 20
minutes. This limits the acreage coverage.
 The drones which can be used for the agricultural sector purpose are costly.
 The drones are weather dependent and vulnerable in bad weather as compared to traditional aircraft.
 Data collection may not be accurate.
 The interpretation of the data collected needs special skills and knowledge which may be difficult for
the farmers.

In Indian context
 When it specifically comes to India, our agriculture is faced with multiple challenges like high
dependence on monsoon, resource intensiveness – heavy use of resources (water, inorganic fertilisers
and pesticides), degradation of land and loss of soil fertility, and low per hectare yield, among others.
 Agriculture continues to employ 49 per cent of the workforce and contributes to only 16 per cent of
the country’s GDP.
 Improvement in agriculture would, therefore, positively impact the well-being of a very large section
of the Indian population, apart from delivering food security to our country.
 Feeding over a billion Indians on limited land resources is a big challenge - a task that requires
technological intervention on a large scale, to enable a giant leap in agricultural productivity.

Conclusion And The Way Forward

 The digital revolution is touching every sphere of life and hence it is high time to bring agriculture in
its ambit.
 The MoUs to rope in the private sector can help in quicker modernisation of farms, easier access to
various schemes and subject matter knowledge.
 Such practices must be studied in depth via pilot projects and extended to the whole of India.
 The emphasis on digital infrastructure for infusion of agriculture technologies in a PPP mode will be
the need of the hour in the next 25 years to combat the serious threat of climate change, Kisan drones'
are the beginning of a new revolution.
 Farmers can use high-capacity drones in the coming times to transport their produce like fruits,
vegetables and flowers to markets in a minimal time, boosting their income.
 The drones would go a long way in addressing the acute labour shortage faced by farmers.
 The government needs to frame policies, install infrastructure to keep a tab on the drones and put in
place policies for opening up the sector.

Promotion of drone in agriculture is a welcome step that can usher in development but it will require
collaborative effort of all stake holders (manufacturers, Government agencies and Agriculture institutes)
along with awareness and capacity building of farmers to achieve its true potential. This is a new chapter
in providing modern farming facilities in the 21st century, and not only will it prove to be a milestone in
the development of the drone sector but also open infinite possibilities. Innovative technology will
empower our farmers and make agriculture more profitable.
 Mission MAHIR
(Mission on Advanced and High-Impact Research)
Driving Advanced Research & Innovation in Power Sector
 What is MAHIR?
 Power and Energy are two essential inputs for economic development and improving the
quality of life in India. Development of conventional forms of energy for meeting the
growing energy needs of society at a reasonable cost is the responsibility of the Government.
 Advanced and high-impact research on the latest and emerging technologies related to the
energy sector is an immediate necessity. In order to stay ahead in the rapidly advancing world
of innovation, it is crucial to quickly identify emerging technologies and develop the
technologies indigenously, at scale, for deployment within and outside the country.
 Such technologies will serve as the main fuel for the economic growth in future and make
India a manufacturing hub of the world.
 Towards this end, the Ministry of Power and Ministry of New & Renewable Energy (MNRE)
have planned for end-to-end development of advanced technologies to make the future power
system in the country robust and advanced so that India takes the lead in the disruptive
technologies in the power sector, as to ensure self-reliance in meeting our energy needs with
wide societal and commercial benefits. To leverage emerging technologies in the power
sector, a national mission MAHIR has been launched by the two Ministries.
 Mission on Advanced and High-Impact Research (MAHIR) aims to identify emerging
technologies in the energy sector and take them to the implementation stage.
 The mission will serve as a catalyst for national priorities such as achieving 'net zero'
emissions and promoting initiatives like Make in India and Start-up India.
 It will also contribute towards achieving the United Nations Sustainable Development Goals
(SDGs). With a projection of India's growth rate of 7% in the coming years, the electricity
demand is expected to increase at close to 10%.
 Furthermore, India is aiming for an energy transition following the vision of LiFE which
requires not only massive investment but also a transformational approach driven by research
& innovation.
 In this regard, MAHIR will work towards Industry Academia-Government collaboration to
create an ecosystem for innovation and translation of research in the power sector.
 The Mission will work with premier institutions such as IITs, IIMs, NITs, IISERs and
Universities on the one hand and public and private power sector startups and established
industries on the other, with the government acting as an enabler for creating an innovation
ecosystem.

 Mission Objectives Š
 To identify emerging technologies and areas of future relevance for the global power sector
and take up indigenous end-to-end development of relevant technologies
 To provide a common platform for power sector stakeholders for collective brainstorming,
synergetic technology development and devise pathways for smooth transfer of technology
 To support pilot projects of indigenous technologies (developed especially by Indian start-
ups) and facilitate their commercialization
 To leverage foreign alliances and partnerships to accelerate research & development of
advanced technologies and to build competencies, capabilities and access to advanced
 technologies through bilateral or multilateral collaborations, thereby facilitating exchange of
knowhow and technology transfer
 To seed, nurture and scale up scientific and industrial R&D and to create vibrant &
innovative power sector ecosystem
 To make India a leading country in power system related technologies & applications
development

 Areas Identified for Research

 To begin with, eight areas are identified for research:
 Alternatives to Lithium-ion storage batteries.
 Modifying electric cookers/pans to suit Indian cooking methods.
 Green hydrogen for mobility (high efficiency fuel cell).
 Carbon capture.
 Geo-thermal energy.
 Solid state refrigeration.
 Nano technology for EV batteries.
 Indigenous CRGO technology.

 Structure of the Mission

 Two- Tier Structure
 It has a two-tier structure consisting of a Technical Scoping Committee and an Apex
Committee.
 The Apex Committee
 It deliberates on technology and product development, approves research
proposals, and looks into international collaborations.
 The Apex committee will look also into international collaborations. The final
approval of all the research proposals / projects shall be given by the Apex
Committee.
 It is chaired by the Union Minister for Power & New and Renewable Energy.
 Technical Scoping Committee (TSC)
 It identifies research areas, recommends potential technologies, and monitors
approved research projects.
 It is chaired by the Chairperson of the Central Electricity Authority.
 Central Power Research Institute (CPRI), Bengaluru will provide all necessary
secretarial assistance to the Apex Committee and Technical Scoping Committee.

 Funding
 It will be funded by pooling resources from the Ministry of Power, Ministry of New &
Renewable Energy, and Central Public Sector Enterprises under these ministries.
 Additional funding, if required, will be mobilized from the Government of India's
budgetary resources.

 Scope of the Mission

 Once research areas are identified and approved, outcome-linked funding proposals will be
invited globally.
 Quality cum Cost-Based Selection (QCBS) basis will be used for selecting the proposals.
  Pilot projects of technologies developed by Indian start-ups will be funded, and their
commercialization will be facilitated.
 International collaboration and technology transfer will be encouraged.
 The start-ups will have to share the IPR with the Government of India/ Central Power
Research Institute. The Mission will facilitate international collaboration for smooth
exchange of know-how and Technology Transfer.
 The Mission will be responsible for seeking collaboration with the best laboratories of the
world for joint development of technologies.

 Key Modalities
 Planned for an initial period of five years from 2023-24 to 2027-28, the Mission will follow
the technology life cycle approach of 'Idea to Product'.
 Proposals will be invited from companies/educational institutes/reputed universities/research
laboratories/ research organisations/ industries/startups/other reputed agencies across the
globe. The initial scrutiny of the proposals will be carried out by the Mission Secretariat and
subsequently screened by the Technical Scoping Committee. Based on the recommendation
of the TSC, projects will be placed before the Apex Committee for final consideration.
 A centralised web portal for Mission will be created on the cloud which will provide
collective information of running status of all the activities under the Mission. Such a portal
will be a dynamic repository of information on all activities/components, resources and
outputs, associated with the Mission. This will be maintained and continuously updated for
monitoring the progress of the Mission by the Mission Secretariat.

 Significance of the MAHIR

 Indigenous Development
 By developing advanced technologies within the country, India can reduce its
dependence on imports, enhance self-reliance, and promote domestic innovation and
manufacturing capabilities.
 It aligns with the "Make in India" initiative and contributes to the growth of
indigenous technology-driven industries.
 Energy Transition and Net Zero Emissions
 MAHIR can support the adoption of cleaner and greener energy sources, energy
storage solutions, and carbon capture techniques.
 This contributes to India's commitment to combating climate change and transitioning
towards a sustainable energy future.
 Economic Growth and Manufacturing Hub
 MAHIR aims to make India a manufacturing hub for advanced power technologies.
 By developing and deploying cutting-edge technologies, it can attract investments,
foster innovation-driven industries, and create job opportunities.
 With the launch of MAHIR, the Indian government aims to foster an innovative
ecosystem in the power sector, enhance research and development capabilities, and
position India among the leading countries in power system technology and applications
development.

By identifying emerging technologies and taking them to the implementation

stage, the Mission seeks to leverage them as the main fuel for future economic
growth and thus make India a manufacturing hub of the world.
 Medical Tourism
Taking India's Healing Touch To The World
India has established a rock-solid foothold as the 'Global Medical Destination' by attracting the entire
world's attention and trust on its high-end healthcare ecosystem and world-class medical facilities. The
integral philosophy of Indian hospitality is 'Atithi Devo Bhava' (guest is akin to God). With this in mind,
Indians believe in going out of the way in treating their guests with the same reverence as God.

Healthcare is a $9 trillion industry globally, in which India’s share is a meager $160-180 billion. The
healthcare industry of the USA alone is $3trillion. Indian healthcare industry is presently growing at 17%
annually.

Global medical tourism industry is a $45.5-$72 billion industry and approximately twelve million patients
travel abroad spending an average of USD 3,800-6,000 per visit, including medically-related costs, visa
and local transport, inpatient stay and accommodations. The industry is experiencing a double digit
growth in India and various estimates peg the size of the Indian medical tourism industry at $7-8billion in
2020 and set to grow at a rapid rate every year.

 What is Medical Tourism?

 The term 'medical tourism' refers to planned international travel to receive cutting-edge medical
care.
 Medical tourists cross international borders to maintain, enhance, or restore their health by
utilizing affordable healthcare services and procedures available in other countries.
 Medical tourism's primary benefits include improved healthcare, ground-breaking medications,
sophisticated technologies, improved hospitality, and personalized treatment.

 India's Position on Medical Tourism Map

 Medical tourism is one of India's fastest growing industries, which has experienced exponential
growth in recent years, and is predicted to have substantial growth in the years to come. India is
the ideal destination for medical value tourism because India offers a distinct amalgamation of a
holistic health and wellness ecosystem and its myriad opportunities.
 India is currently ranked 12th in terms of inbound medical tourism spending, which is a result of
the country's strong and supportive government policies, which include the adoption of 'Medical
Visa' and focused marketing campaigns.
 To make traveling smoother for medical tourists, a new category of 'Medical Visa' has been
introduced as part of a policy that the Indian Ministry of Tourism has developed to encourage
tourists seeking to come to India for medical counseling and treatment. At the moment, visitors
can fill an online application form, pay the requisite fee online, and get a digital copy of their
Medical eVisa.
 The following figure represents the number of Foreign Tourist Arrivals (FTAs) in India on
Medical Visa which has shown a growth of around 41% from 2017 (4.95 lakhs) to 2019 (6.95
lakhs). As the figure reflects, in 2020 (1.83 lakhs), the footfalls of foreign tourists reduced
significantly, mainly due to the COVID-19 pandemic. Subsequently, in 2021 (3.04 lakhs), the
footfalls again started increasing for medical purposes in India and in 2022 (4.9 lakhs) visited
India.
 According to the Bureau of Immigration, Govt. of India, the top countries from where foreign
tourists arrived in India for medical purposes in 2020 include Iraq (93.4%), Maldives (76.1%),
Yemen (69.9%), Nigeria (53.1%), Afghanistan (34%), Sudan (30.3%) and Oman (28%).
 India's Competitive Edge
India offers various advantages in the field of medical tourism but the most important ones are as
follows:
 India is a popular destination that offers various tourist attractions, historical landmarks,
pilgrimage sites, fine handicrafts, unique fairs and exhibitions in different regions. As a result,
there are always possibilities of combining pleasure and recreation with medical rejuvenation.
 The main criteria that travelers seek in medical tourism is 'more for less', i.e., they seek high-end
medical facilities at affordable rates. There is a common perception that as compared to many
wealthy countries, India provides value for money to medical tourists.
 India is one of the world's fastest-growing hubs for information technology (IT). IT has become
the backbone of the healthcare industry. Hence, the IT boom has triggered demand and
accessibility, thus, boosting medical tourism.
 The initiatives undertaken by the public and private sectors offer a variety of services, including
easy and smooth accessibility to Medical Visas, frequent flights and other modes of domestic
transportation systems to travel to and fro, affordable tour packages tailored to travelers' needs,
more accessibility to the internet and other communication facilities, availability of certified
drugs and medicines within easy reach, adding to the advantage in medical tourism.

 Challenges To Medical Toursim

 Brain drain
In the countries with a pool of talented doctors and nurses like India, it is a major
challenge to retain these professionals. There is shortage of such skilled professionals in
most countries across the globe and thus they are offered the best salaries abroad. Brain
drain takes place due to lack of opportunities in the home country.
 Lack of infrastructure
Many developing countries including India face problems due to poor infrastructural
support in medical services. There are problems related to proper water and power
supply, poor hygiene in hospitals including unhygienic surroundings, untidy staff and low
quality food and lodging, along with poor air connectivity to support patients’ inflow in
the country.
 Lack of professionalism
The medical staff in most developing countries lacks professionalism and behavioral
aspects. The soft skills of medical workforce like warmth, concern, and friendliness, and
professional skills like interpersonal skills, loyalty and appearance are still
underdeveloped and it negatively influences the customers’ service experience.
 Difficulties in promotion
The countries like India also suffer from problems of promotion in medical tourism.
There is a lack of quality accreditation and regulation in the hospitals and other medical
service providers. Apart from this there is no uniform pricing and standardization of
services acting as barrier in building customers’ trust on the services offered.
 Legal problems
One of the serious concerns in medical tourism relate to differences in laws in different
countries. There are no uniform laws and moreover, in most countries there are weak
laws for malpractice in medical services which leave patients with fewer options to fight
for their rights in case they are cheated or if something goes wrong during the whole
medical process.
 Government Initiatives to Boost Medical Tourism

 'Heal in India' & 'Heal by India'

The PM has an optimistic vision for the country's potential to become a global center for medical
tourism, serving and saving millions of lives every year. He established the goal of the 'Heal in
India' campaign to further promote medical tourism, with all the macro elements favoring
significant investments into the Indian medical tourism sector. This allows our medical workforce
to travel the globe and contribute to a healthy global society. India is committed to developing its
traditional medicine sector and promoting the 'Heal in India' and 'Heal by India' initiatives to
become a global hub for medical value.

 AYUSH Visa/eVisa
India is working towards the creation of a new category for AYUSH Visa/eVisa. It is a
component of the 'Heal in India' campaign, which advocates for conventional medical travel. The
PM announced the launch of a special category of AYUSH Visa for tourists coming to India for
AYUSH medical tourism, education, or treatment, including Yoga, during the opening ceremony
of the "Global AYUSH Investment and Innovation Summit" held on April 20, 2022, in
Gandhinagar, Gujarat. While modalities are being worked out for rolling out the AYUSH Visa for
persons traveling to India from other nations to receive Ayurvedic treatment, 165 countries have
made medical and attendant Visa provisions for receiving Ayurvedic medicine.

 National Strategy and Roadmap for Medical and Wellness Tourism

The Ministry of Tourism's strategy document on medical tourism focuses on the following key
points:
 Develop a brand for India as a wellness destination
 Strengthen the ecosystem for medical and wellness tourism
 Enable digitalization by setting up an Online Medical Value Travel (MVT) portal
 Enhancement of accessibility for Medical Value Travel
 Promoting wellness tourism
 Strengthening governance and institutional framework.

 Publicity and Promotion

To provide a dedicated institutional framework to promote medical tourism, the government has
constituted the National Medical and Wellness Tourism Board. As part of its ongoing activities,
the government releases global reports, both printable and electronic, and online media
campaigns that are essential for promotion overseas under the 'Incredible India' brand line. This
helps to promote various tourism destinations and products of the country. Moreover, the
Government provides financial assistance under Market Development Assistance Scheme to
Medical Tourism Service Providers accredited by NABH for participation in Medical/ Tourism
Fairs, Medical Conferences, Wellness Conferences, Wellness Fairs, and allied Road Shows.

 Globalization of Medical Tourism Market

 India has a long and illustrious medical history dating back to the Vedic era. Ayurveda, one of the
earliest systems of medicine, may be traced back to 8000 BCE. Numerous medical specialties
have emerged, including Naturopathy, Unani, Siddha, Sowa-Rigpa, and Homoeopathy. Yoga and
meditation have also grown in prominence and are now well recognized for their positive effects
on health. India has developed a distinctive ecosystem for holistic health that blends the finest of
contemporary healthcare, alternative medicine, and wellness in the wake of its independence as
the country has advanced dramatically in modern medicine.
 Over the past few decades, new healthcare service production and consumption patterns have
emerged due to the expansion of international trade in medical technology, capital funding, and
regulatory frameworks. The medical systems practiced in India, including Ayurveda, Yoga,
Panchakarma, Rejuvenation Therapy, etc., are some of the oldest in the world. India can offer
affordable, highend medical and health services.
 The primary purpose is achieving, promoting, or maintaining good health and a sense of
wellbeing. Kerala, one of the Southern Indian states, has established stellar health and healing
facilities as significant products to promote tourism. Ayurvedic Centers are becoming a common
feature of newgeneration hotels and resorts.
 Most international visitors now solely travel to India for Ayurvedic treatment and rejuvenation.
The top tourism companies have Ayurvedic treatments listed in their brochures. If appropriate
attention is paid to health and medical tourism, the growth of this sector may considerably
escalate. Listed below are some of the emerging facts about India's medical tourism sector:
 India boasts of high-grade medical professionals and facilities.
 The cost of the treatment is far lower than it would be in the source markets.
 Various medical procedures do not have a long waiting period.

 Eastern healthcare knowledge combined with Western medical knowledge is becoming more and
more attractive compared to Western tourism destinations.
 On the government's recommendation, the Indian Healthcare Federation, a non-profit
organization affiliated to the Confederation of Indian Industry (CII), has created a guide on
specific Indian hospitals nationwide for 'health tourism' purposes. For further promotion, it has
been posted on the Ministry of Tourism's website, www.incredibleindia.org. The Ministry of
Tourism has created brochures, CDs, and other publicity materials to promote medical and health
tourism and these items have been widely distributed for exposure in target areas.
 Medical and health tourism has been primarily marketed at numerous international venues, like
World Travel Mart in London and ITP Berlin. All State Governments have received a copy of the
accreditation standards for Ayurvedic and Panchkarma centers for implementation. For more
exposure, these have been posted on the Ministry of Tourism website, www.incredibleindia. org.
 Under the 'Incredible India Campaign' of the Ministry of Tourism, Yoga, Ayurveda, and Wellness
have been promoted during the past two years in print, electronic, online, and outdoor media. The
Indian Healthcare Federation brings together pharmaceutical, medical equipment, and non-
government hospitals and diagnostic facilities.
 The Federation's primary goal is to support and advance the nation's healthcare business. It aims
to serve as a conduit for communication between the government, healthcare providers, suppliers
of medical equipment, and other healthcare organizations.
 India is ranked third among the top 10 nations in the Asia Pacific for health, making it essential in
Medical Value Tourism (MVT). Medical Value Tourism from an Indian perspective offers
comprehensive health and welfare and spreads the richness of Indian hospitality via the merging
essence of its food, nature, and culture. Remarkably, India may be the only nation with a whole
Ministry devoted to complementary medicine, anti-aging treatments, and Yoga. A deliberate
effort is being made to move the world's population away from the cycle of illness and treatment
and toward a lifestyle of preventative and holistic health, including mental, bodily, and spiritual
well-being. MVT is founded on knowledge of the behavior of the 21stcentury citizen when
seeking health, as opposed to healthcare. Ayurveda, Yoga, and meditation remain today's timeless
pillars of Indian wellness tourism. Significant attempts are being made to revitalize and promote
alternative remedies and stress relieving and rejuvenation therapies.
 The Way Forward
 A new paradigm in the healthcare industry allows the government to act as a facilitator with
sensible trade laws to guarantee a seamless value chain. Policymakers must concentrate on Indian
healthcare establishments that welcome medical tourists from underdeveloped nations who come
for skillful operations, with cost and surgical competency of utmost importance.
 The administrative authorities need to start training programs to develop their capacity in the
medical tourism industry. By expanding their healthcare services internationally, private hospitals
can collaborate with foreign embassies to influence policy and attract financially supported
medical tourists. India has a diverse portfolio of niche tourism products - cruises, adventure,
medical, wellness, sports, MICE (Meetings, Incentives, Conferences and Exhibitions),
ecotourism, films, rural and religious tourism.
 It is significant to emphasize that Medical Value Tourism encompasses many other therapeutic
methods, such as yoga and spiritual retreats, and is not just for wellbeing. For these particular
getaways, many tourists from different countries travel to India. Several places in India, including
Uttarakhand, Kerala, Maharashtra, Goa, and Karnataka, already provide Yoga, meditation, and
health retreats. With the Ayush Visa set to be implemented in the coming days, India may
anticipate an increase in foreign travelers, moving towards new Medical Value Travel locations.
 The government is improving medical tourism through exhibitions, trade fairs, and affiliations
with international organizations. When hospital management is directly involved in promoting
services globally, in that case, there will be little room for further doubt in the minds of
prospective medical professionals, and the healthcare sectors will prosper effectively.
 The varying roles that stakeholders have played over the years have resulted in significant
changes in medical tourism. The increased competition has attracted a variety of additional
players to the industry. Policymakers, the local community, and other private players have
primarily contributed to the internationalization of Indian healthcare systems.
 The process of creating capacity can be improved by becoming more proficient at providing
healthcare services and having a less complicated healthcare network. Quality and standard
assurance are vital criteria for evaluating medical institutes' potential for success .
 Tourism encompasses multiple ministries and takes place in and within many states and thus
requires collective efforts and cooperation with centre and other states.
 To truly ensure a seamless tourist transportation experience we need to standardise all interstate
road taxes and make them payable at a single point which will facilitate the ease of doing
business.
 With growing competition businesses need to adapt and keep pace with the latest technology to
ensure growth and sustainability.
 Indian healthcare sector is much diversified and is full of opportunities in every segment, which
includes providers, payers, and medical technology.
 Tax incentives to the service providers, import duty reduction on medical equipment,
committees to promote and foster medical tourism can be undertaken. There is also a need to
develop supporting infrastructure such as transport services to facilitate tourism in India. The
tourism, health, information and communication departments need to work in tandem for
efficient patient care. These include building and promoting the image of India as a high-quality
medical tourism destination, creating and promoting new combination of medical tourism
products, keeping up the high standard of quality treatments at a reasonable price, providing
informative material online and offline and making it available to potential customers.
 India’s competitive advantage also lies in the increased success rate of Indian companies in
getting Abbreviated New Drug Application (ANDA) approvals. To sum up, our efforts are in
the right direction, and with effective initiatives, India would emerge as the next best medical
tourism destination in a post-pandemic era.
 My Aspirations for New Age India
Introduction
India's democracy, the world's most populous, is a marvel of the modern age: 1.3 billion people that
communicate more than 700 languages beneath one roof. Almost 1/6th of mankind lives in India.

At first glance to make India better on a more profound level, it is only a fantasy. It mirrors an
irrepressible desire, to see India, Indians and the Indian economy at the top of the global ladder.

Poor public services, high inflation, crippling corruption and crumbling infrastructure are constant
grievances of masses. Indians yearn for better education, more jobs, zero poverty, improved healthcare
and faster development as a path to prosperity.

India falls under the third world country tag which is an issue of great concern, due to the fact a country
which produces high number employment across the world and is one of the quickest growing economies
within the global arena is disadvantaged of all of the fundamental human requirements.

India is one of the greatest countries with the massive ability to overgrow any country in the world.
Today, more than half of India's population is under the age of 25. India's average age is just 29 years,
compared to 37 in China and the United States, 45 in Western Europe and 48 in Japan. This is a
generation with huge potential and big aspirations. India is self-sufficient in topography, natural
resources, manpower.

The children of today will become founding fathers of tomorrow, who are being nurtured into the wombs
of formal and informal corporations of education. We need to put our future at the front of our minds and
in our policy-planning, because, when they thrive, India will too.

India is by all accounts growing rapidly in the diverse field. However, the following are primary field
zones that will make India a developed country:

 Agriculture
It will remain the mainstay of employment with over 40% in India of my dreams. Farming is the
backbone of India. 75% of India is agrarian land. Highest priority should be given to agribusiness and
farmers to make India a developed nation. Keeping up with agribusiness will help in keeping up our
spine strong.

 Green Revolution
India should be a Green India. We don't want to see only advanced structures and zero trees. Fewer
trees would lead to contamination, no rain and individuals will wind up with misery from obscure
illnesses. Each individual should assume up the liability of having a tree for every house, at any rate,
to make India a Green India.

 Literacy rate
The Indian literacy rate stands at 74% (2011 Census figure) with recent reports of 80% literacy.
Ideally, the literacy rate should be 100%. The under-standing of every part of what we do can be
achieved only through education. And this education should be good enough to make result effective.
Literacy will rise significantly to over 80% in the future, but that will still leave about one in five
adults illiterate.
 Corruption
There are instances of scams running into crores of rupees. People forget as the year passes, the
reason being there are no judgments given for such, which enables people to repeat. There ought to be
prompt judgment and serious measures for the debasement, which should dispirit people to get into
corruption.

 Gender Equality
Indian women have come halfway to gender equality and have rather strange aspirations as to their
gender's performance, which only reinforces gender norms and hierarchy. And that explains why they
have stunted career goals and easily give up professional life for the sake of home.

Women should no longer be bound by gender norms. They must be secured so they can bravely and
confidently step out of the confines of four walls and enter their own world.

Women can be raised like sons but can sons be raised like daughters? But men are not taking the
traditional roles played by women, are they?

 Immediate action for crime

In order to avoid major crime, the penalty for each crime should be severe and immediate, and no
option should be given as an alternative for the judgment finalized. Every individual who committed
the crime must undergo the severe punishments, which will disallow any other person in the country
to commit the same crime. Every day in the paper we read at least an average of 4 incidents of rape.
Any kind of eve teasing should also have severe punishments to avoid any sexual harassment.

 Decentralization of power
The local village or panchayat or colony or ward knows which the best decision for them is, in terms
of electricity/ roads/ farming/dams. They should be given a fair right to make that decision.
Centralizing it is like trying to "fit one size for all". Also, it will reduce the corruption as funds are not
centralized in one place.

 Proper/Neat and Fair Transportation

Roughly speaking the country has great transportation, however, the remaining public transport
vehicles are not in a decent condition, the transport/ railroad stations are not slick, and transports are
dependably swarmed. Keeping in mind the eventual goal to make India a developed nation the
transportation framework ought to be proper, neat and fair.

 People with a Civic Sense

There are spit marks, random garbage and overflowing sewers at each nook and corner of India. It is
anything but difficult to stick everything on the administration; however, people should take it on
themselves and their own particular community sense. Streets are not filthy because no one cleaned it,
but rather because someone dirtied it in the first place. Civic sense is nothing but social ethics.

 Clean and Neat Rivers/Water Bodies

Every corner of our major river/water body is choked with waste items, having a wicked smell when
you cross it. My aspirations for new India fairly include clean and neat water bodies in India.
Responsibility lies with every citizen and the government. Do not throw garbage in the water bodies,
it is not a dustbin
 Effective and affordable Public Health Care
Public Healthcare is not as effective as private health care. Moreover, the private healthcare is not
affordable for every being in India. The government should take broad measures of having successful
and reasonable health care services which are open to all regardless of religion, gender and caste.

 Proper implementation of Government plans

Government is launching various plans to make India a developed nation but mostly the results are
not what we expected. This is because the execution of such plans is not viable. If the plans proposed
are executed effectively, it will not be long for us mature into a developed nation.

India will touch nearly $8 trillion Gross domestic product (GDP), almost four times the current level,
and the addition to the GDP in the decade will be nearly thrice the amount added in the years since
Independence. With population growth slowing down, this will also mean per capita incomes rise
about four-fold to $6,000.

India's integration with the global economy will be even higher with trade in goods and services
accounting for nearly two-thirds of GDP. The average Indian will consume over four times the power
he does today.

 Social Media and the Internet can Play a Big Role

The prevalence of social media and internet use among India’s youth presents an opportunity to
expand their awareness about education pathways, employment opportunities, skill needs, and
available skill development programmes.

Internet users will account for anywhere between 50% and 80% of the populace. The market for
passenger cars will be around 7.2 million a year, currently the size of the US market. Over 320
million people will travel by air within the country each year, meaning nearly a million Indians will
take to the skies each day.

 Indian Youth are Independent, Optimistic and Open to Change

The influence of family and peers on the career and educational choices of India's youth is in decline.
Young people are increasingly seeking productive employment opportunities and career paths that
reflect their individual aspirations.

The youth is very interested in participating in skills development programmes. Increased

employment opportunities and higher wages are the main motivators for this goal.

 Aspire for a Collaborative world

Sometimes, the journey of excellence can be interpreted as one of fierce competition and winning by
defeating others. That does create individual champions, but doesn’t build a strong country. For a
nation to be strong Excellence has to exist in a collaborative way.

Not everyone will be special talent, some will be special as enablers – it’s a collaboration of players
& enablers that makes a progressive world. Once again our historical way of life of “safeguarding our
own being” has got us to a place where we are a bunch of wandering silos lost in a crowd. And
probably it was the right approach for survival in a nation that has a tiny land or resource base, and a
third of world population to feed.

However, this has brought us to a place where the future increasingly looks more fraught with
isolation, solitude and misery. We will need to alter this – let our children compete collaboratively.
 Solving problems in group, growing up as mates, living as a community, learning as a cohort – we
will need to be more pronounced than ever.

We need to give up these stupid bickering in the name of political, communal, regional or any other-
al differences. These are good for none. They haven’t contributed ever (historically) to any growth or
development. They are serious energy sappers that imprison a productive and intellectual populace in
a trance of pure negativity and non-performance. High time, we realize it – and come out of it. The
day our children feel genuinely happy in the victories of their friends, celebrate it and want to
passionately emulate them – we can safely feel we have turned a leaf.

 Finally, aspire to making India Incredible..again!

JFK’s words “ask not what your country can do for you, ask what you can do for your
country” not only makes great impact in speeches, but also when imbibed and practiced in everyday
life.

It’s true that we all have at some point taken swipe at a flawed or fractured system. This concept of
“system” is such a loser pillar to hide behind. Who is this “system” that takes away all the strength,
power and gumption to make our own life better, our own country great? Or is it the case of us,
wanting it that way? – We have paid my taxes, so our job is done. Let the “system” do the rest. This
“system” is a make believe organism that has been conveniently created for us to find solace hiding
our own failures, inadequacies, inability to own & drive change. We can be the system if we want it –
maybe not for big, huge shifts – but for small yet significant wins. Whether it’s to follow civic norms,
nip corruption at the bud, make our neighborhood clean, promote talent in our community, drive good
health and excellence etc. we have lot that’s in our control – only if we choose to be the “system”.

The second part to this point is the sense of pride for what we have. Our history, our resources, our
present, our resilience, our creativity, our intellect – there is a lot that the world appreciates and gets
overawed with. Only if,we do the same too. Our sense of pride will be the fuel to feel positively about
our country and kill the rampant cynicism that envelopes us. It’s good to be real – but it’s great to be
proud of our nation, every time. Our nation is not what its politicians or broken systems make it to be.
It’s just that, we choose to only see these and think that as the reality. There’s a very different India
that is in motion driven with its fierce intent, wanting to make a dent in the universe. Let’s try and see
that and be proud of that India.

Our wish should be so simple to change a nation. And our idea here is not to oversimplify or trivialize
the present state of nation. We are a land of complex systems. But beneath all those complexities lie
the fundamental basis of “we the people”. Our mindset, our choices, our humility, our happiness, is in
our hands. There is a lot we can alter there, that can catapult a nation from languishing at the abyss of
mediocrity and hypocrisy to the zenith of excellence and positivity. It can begin, now – at this
moment.

Conclusion
India is a country driven by aspirations. Not only do the ambitions of the growing middle class drive the
economy of the nation, growing aspirations for a better life also encourages behaviours that ultimately
result in greater productivity. If we as Indians want to have a better future of India, we have no choice but
to change. If you can dream it, you can achieve it.

And change will happen – One day at a time.

“One Day Maataram”
Namami Gange Recognized by UN as Torchbearer in World
Ecology Restoration Efforts
 The United Nations (UN) has recognised 'Namami Gange' initiative as one of the top 10 World
Restoration Flagships to revive the natural world. Namami Gange was selected from over 150
such initiatives from 70 countries across the globe. The United Nations Environment Programme
(UNEP) describes Namami Gange as, "Launched in 2014, the government-led Namami Gange
initiative is rejuvenating, protecting and conserving the Ganges and its tributaries, reforesting
parts of the Ganges basin and promoting sustainable farming.

 It also aims to revive key wildlife species, including river dolphins, softshell turtles, otters, and
the hilsa shad fish. Investment by the Indian government is up to $4.25 billion so far. The
initiative has the involvement of 230 organisations, with 1,500km of river restored to date.
Additionally, there has been 30,000 hectares of afforestation so far, with a 2030 goal of 134,000
hectares".

 How will Namami Gange Benefit from this Recognition?

 The initiatives declared World Restoration Flagships are eligible to receive UN-backed
promotion, advice or funding.

 What is Namami Gange project?

 The Government launched an integrated Ganga conservation mission called 'Namami Gange'
in 2014 to arrest the pollution of the sacred River Ganga and subsequently revive the river.

 River Ganga is important not only for its cultural and spiritual significance but also because it
hosts more than 40% of the country's population.

 The focus of Namami Gange programme has been on abatement of pollution, together with
cleaning of ghats, regulatory control of industrial pollution and real time online monitoring of
pollution in the river, besides afforestation and biodiversity conservation

 Namami Gange mission has emerged as a leading case study of river rejuvenation in the
world. People across the globe are taking note of the many efforts being undertaken to
rejuvenate the river and the riverine ecosystem and wish to contribute in some way.

 In India, the Ganga River is not just a river, but symbolizes the collective faith and
consciousness of the people- its sacred value and reverence dating back to early centuries.
Today, it contributes to 26% to India's water sources and is the source of life and livelihood
for the 520 million people residing in the Basin.

 The mission has adopted a holistic and multisectoral approach for the conservation,
protection and rejuvenation of the Ganga River Basin. Prior to its launch, efforts to clean
Ganga existed as early as the Ganga Action Plan in 1985 which covered 25 towns in the main
stem of the river. This was followed by the Ganga Action Plan II in 1993,the National River
Conservation Plan in 2005, and finally, the establishment of National Ganga River Basin
Authority (NGRBA) in 2009. Initially registered as a society in 2011, the National Mission
for Clean Ganga (NMCG) was later notified in 2016, as an authority with statutory powers
 under the Environment Protection Act, 1986. The 2016 Authority Notification gave NMCG
regulatory, financial and administrative empowerment, leading to faster decision making.

 However, unlike the previous efforts which were characterized by a piece meal approach,
what sets Namami Gange apart is its holistic vision which allows the management of the
river as a single system including its tributaries, smaller rivers, floodplains, wetlands,
groundwater, biodiversity, springs, and maintenance of a minimum flow of the river.

 Four key pillars of interventions have been identified are:

 Nirmal Ganga (unpolluted flow)
 Aviral Ganga (unrestricted flow)
 Jan Ganga (strengthening people river connect)
 Gyan Ganga (research and knowledge management)

 In the last few years, Namami Gange has achieved significant milestones, especially when
one compares it to similar interventions implemented across the globe. The improvement in
water quality of the river, rise in number of species or the 16 million trees afforested bear
testimony to the many efforts that have been undertaken. The strong impetus and focus that
Maa Ganga has received in these eight years, has enabled the mission to traverse this
successful journey, and will continue to do so in the coming years for which the mission has
been extended

 Nodal Agency
 The National Mission for Clean Ganga (NMCG), is the designated authority to take all
necessary decisions and actions for pollution abatement and rejuvenation of River Ganga.
 NMCG is the nodal agency acting as the planning, financing, monitoring and coordinating
agency for implementing the 'Namami Gange' programme.

 Budget and Implementation

 Initially, Government of India launched the Namami Gange Programme in June 2014,
with the total budgetary outlay of ₹ 20,000 crore to accomplish the twin objectives of
effective abatement of pollution, conservation and rejuvenation of National River Ganga
and its tributaries.
 The budget for the programme is provided in the Demands for Grants for Ministry of Jal
Shakti. The National Mission for Clean Ganga releases funds to State Project
Management Groups (SPMGs) on the basis of Annual Action Plans as and when
demanded.
 Under Namami Gange programme, diverse set of interventions for cleaning and
rejuvenation of river Ganga have been taken up. These includes pollution abatement
activities including domestic sewage, industrial effluent, solid waste etc., River front
Management, Aviral Dhara, Rural Sanitation, Afforestation, Biodiversity Conservation,
Public Participation etc. A total of 346 projects are taken up at a sanctioned cost of
₹.30,235 crore, out of which, 158 projects are completed. The certainty of funds and
scaled-up budget enabled the mission to survey and conduct condition assessment of all
the cities, towns, villages and industries along River Ganga and develop a scientific
roadmap for appropriate multi-sectoral interventions.
 In order to impart momentum and broaden the scope of the program for Ganga
Rejuvenation, an empowered institutional framework was developed. The programme,
 with its holistic approach and innovative features, has gathered momentum with
completion of several projects and developing a framework for river rejuvenation.
 Key Ministries comprising have been working together since the inception of the
programme for a comprehensive approach. Recognising the multisectoral, multi-
dimensional and multi-stakeholder nature of the Ganga rejuvenation challenge, efforts
have been made to improve the inter-ministerial, and centre-state coordination with
increased involvement in preparation of action plan and increased monitoring at central
and state levels. These ministries are:
 Water Resources, River Development and Ganga Rejuvenation
 Environment, Forest & Climate Change
 Urban Development
 Drinking Water Supply and Sanitation
 Rural Development
 Tourism
 Shipping
 The implementation of the program has been divided into entry-level activities (for
immediate visible impact), medium term activities (to be implemented within 5 years of
time frame), and, longterm activities (to be implemented within 10 years).

 Entry-level activities
These include:
 River surface cleaning to address the floating solid wastes
 Rural sanitation to arrest the pollution (solid and liquid) entering through rural sewage
drains and construction of toilets
 Renovation, modernization, and construction of crematoria that prevents the disposal of
unburnt/ partially burnt bodies in the river
 Riverfront Management for Ghats' development in selected cities and towns repair,
modernization and construction of ghats to improvise the human-river connect
 Rehabilitation and upgradation of existing sewage treatment plants (STPs) along River
Ganga
 Conservation of Aquatic life - special attention on Dolphin, Turtles and Ghariyals
 Safe disposal of flowers and other puja material
 Establishment of Ganga Task Force and Ganga Vahini
 GIS data and Spatial Analysis for Ganga basin; study of communities depending on
Ganga for their traditional livelihood
 National Ganga Monitoring Centre; special guidelines for sand mining in Ganga
 Assessment of Special Properties of Ganga Water
 Communication and public outreach activities are also included in short-term activities.

 On medium term, apart from the completion of the ongoing projects, activities, include
identification of urban habitations on banks of river Ganga for extending coverage of
sewerage infrastructure including sewage treatment; making over 1,600 Gram Panchayats
located on Ganga banks free from open defecation; and enforcing zero liquid discharge by
the grossly polluting industries located in the all Ganga River Basin States.

 The long-term vision for rejuvenation of River Ganga is restoring wholesomeness of the river
in terms of defining the concept of ensuring Nirmal Dhara, Aviral Dhara and maintaining the
ecological and geological integrity of the river
 Strategic Steps and Actions
Strategic steps and actions for revival and long-term security of River Ganga are grouped under
different missions:
 Mission 1: Aviral Dhara
 For water resources planning with emphasis on wetlands, forests and distributed
groundwater and surface water storages; to ensure efficient use of water; shifting policy
with emphasis on water resource preservation, ensuring longitudinal river connectivity
etc.
 Mission 2: Nirmal Dhara
 For the management of solid and liquid wastes generated from domestic/commercial
sources; riverfront development, floodplain management and rejuvenation of water
bodies; management of industrygenerated solid and liquid wastes and management of
polluted agricultural run-off.
 Mission 3: Ecological Restoration
 For the restoration of unpolluted rivers; regulation of river bed farming and sandmining
from river beds; control of alien species invasions, overfishing and fishing during
spawning seasons; river nutrient assessment and release of sediments trapped behind
dams/barrages into downstream river reaches; long-term biomonitoring of the Ganga
river network; synergising actions with the dolphin conservation action plan-2010; and
comprehensive research on ecological dynamics of the river system.
 Mission 4: Sustainable Agriculture
 To promote the adoption of conservation agriculture to enhance soil fertility and
agricultural output with resource conservation; promotion of organic farming; promoting
regional resource conservation steps to counter monotonous agro-ecosystem impacts and
experimentation, adaptability and flexibility in agriculture to synthesise traditional
knowledge with ongoing and future scientific discoveries.
 Mission 5: Geological Safeguarding
 To control/regulate geologically hazardous activities including deep groundwater
withdrawals and underground excavations; restrictions on geomorphologically harmful
land-use practices such as deforestation and construction activities on hill slopes;
improved drainage of low-lying areas and disturbed areas stabilisation; and mapping river
migration zones and geological monitoring of basin.
 Mission 6: Basin Protection Against Disasters
 To ensure that ecosystems should be strengthened against catastrophic disasters by
preserving wetlands, promoting mixed vegetation and indigenous forests, and curbing
human land use disturbances and encroachments; floodplain regulations; to study the
ecology of forest fires and epidemics; to check deforestation, road and building
constructions, unsafe debris disposal in the upper Ganga basin and other hilly regions to
minimise land-slides, among others.
 Mission 7: River Hazards Management
 To ensure preparation of basin scale flood-risk maps; for drainage improvement; to look
for alternatives to embankments for flood management with emphasis on 'living with the
floods' concept; research on sediment dynamics and its application in river management
projects for sustainable river management strategies, etc.
 Mission 8: Environmental Knowledge
 For processing and storage of information on the basin's natural resources, anthropogenic
activities, and environmental monitoring of the basin; conducting educational workshops
 and campaigns with stakeholders and interested citizens to enable their sensitisation and
comprehensive understanding of basin processes; conducting ground level monitoring
and field researches of the Ganga river basin's environment with stakeholder
participation.

 One of NMCG's long term visions for Ganga Rejuvenation is to restore the viable
populations of all endemic and endangered biodiversity of the river so that they occupy their
full historical range and fulfill their role in maintaining the integrity of the Ganga River
ecosystems. Presence of rich biodiversity in a river ecosystem is the ultimate indicator of the
river's health. The Ganga river ecosystem supports more than 25,000 oral and faunal species.
Biodiversity of any ecosystem is threatened foremost by the loss or degradation of its habitat.

 Mascot
 NMCG has been focusing on youth as part of its outreach and public communications efforts
as they are the impellers of change.
 As a step towards this NMCG tied-up with Diamond Toons to develop and distribute comics,
ecomics and animated videos. The content will be designed with the objective of bringing
about behavioural change amongst children towards Ganga and other rivers.
 To increase association among children, Chacha Chaudhary was declared as the mascot of
the Namami Gange Programme and will be useful in ground-level activation for Ganga
rejuvenation.

 United Nations Decade on Ecosystem Restoration

 The UN Decade on Ecosystem Restoration aims to prevent, halt and reverse the degradation
of ecosystems on every continent and in every ocean. Ecosystems support all life on Earth.
The healthier our ecosystems are, the healthier the planet - and its people would be. It can
help to end poverty, combat climate change and prevent a mass extinction. The recognized
initiatives, such as Namami Gange, were declared World Restoration Flagships and are
eligible to receive UN backed promotion, advice, technical expertise or funding.
 Together, the 10 flagships aim to restore more than 68 million hectares and create nearly 15
million jobs. Namami Gange was selected as one of the flagships that are the "best examples
of large-scale and long-term ecosystem restoration, embodying the 10 Restoration Principles
of the UN Decade on Ecosystem Restoration".

 About UNEP World Restoration Flagships

 The United Nations has recognized 10 ground-breaking efforts from around the globe for
their role in restoring the natural world. The winning initiatives were unveiled at the UN
Biodiversity Conference (COP15) in Montreal and a special virtual gala event.
 Efforts from Central America to East Asia were honoured as World Restoration Flagships.
 The initiatives are now eligible to receive United Nations-backed promotion, advice or
funding.
 The UN Decade seeks to honour the best examples of large-scale and long-term ecosystem
restoration.
 Until 2030, regular calls for World Restoration Flagships will be launched.
 Together, the 10 flagships aim to restore more than 68 million hectares, an area bigger than
Myanmar, France or Somalia.
Together, the 10 flagships are expected to create nearly 15 million jobs
India’s Armed Forces Contribution to Nation Building
What constitutes a nation is not speaking the same tongue or belonging to the same ethnic
group, but having accomplished great things in common in the past and the wish to
accomplish them in future.

— Ernest Rennan

 Introduction

No nation state can be built without first creating and inculcating nationalism. The Indian paradox is that we
are an old society and civilisation but we are a new nation state in the modern political sense. In its long
history, India can be considered to have been a ‘nation state’ only a few times: during the Mauryan Empire
(321-185 BC), in the Gupta Age (320-500 AD), the Mughal period (1527-1857 AD), and as the British India
colonial empire (1857-1947 AD). The dynamics of these near whole or complete Indian nation states has been
that each time, it has risen out of a hotbed of internecine quarrels and fighting among small states: a tendency
which is sometimes felt even today.

As a nation state, India comprises myriad streams of culture; 22 scheduled languages, 200 dialects, a dozen
ethnic groups, seven religious communities with several sects and sub-sects, and 68 socio-cultural subregions.
That makes us a great as well as complex society and nation. This very paradox also poses challenges in
building India as a nation.

 Nation Building
What is nation building? Is it economic development and industrialisation? Is it building large metros, roads,
schools and hospitals? Is it ensuring social equality and harmony? Or is it shaping a national identity based on
our core values so as to mature as a strong and vibrant nation, proud and confident, backed by comprehensive
national power to assume its rightful role in international affairs?

Nation building is a combination of all facets of progress. The last part stated above is the ultimate goal in
nation building. This is also stated in the Preamble to our Constitution. In addressing the contribution of
India’s armed forces in nation building, the starting point lies in understanding India’s military legacy. Military
life, in its outlook and purpose, is heavily dependent on traditions of service imbibed over years of blood-
stained history. These traditions, almost sacred to soldiers, can be traced upwards to patriotism and downwards
to self-pride. These traditions are not only from the British Indian Army but also date back to the Mahabharat
days. The Bhagwad Gita says, “Considering your own duty, you should not waver”, or as Guru Gobind Singh
says, “Deh shiva war mohe ehse shubh karman te kabhu na taru. Na darro arr seo jab jaye larun nishchay kar
apni jit karun”. Similarly, the Chetwode credo states: “The safety, honour and welfare of your country come
first, always and every time. The honour, welfare and comfort of the men you command come next. Your own
ease, comfort and safety come last, always and every time.” An oath is the bedrock of the true military
profession which differentiates it from all other professions. Earlier, the oath was based on the concept of
“Naam– Namak–Nishan: Be Honourable–True to your Salt–Uphold the Flag.” Today this oath is to the
Constitution of democratic India. The armed forces are a true reflection of the basic national concept of unity
in diversity. In an exemplary role model for the rest of our countrymen, soldiers of all classes, castes, creeds
and religions are able to serve the nation with total dedication; living together in barracks, eating from the
same kitchen, speaking the same language, and observing each other’s religious festivals. Secularism,
discipline, integrity, loyalty, espirit-de-corps—these are essential values inculcated among our men.

Such motivated people not only make efficient and dedicated soldiers in service, but even after leaving the
Services, continue as nation building role models for others. An important legacy of the Indian armed forces
has been its totally apolitical outlook. As stated earlier, a soldier’s oath is to the Constitution of India and to the
constitutionally elected central government. The ideology of the political parties or their hue and colour does
not concern the armed forces. Our armed forces, unlike those of some neighbouring countries, have stuck to
the concept of loyalty to the constitutionally elected government. They have, thus, contributed to the political
stability of the nation and enabled it to develop its unique democratic political ambience.

Even in the insurgency-affected states of the nation, the Army has ensured an adequately secure atmosphere
wherein India’s autonomous Election Commission can conduct free and fair elections. Even the Election
Commission has asked the political parties, in a stronger and more comprehensive way, not to politicise the
armed forces.

 Consolidation of Nation State

The Indian armed forces have played an important role in national consolidation from the day India became
independent. Few political leaders foresaw the mayhem that could result amongst the innocent people who had
lived together for generations in the undivided India. The communal frenzy that was unleashed by the artificial
boundaries of partition was at that time beyond the control of the police. In 1947, the police was insufficient:
neither well trained, nor well equipped and suffering from the trauma of communal fighting. The armed forces,
led by Indian as well as some British Service officers, had to control the furious rioting and enforce civil order.
It is generally believed that the British left India with a bloodless legal transfer of power. But the birth of the
nation state that we see today was not such a smooth affair. Hyderabad and Junagadh had to be coerced to
integrate with India by what came to be known as police actions. In October 1947, when Maharaja Hari Singh
of Jammu and Kashmir (J&K) signed the Instrument of Accession to join India, the armed forces were swiftly
inducted into Kashmir Valley and other parts of the state to thwart Pakistan’s design of capturing it by force.
Later, the liberation of Goa, Daman and Diu carried forward the consolidation of our territorial frontiers.

 Infrastructure Development And Integration of Geographic Area and People

India is a vast country. Some of its people are living in remote border areas, far from the Indian heartland. The
armed forces have played a significant role in integrating people of these areas and border states into the
national mainstream. Many a times, a soldier was the first Indian to reach out to these areas and make the
locals realise that they were Indians.

Deployment of the armed forces enabled governmental infrastructure to follow in the remote areas of
Arunachal Pradesh (erstwhile North-Eastern Frontier Agency), Mizoram, Manipur, Nagaland, border areas of
Uttarakhand, Himachal Pradesh and some parts of Jammu and Kashmir.
Till the late 1950s, the important Buddhist town of Tawang had very limited administrative links with India.
The civil government representative was located many miles short, at Bomdi La. Even today, most Indians do
not know where places like Mon, Moreh, Giagong, Chushul or Sumdo are located. The credit for initiating the
feeling of nationalism in such areas goes to the armed forces. The very establishment of a military station
generates a certain amount of business and developmental activities in and around the station. This is how the
government’s developmental infrastructure like roads, electricity and tele-communication could reach out to
remote and undeveloped areas.

The armed forces have also improved the ecology of the areas wherever they are located. The greening of the
cantonments and the forestation undertaken by the Ecology Territorial Army (TA) battalions in Uttarakhand,
Rajasthan, Madhya Pradesh and some other states has set a healthy trend for others to follow.

What about integration of the people? As stated earlier, there is no better example of unity in diversity than the
armed forces. Unaffected by divisive politics or casteist social activities, military stations have always been,
and are, totally cosmopolitan: oases of national unity.

The Indian army is possibly the leading force for inclusive development. The road and track infrastructure in
the remotest areas over inhospitable terrain, has ensured outreach and connectivity with Indian citizens who
inhabit these far-flung parts of the country. Combined with this the army has always taken the lead in building
and running schools, medical facilities and habitat enhancing infrastructure in distant border areas.
Interestingly, it has also been playing a key role in ecological sustenance through the various territorial army
units.

 Security of the Nation State

The primary role of the armed forces is to defend the territorial integrity of the nation state against external and
internal threats. Strong and well-trained armed forces are deterrence to our potential adversaries. If this is
achieved, developmental activities and nation building can be progressed without external hindrance. This is
central to the concept of national security and paramount for all nation building activities.

Territorial disputes with China and Pakistan require India’s armed forces to remain alert and deployed along
disputed borders round the years. History is witness to the fact that whenever a nation has neglected its armed
forces and their capacity, external powers have been quick to exploit it. In the 1950s, we overlooked this
important lesson of history and allowed the security apparatus to drift till the Chinese shook us up in 1962. We
had to relearn this lesson through an ignominious experience. Post 1962, we have had several skirmishes
against the Chinese: at Nathu La in Sikkim in 1967, Wangdung in 1986 and Doklam in 2017. The outcomes
have made it clear that the Indian armed forces are alert and determined to defend national territory. This has
ensuredthat the Chinese and our leaders pursue agreements for maintaining peace and tranquillity along the
Line of Actual Control (LAC) and several other confidence building measures to improve relations.

Pakistan attempted to annex part of India’s territories in major attacks in 1965, 1971 and 1999. In all these
conflicts, it was effectively defeated. In 1984, the armed forces preempted the Pakistan Army’s effort to
illegally occupy the Siachen Glacier. Its many other minor intrusions and skirmishes along the Line of Control
(LOC) too have been effectively foiled.
 Internal Security

Nation building is hardly possible when we fight and kill each other, referring to internal security and stability.
For example, the riots in Mumbai of 1992, when the economic capital of India came to a standstill. Communal
and inter-caste riots, Naxalites, secessionist groups, militants and other anti-social elements, aided and abetted
by foreign countries: internal security has always been a serious challenge to our national security. The
demand or the need to use the armed forces, particularly the Army, for internal tasks which are primarily a
police and Home Department domain, has been increasing year after year. At a higher level of violence, we
have fought, and continue to fight, full-fledged insurgency and terrorism in many states. The armed forces
have not allowed, nor shall allow, any attempt by any state, or even a section of the state, to secede from the
Republic of India.

The positive impartiality of the Indian soldier in such situations— odd aberrations notwithstanding—is
legendary. By and large, the Indian soldier is looked upon as a source of confidence amongst the people, not
only in India but even abroad. During such operations, the military not only fights militants and anti-national
elements but also reassures innocent people feeling insecure or neglected due to inadequate civil
administration. Large-scale civic action programmes are undertaken by the military alongwith anti-terrorist
operations. At such places the Army has formed an Army Development Group for this purpose.

 Ensuring a Secure Environment

First and foremost, it is the secure environment provided by the army as a guarantor of national and territorial
integrity that ensures the path to prosperity and development for the country as a whole. Today the dimensions
of conflict are manifold and not restricted to the border areas alone. Once again, it is this organisation which is
combating the scourge of violence and terrorism unleashed by secessionist elements, aided and abetted by
adversarial powers. As a vital organ of the state it is the army, the ultimate arbiter of national safety and
security which ensures a safe environment for internal progress and prosperity. Post COVID-19 pandemic, the
Indian economy is set for a northward trajectory and the stress by the government is on inclusive development.
All this is not feasible without an adequate assurance of a safe and secure nation and the armed forces
represent this insurance policy.

 Disaster Relief And Humanitarian Assistance

Another area where the army periodically occupies centre stage is humanitarian assistance and disaster relief.
The Navy has played a stellar role in providing critical help on foreign shores and also evacuation of Indian
citizens in distant lands during times of natural as well as human crisis. The Air Force is vital during such
disasters due to its speed and reach with both rotary and fixed wing air efforts. However, it is the army with its
pan-India presence, especially in the far-flung areas of our country, which is omnipresent during any disaster
relief efforts. Ideally, the various organs of state and central governments should come into play before the
resources of the army are tapped for such eventualities. But invariably it ends up being not only the most
potent responder but also the first responder due to its ingrained capabilities, equipment and disciplined
application. The army’s network of field hospitals, its transportation assets, engineer plant equipment and
reconnaissance and communication resources with its nationwide reach, has saved countless lives and provided
succour to the people of India, during any natural calamity. The army and organisations like the NSG which
are populated by army personnel on deputation have the core competencies in areas vital for crisis
management and resolution. These include aspects such as hostage rescue, bomb disposal, search and rescue
missions, heli-borne extraction and even rescue operations from blind wells.

The nation has always counted on the military in every disaster-affected situation. If it is not an earthquake in
some state, it is floods somewhere or a cyclone in a coastal area. India has seen earthquakes, cyclones,
landslides and heavy floods almost every year. Despite the raising of disaster management organisations and
forces, the armed forces are acknowledged as the most dependable rescue and relief organisation in such
circumstances. They are effectively the nation’s chief rescue and relief forces.

 Image Abroad

The armed forces have also enhanced India’s image abroad. Our forces, in support of the foreign policy of the
government, have projected military power in Sri Lanka and Maldives when requested by these neighbours.
Since the mid-1950s, the armed forces have been deployed in a large number of UN peace-keeping missions
all over the world. They have worked in Korea, Congo, Gaza, Cambodia, Angola, Somalia, Rwanda, Namibia,
Sudan and many other countries and done the nation proud by their impartiality, efficiency and dedication.
This aspect has received international recognition.

 Boosting Domestic Manufacturing

The flavour of the season and the pointer to future economic prosperity is ‘Make in India’. Once again, it’s the
Indian Armed Forces which is a major stakeholder in the success of the ‘Make in India’ pursuit. Being the
largest single service, the matrix of numbers related to its equipment and wherewithal are of a very large
dimension. Manufacture of military equipment not only gives a boost to the defence industry, it also builds up
a dual use ecosystem of many smaller items and sub-items which in turn encourages entrepreneurship,
generates employment and multiple other benefits. Success of ‘Make in India’ for defence equipment will lead
to an enhancement of defence exports, accrue forex earnings and contribute significantly to the GDP. It also
needs to be emphatically emphasised that rather than being a drain, the defence budget should be seen as an
engine for economic growth.

Many significant products including 155mm Artillery Gun system ‘Dhanush’, Light Combat Aircraft ‘Tejas’,
LCH Prachand, Surface to Air Missile system ‘Akash’, Main Battle Tank ‘Arjun’, T-90 Tank, T-72 tank,
High mobility Trucks, INS Vikrant, INS Mormugao, INS Chennai, Medium Bullet Proof Vehicle (MBPV),
Weapon Locating Radar (WLR), Lakshya Parachute for Pilotless Target Aircraft, etc. have been produced in
the country during the last few years which are being used by the Indian Armed Forces.

 Trained Manpower
Within the country the army has provided key support to the central armed police forces in terms of training,
equipment and cross attachment of personnel for absorbing best practices. Outside its own organisation the
army has been a great facilitator in human resource development. The training and interaction imparted by its
personnel to the youth of India, through the medium of the National Cadet Corps, is a stellar example. In fact,
the NCC is widely regarded as an arena of discipline, duty and patriotism and many young spirits vie to don its
khaki uniform. The army is also a great reservoir of trained, skilled and disciplined manpower, readily
available for lateral absorption in other government organisations as well as the private sector. In that sense
development of human resource has always been a hallmark of the Indian army.

Agniveer Scheme will help address the issue of unemployment to a large extent. Definitely, the intake of the
Agniveers will balance out that weightage and ensure that the forces are not deficient or depleted in our
manpower at any stage.It will aslo provide trained manpower to the civil sector after four years of service to
the Armed Forces. Agnipath scheme for recruitment into Army, Air Force and Navy will make the forces
young and recruits who exit after their tenure will prove to be a nationalist, disciplined and skilled manpower
to the society.

 Contribution to tackle COVID 19 Pandemic

Transport aircraft of the Indian Air Force ferried much-needed oxygen and other medical supplies from donor
nations. The Indian Navy carried medical supplies from the neighbourhood. The Air Force and Navy both
evacuated Indians from abroad and got them back to India. The Indian Army created dedicated Covid-19
facilities for civilians, and military medical personnel and set up hospitals and helped civilians in far flung
areas of J&K and the North Eastern states. They helped the district administration set up a new oxygen plants
and helped repair local oxygen manufacturing units that became non-operational. And also provided skilled
and trained medical staff to assist the civil administration.

 Confidence in Uniform
The nation expects the army to perform, whether in war, internal strife, disaster relief or any other contingency
beyond other organs of governance and the army can proudly claim that it never ever fails on this count. In
fact, it goes far beyond this and will always remain a key element in nation building. The Armed Forces is a
great reservoir of trained, skilled and disciplined manpower, readily available. Development of Human
Resource has always been a hallmark of the Indian Armed Forces.

 Conclusion
A nation comprises not just its economic assets. A nation consists of its people, national character and core
values, its culture, its unity, and its stature in the world community. We need to build India as a nation on the
basis of a common ideology, high character and stable institutions so as to help create a strong and powerful
nation which can improve the quality of its people. The Armed Forces of India have established and sustained
their credibility through dedication, sacrifice, professional competence, operational effectiveness. Besides
being defenders of the nation, they are the people’s Armed Forces, with recruitment from all parts of the
country. The people of India, the most important element in our nation, have looked at them as secular,
positive and impartial. The Armed Forces are proud of this achievement and image, and these will certainly be
carried in spirit to the future too.

The secure environment provided by the Armed Forces, ensuring the path to prosperity
and development for the country as a whole, is only a part of the larger and ubiquitous
role played by the Indian Armed Forces in nation building.
 Open Network for Digital Commerce (ONDC)
The retail revolution of India has undoubtedly been led by the thriving e-commerce industry of the country. The
rising number of internet users has made India one of the fastest growing ecommerce markets in the world. With
560 million internet users, India has become the second largest country globally in terms of internet users,
surpassing the United States. The Indian ecommerce industry has been on an uphill advancement path. Impelled by
increasing smartphone infiltration, the introduction of 5G networks and growing consumer wealth, the Indian e-
commerce market is anticipated to grow to $250 billion by the next decade.

India has taken the path of building public digital infrastructure for serving her citizens. UPI, Jan Dhan, Aadhar,
CoWin and ULIP are a few examples of this approach. ONDC is a similar initiative of the Department of Promotion
of Industry and Internal Trade (DPIIT), Ministry of Commerce. The network is poised to create a facilitative model
to revolutionise digital commerce, giving greater thrust to penetration of retail ecommerce in India.

 What is ONDC?
 With the vision to create an organisation with a startup mindset supported by the Government, ONDC was
incorporated as a non-profit, Section-8 company on December 31, 2021.
 The company was incubated at the Quality Council of India (QCI), an autonomous organisation with
DPIIT, where the founding work for the project was initiated in a mission mode. QCI was joined by
Protean as the co-founder for incorporation of ONDC. Many public and private banks and financial
institutions have contributed equity to ONDC till now.
 ONDC is a freely accessible government-backed platform that aims to democratise e-commerce
by moving it from a platform-centric model to an open network for buying and selling of goods and
services.
 Under ONDC, it is envisaged that a buyer registered on one participating e-commerce site like Amazon
may purchase goods from a seller on another participating e-commerce site like Flipkart.
 Presently, buyers and sellers have to be on the same app for a transaction which happens through the
same platform. For example, a buyer needs to go to Amazon, to buy a product from a seller on Amazon.
 It is a not-for-profit organisation that will offer a network to enable local digital commerce stores across
industries to be discovered and engaged by any network-enabled applications.

 Objectives
 ONDC has three major objectives:
1. Democratisation and decentralisation of e-Commerce: ONDC will democratise ecommerce and
enable millions of small traders to take advantage of opportunities thrown up by ecommerce. ONDC has
been designed to promote local languages, products, and cultural heritage, and create opportunities for
small businesses. Small artisans and workers can offer better quality through ONDC and also earn better
without having to pay commission for their products. ONDC will foster healthy competition, benefit
consumers and contribute to the overall growth of the digital commerce ecosystem in India.
2. Inclusivity and access for sellers, especially small and medium enterprises as well as local
businesses: ONDC will unlock doors of opportunities in an inclusive manner for both big and small
businesses, benefitting the entire value chain of commerce. It will provide a much larger market for sellers,
without any preferred or priority sellers, ensuring equitable and fair treatment for all stakeholders. ONDC
will foster economies of scale, competition, and better pricing and quality, ultimately benefiting consumers.
3. Increased choices and independency for consumers: ONDC is customer-centric, keeping in line
with the vision "customer is the king". It will empower consumers by offering more choice. ONDC, with its
concept of using interfaces between various platforms, will open up more options for buyers, enhance price
discovery and market opportunities for sellers, and also empower consumers to make informed choices.
This will result in more competition in the market and will not be limited through algorithms. Consumers
can potentially discover any seller, product or service by using any compatible application or platform, thus
increasing freedom of choice for consumers. It will enable the consumers to match demand with the nearest
available supply. This would also give consumers the liberty to choose their preferred local businesses.
Thus, ONDC would standardise operations, promote inclusion of local suppliers, drive efficiencies in
logistics and lead to enhancement of value for consumers.
 Understanding ONDC
 Currently, digital markets are closed and platform-centric wherein buyers and sellers need to be on the
same platform to carry out a transaction. The current model of e-commerce stifles innovation, creates
significant barriers to entry for new players, and creates a gap between online demand and the local retail
ecosystem. As a result participation in ecommerce is well below its potential and has a tremendous
opportunity to grow manifold. ONDC, on the other hand, does not require that buyer and seller must use
the same platform/application to do a business transaction.
 Instead, it is a network-centric model where, so long as platforms/ applications are connected to this open
network, buyers and sellers can transact irrespective of the platforms/applications they use. It is like the
"UPI of ecommerce".
 The goal is to render a start-up mindset commissioned by a management with a cutting-edge concept,
extensive knowledge of commerce, comfort with state-ofthe-art technology, and a positive scope to
facilitate development. The purpose of the start-up is to strengthen the network by utilising and developing
enabling technology and encouraging wide-scale voluntary cooperation by ecosystem players.
 ONDC is aimed at promoting open networks for all aspects of exchange of goods and services over digital
or electronic networks. It is based on opensourced methodology, using open specifications and open
network protocols independent of any specific platform. These open protocols are used for establishing
public digital infrastructure in the form of open registries and open network gateways to enable exchange
of information between providers and consumers. Providers and consumers are able to use any compatible
application of their choice for exchange of information and carrying out transactions over ONDC. Thus,
ONDC goes beyond the current platform-centric digital commerce model where the buyer and seller have
to use the same platform or application to be digitally visible and do a business transaction.
 ONDC protocols would standardise operations like cataloguing, inventory management, order management
and order fulfilment. Thus, small businesses would be able to use any ONDC compatible applications
instead of being governed by specific platform-centric policies. This will provide multiple options to small
businesses to be discoverable over network and conduct business. It would also encourage easy adoption of
digital means by those currently not on digital commerce networks.
 ONDC aims to provide a winwin solution for both buyers and sellers. ONDC will enable speedy, efficient,
and real-time settlement of transactions, catering to hyperlocal and global needs simultaneously. ONDC is
expected to make eCommerce more inclusive and accessible for consumers. Consumers can potentially
discover any seller, product or service by using any compatible application or platform, thus increasing
freedom of choice for consumers. It will enable the consumers to match demand with the nearest available
supply. This would also give consumers the liberty to choose their preferred local businesses. Thus, ONDC
would standardise operations, promote inclusion of local suppliers, drive efficiencies in logistics and lead
to enhancement of value for consumers.
 ONDC identifies four types of players - Buyer Network Participant, Seller Network Participant,
Technology Service Provider and Gateway. In an unbundled network, there needs to be a seamless
interaction between all participants to facilitate end-to-end ecommerce transactions.

 What is the Significance?

 On ONDC, buyers and sellers may transact irrespective of the fact that they are attached to one specific e-
commerce portal.
 This could give a huge booster shot to smaller online retailers and new entrants.
 ONDC will standardise operations like cataloguing, inventory management, order management and order
fulfilment, hence making it simpler and easier for small businesses to be discoverable over network and
conduct business.
 ONDC is expected to digitise the entire value chain, standardise operations, promote inclusion of
suppliers, derive efficiency in logistics and enhance value for consumers.
 The platform envisages equal-opportunity participation and is expected to make e-commerce more
inclusive and accessible for consumers as they can potentially discover any seller, product or service by
using any compatible application/platform, thus increasing their freedom of choice.
 It will enable transactions of any denomination, thus making ONDC a truly ‘open network for democratic
commerce’.
 Over the next five years, the ONDC expects to bring on board 90 crore users and 12 lakh sellers on the
network, enabling 730 crore additional purchases
 Benefits of Open Network for Digital Commerce (ONDC)
 ONDC is expected to make E-Commerce more inclusive and accessible for consumers.
 Consumers can potentially discover any seller, product, or service by using any compatible application or
platform, thus increasing freedom of choice for consumers.
 It will enable the consumers to match demand with the nearest available supply. This would also give
consumers the liberty to choose their preferred local businesses.
 Thus, ONDC would standardize operations, promote inclusion of local suppliers, drive efficiencies in
logistics and lead to enhancement of value for consumers.
 The digital market will be widened to accommodate more Micro, Small, and Medium Enterprises
(MSMEs) and small traders in the country.
 The monopolies of large e-commerce companies will be broken leading to improvement in access,
innovation, and variety of businesses.
 The transparent rules will attract more investments into businesses in the e-commerce space.

 Concerns related to ONDC

 The smaller businesses may still find it hard to compete with the number of resources available to e-
commerce giants like Amazon and Flipkart.
 The possibility of mismatch in payment gateways of different platforms will compromise the aim of a
seamless transaction.
 The legal aspects of the functioning of ONDC and its association with other e-commerce platforms are still
unclear.
 The liability of issues faced by consumers concerning the quality of products, payments, services, etc is also
not specified.
 The lack of digital education among a large section of small business owners may hamper the objectives of
the initiative.

 Future of ONDC
 The ONDC aims to raise e-commerce penetration in the next two years to 25% of India’s consumer
purchases, from nearly 8% now, in a country of 1.35 billion people.
 It aims to sign up 900 million buyers and 1.2 million sellers on the shared network within the next five
years while achieving a gross merchandise value of $48 billion.
 It aims to bring in logistics firms and others who can collaborate with sellers to deliver products to
customers.
 ONDC aims primarily to tap millions of small businesses that often lack technological expertise, so the
government will have to run a massive awareness campaign to get them on board.
 The role of the Competition Commission of India (CCI) will be crucial in the success of ONDC as smaller
businesses with low volumes lack the resources to match the discounts offered by heavyweights like
Amazon and Flipkart. Their integration and sustenance could be done only when big players are effectively
stopped from indulging in anti-competitive practices.
 The government also needs to make sure that ONDC complies with the Information Technology Act and
related laws.

 Way forward
 The lack of digital education needs to be addressed foremost with help of different digital literacy missions
of government. It is important to accommodate various languages and user-friendly interfaces for both
consumers and sellers.
 The initiative should be promoted more extensively to include more small times sellers which will help
enhance their livelihoods.
 A single window Grievance redressal mechanism needs to be established to deal with both demand and
supply issues.

ONDC is an interoperable network based on the BeckN protocol that anyone can
piggyback on. It seeks to break down silos in digital commerce by enabling platforms of
varying configurations (big or small) to connect and operate seamlessly on it.
 Operation Sadbhavana
“Jawan Aur Awam, Aman Hai Muqaam”
(The soldier and people, peace is the destination)

 Background
 Operation Sadbhavana (Goodwill) is a unique humane initiative undertaken by Indian Army in
Jammu and Kashmir and Ladakh to address aspirations of people affected by terrorism, sponsored
and abetted by Pakistan.
 The unique operation has provided succor to a large section of population of the State. As part of
a grand design an insidious attempt was made by terrorist ‘tanzeems’ to systematically subvert
Government officials, target property, public services and symbols of State authority in order to
inflict hardship and alienate local population from the national fabric.
 In a situation where the Army was looked upon as the last bastion which could provide relief to
the masses affected by terrorism, Indian army swiftly launched ‘Operation Sadbhavana’ with a
modest budget of Rupees four crores in 1998. The timely intervention was carried out with an
aim of supplementing efforts of the State administration in restoring public services, rebuilding
infrastructure and creating a conducive environment for development in the State. In the
intervening years since 1998 the Army has spent in excess of Rupees 700 crores on various
people centric development activities in the State.
 It was in these challenging operational environment that the Indian Army as part of the overall
Counter Terrorism strategy decided to use its footprint to wrest the initiative back from the
terrorists, re-integrate the ‘Awaam’ (Locals) with the national mainstream and blunt the proxy
war abetted by Pakistan.

 Why was the project launched?

 The terrorist organizations in the Kashmir region are trying to subvert government officials and
target the public symbols and services.
 The organizations aim to alienate the local population by this. Once alienated they become easy
targets. More people can be pulled into terrorism by this.
 The project mainly aims to integrate the locals into the national mainstream.
 It works to reduce the proxy wars fought by Pakistan in the region. Proxy wars are conflicts
fought by the terrorist groups on behalf of the government. Pakistan government pays money and
supplies ammunitions to the terrorist groups to fight such wars in the Kashmir region.
 As part of ‘Operation Sadbhavana’, Indian Army is undertaking multiple welfare activities such
as running of Army Goodwill Schools to improve the standard of education and to provide them
with quality education, Infrastructure Development Projects and Education Tours for the children
living in remote areas.
 Some of the objectives achieved through Operation Sadbhavana are national integration tours,
women empowerment, employment generation, education and development activities towards
nation building.
 Operation Sadbhavana projects are selected after taking local aspirations into consideration, in
conjunction with local civil administration and it is ensured that there is no duplicates with
projects of civil administration.
 The funds are being utilised for various activities like Human Resource/Skill Development,
Sports, Healthcare, National Integration, Infrastructure Development, Ecology, Environment and
Education.
  Women in remote areas are being empowered through various training programmes organised
and funded through Operation Sadbhavana in Vocational Training Centres, Women
Empowerment Centres and Computer Centres at various locations.

 Methods of Operation Sadbhavana

 Indian Army units have undertaken various development projects in the fields of education,
community development, vocational training, and ecology as a part of Operation Sadbhavana.
 Civic action programs undertaken for the local populace are small-scale community projects
aimed at the development of the people of this area to allow them to lead long healthy lives, to
acquire knowledge, and to have access to resources needed for a decent standard of living.
 The civil administration is unable to cope with the aspirations of the people of this remote and
inaccessible area because of the prevailing security situation and poor communication links and
infrastructure.
 The key result areas under Operation Sadbhavana are:
 Primary education
 Comprehensive health care
 Adult literacy and vocational training
 Enhancement of agricultural output
 Assistance in electrification and establishment of communication networks
 Adoption of villages for integrated development
 Empowerment of women
 Employment generation.
 The project will neutralise the anti-India propaganda sponsored by Pakistan in Kashmir.
 The focus of Operation Sadbhavana is to improve the overall core social indices of Education,
Women & Youth Empowerment, and Health care with simultaneous thrust on capacity building
through implemention of community/infrastructure development projects. The underlying theme
is to blunt Pakistan sponsored anti India propaganda and facilitate all around development of the
State based on a participative model involving the local people, Army and the civil
administration. Accordingly, the core of Operation Sadhbhavana theme gyrates around
aspirations of local populace and India’s national interest.
 It mainly focuses on:
 Infrastructure development
 Extensive damage to the State infrastructure was inflicted by terrorists and anti national
elements in early 1990’s. Fear of terror inhibited government agencies to function freely
and restore damaged infrastructure or undertake new projects, thereby, leaving a gapping
void in the Sate’s infrastructure.
 The Indian Army stepped in to bridge the void by providing assistance and undertaking
number of small/large infrastructure projects under Op Sadbhavana and ameliorate
conditions of the local population. Augmenting of water supply schemes, provision of
road/track connectivity, construction of small bridges and electrifications projects are
being undertaken to improve quality of life.
 The projects being undertaken are carefully planned and executed in conjunction with the
State Government so that the local administrative machinery and elected representatives
who are the real stakeholders in the development of the State are fully integrated from the
inception stage. The underlying theme being that the projects should supplement and not
supplant the efforts of civil administration.
 Education
 Ever since the inception of Operation Sadbhavana Indian Army has established Army
Goodwill Schools and rendered assistance to approximately 2000 State Government run
schools by carrying out renovation, modifications, infrastructure augmentation and
 provisioning of equipment. All Goodwill schools are affiliated to J&K State educational
Board and CBSE Board.
 The popularity of Army Goodwill Schools can be measured by the fact that there is a
growing clamor from local population for opening schools in almost all corners of the
State. Approximately 14,000 students are currently enrolled and close to one lakh
children have obtained primary/higher secondary levels quality education in last one and
half decades of insurgency.
 With an aim to provide equal opportunity to children from marginalized section of the
society and those affected by terrorist violence Army has been sponsoring the cost of
their education. Students are receiving scholarships for studies in schools within and
outside the State. Army has assisted nearly 565 students to obtain admission in various
institutions outside the State.
 Army provides free coaching to J&K students under Super 30 program with the aim to
provide coaching for MBBS and NEET courses to poor students from far-flung areas of
the state.
 Army also holds pre-training for Agnipath aspirants in remote areas of Kashmir. The
Army is providing them all facilities that are needed in the preparation for the recruitment
which includes medical checkup as per defence requirements.
 The state of J&K has a unique mix of population which also comprises Gujjar/Bakarwals
(nomadic tribes) in sizeable numbers. These nomadic groups migrate every year within
the State in summer’s months to upper reaches and to the lower foothills in the winters.
While doing so they traverse all three distinct regions of the State. In order to ensure that
their children get quality basic and middle school education, Indian Army is running
special “Shepherds Schools”, a one of its kind initiative at various receiving areas which
are frequented regularly by the nomadic groups.
 Community development projects
 The assistance provided in terms of community development projects include
construction, upgradation and provisioning of equipment for community halls, water
supply schemes, provision of generators, solar lighting, arboriculture, establishment of
bore wells, constructions / repairs to village roads / tracks and construction of toilets.
 Sports is also being provided impetus by providing equipment, sports kits and organising
various sports events.
 Women and youth empowerment
 Special emphasis is being laid to empower women by organising skill development
training like operating of computers, knitting, tailoring, candle making, bag making,
carpets / basket weaving, horticulture and fashion designing at various Vocational
Training Centers (VTC) for them.
 Regular interactions with bank and government officials are being organised to initiate
them into banking and financial management. Besides women, un-employed youth of the
Sate are also being provided with opportunities for becoming self-employed.
 Numerous Youth Guidance Employment Nodes (YGENs) have been established across
the State to create awareness about job opportunities, competitive exams and eligibility
criteria for seeking employment in Government/civil sector.
 Competent trainers and counselors train the youth and assist them to develop skills for
seeking jobs and availing employment opportunities on their own merit. Skill training as
mechanics, machine operators, poultry farming, animal husbandry, compounders and
tourist guides conducted at various Vocational Training Centers is assisting the youth to
seek self-employment.
 Health and sanitation
 To cater for the medical needs of population living in remote and inaccessible areas, a
number of medical aid/health centers have been constructed. These centers have been
 providing essential medical aid to local population and are equipped with modern
equipment.
 Villagers are regularly being educated on family planning, child care, basic hygiene,
sanitation and precautions against local ailments at these Centers.
 Mobile medical teams have been regularly dispensing medical care and medicines at the
doorstep of needy population through the medium of health camps. Motivated youth are
identified during conduct of such camps in rural areas for further training in para-medical
care and first aid by the Army Field Hospitals. Veterinary Camps are also being
organized regularly in conjunction with representatives of Government Veterinary
Department to provide veterinary care.
 Indian Army set up a medical cum COVID-19 awareness camps under Operation
Sadbhavana for Kalimasta, a remote and backward villaon various locations all over
Kashmier including far flung villages and villages on the border region. In the camp,
Army officials handed over masks and educated the lot on how to prevent the spread
of COVID-19 infection. All individuals above 18 years of age were advised to get
vaccinated as soon as possible. Certain misconceptions, myths and doubts pertaining to
novel coronavirus were addressed by the Indian Army too.
 National Integration Tours
 National Integration Tours (Educational and Motivational Initiative) are being organized with
an aim to integrate students and opinion makers from all regions of the State to national
mainstream as also to provide them with an opportunity to experience the rich cultural
diversity and varied traditions of other parts of the country.
 These tours enable the participants to experience development and growth in other regions
and act as catalysts for channelizing their energies to achieve higher goals in life. It also
provides them an opportunity to appreciate and evaluate various employment options that
exist for them outside the State.
 On an average 70-100 such tours comprising 25-30 participants are being sent each year to
various cities in the country.

 Conclusion
 Operation Sadbhavana is perhaps, the only ‘Winning of Hearts and Minds” initiative in the world
wherein, an Army embroiled in conduct of intense Counter Terrorism operations is also actively
assisting civil administration to bring back normalcy. T
 he unique initiative stands as a dazzling example of commitment and dedication of the uniformed
community towards the people of Jammu & Kashmir and has successfully blunted Pakistan
sponsored anti India propaganda.
 It has complimented efforts of the State to ameliorate conditions in order to provide much needed
succor to the population severely affected by decades long “Proxy War”. Initiatives likes these
are reassuring not only because of the positive numbers and results, but also because in these
initiatives exists a possibility of socially uplifting a section of the society which not only suffers
socio-economically but also lives under a constant threat of geopolitical instability.
 The Operation Sadbhavana initiatives of the Indian military can be viewed as a success only
when certified as such under the harsh scrutiny of history, eventually being considered a victory
in retrospect.
 The real return on the investment in the people, as a form of nation building, is in long-term
patriotism and regional development.

“Op Sadbhavana Motto … A Smile on Every Face”

“Army belongs to the people and its commitment will last as long as the
involvement of the people lasts…..”
Organic Farming and Natural Farming
 Organic Farming
 Organic Farming is a method of farming that supports cultivating the land and growing crops in
natural ways. The aim of Organic Farming is the keep the soil healthy by using organic wastes
such as animal and farm wastes, aquatic wastes, biofertilizers, and other biological products that
provide enough nutrients to the crops and promote an eco-friendly environment.
 Organic farming is a system of farm design and management to create an ecosystem of
agriculture production without the use of synthetic external inputs such as chemical fertilisers,
pesticides and synthetic hormones or genetically modified organisms that cause damage to the
environment.
 Organic farm produce means the produce obtained from organic agriculture, while organic
food means food products that have been produced in accordance with specified standards for
organic production.
 Organic Farming is an agricultural system that uses organic fertilizers such as green manure,
compost manure, bone meal, etc., and gives emphasis on the techniques such as companion
planting and crop rotation.
 Organic Farming shows that there is no need to use chemical-rich products when you can get
better crops with biological fertilizers or by using the organic method.
 This system of agriculture production combines biodiversity with healthy practices that lead to
preserving natural resources.
 Organic Farming is expected to become ₹75000 crore market by 2025.

 Indian Scenario Regarding Organic Farming

 India ranks 1st in number of organic farmers and 9th in terms of area under organic farming.
 Sikkim became the first State in the world to become fully organic in 2016.
 North East India has traditionally been organic and the consumption of chemicals is far less
than the rest of the country.
 Similarly the tribal and island territories have been traditionally practicing organic farming.
 The major organic exports from India have been flax seeds, sesame, soybean, tea, medicinal
plants, rice and pulses.
 Commencement of exports from Assam, Mizoram, Manipur and Nagaland to UK, USA,
Eswatini and Italy have proved the potential by increasing volumes and expanding to new
destinations as the demand for health foods increases.

 Characteristics of Organic Farming

 Protecting the fertility of soils by providing organic matter levels, boosting soil biological
activity, and careful mechanical intervention.
 Organic Farming provides nutrients to the crop indirectly by using relatively insoluble organic
sources.
 Disease, weed, and pest control depend majorly on natural predators, crop rotations, organic
manuring, diversity, limited thermal, resistant varieties, and chemical and biological intervention.
 Conservation of natural habitats and wildlife, and giving careful attention to the impact of the
farming system on the environment.
 Meeting nitrogen self-sufficiency by using biological nitrogen fixation, legumes, and also
effective recycling of the organic materials.
 Components of Organic Farming
 Following are the components of Organic Farming:
 Selection of variety  Weed management
 Manage soil health  Pest and disease management
 Water management  Livestock management
 Maintain genetic diversity  Nutrient management

 Types of Organic Farming

 There are two types of Organic Farming, namely:
 Integrated Organic Farming: includes the combination of nutrient management and pest
management to achieve ecological demands and requirements.
 Pure Organic Farming: avoids all unnatural chemicals. In this process, all fertilizers and
pesticides are obtained from only natural sources such as blood meal and bone meal.

 Government Initiatives to Promote Organic Farming

 Mission Organic Value Chain Development for North East Region (MOVCD)
 Mission Organic Value Chain Development for North East Region (MOVCD-NER) is
a Central Sector Scheme, a sub-mission under National Mission for Sustainable Agriculture
(NMSA)
 It was launched by the Ministry of Agriculture and Farmers Welfare in 2015 for
implementation in the states of Arunachal Pradesh, Assam, Manipur, Meghalaya, Mizoram,
Nagaland, Sikkim and Tripura.
 The scheme aims to develop certified organic production in a value chain mode to link
growers with consumers and to support the development of the entire value chain.
 Paramparagat Krishi Vikas Yojana (PKVY)
 Paramparagat Krishi Vikas Yojana, launched in 2015 is an elaborated component of Soil
Health Management (SHM) of major project National Mission of Sustainable Agriculture
(NMSA).
 Under PKVY, Organic farming is promoted through adoption of organic villages by cluster
approach and Participatory Guarantee System (PGS) certification.
 Certification Schemes
 Food Safety and Standards Authority of India (FSSAI) is the food regulator in the country
and is also responsible for regulating organic food in the domestic market and imports.
 Participatory Guarantee System (PGS)
 PGS is a process of certifying organic products, which ensures that their production takes
place in accordance with laid-down quality standards.
 PGS Green is given to chemical free produce under transition to ‘organic’ which takes 3
years.
 It is mainly for domestic purpose.
 National Program for Organic Production (NPOP)
 NPOP grants organic farming certification through a process of third party certification
for export purposes.
 Soil Health Card Scheme
 It has led to a decline of 8-10% in the use of chemical fertilizers and also raised
productivity by 5-6%.
 Agri-export Policy 2018
 Its focus is on clusters and Marketing and promotion of “Produce of India” have
positively impacted the organic farming in India.
  PM Formalization of Micro Food Processing Enterprises (PM FME)
 The Ministry of Food Processing Industries (MoFPI) launched the PM FME scheme as a
part of ‘Atmanirbhar Bharat Abhiyan’.
 It aims to bring in new technology, apart from affordable credit to help small
entrepreneurs penetrate new markets.
 Zero Budget Natural Farming
 Zero budget natural farming is a method of chemical-free agriculture drawing from
traditional Indian practices.

 Advantages of Organic Farming

 Economical: with Organic Farming, farmers can reduce their cost of production as they don’t
need to buy expensive chemicals so there is no extra expense.
 Return on Investment: the ROI is great because farmers use cheaper and local inputs to get the
output.
 Nutritional: organic products have more nutrients as compared to foods that are produced with
chemicals, fertilizer, and utilized products.
 High demand: currently, the market has a huge demand for organic products in India and also
globally.
 Environment friendly: it is one of the best advantages of Organic Farming. Organic farming
includes the usage of organic products, so it does not harm the environment. It supports wildlife,
especially in the lowlands. It leads to lesser carbon emissions. It also promotes soil respiration,
growth of beneficial organisms like earthworms, soil enzymes and microbial biomass increase
 Crop Yield: It is more productive as compared to chemical-based farming.
 Reduction in the Costs: As the inputs are produced by the farmers on the farm itself, the costs
would be decreased substantially.
 Income and Livelihood: This approach not only leads to minimise cost of cultivation (as inputs
are produced on-field), it also fetches a premium price for the produce.
 Soil Health: It leads to better soil health as it does not deplete the macro-nutrients (nitrogen,
phosphorus and potassium) and micro-nutrients (iron, manganese, zinc and copper), organic
carbon as well as rhizosphere microbiome in the soil, unlike the conventional chemical-based
practices.
 Water-use efficiency: Use of natural methods of farming leads to more efficient use of soil
moisture, leading to an increase in the levels of water table, prevents over-extraction of
groundwater and promotes aquifer recharge.
 Food Quality: It promotes the growth of nutrient content and improves the physical attributes of
vegetables like tomato, cabbage and cowpea, fetching better prices in the market.
 Some imperative reasons why Organic Farming needs to be encouraged in India:
 Sustainable agriculture method
 The rise in Agriculture productivity
 Employment generation
 Healthy organic food
 Favor eco-tourism in some areas

 Disadvantages of Organic Farming

 Organic foods are expensive because the farmers don’t get as much output as the conventional
farmers do, and that’s why organic foods cost 40% more.
 The quantity of organic foods produced is low, so the marketing and distribution are not efficient.
 Organic products have a shorter shelf life and have more flaws than that chemical products.
 Lack of adequate infrastructure and marketing of the products.
 Challenges to Organic Farming in India
 Lack of awareness
 Inadequate infrastructure and marketing problems
 High input cost
 Shortage of Biomass

 Need for Organic Farming

 The population in India is increasing day by date, and we have to stabilize agricultural production
and increase it further in a sustainable way. The natural balance needs to be restored for the
existence of property and life, and therefore, the need for Organic Farming rises.
 The agrochemicals are not renewable, and their availability is decreasing, which can cost our
foreign exchange in the future.
 More demand for organic foods due to the food safety.
 Organic Farming in India is not a new concept, and for a long time, farmers have been using
organic residues, composts, cow dung, etc. Organic Farming is the answer to achieving food
security and improving nutrition.
 With time, the popularity of Organic Farming is rapidly increasing, and due to this, farmers will
soon see their rightful place in the global trade.
 New campaigns are highlighting the benefits of Organic Farming against the conventional
system, which would further boost the demand for Organic Farming.

 Way Ahead
 Now is the time when India moves forward on the path of natural farming and takes full
advantage of the global opportunities that are emerging.
 Natural farming will reduce dependency on purchased inputs and will help to ease smallholder
farmers from credit burden.
 The villages of India have shown that villages can not only bring change but can also lead the
change.
 Unsustainable agricultural practices have proved to be harmful for land, soil and farmers in
general. A switch to organic farming can not only help to achieve sustainable agricultural
production but would help farmers with rise in income and production.
 An emphasis should be given to organic farming. Sikkim is being such a state to recognise it early
and becoming a 100% organic state. Other states should work for the same

 Natural Farming
 It is defined as a “chemical- free farming and livestock based”.
 Soundly grounded in agro-ecology, it is a diversified farming system that integrates crops, trees
and livestock, allowing the optimum use of functional biodiversity.
 It holds the promise of enhancing farmers’ income while delivering many other benefits, such
as restoration of soil fertility and environmental health, and mitigating and/or reducing
greenhouse gas emissions.
 This farming approach was introduced by Masanobu Fukuoka, a Japanese farmer and
philosopher, in his 1975 book The One-Straw Revolution.
 Internationally, Natural Farming is considered a form of regenerative agriculture—a prominent
strategy to save the planet.
 In India, Natural farming is promoted as Bhartiya Prakritik Krishi Paddhati Programme (BPKP)
under Paramparagat Krishi Vikas Yojana (PKVY).
 Significance of Natural Farming
 Minimized Cost of Production
 It is considered as a cost- effective farming practice with scope for raising employment
and rural development.
 Ensures Better Health
 As Natural Farming does not use any synthetic chemicals, health risks and hazards are
eliminated. The food has higher nutrition density and therefore offers better health benefits.
 Employment Generation
 It generates employment on account of natural farming input enterprises, value addition,
marketing in local areas, etc.
 The surplus from natural farming is invested in the village itself. As it has the potential to
generate employment, thereby stemming the migration of rural youth.
 Environment Conservation
 It ensures better soil biology, improved agrobiodiversity and a more judicious usage of
water with much smaller carbon and nitrogen footprints.
 Livestock Sustainability
 The integration of livestock in the farming system plays an important role in Natural
farming and helps in restoring the ecosystem. Eco Friendly bio-inputs, such as Jivamrit and
Beejamrit, are prepared from cow dung and urine, and other natural products.
 Resilience
 The changes in soil structure with the help of organic carbon, no/low tillage and plant
diversity are supporting plant growth even under extreme situations like
severe droughts and withstanding severe flood and wind damage during cyclones.
 NF impacts many farmers positively by imparting resilience to the crops against weather
extremities.

 Issues Related to Natural Farming

 Unable to Boost Productivity and Income
 While ZBNF has definitely helped preserve soil fertility, its role in boosting productivity
and farmers’ income isn’t conclusive yet.
 Decline in Yields
 Sikkim (India's first organic state), has seen some decline in yields following conversion
to organic farming.
 Many farmers have reverted to conventional farming after seeing their ZBNF ( Zero-
Budget Natural Farming) returns drop after a few years.
 Lack of Availability of Natural Inputs
 An often-cited barrier by farmers in transitioning to chemical-free agriculture is the lack
of readily available natural inputs. Not every farmer has the time, patience, or labour to
develop their own inputs.
 Nutrient Deficiencies
 A study in Nature Sustainability states that while the nutrient value of the natural inputs is
similar to the chemical ones used in low-input farms (farms using lower quantities of
fertilisers and pesticides), it is less in high-input farms.
 When such nutrient deficiencies are aggregated at a large scale, it might hamper the yield
over the years, potentially leading to food security concerns.
 Way Forward
 There is a need to focus on promoting natural farming in rainfed areas beyond the Gangetic
basin. Rainfed regions use only a third of the fertilisers per hectare compared to the areas where
irrigation is prevalent.
 Micro enterprises that produce inputs for chemical-free agriculture shall be provided
support from the government to address the challenge of unavailability of readily available
natural inputs, the promotion of natural farming needs to be combined with the setting up of
village-level input preparation and sales shops.
 The government should facilitate an ecosystem in which farmers learn from and support each
other while making the transition.
 Beyond evolving the curriculum in agricultural universities, there is a need to upskill the
agriculture extension workers on sustainable agriculture practices.

 Similarities Between Natural Farming And Organic Farming

 Natural and organic both are chemical free and more or less poison free farming
methods.
 Both systems discourage farmers from using any chemical fertilizers, pesticides on
plants and in all agricultural practices.
 Both farming methods encourage farmers to use local breeds of seeds, and native
varieties of vegetables, grains, pulses a nd other crops.
 Organic and natural farming methods promote nonchemical and homemade pest control
methods.

 Key Differences Between Natural Farming And Organic Farming

 In organic farming, organic fertilizers and manures like
compost, vermicompost, cow dung manure, etc. are used and added to farmlands
from external sources.
 In natural farming, neither chemical nor organic fertilizers are added to the soil.
In fact, no external fertilizers are added to soil or give to plants whatsoever.
 In natural farming, decomposition of organic matter by microbes and earthworms
is encouraged right on the soil surface itself, which gradually adds nutrition in the
soil, over the period.
 Organic farming still requires basic agro practices like plowing, tilting, mixing of
manures, weeding, etc. to be performed.
 In natural farming there no plowing, no tilting of soil and no fertilizers, and no
weeding is done just the way it would be in natural ecosystems.
 Organic farming is still expensive due to the requirement of bulk manures, and it
has an ecological impact on surrounding environments; whereas, natural
agriculture is an extremely low-cost farming method, completely molding with
local biodiversity.
 There are many working models of natural farming all over the world, the zero
budget natural farming (ZBNF) is the most popular model in India. This
comprehensive, natural, and spiritual farming system is developed by Padma Shri
Subhash Palekar.
 One Sun, One World, One Grid (OSOWOG)
 About OSOWOG or the Green Grid
 The One Sun One World One Grid (OSOWOG) is a transnational electricity grid supplying
power all over the world.
 The idea was first proposed by Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s during the first assembly of
the International Solar Alliance (ISA) in 2018.
 As per the draft made by the Ministry of New and Renewable Energy (MNRE) the scale of the
OSOWOG is ambitious, aiming to provide energy to about 140 countries through a common grid
that will transfer solar power.
 At the COP-26 climate summit in Glasgow, India launched ‘One Sun One World One Grid’
(OSOWOG).
 Prime Minister Narendra Modi also mentioned that ISRO will develop a solar calculator
application to inform countries about the solar potential of any place on the earth using satellite
data.
 This initiative was jointly launched by the United Kingdom and in partnership with ISA and
the World Bank Group.
 The concept behind the OSOWOG is ‘The Sun Never Sets’ and is a constant at some
geographical location, globally, at any given point of time.
 The fundamental concept behind OSOWOS is to develop a transnational grid that will be laid all
over the globe to transport the solar power generated across the globe to different load centres. It
would thus help in realizing the vision of “One Sun, One World, One Grid” articulated by India.
 The initiative will help to realize the “three transitions” of energy development.
 The transition of energy production from fossil fuel to clean energy dominance.
 The transition of energy allocation from local balance to cross-border and global distribution.
 The transition from coal, oil, and gas in energy consumption to electric-centric consumption.
 The OSOWOG plan may also leverage the International Solar Alliance (ISA), co-founded by
India that has 80 countries as members.
 With India in the middle, the solar spectrum can easily be divided into two broad zones:
 Far East including countries like Myanmar, Vietnam, Thailand, Lao, Cambodia etc.
 Far West covering the Middle East and the Africa Region.
 Three Phases of the Plan:
 First Phase: It will entail interconnectivity within the Asian continent.
 Second Phase: It will add Africa.
 Third Phase: It is about global interconnection.

 What is the need for the OSOWOG?

 Apart from addressing environmental concerns, India also seeks to have a geopolitical edge over
China. Experts are of the opinion that OSOWOG is the answer to China’s One Belt One Road
initiative.
 These same experts are also of the opinion that announcing infrastructure projects in other
countries is a way of asserting superiority.
 Other potential benefits also mean improving the quality of life. The potential benefits include
widespread scale-up in energy access, abatement in carbon emissions, lower costs of living and
improved livelihoods.
 Annually, India imports about $250 billion worth of fuels. This includes oil, diesel, LNG, fossil
fuels, coal etc.
 If OSOWOG can be implemented, then India has alternative means to meet its energy
requirements through sustainable energy that may reduce imported inflation pressures.
 Significance of the Project
 Help all the participating entities in attracting investments in renewable energy sources as well as
utilizing skills, technology and finances.
 Lead to reduced project costs, higher efficiencies and increased asset utilization for all the
participating entities.
 Resulting economic benefits would positively impact poverty alleviation and support in
mitigating water, sanitation, food and other socio-economic challenges.
 Allow national renewable energy management centres in India to grow as regional and global
management centres

 Challenges of One Sun, One World, One Grid

 Although the idea is brilliant where sustainable development is concerned, the OSOWOG faces
some serious challenges in its implementation:
 Due to the development of advanced electricity storage technologies, it becomes less viable
to follow the sun at any latitude or be dependent on its rays all the time.
 Large grids won’t be necessary, as installing a microgrid is enough. Microgrids are individual
solar panels that one can even set up at the rooftop of their house.
 The bigger the electricity grid the more vulnerable it is to accidents, natural disasters, cyber-
attacks etc that can disrupt the electricity supply.
 Most of the equipment for solar equipment like cells, panels etc comes from China. This can be a
hurdle as China will be least inclined in supporting a rival project like the OSOWOG.
 There can be trust issues between the grid participants on account of sovereignty and local
implications.
 Interconnection may open ways for other countries to muscle in on other economies and even
likely bring them to a grinding halt.

 How can the OSOWOG be implemented?

 Despite the grand scale of the One Sun, One World, One Grid and a host of other challenges it
faces, there are ways it can be implemented to a certain extent
 Creation of a Supranational Rule-Based Organisation: A supranational organisation can
implement the OSOWOG. In this case, the ISA can be that organisation.
 Engaging with China constructively: Given India’s dependence on Chinese imports, OSOWOG
will have to find ways to deal with China while at the same time give credence to local industry
under the Make in India program.
 In the end, it is a novel idea to establish a global solar grid, considering the implications of
climate change.
 Since it might not be possible to rope in 140 countries, India can start small by creating a grid
consisting of SAARC nations.
 The move is the key to future renewable-based energy systems globally because regional and
international interconnected green grids can enable sharing and balancing of renewable energy
across international borders.
 It allows grabbing opportunities to learn quickly from global developments and share renewable
energy resources to reduce the global carbon footprint and insulate the societies from
pandemics.
 Institution building iskey to fulfilling the ambitions of a multi-country grid project. In this
context, ISA (International Solar Alliance) can act as an independent supranational institution to
take decisions about how the grid should be run and conflicts settled.

One Sun, One World, One Grid is the solution to tackle the challenges of solar power.
 OTT Platform
 What is OTT?
 The acronym OTT stands for Over-the-Top. This convenient little term explains the new delivery
method of film and TV content over the internet whenever we want, across many different
devices, without the need for traditional broadcast, cable or satellite pay-TV providers.
 In simple terms, OTT streaming means paying an internet provider, like Airtel or Jio, for
internet access to watch Netflix, without paying for cable TV. OTT, or over-the-top platforms,
are audio and video hosting and streaming services which started out as content hosting
platforms, but soon branched out into the production and release of short movies, feature films,
documentaries and web-series themselves.
 The meaning or interpretation of OTT has bridged the possibility to watch preloaded television
episodes or on any kind of OTT content an unlimited number of times. All of these are structured
in a large & centralized library of multilingual movies.
 These platforms offer a range of content and use artificial intelligence to suggest to users the
content they are likely to view based on their past viewership on the platform.
 Most OTT platforms generally offer some content for free and charge a monthly subscription
fee for premium content which is generally unavailable elsewhere.
 Premium content is usually produced and marketed by the OTT platform themselves, in
association with established production houses which historically have made feature films.
 For example, consumers would sign up for subscriptions or for one-time view added with in-
stream ads in platforms like Netflix or Spotify to access thousands of content from anywhere
at any time. An OTT media service is any online content provider that offers streaming media
as a standalone product/service. The term is commonly applied to online video platform, but
also refers to audio streaming or real-time-based platform streaming solutions.
 The best highlight is, as content owners you can provide the entire service whenever you
wish to use it, or else you can also allow your users to download videos and play them in
offline mode too. All that it takes is to have a stable internet connection – either locally or
through a mobile network.
 Examples: Netflix, Disney+ Hotstar, Amazon Prime Video, Sony LIV, Zee5,Spotify, Gaana,
Soundcloud and so many more.

 How OTT is delivered?

 The accessibility of OTT content is one of the many reasons it’s so popular. To stream OTT,
customers only need a high-speed internet connection and a connected device that supports apps
or browsers.
 Mobile OTT Devices: Smartphones and tablets are able to download OTT apps to stream on-
the go.
 Personal Computers: Consumers can access OTT content from desktop-based apps or web
browsers.
 Smart TVs: The ability to sign in to your personalized account on the OTT media platform is
made effortless! Therefore through devices like Roku, Apple TV, or Fire Stick you can
access your subscriptions anywhere at home.
 Gaming Consoles: Target demographic within console games can be acquired via online
video content where users tend to stream their favorite shows with popular Playstations like
XBOX , Sony Playstation5, etc.
 How Do OTT Media Services Work?
 You can access OTT platforms in many ways, including via your computer, phone, tablet, smart
TV, or gaming console. You don’t need a subscription to a TV service provider—but depending
on the OTT platform, you may need a subscription to the OTT platform. This is the case for
services like Netflix and Disney+, where users can access curated content at any time with a
monthly or yearly subscription.
 Some OTT platforms, like Amazon and Peacock, instead don’t charge subscription fees to
customers, instead generating revenue by showing their viewers ads while they’re watching
content or offering reduced-cost subscriptions with limited ads.

 Advantages of OTT Platform

 Reduced Cost
 There are thousands of programs you can access with a monthly subscription. Freedom to
access international web series, shows, live sports telecasts, and favorite flicks on the go is
one of the greatest pros of streaming platforms.Also, there are no monthly bills for cable
operators or interruption to face. Anyone willing to watch online digital content can register
themselves and pay a monthly or yearly subscription amount, making it cost-effective.
 The cost of a subscription is reasonable. You may view lots of online content for a thousand
rupees per year or 200 rupees per month.

 Crisp Sound and Picture Quality

 Every OTT Platform keeps the content quality in High Definition. The higher your speed, the
better will be auditory and visual content since the service is offered online.The video and
audio quality of the movies are usually high, which is a great advantage of using an OTT
platform like HBO and Netflix. On the plus side, you can customize the video and audio
quality per your liking.
 OTT platforms provide new and high-quality content. For OTT platforms, unique concepts
and filming approaches are tested. The language barrier isn’t an issue because most sites have
a range in multiple languages.

 Instant Playback
 Instant viewing is another advantage of OTT platform as you can request to view any movies
or shows, irrespective of their time of release, anytime. You can watch your favorite web
series as many times as you like by downloading it. There are no hassles of waiting in long
ticket queues in theatres or see those annoying advertisements during a movie on TV.
 You can immediate and unlimited access to the movies, even when you are on the road. Some
platforms charge a flat monthly fee, and in return, you get full access to their programming.

 Multi-Platform Service
 It is handy because the content is viewed at any time and from any location. A person with a
smartphone and a decent internet connection can watch national and international films and
television series of their choice.
 OTT platforms give you enough freedom to watch your favorite content wherever you want,
however you want, and whenever you want. If you don’t have time to log on to your laptop or
desktop, you can binge-watch it on your smartphone or tablets even on offline mode.
 You can watch the video material on multiple devices at any time. It also has a download
option, allowing you to watch your favourite movies even if your internet connection is poor.
 These media services can easily be accessed through mobile phones, laptops, smart TV, and
other audio-visual devices with an internet connection and digital content at the International
level can be accessed.
  Original Content
 Having an account on an OTT platform like Netflix means that you will need to subscribe to
the authentic services. By paying a little subscription amount, you get a wide variety of
original content that can be accessed only upon authorization.
 Being the account owner, you can manage the stuff on your own without any intervention
from external sources.
 OTT platforms offer an ad-free experience to viewers. Users won’t have to view the same
advertisement over and over again, and they’ll be able to watch the show uninterrupted.

 Disadvantages of OTT Platform

 Online Limitation
 You can enjoy streaming platforms for as long as you have an internet connection. The
downside of streaming media from a website is that the media is only available online. This
option limits access to the material to people who don’t have an online presence. You are also
required to have an account on streaming platforms to be able to view your favorite program.

 Poor Network can Impact your viewing

 People with poor internet connections will not be able to enjoy a smooth viewing experience.
Access to the Internet is also required because the materials are only available online. If you
want the HD experience, you should have a minimum of 2MBPS of internet connection,
otherwise, you will experience buffering issues.

 Online Security
 Besides HBO, Netflix, and other OTT Platforms, some are untrusted ones. Thousands of such
platforms are unsafe for you as you are vulnerable to lose your confidential information while
paying for a subscription.
 Also, Cybercrime can happen on platforms that ask you for your personal information,
including your bank details. Even though many reputable platforms work on tightening the
security, many require tweaking their security.

 No Censorship
 OTT platforms operate independently and without following governmental policies. There
are no age limitations for viewership either. The only purpose is to bring content that attracts
more viewers on board. One of the concerning disadvantages of OTT Platform is that there is
restrictions on the content. Such content may be harmful to underage users.

 Users waste too much on OTT Platforms

 Given that there are plenty of web series, movies, and shows released every week, users are
more likely to waste their time on OTT Platforms. As a web series ends, there’s another one
in the recommended segments..
 People might quickly become addicted to OTT platforms due to the wide range of content
offered, resulting in a limited social life rather than being socially active in real life.

 OTT Regulation in India

 OTT Platforms, unlike other media providers such as television, print, or radio, are comparatively
new, and hence so far in India there are no such laws or rules governing and regulating the
content on these platforms.
 Due to the pressure to regulate the content on these platforms, the Internet and Mobile
Association of India (“IAMI”), which is the representative body of the OTT platform, came up
with the idea of a self-regulatory model.
  But, this idea could not be implemented as the Government of India in November 2020 amended
the Government of India (Allocation of Business) Rules, 1961 and brought the OTT Platforms
under the purview of, Ministry of Information and Broadcasting.
 The government recently formulated the Information Technology (Intermediary Guidelines and
Digital Media Ethics Code) Rules, 2021(“IT Rules, 2021”) which replaced the Information
Technology (Intermediaries Guidelines) Rules, 2011. Though the rules have been framed under
the Information Technology Act, 2000, Part III of these Intermediary Rules, which is mainly
concerned with the regulation of Digital news media and OTT Platforms, would be administered
by the Ministry of Information and Broadcasting.

 OTT market in India

 In India, the OTT business is only a few years old. Netflix was the first OTT platform to launch,
followed by Amazon Prime Video and more than 40 others. The first company to commission
Indian originals was Amazon. Following that, Netflix delved into the realm of local content.
 Amazon Prime Video has around 17 million paying customers, second only to Disney+ Hotstar
(18 million), with Netflix India having five million and Zee5 having 11 million or more.
 It made watching movies more easy, available, and economical for a broader range of users.
Anyone with a phone having an Internet connection can watch a movie from anywhere.
 The Indian OTT market is anticipated to reach US$3.22 billion by FY25, up from US$576.73
million in FY19, according to a report.
 By FY25, India will have 800 million or more online video users, which will rise as smartphone
and internet penetration increase.
 The Indian OTT streaming industry is expected to grow to $13-15 billion over the next decade.

 Way Forward
 The pandemic and subsequent lock-downs affected almost every aspect of life and people had to
make changes and adapt to a ‘new normal’. With most industries being affected adversely, there
was a need to evolve and reinvent the way things worked to get out of the backlash of the
pandemic.The film industry also took a hit, but both the industry and the audience moved to the
smaller screen on OTT platforms. This way, creativity and entertainment crept out of the gloom
of the pandemic and onto OTT platforms such as Netflix, Amazon Prime Video, etc.
 OTT platforms have a great future. Considering the present situation, the need for an unbiased
regulatory body to regulate the contents on OTT platform is necessary. The public today is
looking for content that brings out the truth and realities of the society, provides regional
varieties, and most importantly that does not hurt the sentiments of people. The government must
take care that the regulatory measures do not override the rights of people and provide an
effective regulatory process.
 OTT platforms are thriving in the current market scenario. They offer an excellent opportunity for
content providers to reach out to new users and expand their subscribers.
 With more people getting access to high-speed internet, the growth potential is immense with a
large variety of content of different kinds.
 OTT services are revolutionizing the media and entertainment industry. OTT has emerged as a
powerful medium used by individuals to access, share and create content freely across the globe.
 Over-the-top content is taking over India. Because of its low cost, high quality, and ease of use,
more people watch on-demand videos than ever before.
 One of the things that have helped drive the success of OTT platforms in India is their ability to
develop content for various markets.

What makes OTT platforms a success in India is the internet and its growth.
 QUAD vs China
 What is QUAD?
 It is the grouping of four democracies –India, Australia, the US, and Japan.
 All four nations find a common ground of being democratic nations and also support the
common interest of unhindered maritime trade and security.
 It aims to ensure and support a “free, open and prosperous” Indo-Pacific region.
 The idea of QUAD was first mooted by Japanese Prime Minister Shinzo Abe in 2007. However,
the idea couldn’t move ahead with Australia pulling out of it, apparently due to Chinese
pressure.
 Finally in 2017, India, Australia, the US and Japan, came together and formed this
“quadrilateral” coalition.
 It is often dubbed as an "Asian" or "mini" North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO), and is
viewed as a counterbalance to China's military and economic clout in the Indo-Pacific region.

 Principles of QUAD
 The motive behind the QUAD is to keep the strategic sea routes in the Indo-Pacific free of any
military or political influence.
 It is basically seen as a strategic grouping to reduce Chinese domination.
 The core objective of the QUAD is to secure a rules-based global order, freedom of navigation,
and a liberal trading system.
 The coalition also aims to offer alternative debt financing for nations in the Indo-Pacific region.
 The QUAD leaders exchange views on contemporary global issues such as critical and emerging
technologies, connectivity and infrastructure, cyber security, maritime security, humanitarian
assistance, disaster relief, climate change, pandemic, and education.

 What are the Opportunities for India under QUAD Arrangement?

 QUAD gives a powerful platform to advance its interests in East Asia, coordinate strategies with
powerful friends and add more strength to its Act East initiative.
 It is deepening India’s ties with US, Australia and Japan and providing India significant leverage
in shaping US policies in Afghanistan-Pakistan to the benefit of India.
 Through QUAD India seeks to reassert rule based world order to counter China’s growing power
and assertion.
 India can even take the help of its naval front and conduct strategic explorations in the Indo-
Pacific region.
 By joining the QUAD India has taken a significant turn in its policy for the subcontinent.
  The geostrategic term “Indo-Pacific” as opposed to “Asia-Pacific” has been gaining
currency.
 It will deepen India’s ties with US, Australia and Japan with benefits in diplomatic
leverage and sharing of burden in defence.
 Countering China
 The maritime space is a lot more important to China than engaging in opportunistic land
grab attempts in the Himalayas.
 If Chinese hostilities rise on the borders, India can take the support of the other QUAD
nations to counter.
 A huge chunk of Chinese trade happens via the Indian oceanic routes that pass through
maritime chokepoints.
 In the event of any Chinese aggression on borders, India by cooperating with QUAD
countries can potentially disrupt Chinese trade.
 Hence, unlike in the continental sphere where India seems facing a ‘nutcracker like
situation’ due to China-Pakistan collusion, the maritime sphere is wide open to India to
undertake coalition building, rule setting, and other forms of strategic exploration.
 Emerging as a Net Security Provider
 There is a growing great power interest in the maritime sphere, especially with the arrival
of the concept of ‘Indo-Pacific’. For instance, many European countries have recently
released their Indo-Pacific strategies.
 With India, located right at the centre of the Indo-Pacific geopolitical imagination can
realise the vision of a ‘broader Asia’ that can extend its influence away from geographical
boundaries.
 Moreover, India can build around collective action in humanitarian assistance and disaster
relief, monitoring shipping for search and rescue or anti-piracy operations, infrastructure
assistance to climatically vulnerable states, connectivity initiatives and similar activities.
 Further, India with QUAD countries can check imperialist policies of China in Indian
Ocean region and ensure Security and growth for all in the region.

 What are the Issues Related to QUAD?

 Undefined Vision
 Although there is potential for cooperation, the QUAD remains a mechanism without a
defined strategic mission.
 Maritime Dominated
 The entire focus on the Indo-Pacific makes the QUAD A maritime, rather than a land-based
grouping, raising questions whether the cooperation extends to the Asia-Pacific and
Eurasian regions.
 India’s Aversion of Alliance System
 The fact that India is the only member that is averse to a treaty alliance system has slowed
down the progress of building a stronger Quadrilateral engagement.
 The Threat of China
 For the US, it is about trade and Taiwan.
 For Australia too, trade was the biggest issue until the recent establishment of a Chinese
military base in the Solomon Islands brought a new dimension.
 Japan and India are closest to China, and both face belligerent Chinese claims to territory.

 Opportunities before QUAD

 Space
 As leaders in space, QUAD countries are strengthening cooperation and pooling collective
expertise to exchange satellite data, enable capacity-building, and consult on guidelines.
  Harnessing commercially-available data using existing technologies
 Through a combination of an Automatic Identification System and radio-frequency
technologies, these partners can provide an unprecedented “common thread” of activities.
 Because of its commercial origin, this data will be unclassified, allowing the QUAD to
provide it to a wide range of partners who wish to benefit.
 The QUAD Vaccine Partnership and Global Health Security
 The QUAD is committed to maintaining its global leadership in responding to the
COVID-19 pandemic and bolstering global health security.
 QUAD partners have collectively provided 257 million safe and effective doses to the
Indo-Pacific.
 Critical and Emerging Technologies
 Four countries are committed to responsible innovation in critical and emerging
technologies.
 Through a new Memorandum of Cooperation on 5G Supplier Diversification and Open
RAN, the QUAD will cooperate on technical exchanges and test bed activity to advance
interoperability and telecommunications cyber security.
 Infrastructure
 To help meet the Indo-Pacific’s enormous infrastructure needs, QUAD leaders launched
the QUAD Infrastructure Coordination Group, which will deepen collaboration and
pursue complementary actions, including in digital connectivity, transportation
infrastructure, clean energy and climate resilience.

 Malabar Exercise
 It is a multilateral war-gaming naval exercise that was started in 1992. It began as a bilateral
exercise between the navies of India and the United States.
 Two more editions of the exercise were carried out in 1995 and 1996, after which there was a
break until 2002 in the aftermath of India’s nuclear tests.
 From 2002 onward, the exercise has been conducted every year.
 Japan and Australia first participated in 2007, and since 2014, India, the US and Japan have
participated in the exercise every year.
 In 2020 Australia joined the Malabar Exercise on India’s request in order to contain China in
the Indo-Pacific region.
 For the first time in over a decade, Malabar 2020 saw the participation of all four QUAD
members.
 It is aimed to support free, open and inclusive Indo-Pacific and remain committed to a rules
based international order.

 Significance of Malabar Exercise

 Enhance Strategic Partnership
 Such complex exercises have further enhanced synergy and mutual understanding among
the four navies in undertaking joint maritime security operations, and will go a long way in
further strengthening their already close strategic partnership.
 Sustainable Indo-Pacific Coalition
 A major step towards building a sustainable Indo-Pacific coalition thereby addressing the
massive strategic imbalance generated by an economically and militarily powerful China.
 There is a consensus, among many major liberal democracies, that China threatens the
international system, liberal societies and a rules-based regime.
 Peace through Sea
 The road to peace in the mountains may lie through the sea.
  It is not a coincidence that as India-US ties improved in the mid-2000s, China was better
behaved.
 It is only with economic strength and partnerships such as the one that will be manifested in
the Malabar exercise that India can broaden its options with China.

 Other Exercises with QUAD Countries

 India- Japan: JIMEX (Naval exercise), SHINYUU Maitri (Air Force exercise), and Dharma
Guardian (Military exercise).
 India-US: Yudha Abhyas (Army), Vajra Prahar (Military), Spitting Cobra, SANGAM, RED
FLAG, COPE INDIA.
 India-Australia: AUSINDEX (Maritime), AUSTRA HIND, Pitch Black.
 Passage Exercises (PASSEX).

 Way Forward
 The QUAD nations need to better explain the Indo-Pacific Vision in an overarching
framework with the objective of advancing everyone’s economic and security interests.
 India has many other partners in the Indo-Pacific; therefore, India should pitch for countries like
Indonesia, Singapore to be invited to join in the future.
 India should develop a comprehensive vision on the Indo-Pacific which would ideate on the
current and future maritime challenges, consolidate its military and non-military tools, and
engage its strategic partners.
 The QUAD members will have to chart out a clearer vision for the grouping. A “free and open
Indo-Pacific” should not merely be a slogan. The QUAD Group should work out a working
regional consultation mechanism and also work more closely with the ASEAN.
 The QUAD countries recognise each other’s approaches and have endeavoured to revive
the group by building on the areas of convergence.
 Through QUAD India seeks to reassert rule based world order to counter China’s growing power
and assertion.
 India can even take the help of its naval front and conduct strategic explorations in the Indo-
Pacific region.
 India’s Stand
 QUAD is united by its democratic values and will remain an important pillar of stability in
the Indo-Pacific region.
 Called the meet an extension of the ancient Indian philosophy ‘Vasudhaiva Kutumbakam’,
which regards the world as one family.
 Australia’s Stand
 QUAD grouping could be the start of a new, permanent and powerful regional grouping of
like-minded democracies.
 America’s Stand
 QUAD is an opportunity to cooperate on economics, technology, climate and security. It is
not a military alliance or North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) equivalent.
 Maritime security, humanitarian and disaster response are core to the QUAD agenda.
 QUAD is going to be a vital arena for cooperation in the Indo-Pacific region.
 Japan’s Stand
 It will firmly advance its cooperation to realise a free and open Indo Pacific, and to make a
tangible contribution to the peace, stability, and prosperity of the region, including
overcoming Covid-19.

The QUAD has evolved as a unique partnership and is poised to play a meaningful
role in promoting stability, security and development in the Indo-Pacific region.
 Reforms in Education System
 About the Indian Education System
 By 2030, India will have the largest number of young population in the globe, a population size which
will be a boon only if these young people are skilled enough to join the workforce. Quality
education will play a major role in it.
 A major shift in the education system can be observed since the pre and post-British rule till today in
India. Initially, children were educated in Gurukuls which was later modified and the modern
education system was introduced.
 After India became independent, the constitution committed six fundamental rights, of which one was
the Right to Education. It allowed free education for every child up between the age of 6 and 14
years.
 The education system is mainly divided into pre-primary, primary, elementary and secondary
education, which is followed by higher studies.
 However, there are many drawbacks and loopholes in this system which if curbed can work for the
overall development of the country.
 The current state of Education faces major challenges like lack of adequate infrastructure, low
government expenditure on education( less than 3.5% of the GDP) and as per Unified District
Information System For Education (UDISE) the pupil-to-teacher ratio at national level for elementary
schools is 24:1.
 So it's high time to tune the Indian Education System with global standards and adopt modern learning
approaches that are responsive and relevant. Also, vitalise National Education Policy 2020 to see the
light of day.

 Features of National Education Policy 2020

 The NEP 2020 aims at making “India a global knowledge superpower”. It is only the 3rd major
revamp of the framework of education in India since independence.
 The two earlier education policies were brought in 1968 and 1986.
 It aims to bring 2 crore out of school children back into the mainstream through an open schooling
system.
 School governance is set to change, with a new accreditation framework and an independent
authority to regulate both public and private schools.
 Assessment reforms with 360-degree Holistic Progress Card, tracking Student Progress for
achieving Learning Outcomes.
 Vocational Education to start from Class 6 with Internships.

 What are the Major Issues Related to the Education Sector in India?
 Inadequate Infrastructure in Schools
 Only 12% of schools have internet facilities and 30% have computers.
 About 42% of these schools lacked furniture, 23% lacked electricity, 22% lacked ramps for
the physically disabled, and 15% lacked WASH facilities (which include drinking water,
toilets, and hand wash basins).
 High Dropout Rate
 The dropout rate is very high in primary and secondary levels. Most of the students in 6-14 age
groups leave the school before completing their education. It leads to wastage of financial and
human resources.
 According to the National Family Health Survey, not being interested in studies was the
reason given by 21.4% of girls and 35.7% of boys aged between 6 to 17 years for dropping out
of school.
  Problem of Brain Drain
 Due to cutthroat competition for getting admission in top institutes like IITs and IIMs, a
challenging academic environment is created for a large number of students in India, so they
prefer going abroad, that makes our country deprived of good talent.
 There is definitely a quantitative expansion of education in India but the qualitative front
(essential for a student to get a job) is lagging behind.
 Mass illiteracy
 In spite of constitutional directives and efforts aimed at enhancing education, around 25% of
Indians still remain illiterate, which also leaves them socially and digitally excluded.
 Lack of Adequate Attention to Indian Languages
 Indian languages are still in an underdeveloped stage, the medium of instruction particularly in
science subjects is English, resulting in unequal opportunities for rural students.
 Also, standard publications are not available in the Indian language.
 Lack of Technical and Vocational Education
 Mainly, our educational system is of generalistic nature. Development of technical and
vocational education is quite unsatisfactory, due to which the number of educated unemployed
persons is increasing day by day.
 Unaffordability
 A meager income at rural level leads to education taking a backseat. Due to lack of awareness
and financial stability, many parents tend to see education as an expense rather than an
investment. They would rather want their children to work and earn.
 When it comes to higher education, lack of good institutes in the vicinity force students to
shift in cities, which adds to their expenses. This leads to low rates of enrollment.
 Gender-Inequality
 Despite the government's effort to ensure equality of opportunity for education for both men and
women in our society, the literacy rate of women in India, especially in rural areas, still remains
very poor.
 According to UNICEF, poverty and local cultural practices (female infanticide, dowry, and
early marriage) play a big role in gender inequality in education throughout India.
 Another obstacle to education is a lack of sanitation in schools across the country.

 Digital Education: Learning amid the Pandemic

 The Covid-19 outbreak
 It had disrupted children’s lives, pushed out many, and stalled classes and examinations across the
country. To ensure students did not miss out on studies, schools shifted the classes to online
mode.With the pandemic forcing the teaching and learning process to migrate to the online mode,
the education system faced an upheaval like never before. Many of the students were left clinging
to their phones and computer screens.
 Digital Education
 Digital education is the innovative use of digital tools and technologies during teaching and
learning and is often referred to as Technology Enhanced Learning (TEL) or e-Learning.
 Exploring the use of digital technologies gives educators the opportunity to design engaging
learning opportunities in the courses they teach, and these can take the form of blended or fully
online courses and programs.
 Government Initiatives for Smooth Conduct of E-Learning:
 E-PG Pathshala: An initiative of the Ministry of Human Resource Development to provide e-
content for studies.
 SWAYAM: it provides for an integrated platform for online courses.
 NEAT: It aims to use Artificial Intelligence to make learning more personalized and
customized as per the requirements of the learner
 PRAGYATA: Under the PRAGYATA guidelines, schools can hold live online classes for a
maximum of 1.5 hours per day for Classes 1-8, and 3 hours per day for Classes 9-12.
 Schemes & Campaigns to Boost Education System in India
 Sarva Shiksha Abhiyan: Launched in 2001 with an aim to promote ‘Education for All’,
strengthening the existing infrastructure of schools and construction of new schools.
 Samagra Shiksha: It is an integrated scheme for school education extending from pre-school to
class XII to ensure inclusive and equitable quality education at all levels of school education. The
scheme treats school education holistically as a continuum from Pre-school to Class 12.The main
emphasis of the Scheme is on improving the quality of school education by focusing on the two T’s
– Teacher and Technology.
 PM SHRI Schools: On the occasion of Teacher’s Day 2022, the PM of India announced a new
initiative -PM SHRI Schools (PM ScHools for Rising India). It will be a laboratory for the
new National Education Policy (NEP) and under the first phase, 14,500 schools will be upgraded.
 National Programme for Education of Girls at Elementary Level:
 It is a focused intervention of Government of India, to reach the “Hardest to Reach” girls, especially
those not in school.
 Mid Day Meal Scheme: It is one meal that is provided to all children enrolled in government schools,
government-aided schools, local body schools, special training centres (STC), madrasas and maktabs
supported under Sarva Shiksha Abhiyan (SSA).
 Rashtriya Madhyamik Shiksha Abhiyan:It is a flagship scheme aiming at enhancing secondary
education and increasing the enrolment rate by providing a secondary school within a reasonable
distance of every home.
 Scheme for Infrastructure Development in Minority Institutes:The scheme would facilitate
education of minorities by augmenting and strengthening school infrastructure in Minority Institutions
in order to expand facilities for formal education to children of minority communities.
 Beti Bachao Beti Padhao: The scheme to promote girl child education in India.

 What should be the Way Forward?

 Towards Experiential Learning Approach
 There is a need for inclusion of problem-solving and decision-making related subjects in the
school curriculum to offer a hands-on learning experience to students and prepare them to face
the outside world when they enter into the workforce.
 Experiential Learning can reap maximum benefit from its ability to extract active participation
from every student, which in turn triggers their emotional intelligence and sets them on a path
to self-learning.
 Linking Artificial Intelligence with the Educational Sector will also facilitate experiential
learning.
 Implementation of National Education Policy
 The implementation of the NEP can help shake the education system from its slumber.
 Moving away from the current 10+2 system to a 5+3+3+4 system will bring the pre-school
age group formally into the education set-up.
 Education-Employment Corridor
 India's educational setup needs to be enhanced by integrating vocational learning with
mainstream education and providing right mentorship at school level to ensure that students are
guided in the right direction from the start and are aware of career opportunities.
 Students in rural regions have great potential and are motivated to study but lack the right
mentoring. This is required not just for the children but also for their parents that will in a way
also reduce the gender gap in education.
 Reducing the Language Barrier
 While keeping English as a means of education for international understanding (EIU), it
is important to give other Indian languages equal importance, and special publication
agencies can be established to translate resources into a variety of languages so that all Indian
students have the same opportunity regardless of their linguistic background.
 Taking a Note From Past to Future
 It is important to look to the future while keeping our long-established roots in mind.
  Expenditure on education
 More funds should be allotted for the development of the education system in India. In the past
few years, many beneficial steps have been taken in this direction and if the same is continued
India may soon be overcome the current challenges.
 Capacity utilization
 The world now needs creative minds and the Government must encourage schools to boost the
students and utilise their capacities to the max and not let their ideas go unheard.
 Infrastructure facilities
 Better infrastructure must be provided especially in Government schools. Since Government is
now focussing on digital education, they must undertake steps to provide all necessary facilities in
the Government schools and rural areas as well.
 PPP model
 Well-designed PPPs can create models of innovation for the school system in India. Thus the
Public-Private Partnership (PPP) model must be taken into consideration.
 Student-teacher ratio
 The number of students in search of proper education is way more in comparison to the teachers
and faculty available. Thus, qualified teachers must be appointed to impart knowledge to the
future of the country.
 Students studying abroad
 There are many students who choose to study abroad because of these issues in the Indian
education system. The concerned authorities must work on them and students must also choose to
stay, learn in India and empower the country through their knowledge.

 Conclusion
 Innovations required: India is moving towards digital education. This will help in budding the
innovative minds of students and the youth of the country. This will bring a transformation in the
Indian education system and the authorities and Government must encourage and boost the young
minds to focus on overall development rather than just the book learning.
 Quality of education: There is a major difference in the quality of education being provided in the
rural and urban areas of the country. Steps must be taken to standardize the quality of education across
India so that everyone can get equal and unbiased knowledge and opportunities to grow.
 Making education affordable: There are Government schools and educational Institutions which are
affordable but lack in terms of infrastructure and quality. On the other hand, there are various private
education institutions which demand high fees and have better infrastructure and equipment to study.
This disparity must be worked upon and the Government must make education affordable and
accessible for all. ‘Equality of Opportunity’ is one of the basic principles of the Indian Constitution.
 Introduction of technology: Technology and education system cannot be kept apart. Students must
be taught about technology right from the early years of their education so that it does not come like
an alien thing in their later times. Indian schools must embrace technology and education with an open
heart and propagate the same to the students as it is there, where their future lies.
 Better training of educators: Teachers play the most important role in schools and hence, they
should be given the best of class training. After all, they are shaping the future of the nation, the
children. Teachers are often considered as second parents. Thus, they should be imparted their training
in a way that they can act as parents to the children away from their homes.While teaching, they
should create a congenial and home-like atmosphere where students can feel the empathy and love in
the classroom and which can then be reflected in their behaviors.

Thus, it is high time that we take certain steps immediately so that not only the level of
education is increased which will enhance an individual’s knowledge but also it will in
turn lead to the up liftman of the country that we really need and certainly India will
become one of the best in terms of education and soon it will be a developed nation..
 Right to Repair Initiative for Circular Economy
 What is E-Waste?
 E-Waste is short for Electronic-Waste and the term is used to describe old, end-of-life or
discarded electronic appliances. It includes their components, consumables, parts and spares.
 Electronic waste (e-waste) is the waste that arises from end-of-life electronic products. It
is the fastest growing waste stream in the world today.
 It is categorised into 21 types under two broad categories:
 Information technology and communication equipment.
 Consumer electrical and electronics.
 Growth of the Information and Communication Technology sector has enhanced the
usage of electronic equipments exponentially and faster obsolescence and subsequent
up-gradation of electronic products is resulting in accumulation of huge e-waste.
 This growing concern of e-waste mangement needs to be addressed systematically
through policy and practice. If handled and disposed of in an irresponsible manner, e-
waste can lead to extremely damaging impact on human health and the environment.
 India generates around 3.2 million tons per year of electronic waste which contains many
precious materials like Gold, Palladium, Silver, etc., in addition to hazardous materials
which can cause irreparable health hazards to human beings. In this context, development
of environmentally benign processes to address those issues is of paramount importance.

 List of Common E-waste Items

 Home Appliances
 Microwaves  Heaters
 Home Entertainment Devices  Fans
 Communications and Information Technology Devices
 Cell phones  Laptops
 Smartphones  Circuit boards
 Desktop Computers  Hard Drives
 Home Entertainment Devices
 DVDs  Video Game Systems
 Blu Ray Players  Fax machines
 Stereos  Copiers
 Televisions  Printers
 Electronic Utilities
 Remote Controls  Smart and night Lights
 Television Remotes  Treadmills
 Electrical Cords  Smart Watches
 Lamps  Heart Monitors
 Office and Medical Equipment
 Copiers/Printers  Dialysis Machines
 IT Server Racks  Imaging Equipment
 IT Servers  Phone & PBX systems
 Cords and Cables  Audio & Video Equipment
 WiFi Dongles  Network Hardware
 The Dangers of E-waste
 According to the World Health Organization (WHO), health risks may result from direct contact
with toxic materials that leach from e-waste. These include minerals such as lead, cadmium,
chromium, brominated flame retardants, or polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs). Danger can come
from inhalation of the toxic fumes, as well as from the accumulation of chemicals in soil, water,
and food.
 This puts not just people in danger but land and sea animals as well. In developing countries, the
risks are exceptionally high because some developed countries send their e-waste there.
 Studies have shown this global e-waste has detrimental effects on the people that work with the e-
waste but also the people that live around it. Because of this, a proper recycling process needs to
be put in place to protect us and future generations.

 What are the Challenges Related to the Management of E-Waste in India?

 Less Involvement of People
 A key factor in used electronic devices not being given for recycling was because
consumers themselves did not do so.
 However, in recent years, countries around the world have been attempting to pass
effective 'right to repair' laws.
 Involvement of Child Labor
 In India, about 4.5 lakh child laborers in the age group of 10-14 are observed to be
engaged in various E-waste activities and that too without adequate protection and
safeguards in various yards and recycling workshops.
 Ineffective Legislation
 There is absence of any public information on most State Pollution Control Boards
(SPCBs)/PCC websites.
 Health Hazards
 E-waste contains over 1,000 toxic materials, which contaminate soil and groundwater.
 Lack of Incentive Schemes
 No clear guidelines are there for the unorganized sector to handle E-waste.
 Also, no incentives are mentioned to lure people engaged to adopt a formal path for
handling E-waste.
 E-waste Imports
 Cross-border flow of waste equipment into India- 80% of E-waste in developed countries
meant for recycling is sent to developing countries such as India, China, Ghana and
Nigeria.
 The Reluctance of Authorities Involved
 Lack of coordination between various authorities responsible for E-waste management
and disposal including the non-involvement of municipalities.
 Security Implications
 End of life computers often contain sensitive personal information and bank account
details which, if not deleted leave opportunity for fraud.

 What are the Provisions regarding E-waste in India?

 India has a formal set of rules for electronic waste management, first announced these rules in
2016 and amended it in 2018.
 Recently, the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change has released the draft
notification for Electronic Waste Management
 The Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change notified the E-Waste Management
Rules, 2016 in supersession of the E-waste (Management & Handling) Rules, 2011.
 India’s first e-waste clinic for segregating, processing and disposal of waste from household and
commercial units has been be set-up in Bhopal, Madhya Pradesh.
 Over 21 products (Schedule-I) were included under the purview of the rule. It
included Compact Fluorescent Lamp (CFL) and other mercury containing lamps, as well as
other such equipment.
 For the first time, the rules brought the producers under Extended Producer Responsibility
(EPR), along with targets. Producers have been made responsible for the collection of E-waste
and for its exchange.
 Various producers can have a separate Producer Responsibility Organisation (PRO) and ensure
collection of E-waste, as well as its disposal in an environmentally sound manner.
 Deposit Refund Scheme has been introduced as an additional economic instrument wherein the
producer charges an additional amount as a deposit at the time of sale of the electrical and
electronic equipment and returns it to the consumer along with interest when the end-of-life
electrical and electronic equipment is returned.
 The role of State Governments has been also introduced to ensure safety, health and skill
development of the workers involved in dismantling and recycling operations.
 A provision of penalty for violation of rules has also been introduced.
 Urban Local Bodies (Municipal Committee/Council/Corporation) have been assigned the duty
to collect and channelize the orphan products to authorized dismantlers or recyclers.
 Allocation of proper space to existing and upcoming industrial units for e-waste dismantling
and recycling
 There have been several further developments in the sector since the introduction of the
Rules. And, in line with the LiFE (Lifestyle for Environment) movement launched to
encourage sustainable consumption, the Department of Consumer Affairs under the
Ministry of Consumer Affairs, Food & Public Distribution has taken a significant step for
developing an overall framework for the 'Right to Repair'.
 Right to Repair
 The LiFE movement calls for mindful and deliberate utilisation which includes
reusing and recycling various consumer products. Repairing is a critical function
of all forms of re-use and even for the sustainable life of the products.
 A product that cannot be repaired or which falls under planned obsolescence, i.e.
designing a product with an artificially limited useful life, not only becomes
ewaste but also forces the consumers to buy new products instead of being able to
reuse or repair them. Restricting the repair of products forces consumers to
deliberately make a choice to purchase a new model of that product.
 The 'Right to Repair' for consumer goods refers to the concept of allowing end
users, consumers as well as businesses, to repair devices they own or service
without any manufacturer or technical restrictions.
 The rationale behind 'Right to Repair' is that when we buy a product, it is inherent
that we must own it completely and that the consumers should be able to repair
and modify the product with ease and at reasonable cost, without being captive to
the whims of manufacturers for repairs. Considerable delay in repair, exorbitantly
high price of repair, unavailability of spare etc. causes consumers great distress
and harassment.
 The 'Right to Repair' framework set up by a committee under the Ministry of
Consumer Affairs will give consumers a chance to repair their products at an
optimal cost instead of buying new products altogether.
  The important sectors for the initial focus of the framework are farming
equipment, mobile phones & tablets, consumer durables, automobiles &
automobile equipment.
 Under this framework, it would be mandatory for manufacturers to share their
product details with customers so that they can either repair themselves or by
third parties, rather than only depending on original manufacturers.
 It will save consumers' money and contribute to circular economy objectives by
improving the life span, maintenance, reuse, upgrade, recyclability, and waste
handling of the appliances. The framework also aims to help harmonise the trade
between the Original Equipment Manufacturers (OEMs), thirdparty buyers and
sellers, thus also creating new jobs.
 It will also help reduce the vast mountain of e-waste that piles up each year on the
continent and boost business for small repair shops, which forms an integral part
of local economies.
 Once it is rolled out in India, it will become a game-changer both for the
sustainability of the products and as well as serve as a catalyst for employment
generation through Aatmanirbhar Bharat by allowing third-party repairs.
 Mission LiFE
 Mission LiFE (Lifestyle for Environment) is a public movement to mobilise
individuals to become 'pro-planet people'.
 The LiFE Movement aims to utilise the power of collective action and nudge
individuals across the world to undertake simple climatefriendly actions in their
daily lives.
 Additionally, it also seeks to leverage the strength of social networks to influence
social norms surrounding climate. The Mission plans to create and nurture a
global network of individuals, namely 'Pro-Planet People' (P3), who will have a
shared commitment to adopt and promote environmentally-friendly lifestyles.
Through the P3 community, the Mission seeks to create an ecosystem that will
reinforce and enable environmentally friendly behaviours to be self-sustainable.
 LiFE seeks to create an ecosystem that will reinforce and enable environmentally
friendly behaviours to be self-sustainable.

 What are E-waste Recycling Practices in India?

 Informal Sector
 95% of the e-waste in India is being recycled in the non-formal sector and 5% of the e-
waste volume is handled in the formal unit.
 Non-formal units generally follow steps such as a collection of the e-waste from the rag
pickers, disassembly of the products for their useable parts, components, modules, which
are having resell value.
 The rest of the material is chemically treated to recover precious metals. Due to
inadequate means, it may cause leaching of hazardous substances to the air, soil, and
water.
 This recycling method has low efficiency and recovery is carried out only for valuable
metals like gold, silver, aluminum, copper, etc.

 Formal Sector
 The use of advanced processes and technologies leads to the efficient recovery of metals.
  Efficiency of recovery in formal recycling is high and metals at the trace level can also be
recovered. Some technology works with a zero-landfill approach.
 The recycling/ recovery of valuable substances by units in the formal sector is carried out
in a protected environment and with due care to minimise any damage to the environment
or society.
 Most of the e-waste in India is channelised to non-formal sector, whereas the formal
sector is facing the problem of not having sufficient input materials.

 Preliminary Steps in the Disposal and Management of E-waste?

 Purchase Fewer Items
 The most common source of e-waste is the purchase of items that people do not require.
Avoid buying new electronic devices that the maker can’t reuse or discard. Opting for
recyclable or long-lasting electronic products is a sustainable step toward e-waste
management.
 Donate or Give Away of E-waste
 If the consumer doesn’t need something he/she can donate it so that it can be appreciated
by someone else. Donations are excellent tax deductions since the amount is generally
close to the worth of the asset if sold.
 Selling Unused Products
 Selling electronics as soon as there is no need to keep them; newer models quickly
depreciate in value. There is a plethora of companies that will gladly buy the old
electronic equipment. They offer to provide ‘money in exchange for product’ services.
 Awareness about the Recycling Possibilities
 There’s a need to be aware of rules and regulations regarding the e-waste management on
which the government is working. As e-waste is not hazardous if it is stocked in safe
storage or recycled by scientific methods or transported from one place to the other in
parts or in totality in the formal sector. The e-waste can, however, be considered
hazardous if recycled by primitive methods.

 Way Forward
 Policies and Better Implementation: There are various startups and companies in India that
have now started to collect and recycle electronic waste. We need better implementation
methodologies and inclusion policies that provide accommodation and validation for the
informal sector. Effective implementation of regulations is the way ahead to managing
the e-waste that is yet to be regulated in at least 115 countries to step up and help us meet
our recycling targets in an environmentally sound manner.
 Need of Inclusion: Also, successfully raising collection rates required every actor to be
involved, including consumers.
 Encouraging Informal Sector: It is needed to come up with a strategy to engage with informal
sector workers because doing so will not only go a long way in better e-waste management
practices but also aid in environmental protection, improve the health and working conditions of
labourers and provide better work opportunities to over a million people. This will make
management environmentally sustainable and easy to monitor.
 Increase in Employment: The need of the hour is to generate employment, which can be done
through identifying and promoting cooperatives and expanding the scope of the E-Waste
(Management) Rules, 2016 to these cooperatives or the informal sector workers.

CYCLING GIVES HEALTH TO ONE,

E-RECYCLING GIVES HEALTH TO ALL
 Role of Youth in Nation Building
The role of Youth in nation-building or development is very important, and this is because the
development of any nation lies in the future generation. Democracy, economy, technology and the
improvement of medical science all lie in the hands of the Youth.

Poverty, unemployment, global warming, and pollution of many types are the problems that the world is
facing today. The answer to solving all these problems lies with the next generation. History is evident
that the next generation has been the answer to solve future problems. As time passes by, it is required to
adapt to the changes and bring a change in society. The Youth is capable of doing so; we can bring a
change in society.

Swami Vivekananda once said, “My faith is in the younger generation, the modern generation and out of
them will come to my workers”. This quote describes the impact the Youth can have on society. The
mission to make the first person walk on the moon consisted of more than 80% of the Youth who helped
in planning the whole mission. Likewise, Indian Youth also played an important role to make our country
free from British rule. Youth has the power to change the world. When the Youth is united, we can make
the world a better place to live, and when we are divided, we also have the power to destroy the
world. Youth is the most dynamic and important segment of the population in any country.

Statistics show that the developing countries which have a huge youth population could be seeing
tremendous growth in all the sectors of the countries provided they invest in young people's education,
health and protect and guarantee their rights. It is believed that today's young minds and tomorrow's
leaders, creators, builders, and innovators.

For Youth to be good leaders, inventors and innovators, it is important that they are supported and are
provided good health, training, and education to transform the future. There will be a boost in the
economy of the country when the Youth is working and earning rather than being dependent on anyone.
Half of the world's population is now under the age of 25, and 1.8 billion people are between the ages of
11-25. This is considered to be the largest youth generation to ever exist. Many countries such as Sweden,
Japan, and Germany have already started gaining from the Youth by providing them opportunities in
different sectors. It has been more than 80 years plus since the bombing of Hiroshima and Nagasaki in
Japan. Any country would be devastated by the loss of lives and the destruction that was caused during
that time, but Japan did not stop, and over the decades, the government of Japan has started investing in
the Youth and the investment they made in the Youth during that time is giving them the profit now.
More than 80% of Youth in Japan are responsible for the economic boost of the country. Industries such
as Manga and Anime consist of 90% of young minds that are responsible for generating revenue of 1.3
billion every year to the country. This is the impact that Youth can make on the country's growth.

Role of Youth
A beautiful saying of Nelson Mandela that, “Youth of today are leaders of tomorrow” is true and
applicable in each and every aspect. The youth lays the foundation of development for any of the nations.
They have unlimited possibilities as follows:
 Youth is that stage in the life of an individual, filled up with several capabilities and potential of
learning along with performing.
 The youth is filled up with mind talents and creativity. If they raise their voice on any issue, are
successful in bringing the transformation.
 Youth are considered to be the voice of the nation. The youths are like raw material or resources to
the nation. The way they are shaped, they are likely to emerge in the same manner.
 Different opportunities and empowering youth procedures must be adopted by the nation, which will
enable the youth to make career-oriented in various streams and fields.
 Youths are aimless, confused, and directionless, and therefore are subject to guidance and support so
that, they can be smart enough to pave their own path to success.
 Youth are always facing several failures in their life and each and every time it appears as if there is a
complete end, but again rises with a fresh attitude for exploring with some new goal.
 Youth is filled up with immense capabilities.
 They are full of potential, enthusiasm, and great working capacity.
 Youth have quick learning, creativity, skills. They have the power to bring transformation in our
society and nation.
 Youth is set up with that spark, which can make anything happen.
 There are many negative beliefs and acts carried on in society. Youth has the capability of changing
the same and bringing up the concept of gender and social equality.
 Youth can be serving as a role model for others by doing works on several issues prevailing in the
society.

Youth of India
India is one of the youngest nations in the world, with more than 55% of the population is below the age
of 25, and more than 60% of the population is the working age, which is between 15 to 60 years. India's
average age is just 29 years, compared to 37 in China and the United States, 45 in Western Europe and 48
in Japan.

The presence of younger people in our country gives us an edge over the demographic dividend over
other countries. The demographic dividend is the growth in the economy of the country due to the change
in the age structure of the country.

The Youth of our country today are increasingly becoming restless and trying their best to make a
difference, but it has not been enough. More effort should be made if we all want to end unemployment,
poverty, corruption, and violence in the country. Due to the presence of these diseases in our society,
there has been a delay in the development of the country.

India is the biggest democracy in the world, and still, it lags in achieving economic and socio-political
growth. Young minds are known to be innovative and hard-working that will help in the development of
the country. Youth can change the country only if proper opportunities in the various fields are given to
them. In our society, we have been guided to pursue careers in either engineering or medical science. This
could be because of the pressure from the family or the trend in society. This has become a major cause
for the downfall of the Youth. A statistical report suggests that about 55% of engineering Youth are
unemployed because they don't have the required skills to crack a job.

Major Problems/Challenges Faced by Youth in India

The number of youths in India is almost the highest among all the countries; therefore there must be
proper planning and decision making for their proper development and success. But unfortunately, the
youth in the country is tackled up with several problems which are listed below:
 Many of the youngsters are not provided with quality education; even many do not have visited
schools due to poverty and unemployment, and illiterate guardians. It must be ensured that every
child gets a chance to visit the school and further gain higher education.
 There should be a focus on girl education, as there are many parts in the country where girl child is
not meant for going to school and studying, deprived of education. But the youth constitute both boys
and girls. How can an overall development take place when one section of society is neglected?
 Most of the youth have been pulled up in the wrong direction; they must be prevented from
destroying their life and career.
 There is a lack of skill in many of the youth, and therefore the government should focus on
implementing some skill and training programs for youth so that they may further be benefitted from
one or the other opportunities.
 In India more than 90% of people are residing in villages, therefore do not have proper access to all
the facilities of education and opportunities.
 The problem of the financial crisis and social inequality faced by some youth.
 There are many children born with talent but due to insufficient resources, they could not excel
further with their talents. Many of them have to work for earning money because of family
requirements, but they do not have a love for the work they are doing.
 The problem of unemployment is the utmost problem faced by youth.

Youth Development In India

The value of a country is assessed not by the riches or assets it possesses, but by its people. A nation
may be wealthy, but what's more important than the actual wealth is the collective intellect and
intelligence of the people who contribute towards earning that wealth.

The youth of a nation determine how it shapes up a few years into the future; they are the future of
the country, and their actions and inaction both contribute to the state of the Nation. India is proud of the
fact that she is the world's largest democracy, for it to be governed efficiently; it has been done by people
who are developed for this purpose.

Bringing in positive change: India is challenged by various social ills. The youth of the country can
use their education to battle these problems that plague the country - they can fight every social ill that
keeps a nation down and prevents it from progressing at the speed it should.

Using their education for the good of the country: Countries develop and become better when more of
their youth are educated, and when this education is used for the greater good of the nation. India is
leaping ahead of most other nations in terms of infrastructure and opportunities, but the mindsets also
need to change at the same pace. If the youth of a country are educated and willing to go the extra mile to
effect positive change, miracles can happen.

All through history, youth have been the harbingers of change - from winning independence for
nations, to creating new technologies that change the status quo, to new forms of art, music and culture.
Supporting and promoting the development of India's youth must be one of the foremost priorities, across
all sectors and stakeholders, of any Nation.

India has the largest youth population in the world that is poised to increase further in the coming decade.
70% of India's population is below the age of 35 years. It is indeed vital to utilise this demographic
dividend and channelize the youth and their creative energies for nation-building. For this it is essential
that the economy supports the increase in the labour force and the youth have the appropriate education,
skills, health awareness and other enablers to productively contribute to the economy and Nation building.
Youth in the age group of 15-29 years comprise 27.5% of the population. At present, about 34% of India's
Gross National Income (GNI) is contributed by the youth, aged 15-29 years. However, there exists a huge
potential to increase the contribution of this class of the nation's citizenry by increasing their participation
and their productivity.

The Government of India (GoI) currently invests more than Rs. 1,00,000 Crores per annum through a
wide range of programmes of different Ministries on youth development through youth-targeted (higher
education, skill development, healthcare etc.) and non-targeted (food subsidies, employment etc.)
programmes. In addition, the State Governments and a number of other stakeholders are also working to
support youth development and to enable productive youth participation. The State Governments also
incur substantial expenditure on these heads, over and above the expenditure being incurred by the
Government of India. Hence, the aggregate expenditure on youth (Central and State Governments
combined) is much higher.

The objective of GoI engagement with the youth is two-fold. First, it must engage with youth in order to
provide them with information and enable holistic youth development. Second, it must engage with youth
in order to get inputs on issues, policies and specific programmes, especially those that directly impact
youth. Engaging with the youth and ensuring youth develop leadership and other interpersonal skills, will
help create a generation of individuals that are committed to civic, social and political progress.

GoI, runs several programmes for youth engagement with the objective of promoting holistic youth
development and leadership. Leadership and personal development is often a by-product of youth
schemes such as NYKS, NSS and NCC.

It is evident that the youth will play a crucial role in the future development of the nation. Hence it is
important that the issues related to youth are mainstreamed and youth become a national priority. This can
be achieved in several ways, including Building youth development into RFDs, Key Ministries should
developing a 'Youth Connect' programme and regular holistic reviews.

Development of Youth Leading Towards Nation Building

As it has been discussed earlier, the problems faced by youth. They are not having proper access to
education. Some are unprivileged, while some of them due to lack of guidance is directed to the wrong
pathway. There are some children with inborn talent, but due to resource scarcity or no proper training,
they lose their hope and talent too. Thus, it must be ensured that each and every child is provided with the
facility of education. Training and skill development programs must be carried on. Youth must be
provided with several opportunities. They must equally participate in decision-making processes and
political affairs. Many employment schemes must run to provide work to skilled groups.

The wide gap between those who have access to education and skill development opportunities and those
who do not have has to be overcome and the Government is addressing this including the needs of the
unemployed youth, marginalised women and rural communities.

The Make in India, Digital India, Skill India, Start up India, Stand up India, Mudra Yojana, Khelo India
and Rashtriya Yuva Karyakram, Beti Bachao Beti Padhao are a few of the major schemes already
launched cultivating and encouraging innovative entrepreneurs is the ultimate goal of these initiatives.

Technology has a potential to change the world and improve people's lives, now being exploited for youth
development it is developing the incredible spirit of a youth-led enterprise and initiative, demonstrating
how being empowered and encouraged can help an individual realise their full potential.

Conclusion
Youth are blessed up with greater potential along with the capability of making a nation to progress in
each and every aspect. The main focus should be made on making youth work in the right direction with a
positive approach.

Youth is the structural and functional framework of the nation. Every nation’s pillar of
success is its younger generation and its achievements. The future of the nation lies in the
all-around development of youth. Hence, youth plays a supreme role in nation-building.
South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation (SAARC)
 SAARC
 The South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation (SAARC) was established with the
signing of the SAARC Charter in Dhaka on 8 December 1985.
 The idea of regional cooperation in South Asia was first raised in November 1980. After
consultations, the foreign secretaries of the seven founding countries—Bangladesh, Bhutan,
India, Maldives, Nepal, Pakistan, and Sri Lanka met for the first time in Colombo in April 1981.
Afghanistan became the newest member of SAARC at the 13th annual summit in 2005.
 The Headquarters and Secretariat of the Association are at Kathmandu, Nepal.
SAARC comprises of eight member States:
 Afghanistan  Maldives
 Bangladesh  Nepal
 Bhutan  Pakistan
 India  Sri Lanka
 There are currently nine Observers to SAARC:
 Australia  Iran  Mauritius
 China  Japan  Myanmar
 EU  Korea  USA

 Principles of SAARC
 Cooperation within the framework of the SAARC shall be based on:
 Respect for the principles of sovereign equality, territorial integrity, political
independence, non-interference in the internal affairs of other States and mutual benefit.
 Such cooperation shall not be a substitute for bilateral and multilateral cooperation but
shall complement them.
 Such cooperation shall not be inconsistent with bilateral and multilateral obligations.

 Areas of Cooperation of SAARC

 Human Resource Development and Tourism
 Agriculture and Rural Development
 Environment, Natural Disasters and Biotechnology
 Economic, Trade and Finance
 Social Affairs
 Information and Poverty Alleviation
 Energy, Transport, Science and Technology
 Education, Security and Culture and Others

 Importance of SAARC
 SAARC comprises 3% of the world's area, 21% of the world's population and 3.8% (US$2.9
trillion) of the global economy.
 Creating synergies: It is the world’s most densely populated region and one of the most fertile
areas. SAARC countries have common tradition, dress, food and culture and political aspects
thereby synergizing their actions.
 Common solutions: All the SAARC countries have common problems and issues like poverty,
illiteracy, malnutrition, natural disasters, internal conflicts, industrial and technological
backwardness, low GDP and poor socio-economic condition and uplift their living standards
thereby creating common areas of development and progress having common solutions.
 Objectives of SAARC
 To promote the welfare of the people of South Asia and to improve their quality of life.
 To accelerate economic growth, social progress and cultural development in the region and to
provide all individuals the opportunity to live in dignity and to realize their full potentials.
 To promote and strengthen collective self-reliance among the countries of South Asia.
 To contribute to mutual trust, understanding and appreciation of one another’s problems..
 To promote active collaboration and mutual assistance in the economic, social, cultural,
technical and scientific fields.
 To strengthen cooperation with other developing countries.
 To strengthen cooperation among themselves in international forums on matters of common
interests.
 To cooperate with international and regional organizations with similar aims and purposes.

 Principal Organs of the Cooperation

 Meeting of Heads of State or Government
 Meetings are held at the Summit level, usually on an annual basis.
 Standing Committee of Foreign Secretaries
 The Committee provides overall monitoring and coordination, determines priorities,
mobilizes resources, and approves projects and financing.
 Secretariat
 The SAARC Secretariat was established in Kathmandu on 16 January 1987. Its role is to
coordinate and monitor the implementation of SAARC activities, service the meetings of the
association and serve as a channel of communication between SAARC and other
international organizations.
 The Secretariat comprises the secretary-general, seven directors, and the general services
staff. The secretary-general is appointed by the Council of Ministers on the principle of
rotation, for a non-renewable tenure of three years.

 SAARC’s Specialised Bodies

 SAARC Development Fund (SDF)
 Its primary objective is funding of project-based collaboration in social sectors such as
poverty alleviation, development, etc.
 SDF is governed by a Board consisting of representatives from the Ministry of Finance of
the Member States. The Governing Council of SDF oversees the functioning of the Board.
 South Asian University (SAU)
 SAU is an international university, located in India.
 Degrees and Certificates awarded by the SAU are at par with the respective Degrees and
Certificates awarded by the National Universities/ Institutions.
 South Asian Regional Standards Organization (SARSO)
 SARSO has its Secretariat at Dhaka, Bangladesh.
 It was established to achieve and enhance coordination and cooperation among SAARC
member states in the fields of standardization and conformity assessment and is aimed to
develop harmonized Standards for the region to facilitate intra-regional trade and to have
access in the global market.
 SAARC Arbitration Council
 It is an inter-governmental body having its office in Pakistan is mandated to provide a legal
framework/forum within the region for fair and efficient settlement of commercial,
industrial, trade, banking, investment and such other disputes, as may be referred to it by
the member states and their people.
 Associated Challenges Within SAARC
 Low frequency of meetings: More engagement is required by the member states and instead of
meeting biennial meetings should be held annually.
 Broad area of cooperation leads to diversion of energy and resources.
 Limitation in SAFTA: The implementation of SAFTA has not been satisfactory a Free Trade
Agreement confined to goods, excluding all services like information technology.
 Indo-Pak Relations: Escalated tension and conflict between India and Pakistan have severely
hampered the prospects of SAARC.

 What is the Significance of SAARC for India?

 Neighbourhood first: Primacy to the country’s immediate neighbours. Nations of SAARC help
in the creation of mutual trust and peace within the region thus promoting stability.
 Geostrategic significance: Can counter China (OBOR initiative) through engaging Nepal,
Bhutan, the Maldives and Sri Lanka in development process and economic cooperation.
 Regional stability: SAARC can help in creation of mutual trust and peace within the region.
 Global leadership role: It offers India a platform to showcase its leadership in the region by
taking up extra responsibilities.
 Game changer for India’s Act East Policy: by linking South Asian economies with South
East Asia will bring further economic integration and prosperity to India mainly in the Services
Sector.

 India’s Contribution to the SAARC

 India, as one of the founding members, supports various initiatives in the SAARC framework to
achieve closer cooperation in diverse areas. India has enhanced its engagement with all SAARC
countries both bilaterally and through SAARC. It has increased efforts for enhancing trade and
connectivity links through land, air and sea for accelerating regional integration and greater
people-to-people contacts.
 India continues its efforts to build peaceful cooperative ties with Pakistan to address the
outstanding issues through peaceful bilateral dialogue.
 India is a founding member of the South Asian Association of Regional Cooperation (SAARC)
that was set up in 1985 as an organization to build a connected and integrated South Asia with the
larger aim of promoting the development and progress of all countries in the region.
 India continues to support various initiatives in the SAARC framework to achieve closer
cooperation in diverse areas.
 India enjoys excellent bilateral relations with Afghanistan, Bangladesh, Bhutan, Maldives, Nepal
and Sri Lanka. As per our ‘Neighbourhood First’ policy, India is an active development partner
and is engaged in several projects in these countries. India’s engagement with these countries is
based on a consultative, non-reciprocal and outcome-oriented approach, while focussing on
delivering benefits like greater connectivity, improved infrastructure, stronger development
cooperation in various sectors area, security and broader people-to-people contacts.
 India has signed Regional Trade Agreements (RTAs)/Free Trade Agreements (FTAs) with
countries of SAARC.
 India has been steadfast in its commitment towards sharing the fruits of technological advances
with like-minded countries in its neighbourhood. In this context, India's initiative of extending its
National Knowledge Network (NKN) to the countries of South Asia has been extended to Sri
Lanka, Bangladesh and Bhutan.
 India launched a South Asian Satellite (SAS) in May 2017 from Sriharikota. Demonstration
terminals of SAS have been installed in Bhutan, Maldives, Afghanistan, Nepal, Bangladesh and
Sri Lanka.
  The South Asia Satellite (GSAT-9) is a geosynchronous communications and meteorology
satellite by the Indian Space Research Organisation.
 It is launched for the South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation (SAARC) region.
 This idea was mooted by India in 18th SAARC summit.
 Afghanistan, Bangladesh, Bhutan, Nepal, Maldives and Sri Lanka are the users of the multi-
dimensional facilities provided by the satellite.
 By launching the GSAT-9 ‘South Asia satellite’, India has reaffirmed the ISRO’s scientific
prowess, but the messaging is perhaps more geopolitical than geospatial. More than scientific
endeavour, this geopolitically strengthens India’s Strong neighbour’s policy.
 The benefits the countries would receive in communication, telemedicine, meteorological
forecasting and broadcasting.
 India has given ex-post facto approval for amendment to the ‘Framework on Currency Swap
Arrangement for SAARC Member Countries to incorporate a ‘Standby Swap’ amounting to $400
million operated within the overall size of the Facility of $2 billion.
 India also hosted the Interim Unit of SAARC Disaster Management Center (IU) at the Gujarat
Institute of Disaster Management (GIDM), Gandhinagar. It has been operational since November
2016, serving the needs of all SAARC member states through policy advice, technical support on
system development, capacity building services and training for holistic management of disaster
risk in the SAARC region.
 India is home to South Asian University (SAU). It was established through an Intergovernmental
Agreement to provide world class educational facilities & professional faculty to students and
researchers from SAARC countries. It offers Master’s and M.Phil/PhD programmes in eight
disciplines.
 India is fully aware of challenges in South Asia, with cross-border terrorism being the most
serious of those challenges. India hasstressed how the problems that beset SAARC were not just a
story of missed opportunities but also of deliberate obstacles, terrorism being one of them and
that elimination of terrorism in all its forms is a precondition not only for fruitful cooperation, but
also for the very survival of the region itself.
 India-SAARC & Covid-19
 India created a COVID-19 Emergency Fund with an initial offer of $10 million to meet the
costs of immediate actions. India’s humanitarian relief in the region included supply of
essential drugs, antibiotics, medical consumables, COVID protection and testing kits, and
other laboratory and hospital equipment.
 SAARC Disaster Management Centre (Interim Unit) in Gandhinagar, with the assistance of
Ministry of External Affairs (MEA), Ministry of Health & Family Welfare (MoHFW) and
other Missions, had set up a dedicated website on Covid-19 for use by SAARC countries.
 A video conference of health professionals representing all SAARC countries at the level of
Director General of Health Services (DGHS) was held in March 2020. A video conference of
trade officials of SAARC countries was held in April 2020 to discuss the impact of travel
restrictions and the larger COVID-19 situation on intra-regional trade.
 India developed a ‘SAARC COVID19 Information Exchange Platform (COINEX)’ platform
for use by all SAARC countries to facilitate exchange of specialized information and tools on
COVID-19 among designated health professionals.
 Under India’s e-ITEC (Indian Technical and Economic Cooperation Programme) network,
training of healthcare personnel in the neighbourhood was conducted with content delivery
by super specialty medical institutes like All India Institute of Medical Science (AIIMS) and
Post Graduate Institute of Medical Education& Research (PGIMER) Chandigarh. AIIMS
New Delhi also separately held a series of three video-conferencing sessions in May 2020 on
COVID-19 for practising medical professionals in SAARC countries
 Obstacle’s to India’s Initiatives in SAARC
 The small neighbour countries of SAARC feel the “Big Brother Syndrome” about India. India’s
larger size of territory made India the most striking culprit in the eyes of its smaller neighbours in
the SAARC.
 Due to its economic strength, scientific and technological development India is creating in the
minds of smaller neighbours’ suspicion of domination feeling by India.
 Pakistan factor is another obstacle to India’s initiatives in the SAARC. Though the two countries
occupied the largest in numbers in size i,e. 80% of SAARC land area, over 85% of its population
and over 90% of its GDP, but Pakistan’s uninterrupted enmity disturbed her initiatives in the
SAARC. And ultimately it was scraped. 4. China’s intervention in the South Asian countries also
one of the obstacles to India’s initiatives in SAARC.
 China has border connectivity with India, Pakistan, Nepal, Bhutan and Myanmar. Except India all
are Least Developed Countries (LDCs). For this reason China has increasing her influence in
these countries by investing billions of dollars and provided loans with subsidy. It will definitely
leads to containing India’s influence in South Asian region.
 Another obstacle to India’s initiatives in the SAARC is the small members of SAARC like
Bangladesh, Nepal and Sri Lanka considered India is to be the main source of threat to their
security, they welcomed either directly or indirectly, the role of extra-regional powers in the
region to counter the military might and the alleged military threat of India.

 Way Forward
 The potential of organisation to maintain peace and stability in the region should be explored by
all the member countries.
 SAARC should be allowed to progress naturally and the people of South Asia, who make up a
quarter of the world’s population should be offered more people-to-people contact.
 The role of SAARC includes the promotion of the welfare of the people who live in the region of
South Asia. This organisation plays an important role in having opportunities regarding social,
economic, cultural, technical growth and also improving the quality of life.
 It is the need of the hour for India to act with more generosity towards neighbouring countries by
providing terms of infrastructure, energy, water, trade, climate change mitigation, higher
education, healthcare and military cooperation etc.
 India should contain China’s intervention in South Asia Region.
 India should try to minimize its tensions with Pakistan because without Pakistan’s cooperation
SAARC objectives cannot be materialized. Though the unending problems like Kashmir issue
and cross border terrorism, India should try to take initiative to minimize the tensions for the sake
of the two countries in particular for South Asia region in general.
 To conclude, for the betterment of India’s initiatives in the SAARC, India should act as a
guardian of SAARC regarding the implementation of its aims and objectives. India should play a
dual role in this regard; to contain China’s intervention in South Asia region on one hand and on
other hand to promote Pakistan’s presence in the SAARC activities. Unless India follows these
policies perfectly, India’s initiatives cannot be materialized in the SAARC.
 It can be concluded that the establishment of SAARC plays an important role in order to create a
friendly international relationship among the countries that are members of SAARC.

SAARC has the capacity to bring nations together. As Nelson

Mandela said, “If you want to make peace with your enemy, you
have to work with your enemy. Then he becomes your partner.
 Siachen Glacier
 Significance
 The Siachen region is strategically important for India because it separates Pakistan from
China.It also enables India to monitor the Gilgit and Baltistan regions of Pakistan.
 The glacier is located in the Eastern Karakoram Range in the Himalayas. It lies just northeast
of Point NJ9842, where the Line of Control between India and Pakistan ends.
 It is the highest battleground on Earth. Troops are deployed at elevations of up to 6,700
metres (22,000 feet) at minus 60 degrees C.
 India occupied Siachen glacier under Operation Meghdoot in 1984.
 It lies in the heavily glaciated Himalayan region known as the “Third Pole,” because
mountain glaciers in this region contain more fresh water than is found anywhere else on
Earth except for the polar ice caps.
 The Siachen Glacier lies between the Saltoro Ridge, a subrange of the Karakorams, to the
west and the main Karakoram Range to the east.
 It is 75 km long, which makes it the second longest nonpolar glacier in the world,
after Fedchenko Glacier in Tajikistan.It is positioned from northwest to southeast.
 Nubra River originates from Siachen glacier.
 The name Siachen refers to a land with an abundance of roses.
 Naib Subedar Bana Singh was awarded the Param Vir Chakra, the highest wartime gallantry
medal in India, for conspicuous bravery and leadership under most adverse conditions. The
peak which he captured was Quaid post on 26 June 1987 and was later renamed Bana Top in
his honour.

 Strategic Importance of Siachen Glacier

 The Siachen glacier, which separates central Asia from the Indian subcontinent, divides
Pakistan and China in the region.
 The Siachin glacier’s Saltoro Ridge, which acts as a barrier between Pakistan-occupied
Kashmir and China, prevents the two countries from forging direct military relations in the
region.
  Siachen also serves as a watchtower, allowing India to maintain a close eye on Pakistan’s
Gilgit and Baltistan areas.
 Aside from Chinese worries about Aksai Chin in the east, Pakistan would represent a
substantial threat to India from the west in Ladakh if it gained a geographical advantage in
Siachen.
 Because of its control over Saltoro Ride, India is better positioned to make an arrangement
with Pakistan in the future for settling bilateral territorial concerns.

 Historical Background Of The Siachen Glacier Issue

 Ceasefire Agreement
 India and Pakistan signed a Ceasefire Agreement in 1949 after their first armed conflict
over Jammu and Kashmir soon after their independence in 1947.
 The ceasefire line was drawn up to a point known as NJ 9842 on the map. Beyond this,
the agreement stated, the line would run “north to the glaciers” leaving an un-demarcated
zone right up to the border with China.
 This formulation was repeated in the agreement on the Line of Control in 1972, which
followed the Shimla Agreement of 1971 in the aftermath of the Bangladesh War.
 This was an act of omission on India’s part. The line beyond NJ 9842 was not
demarcated on maps in 1972.
 US and China Maps
 In the later years of the 1970s, this issue came to the front, when official US maps began
to show the LoC as extending right up to the Karakoram Pass on the India-China
boundary.
 It implied that the Siachen glacier fell under the actual jurisdiction of Pakistan. The
Chinese followed suit.
 As a result, roughly 2,300 sq km of territory in this glacier zone came to be shown as
under Pakistani control.
 Operation Meghdoot
 The Indian Army planned an operation to control the glacier by 13 April 1984, to
preempt the Pakistani Army by about 4 days, as intelligence had reported that the
Pakistani operation planned to occupy the glacier by 17 April.
 The first phase of the operation began in March 1984 with the march on foot to the
eastern base of the glacier. A full battalion of the Kumaon Regiment and units from the
Ladakh Scouts, marched with full battle packs through an ice-bound Zoji La pass for
days.
 By 13 April, approximately 300 Indian troops were dug into the critical peaks and passes
of the glacier. By the time Pakistan troops managed to get into the immediate area, they
found that the Indian troops had controlled all three major mountain passes of Sia La,
Bilafond La, and by 1987 Gyong La and all the commanding heights of the Saltoro Ridge
west of the Siachen Glacier.
 Camps were soon converted to permanent posts by both countries.

 Steps taken to resolve the issue

 Rajiv Gandhi-Benazir Bhutto Meeting
 In December 1988, it was agreed that the two sides would hold talks to resolve the
Siachen issue through mutual troop withdrawal.
 However, there was no final outcome because Pakistan did not agree to map the actual
ground positions of the two-armed forces from where they would withdraw.
  Bilateral defence secretaries-level talks under the Narasimha Rao government
 An agreement in principle was reached in 1992, when Pakistan reportedly agreed to the
Indian proposal. However, later, PM Narasimha Rao took a decision to defer its actual
signing to a later date, but then this did not happen.
 Foreign secretary-level negotiations, 2006
o The following resolutions were agreed:
 There would be a formal agreement on mutual but phased withdrawal and joint
monitoring of the demilitarised zone.
 There would be an annex which would record the current locations of the forces
deployed by the two sides and the locations to which they would withdraw.
 There would be a schedule of withdrawals in different phases.
 However, the proposed agreement was dropped again due to opposition from both
sides.

 Environmental Concerns in the Siachen Glacier

 Uninhabited before 1984, the heavy military presence has led to environmental degradation
at the Siachen Glacier.
 Satellite images indicate that the glacier is melting away by 110 metres a year and the glacier
size decreased by 35%. One of the reasons believed for the high-rate of glacial reduction is
attributed to chemical blasting meant for construction of camps and outposts.
 Waste generated by the military presence is dumped in the crevasses of the glacier. The waste
consists of empty ammunition shells, parachutes, garbage, not all of them are biodegradable.
And due to the sub-zero temperatures it is next to impossible to burn them.
 The Indian Army is planning a cleanup campaign called ‘Green Siachen, Clean Siachen’ to
clear the region of biodegradable wastes with the use of biodigesters in the absence of
oxygen and freezing temperatures. At least 40% of the wastes left at the glacier is of plastic
and metal (metals like cobalt, cadmium and chromium.)
 This is dangerous as the Indus River being in close proximity to the Siachen Glacier, the
metals will find their way into the water of its tributaries such as the Shyok River and can
poison the entire water supply.
 Moreover, the troops presence posed a threat to indigenous wildlife, including the Himalayan
brown bear (Ursus arctos isabellinus), the Siberian, or Asiatic, ibex (Capra sibirica), and
the snow leopard (Panthera uncia or Uncia uncia).

 Conclusion
 Though there are some other important reasons as well which are well served with Siachen
glacier being under physical occupation of India. These include having control over source of
water for Nubra River, monitoring Chinese activities and having some effect on physical
collusivity of two nuclear capable states.
 It is therefore essential that India preserve its national strategic interest by continued physical
occupation of Siachen glacier unless the border issue is settled with Pakistan in totality.
Withdrawal of troops even if Pakistan signs the agreement by authenticating the current
locations is not a pragmatic option at this stage as it can negate the agreement once we
withdraw on the similar lines as has been done by its all-weather friend China disregarding
all agreements with India and undertaking incursions across LAC in Eastern Ladakh.
 With the formation of the CPEC, the Siachen area remains India’s northernmost deployment.
With the construction of CPEC, parts of which also pass through Ladakh, defending Ladakh
has become critical for India. Thus, in Siachen, the Indian army deployment is crucial.
 SOCIAL MEDIA
 Introduction
 Any communication channel through which any kind of information, news, entertainment, education, data,
promotional messages etc. can be disseminated is called Media.
 Social media refers to digital channels that allow social user interaction and networking by sharing information
through an online app or platform. An integral part of social media is the ability to like and comment on posts
creating a two-way dialogue.
 Social media is a collective term for websites and applications that focus on communication, community-
based input, interaction, content-sharing and collaboration.
 The common elements that define social media include:
 Operates through a digital app or platform.
 Users create an individual profile.
 Users build networks and connections with other individual.
 A platform for user-generated content.
 Allows two-way dialogue with comments.
 Social Media in recent times has become synonymous with Social Networking sites such as Facebook or
Microblogging sites such as Twitter. However, very broadly social media can be defined as any web or
mobile based platform that enables an individual or agency to communicate interactively and enables
exchange of user generated content.
 Social media is used by Digital Computer Based Technology primarily used for sharing ideas and
information in the form of text, images, and videos through internet-based virtual networks and platform-
based communities.
 Users engage on social media using digital devices, including computers, tablet, mobile phones, etc., via
the application software.
 The advent of social media is transforming the way in which people connect with each other and the
manner in which information is shared and distributed. It is different from traditional media such as print,
radio and television in two significant ways –
 The amount of content that can be generated by the users themselves far exceeds the content generated
by news/opinion makers.
 Its viral ability for potential exponential spread of information by word of mouth and interlinking of
the various social media platforms, thereby considerably reducing the control over spread of any such
information.
 Social media facilitates the sharing of ideas and information through virtual networks. From Facebook
and Instagram to Twitter and YouTube, social media covers a broad universe of apps and platforms that
allow users to share content, interact online, and build communities. More than 4.7 billion people use
social media, equal to roughly 60% of the world’s population.
 People use social media to stay in touch and interact with friends, family and various communities.
Businesses use social applications to market and promote their products and track customer concerns.
 Business-to-consumer websites include social components, such as comment fields for users. Various tools
help businesses track, measure and analyze the attention the company gets from social media, including
brand perception and customer insight.
 Social media has enormous traction globally. Mobile applications make these platforms easily accessible.
 Some popular examples of general social media platforms include Facebook, Instagram, Twitter and
LinkedIn.
 Social media refers to digital platforms that allow user interaction and sharing user-generated content through
an online app for networking purposes.

 Difference Between Social Media and Social Networks

 Social media is a platform used for sharing or broadcasting information, while on the other hand, a social
network is a communication platform used for connecting.
 A single platform can function as a social media and a social networking platform.
 Types Of Social Media
 Social Networking
 The original social media platforms focused on networking and user interaction, with channels facilitating
this among friends, peers, or industry professionals.
 Posts are mainly in written format and include shared images or videos. Social networking platforms are
considered the original and established social media channels, and have strong user bases and brand
adoption.
 Examples: Facebook, Twitter, Linkedin.
 Photo Sharing
 Visual apps predominantly focus on sharing images. Photo sharing apps originally focused solely on
images, but most have expanded to include video and ephemeral content like Stories.
 Instagram has become one of the strongest social media platforms for brands and advertising. It’s also
popular with influencers.
 Examples: Instagram, Snapchat.
 Video Sharing
 Different demographics usually adopt different social media apps and platforms for sharing videos; for
example, TikTok has a strong base of Gen Z users.
 YouTube is one of the strongest channels for brands to build an audience and has attracted a considerable
influencer base.
 Examples: YouTube, TikTok
 Bookmarking
 Bookmarking communities are focused on saving or sharing links.
 Examples: Pinterest
 Discussion Forum
 These channels take a community approach to asking questions or sharing ideas to stimulate discussion.
These platforms are great for doing research and getting feedback.
 Examples: Reddit, Quora

 Background
 Social media has become ubiquitous. As per a UN report, 47 % of the global population is online and
among them, the percentage of social media users is rising steadily.
 It does not have a steep learning curve and compared to other traditional websites offers content in the local
language.
 The barriers to entry are quite low and there is a large and well development ecosystem in place for users
which is unavailable in traditional TV media. The positives of social media.
 Social media offers a variety of entertainment that offers an escape from the conventional scripted
entertainment industry funded by established studios.
 It offers people-to-people interaction that breaks barriers and forges a true human connection.
 It also has been instrumental in pro-democracy fights in many oppressive regimes.
 Social media is also playing a crucial role in disaster relief, blood donation drives, etc.

 The Extent of Social Media

 Based on recent reports published, the extent of social media in India can be understood through the
following facts:
 The top 5 most popular social media platforms in India are:
 WhatsApp, with 534.3 million users.
 Facebook, with 503.37 million users.
 Instagram, with 491.53 million users.
 Telegram, with 374.40 million users.
 Facebook Messenger, with 324.39 million users.
 India has 658 million internet users, of which 467 million actively use social media.
 The total number of mobile connections in India is 1.14 billion.
 The average mobile internet speed in India is 14.39 Mbps.
  Mobile phones dominate internet usage in India, accounting for 75.91% of the share, followed by laptops at
23.66% and tablets at 0.42%.
 The annual growth rate of social media users in India is 4.2%, which means an increase of over 19 million
users yearly.
 On average, users spend 156 minutes per day on social media.
 India's top three most used social media platforms are Instagram, Facebook, and Twitter.
 Google holds a significant monopoly in the search engine market in India, with a share of 98.75%.

 Benefits of Social Media

 Democratisation of Information
 Social media is allowing the democratisation of knowledge and broader communication.
 Billions of netizens around the world now feel empowered to bypass traditional curators of
information.
 They have also become creators and disseminators of content, not just consumers of it.
 New Opportunities
 The rise of the virtual world provides voiceless people unprecedented opportunities to assert
themselves and experience a sense of belongingness.The rise of several YouTubers and social
influencers as a medium of profession is a testimony of the phenomenon.
 Wider and Heterogeneous Communities
 Online communities are, geographically, much wider and more heterogeneous than physical
communities.
 In the past, many communities in India were not allowed to participate in public discourses, organise
themselves and advance their thoughts and ideas.
 Their concerns, ideas, experiences, ambitions and demands largely went unheard.
 Cheap and Easy
 Today, creating content needs less investment than the brick and mortar or any other Physical set up.
 It is more often soft-skill driven.
 With the assistance of technology, anyone can create competent, authentic, effective and fresh online
content.
 Countering The Hegemony
 Social Media has also evolved as a tool to counter the hegemony or narrative of traditional players.
 It has provided an alternate source of Knowledge in a world where mainstream media has come
under severe public criticism for fake news and propaganda.
 Closing The Distance
 Social Media has also bridged the distance.
 Friends and Family are now connected over WhatsApp and other Apps despite being far away in
distance.
 Direct Interaction With Government
 Today Social Media has empowered common people to directly interact with the government and
avail government services directly.
 Common people tagging Railway and other ministries and the agencies responding to them is
common news these days.

 Challenges and Concerns of Social Media

 Hate speech and Rumours
 Hate speech and rumours in India have been responsible for acts of violence and deaths in many of
the cases for quite some time now.
 Similarly Hate Speech on Social Media had a big role in the Delhi Riots of 2020.
 Online Trolling and Cyber bullying
 Social media can be used to bully and harass others. This can seriously impact the victim's mental
health and well-being.
 Trolling is the new bi product of Social Media.
 Vigilantes take law in their own hand and start trolling and threatening those who don’t agree with
their views or narratives.
 It has led to anonymous trolls who attack the reputation of an individual.
  Fake News
 Over 64% of Indians encounter fake news online.
 There are a staggering number of edited images, manipulated videos and fake text messages
spreading through social media platforms and messaging services like WhatsApp making it harder to
distinguish between misinformation and credible facts.
 Women Safety
 Women face cyber rape and threats that affect their dignity severely.
 Sometimes their pictures and videos are leaked with and are forced to cyber bullying.
 Data security
 Social media platforms are often targeted by hackers. This can lead to the theft of user data, including
passwords, credit card numbers, and other sensitive information.
 Addiction
 Social media can be addictive, and people can spend hours scrolling through their feeds, checking
notifications, and responding to messages.
 This can lead to problems such as sleep deprivation, social isolation, and decreased productivity.
 Privacy
 Social media platforms collect a lot of data about their users, including their personal information,
browsing history, and location data. This data can be used to track users, target them with ads, and
even manipulate their behavior.

 Social Media Impact on Human Behavior

 Social media today has become an integral part of our life, and we spend a lot of time on it every day;
therefore, it has a lasting impact on human behaviour that can be positive or negative.
 Positive Impact
 Social media can help people connect with others from all over the world.
 It can help people to stay informed about current events.
 Social media can help people to find support and encouragement.
 Social media can help people to learn new things.
 Social media can help people to be more creative. People can use social media to share their creative
work, such as photos, videos, and stories.
 Negative Impact
 People who spend much time on social media are more likely to experience anxiety and depression.
 Social media can lead to addiction. Social media can be addictive; people can spend hours scrolling
through their feeds, checking notifications, and responding to messages.
 Social media is a breeding ground for misinformation. This is because it is easy for people to share
false information without fact-checking it first.
 Social media can make people feel isolated from the real world. This is because people can spend so
much time interacting with others online that they neglect their real-world relationships.

 Impact of Social Media on Indian Society

 Social media has very deep roots in Indian society, and therefore it is natural that almost every one of us
gets impacted by it either way or the other. The Social media impact on human behavior and society can be
broadly classified into the following two categories:
 Positive Impact of Social Media on Society
 During the recent Covid-19 pandemic, education was one of the worst affected activities. Thanks
to social media which played a vital role in providing education to millions of students through
online classes who would otherwise have been deprived of it.
 Academic education is provided on social media using various tools, including blogs, podcasts, e-
Learning, m-learning, etc.
 Interestingly the educational role of social media is not only limited to academic education but is
very broad and also includes dimensions like enhancing awareness regarding various topics,
including current affairs, politics, environment, etc.
 Social media today plays a crucial role in connecting families, friends, and relatives living in Far
Away places.
  People can connect instantly by using a digital device at their disposal anytime from anywhere
with an internet connection.
 In addition to texting and voice calls, video calls have become a prominent way to connect.
 The Negative Impact of Social Media on Society
 Fake News
o Social media today has become the primary source for spreading fake news and
misinformation. Its deep reach in Indian society makes things even worse.
o This fake news can result from propaganda, Anti National or Anti Social campaigns, or mere
mischief.
o Fake news through social media spreads like wildfire and has the potential to disturb social
harmony and compromise national security as well.
 As a Propaganda Tool
o Powerful people, companies and institutions misuse social media to spread their propaganda
to meet vested interests.
o Political parties are at the forefront of using social media as a propaganda tool and setting a
fake narrative to manipulate the ideology of the common man in general and the voters in
particular. This manipulation leads to distortion in democratic qualities and threatens it.
 Trolling and Bullying
o Anything on social media goes viral in no time, which may result in the content and related
individuals being subject to constant bullying and trolling practices.
o Trolling is a serious issue that may cause great psychological and mental trauma to the victim,
severely affecting their behaviour and daily life. In extreme cases, the victim may even
commit suicide.
 As a tool by Terrorists and Extremists
o Terrorist organizations and extremists use social media extensively to spread hateful and
violent ideologies and influence the common people.
o Terrorists and non-state actors also use social media to recruit Fighters and militants for this
spread of terrorism. The most infamous case is the recruitment youth from the Indian state of
Kerala by ISIS (DAESH). This poses a serious threat to national security and the world order.

 Way Forward
 Along with many advantages, innumerable challenges posed by deep-rooted social media
following points can help tackle such challenges.
 Legal Regulatory Framework
 Social media today influences almost the entire Indian society, and its challenges are also
huge. Thus, there is an urgent need for a nationwide technically sound and up-to-date
dedicated regulatory framework for countering the challenges of social media.
 The Framework should have technical experts capable of dealing with constantly valving
sophisticated challenges posed by social media on a daily basis.
 Fixing Responsibility
 The big challenge related to fake news is that its source is sometimes untraceable, which is a
challenge in fixing the responsibility and punishing the culprit.
 It must be the responsibility of social media platforms to curb fake news in its initial stage
and find out the responsible person behind such news.
 Transparency
 Recently the infamous case of leaking and selling personal data of Facebook users to third
parties demands transparency in the operation and working of social media platforms so that
it remains under vigil and users' privacy is not compromised.
 Digital Literacy
 It is important to not lose sight of the digital divide prevailing in India, especially in the
education sector.
 A policy decision in the name of protecting youth should not result in youth of
underprivileged background to lose out on opportunities of the future.
  Public Awareness
 Public awareness at a mass scale is urgently needed to make social media users aware of the
challenges and ways to deal with them.
 Such campaigns can be run on social media platforms to ensure better reach to the target
audience.
 Social media users should be encouraged to click only on verified and trusted links to save
themselves from any mishap.
 Awareness will make users responsible and, therefore, will help in fighting against social
media challenges.
 Use of Advanced Technology
 The government must extensively use the latest technology to neutralize the impact of social
media on the individual and society.
 Misinformation can be fought by providing genuine and authentic information.
 Government can also use artificial intelligence to curb fake news, hate speech, and other
challenges.
 Governance and Regulation
 Government regulation in form of greater accountability of platforms for their content, Data
Localization, third party digital audits, strong Data Protection Laws etc.
 Role of Social Media Platforms
 Banning certain features like “auto-play” sessions, push alerts and more importantly to
create products which do not target youth.
 Role of Social Agencies
 Parents, Educational Institutions and the society as a whole have the important role to
control the correct and limit the use of social media. This can be done by using Parental
control, limits to screen time, constant communication with kids, and promoting outdoor
activities
 A dedicated Social Media Policy
 A holistic policy to regulate social media by creating accountability of social media
platforms to not target youth as consumers or future consumers.
 This will make the algorithms more attuned towards adults rather than youth.
 Safeguards for inappropriate content
 Platforms should be prohibited from recommending or amplifying certain content involving
sexual, violent, or other adult material, including gambling or other dangerous, abusive,
exploitative, or wholly commercial content.

 Conclusion
 Social media can be a great tool for social change, provided the associated challenges are dealt
with effectively. For this, there is an urgent need to fix accountability and reasonable restrictions
on the right to speech. Both these, clubbed with a sound regulatory framework and an aware
social media user, will not only ensure the moderation of all associated challenges but will also
unleash the full potential of social media for the betterment of individual society and the nation.
 The role of media in society is a highly debated topic. There have been calls to regulate social
media or ban it altogether. A ban might be an extreme step. However, a digitally literate country
is the need of the hour. Responsible social media use must be taught at every school and college
in the country.
 The effects of digital technology on youth is important because these effects will colour their
adult behaviour and the way future societies will behave.

The Power Of Social Media Is It Forces Necessary Change .

 India’s Solar Power Dream
 Government of India has set the target to expand India’s renewable energy installed
capacity to 500 GW by 2030.
 India has been aggressively pushing towards a more sustainable future by investing heavily in
renewable energy sources, with solar energy at the forefront of its efforts. The Government of
India has set the target to expand India’s renewable energy installed capacity to 500 GW by
2030. India has promised to source nearly half its energy from non-fossil fuel sources by
2030 and, in the shorter term, source at least 60% of its renewable energy from solar power.
 India is committed to reducing the country's dependence on fossil fuels and transitioning towards
a greener future, and the growth of the solar sector plays a crucial role in achieving this goal.
 India is also targeting to reduce India’s total projected carbon emission by 1 billion tonnes by
2030, reduce the carbon intensity of the nation’s economy by less than 45% by the end of the
decade, achieve net-zero carbon emissions by 2070.

 What is the Present Status of Renewable Energy in India?

 The total installed capacity for renewable energy in India is 151.4 GW.The following is
the breakup of total installed capacity for Renewables:
 Wind power: 40.08 GW
 Solar Power: 50 GW
 Biopower: 10.61 GW
 Small Hydro Power: 4.83 GW
 Large Hydro: 46.51 GW
 Present Solar Power capacity:
 45 solar parks of aggregate capacity 37 GW have been approved in India.
 Solar Parks in Pavagada (2 GW), Kurnool (1 GW) and Bhadla-II (648 MW) are
included in the top 5 operational solar parks of 7 GW capacity in the country.
 The world’s largest renewable energy park of 30 GW capacity solar-wind hybrid
project is under installation in Gujarat.

 What are the Benefits of Solar Energy?

 Renewable:
 Solar energy is a renewable source of energy, meaning it can be produced indefinitely
without depleting resources.
 Clean:
 Solar energy is a clean source of energy, producing no harmful emissions or pollution.
 Cost-effective:
 The cost of solar energy has decreased significantly in recent years, making it
increasingly cost-effective as a source of energy.
 Reliable:
 Solar energy systems are becoming increasingly reliable and durable, requiring little
maintenance.
 Versatile:
 Solar energy can be used for a wide range of applications, including electricity
generation, heating, and lighting.
  Decentralized:
 Solar energy systems can be installed on a small scale, making it possible to generate
energy locally, reducing dependence on centralized energy sources.

 What are the Misconceptions about Solar Energy?

 Levelized Cost of Solar Power is Coming Down:
 It is believed that the levelized cost of solar power coming down and some believe
that the cost will decrease linearly over time, that the cost is the same for all regions,
that the cost only takes into account the cost of solar panels, that it doesn't include
maintenance costs, and that it ignores energy storage costs.
 In reality, the cost can be affected by various factors such as technology
advancements, changes in market conditions, and government policies, and the
levelized cost takes into account all components of a solar power system including
installation and ongoing maintenance costs, not just the cost of solar panels.
 Financially Viable:
 Solar energy is made financially viable by misguiding the people by leaving out
storage battery cost; handicapping it with subsidies and concessions that are front
loaded by the government, and forcing it on the industry and hapless discoms through
state policy.

 What are the Challenges with Solar Energy in India?

 High Initial Costs:
 Despite recent reductions in the cost of solar panel technology, the upfront cost of
installation remains high, which can be a barrier to adoption for many households and
businesses.
 Limited Access to Finance:
 Access to finance for renewable energy projects can be limited, particularly for
smaller and rural projects, which can make it challenging for individuals and
organizations to invest in solar energy.
 Infrastructure and Grid Connectivity:
 A lack of adequate infrastructure and grid connectivity in some areas of the country
can make it difficult to transmit the electricity generated from solar panels to where it
is needed.
 Land Availability:
 Finding suitable land for large-scale solar projects can be a challenge in
India, particularly given competing demands for land for other purposes such as
agriculture and urban development.
 Maintenance and Operation Issues:
 Poor maintenance and operation of solar power systems can reduce their efficiency
and effectiveness, which can impact the long-term viability of renewable energy
projects in India.
 Cleaning solar panels currently is estimated to use about 10 billion gallons of water
per year — enough to supply drinking water for up to 2 million people.
 Attempts at waterless cleaning are labor intensive and tend to cause irreversible
scratching of the surfaces, which also reduces efficiency.
 Now, a team of researchers at MIT has devised a way of automatically cleaning solar
panels, or the mirrors of solar thermal plants, in a waterless, no-contact system that
could significantly reduce the dust problem.
  Heavily Dependent on Imports:
 India doesn't have enough module and PV cell manufacturing capacity.
 The current solar module manufacturing capacity is limited to 15 GW per year,
whereas the domestic production is around 3.5 GW only.
 Further, out of the 15 GW of module manufacturing capacity, only 3-4 GW of
modules are technologically competitive and worthy of deployment in grid-based
projects.
 Raw Material Supply:
 The silicon wafer, the most expensive raw material, is not manufactured in India.
 It currently imports 100% silicon wafers and around 80% cells.
 Further, other key raw materials, such as silver and aluminum metal pastes for
making electrical contacts, are also almost 100% imported.

 What are Government Initiatives?

 PLI scheme to Support Manufacturing:
 The Scheme has provisions for supporting the setting up of integrated
manufacturing units of high-efficiency solar PV modules by providing Production
Linked Incentive (PLI) on sales of such solar PV modules.
 Domestic Content Requirement (DCR):
 Under some of the current schemes of the Ministry of New & Renewable Energy
(MNRE), namely Central Public Sector Undertaking (CPSU) Scheme Phase-
II, PM-KUSUM, and Grid-connected Rooftop Solar Programme Phase-II,
wherein government subsidy is given, it has been mandated to source solar PV
cells and modules from domestic sources.
 Further, the government made it mandatory to procure modules only from
an Approved List of Manufacturers (ALMM) for projects that are connected to
state/ central government grids
 Imposition of Basic Customs Duty on import of solar PV cells & modules:
 The Government has announced the imposition of Basic Customs Duty (BCD) on
the import of solar PV cells and modules.
 Further, it has imposed a 40% duty on the import of modules and a 25% duty on
the import of cells.
 Basic custom duty is the duty imposed on the value of the goods at a specific
rate.
 Modified Special Incentive Package Scheme (M-SIPS):
 It's a scheme of the Ministry of Electronics & Information Technology.
 The scheme mainly provides a subsidy for capital expenditure on Pv cells and
modules – 20% for investments in Special Economic Zones (SEZs) and 25% in
non-SEZ.

 What should be the Way Forward?

 Utilising Large Hydro:
 With large hydro, India can produce more renewable energy at the least cost and
with the least carbon footprint.
 India has utilised only about 15% of its hydro potential whereas the U.S. and
Europe have utilised 90% and 98% of their potential, respectively.
 The extent of utilisation of hydro potential seems to be an index of civilisational
development and evolution.
  Expanding Infrastructure and Investment:
 India needs to increase investment in renewable energy infrastructure,
including transmission and distribution networks, as well as in research and
development of new solar technologies.
 Encouraging Private Sector Participation:
 The private sector can play a crucial role in developing and deploying solar energy
in India and the government should create favorable policies and incentives to
encourage private sector involvement.
 Improving Energy Storage Solutions:
 Energy storage systems are essential for ensuring that solar energy can be
effectively used, even when the sun is not shining. The Indian government should
support the development of advanced energy storage solutions to make solar
energy more accessible and reliable.
 Promoting Rooftop Solar:
 Rooftop solar systems can be a cost-effective and convenient way for households
and businesses to generate their own energy. The Indian government should
encourage the growth of rooftop solar by providing incentives, subsidies and tax
credits.
 Building a Skilled Workforce:
 The growth of the solar energy sector in India will require a skilled
workforce. The government should invest in training and education programs to
build a pipeline of skilled workers who can help deploy and maintain solar energy
systems.
 Technology tie-up with global manufacturers:
 India will have to work on technology tie-ups to make the right grade of
silicon for solar cell manufacturing.
 Move towards Atmanirbhar manufacturing:
 India should move up the value chain by making components locally that
could drive the price and quality of both cells and modules
 PV panel Manufacturing parks:
 India needs to create industry-like centres to work on specific technology
domains with clear roadmaps and deliverables for the short and long term
 Strong industry-academia collaboration:
 In an innovative manner to start developing home-grown technologies.

 Conclusion
 The one thing for sure from solar energy is the way to a better future.
 It offers numerous benefits, including reducing pollution, improving ecological balance,
and whatnot.
 The goverment needs to work with the industry to provide them with trained human
resource, process learnings, root-cause analysis through right testing and, in the long
term, develop India’s own technologies.
 Change starts with you, go solar and be the change you want to see in the world.

C learly, we need mo re incentives to quic kly increase the use of solar

power; this wi ll cut costs, increase our energy independence and our
national security and reduce the consequences of global wa rming.
 ROLE AND CHARTER OF DEFENCE SPACE AGENCY
 Introduction
 “Space: The Final Frontier”. Be it on land or above it; be it on water or under its surface; since
ancient times man has tried to conquer whatever part of the earth that he could reach, or has at
least tried to. This has led to many conflicts between two or more agencies. Be it air, land or
sea, the airforce, armies and navies of nations have seen combat some time or the other.

 As of 2022 no actual warfare has ever taken place in space, though a number of tests and
demonstrations have been performed. This has caused leaders around the world ot examine and
enhance their combat capabilities in this new battle field called “Space”.

 Space warfare is combat that takes place in outer space. The scope of space warfare therefore
includes ground-to-space warfare, such as attacking satellites from the Earth; space-to-space
warfare, such as satellites attacking satellites; and space-to-ground warfare, such as satellites
attacking Earth-based targets.

 Requirement Of Defence Space Agency

 Commencement of the Space Race (1960s)
 Early efforts to conduct space warfare were directed at space-to-space warfare, as ground-
to-space systems were considered to be too slow and too isolated by Earth's atmosphere and
gravity to be effective at the time. The history of active space warfare development goes
back to the 1960s when the Soviet Union began the Almaz project, a project designed to
give them the ability to do on-orbit inspections of satellites and destroy them if needed.
Similar planning in the United States took the form of the Blue Gemini project, which
consisted of modified Gemini capsules that would be able to deploy weapons and perform
surveillance.
 One early test of electronic space warfare, the so-called Starfish Prime test, took place in
1962, when the United States exploded a ground-launched nuclear weapon in space to test the
effects of an electromagnetic pulse. The result was a deactivation of many orbiting satellites,
both American and Soviet. The deleterious and unfocused effects of the EMP test led to the
banning of nuclear weapons in space in the Outer Space Treaty of 1967.

 Laser Tag with Satellites (1970s–1990s)

 Through the 1970s, the Soviet Union continued their project and test-fired a cannon to test
space station defence. This was considered too dangerous to do with a crew on board,
however, so the test was conducted after the crew had returned to Earth.
 A 1976 Soviet report suggested that the design of the space shuttle hadbeen guided by
a requirement to deliver a payload over Russia and return to land after a single orbit. This
may have been a confusion based on requirements 3A and3B for the shuttle's design, which
required the craft to be able to deploy or retrieve an object from a polar orbit in a single
pass.
 Both the Soviets and the United States developed anti-satellite weaponry designed to shoot
down satellites. While early efforts paralleled other space-to- space warfare concepts, the
United States was able in the 1980s to develop ground-to-space laser anti-satellite weapons.
None of these systems are known to be active today; however, a less powerful civilian
version of the ground-to-space laser system is commonly used in the astronomical technique
of adaptive optics.
 In 1984 the Strategic Defence Initiative (SDI) was proposed. It was nicknamed Star Wars
 after the popular science fiction franchise Star Wars.
 In 1985 a USAF pilot in an F-15 successfully shot down the P78-1, an American research
satellite, in a 345-mile (555 km) orbit.

 Developments in the New Millennium

 The People's Republic of China successfully tested a ballistic missile- launched anti-satellite
weapon on January 11, 2007. This resulted in harsh criticism from the United States of America,
Britain, and Japan.
 The United States of America developed an interceptor missile, the SM-3, testing it by hitting
ballistic test targets while they were in space. On February 21, 2008, the United States of
America used a SM-3 missile to destroy a spy satellite, USA-193, while it was 247 km above
the Pacific Ocean.
 Japan fields the American SM-3 missile, and there have been plans to base the land-based
version in Romania and Vietnam.
 In March 2019, India shot down a satellite orbiting in a Low Earth orbit using an ASAT missile
during an operation code named Mission Shakti, thus making its way to the list of space
warfare nations, establishing the Defense Space Agency the following month, followed by its
first-ever simulated space warfare exercise on 25 July which would inform a joint military space
doctrine.

 SPACE DEFENCE AGENCIES AROUND THE WORLD

 United States of America
 The United States Space Force (USSF) is the space warfare service branch of the United
States Armed Forces. The direct antecedent of the Space Force, Air Force Space Command,
was formed on 1 September 1982 with responsibility for space warfare operations. The
National Defense Authorization Act for 2020 redesignated Air Force Space Command as
the U.S. Space Force, and established it as an independent branch of the U.S. Armed
Forces on 20 December 2019.
 The mission of this organisation is "organise, train, and equip space forces in order to
protect U.S. and allied interests in space and to provide space capabilities to the joint force.
Its responsibilities include developing military space professionals, acquiring military space
systems, maturing the military doctrine for space power, and organising space forces to
present to the Combatant Commands”.
 Functions of USSF as described in the United States Space Force Act, it will be
organised, trained, and equipped to:-
 Provide freedom of operation for the United States in, from, and to space.
 Provide prompt and sustained space operations.
 Duties of the USSF are:-
 Protect the interests of the United States in space.
 Deter aggression in, from, and to space.
 Conduct space operations.

 Russia
 The Russian Aerospace Forces or VKS (Vozdushno-kosmicheskiye sily) is the Aerospace
Forces of the Armed Forces of the Russian Federation. It was established as a new branch on
1 August 2015 with the merging of the Russian Air Force (VVS) and the Russian Aerospace
Defence Forces (VVKO) under the recommendations of the Ministry of Defence.
 The main tasks of the Russian Space Forces are informing the higher political leaders and
military commanders of missile attacks as soon as possible, ballistic missile defence, and the
creation, deployment, maintenance and control of in-orbit space vehicles, like the new
 Persona reconnaissance satellite. For example, the Space Forces operate the GLONASS
global positioning system.
 Formations of the Space Forces included the 3rd Missile-Space Defence Army, anda Division
of Warning of Missile Attack. Installations and assets include the Hantsavichy Radar Station
in Belarus, along with a number of other large warning radars, and the A-135 anti-
ballistic missile system which protects Moscow and the Peresvet anti-air laser combat system
which protects strategic missiles.

 China
 China’s People’s Liberation Army (PLA) views space warfare as an important component of
its concept of war, and is developing a range of capabilities and tactics to carry out space
operations, as well as bolstering its organisational and command and control capacity to
enable such operations, according to a U.S. Defense Intelligence Agency (DIA) report
published in January 2019.
 Strategists in the PLA regard the ability to use space-based systems and deny them to
adversaries as central to enabling modern information warfare. As a result, the PLA continues
to strengthen its military space capabilities despite its public stance against the militarisation
of space.
 Even though China has not publicly acknowledged the existence of any new programs since
it confirmed it used an anti-satellite missile to destroy a weather satellite in 2007, experts
believe that China continues to develop a variety of counter-space capabilities designed to
limit or prevent an adversary’s use of space-based assets during crisis or conflict. In addition
to the research and possible development of satellite jammers and directed-energy weapons,
China has probably made progress on kinetic energy weapons, including the anti-satellite
missile system tested in July 2014.
 The PLA’s Strategic Support Force (SSF), established in December 2015, has an important
role in the management of China’s aerospace warfare capabilities. Consolidating the PLA’s
space, cyber, and electronic warfare capabilities into the SSF enables cross- domain synergy
in “strategic frontiers”. The SSF may also be responsible for research, development, testing,
and fielding of certain “new concept” weapons, such as directed energy and kinetic energy
weapons. The SSF’s space function is primarily focused on satellite launch and operation to
support PLA reconnaissance, navigation, and communication requirements.
 Along with direct-ascent ASAT weapons, China is also believed to be developing other space
weapons. In June 2016, China launched the Aolong-1 spacecraft on a Long March 7 rocket.
China claims that the Aolong-1 is tasked with cleaning up space junk and collecting man-
made debris in space. However, other reports suggest that the spacecraft, equipped with a
robotic arm, is a dual-use ASAT weapon. The Aolong-1 is believed to be the first in a series
of spacecraft that will be tasked with collecting man-made space debris.
 China has been acquiring a number of foreign and indigenous ground-based satellite jammers
since the mid-2000s. These jammers are designed to disrupt an adversary’s communications
with a satellite by overpowering the signals being sent to or from it. The PLA can use these
jammers to deny an adversary the access to the GPS and other satellite signals. Directed
energy lasers are also a soft-kill method that could be usedin an anti-satellite mission.
 Just like all other Chinese military wings, little information is readily available about its space
weaponisation programs. Analysts and experts all around the world have only speculated
what could be going on behind closed doors. The organisation, role and duties of this Chinese
agency are still unknown.
 While it may not be an arms race, the impetus to forge a space strategy is the result of the
domain becoming an ever more contested environment and of its importance for deterrence,
and, if this fails, war fighting. Not only is it recapitalising its military space infrastructure,
ground based and orbital, it is also acquiring the means to protect them.
  India
 Months before the operationalisation of the Defence Space Agency, India conducted an Anti-satellite
weapon (ASAT) test in March 2019. The test was aimed at demonstrating India's anti-satellite
capability.
 The Indian ASAT programme can be traced back to its Ballistic Missiles Development program,
which began in 1999 in response to threats posed by the Ballistic missiles of Pakistan and China. In
2006 and 2007, India tested its first exo-atmospheric interceptor and has developed many interceptors
since then. On 18 March 2008, DRDO had hinted that India possessed technology required for an
ASAT missile. India had begun work on its ASAT soon after the 2007 Chinese anti-satellite missile
test.
 India has been working on directed energy ASAT weapons, co-orbital ASAT weapons, lasers and
electromagnetic pulse (EMP) based ASAT weapons. The ability to protect space assets from hostile
electronic and physical attacks is also being developed by India.
 India is developing the necessary technology that could be used to produce a weapon to destroy enemy
satellites in orbit. In March 2019, India tested its ASAT missile (Mission Shakti) destroying a pre-
determined target of a live satellite.The DRDO's ballistic missile defence interceptor was used on an
Indian satellite for this test.
 India conducted its first simulated space warfare exercise on 25th and 26 July 2019, called
IndSpaceEx. The exercise was conducted under the supervision of Integrated Defence Staff. The
exercise was aimed at obtaining an assessment of threats and the creation of a joint space warfare
doctrine.

 ROLE OF THE DEFENCE SPACE AGENCY

 The role of the DSA will be operate systems to protect Indian interests in outer space and will
deal with potential space wars. The agency will have the responsibility of developing a space
warfare strategy and work in close collaboration with Defence Space Research Agency.

 The Defence Space Research Agency (DSRA) is the scientific organisation responsible for
developing space-warfare systems and technologies for the Defence Space Agency. The DSRA
was approved by the Indian government in June 2019. The DSRA is composed of scientists who
undertake research and development in close coordination with the Integrated Defence Staff..

 ORGANISATION OF THE DEFENCE SPACE AGENCY

 The DSA is headquartered in Bengaluru. Its function under the Integrated Defence Staff and
personnel from all the three branches of the Indian Armed Forces will be stationed in the agency.

 As is with other nations, the DSA is an extension of the Indian Air Force and comprise of
agencies which would deal with the development and operation of various equipments like
satellites, radars, missiles, lasers and other weapons. The components of the Indian Army and
Indian Navy are present for coordination and synergy between the three forces.

 Keeping the role and requirement of the DSA, its organisation is suggested to be based on the
undermentioned points:-
 The DSA will operate systems to protect Indian interests in outer space and deals with
potential space wars. The agency has the responsibility of developing a space
warfare strategy.
 It has a Coordination Cell to liaison, coordinate and seek input on space as a domain of
warfare from the Indian Space Research Organisation and the Defence Research and
Development Organization. This cell is in close coordination with the Integrated Space Cell
which is the nodal agency within the Government of India which oversees the security of
its space based militaryand civilian hardware systems.
  The Defence Imagery Processing and Analysis Centre which controls India's satellite-
based image acquisition capabilities has merged with the DSA.
 The Defence Satellite Control Centre which controls the operation of all defence and
defence related satellites has merged with the DSA.
 Weapons Division This department of the DSA controls the placing and availability of
various missile systems and other weapons like lasers and kinetic bombs across the country
on ground and in outer space. This division can be further sub divided into the
following:-
 Ground to Space Section This section will be responsible for all missiles, lasers and
projectiles being employed from ground stations to target objects in outer space.
 Space to Space Section This section will be control all missiles and lasers placed on
satellites and launch stations in outer space and will target other objects in space.
 Space to Ground Section This section will be responsible for all missiles, lasers and
projectiles being launched from space stations and satellites to target objects on the
surface of the earth.
 Radar Division As and when the space traffic increases, more and more radars and
control stations will be required to be established in suitable location all over the country
to monitor assets of other countries and also to monitor, guide and control own assets.
Thus, a separate department will have to be made responsible for controlling all radar
stations and conveying timely and accurate information to allconcerned.
 Electronic Warfare Division The continued development of satellite and electronics
technology led to focus on space as a supporting theatre for conventional warfare.
Currently, military operations in space primarily concern either the vast tactical
advantages of satellite-based surveillance, communications, and positioning systems or
mechanisms used to deprive an opponent of said tactical advantages. Accordingly, most
space-borne proposals which would traditionally be considered "weapons" are designed
to jam, sabotage, and outright destroy enemy satellites, and conversely to protect friendly
satellites against such attacks. For example, a directed EMP blast may damage or destroy
an enemy satellite without any jeopardy to own assets.

 CHARTER OF THE DEFENCE SPACE AGENCY

 Akin to the three defence services of India, the DSA has the primary role to deter, thwart or end
any attempt by an a g g r e s s o r on the territorial sovereignty of the nation.

 The suggested charter of duties of the DSA are as under:-

 Security of India's territorial integrity, citizens and assets from land/sea-borne and space
threats.
 Safeguard India's national interests and security.
 Influence affairs on land, air, sea or space.
 Deterrence against war or intervention.
 Decisive military victory in case of war/aggression.
 Force projection.
 Assistance to friendly foreign countries.
 Nuclear second strike.
 Power Projection.
 Surveillance.
 Information operations and Electronic warfare.
 Carrying out strategic and tactical bombing missions.
 Providing support to land and naval forces.
 Coordination with other agencies to ensure optimum and efficient utilisationof resources.
 CAPACITY BUILDING
 Unlike other major space powers such as the United States, Russia and China, whose space
programs have clear military origins, India’s space program, on the other hand, began as a
civilian project.

 Hence, the country has little experience in the military dimensions of space organizations.
Because of this reason, India’s Defence Space Agency faces two major challenges in terms of
capacity-building.

 First, the Defence Space Agency (DSA) and the Defence Space Reserch Agency (DSRO) face the
acute danger of falling into the arms race spiral in space, as innovation in this domain is rapid,
with a wide array of weapon-systems available at a country’s disposal. Despite having tested the
anti-satellite missile, ASAT system — which offers limited strategic benefits — it only acts as
weapons of last resort as the threat of creating an enormous amount of debris by shooting a
satellite may be seen as a less credible threat. Given that the military space program faces severe
financial constraints, India must first build the capability to monitor and track assets in space,
operant command and control systems for having an effective space situational awareness —
which act as a prerequisite for harnessing military space power. At the same time, India should
also focus only on those space systems such as co-orbital weapon-systems and offensive cyber
capabilities that provide a credible minimum deterrence against an adversary’s threats to avoid
spiraling into an arms race. Efforts must be made to innovate by tapping into the vast private
sector.

 The second challenge that both the DSA and DSRO will face is organizational in nature. Space as
a military domain has largely remained an unfamiliar ground for the Indian armed forces, thus
making it imperative that members of the new institutions are fully familiar with the new domain,
and rope-in academics and civilian-experts to provide valuable inputs. Operating in the space
domain in certainly expensive and technology-driven, which means the DSO must be fully
capable of adopting these new innovations for effectively operating in space. As scholar Michael
Horowitz has pointed out, military innovation spreads only if a state has the financial and
organizational capacity to fully absorb a new technology, hence making organizational capacity-
building a high point in setting up a new military space agency.

 SPACE DOCTORINE
 Operating in space will be unlike operating in any other domain, involving three dimensions,
spanning across the globe with no territorial borders. While sace warfare can be conceptualized as
using offensive capabilities in space against other space-based weapons, it is also intrinsically
linked engaging in combat on the ground, making it vital for armed forces on the ground to be
interoperable with the space force, creating a new dimension of cross-domain interaction in a
conflict situation.

 Because of this reason, simply having a doctrine focusing on space-to-space engagement or

ground-support engagement will not be enough to meet India’s strategic interests. The DSA and
DSRO must approach the space doctrine with the view of interoperability with the Army, Navy
and Air Force. In 2017, the Integrated Defence Staff published the first joint doctrine. This
publication, however, created further doubts about the jointness among the three services.
Inadequate integratedness has remained a roadblock for India’s military modernization.

 In order to remain relevant in today’s informationized domains, and be fully integrated into
 India’s defence force structure, the DSA must lead the way in devising a new doctrine that fully
integrates the three services of the armed forces, while at the same time having a long-term vision
of India’s interests in space. Such a doctrine will remain the backbone of India’s military space
operations in the coming years.

 NEED FOR INDIA TO AGUMENT SPACE CAPABILITIES

 Currently, India possesses more than a dozen military satellites.The Indian military also uses a
variety of commercial satellites and those run by friendly foreign nations in its operations.Many
of these are prohibitively expensive and carry the danger of service interruption in the event of
emergencies.

 It is crucial to aggressively improve defence space capabilities as part of the “militarization of

space” as India works to reduce defence spending and achieve self-reliance in the field. This
includes launching more satellites into orbit, acquiring better sensors, high-speed communication,
and practical and reusable ones, along with connected infrastructure.Additionally, India must
purchase sophisticated jammers for rogue satellites and safeguard its spacecraft from electronic
assaults.

 The country is working to increase its military capabilities in the space domain to assert itself as a
potent regional power in the future while pursuing its goal of becoming a global power. This is
because India concentrates on cutting military spending, establishing self-reliance in defence, and
developing deterrence against China’s growing space assets.

 However, the investments—whether financial or policy reforms—must be made because space is

a high-expenditure industry, meaning that any returns would be gradual, incremental, and steady.

 CONCLUSION
 The race for space supremacy has already begun with many nations launching ground based
weapons to destroy targets in space. There is no confirmed information on deployment of
weapons in space however it is a surety that all major countries are developing fighting
capabilities in outer space.
 The “weaponisation” of space in not too far in future with countries like USA, Russia,
China, Israel, France, Japan and India working on various overt and covertprojects. Therefore, the
need of the hour is to first define the role and charter of the Defence Space Agency of India and
allocate and provide resources to fulfil them. Be it a deterrence or a major weapon, space
warfare will soon influence all military matters andwe will have to be ready for it.
 The move towards creating a dedicated military space agency is indeed a right one, as the United
States, Russia, China and more recently, France have expressed the necessity to protect their
assets and interests in space, and expand as the next arena for geopolitical competition.
 In such an environment, the DSA and DSRO will certainly face both technical as well as
bureaucratic challenges. However, these challenges must be thought through at the earliest by
politicians, bureaucrats, members of the armed services as well as academics in order to remain
competitive and relevant in the future.

Space warfare requires a solid foundation of collaboration between military

and civilian institutions, but if done well, it can enable close integration and
even fusion between military and intelligence service.
 Startup Ecosystem in India
 Startup
 The term startup refers to a company in the first stages of operations. Startups are founded
by one or more entrepreneurs who want to develop a product or service for which they believe
there is demand.
 A startup refers to a company that leverages novel technologies to conceive, develop, produce,
and market new products, services, or systems.
 Typically operating within a broader business landscape, startups aim to create solutions that
exert a significant impact on society, fostering both progress and socio-economic change.
 Owing to their innovative nature, these startups become generators of employment, thereby
bolstering the workforce and contributing to a stronger economy. A thriving economy, in turn,
fuels the growth of cities, regions, and the entire nation.
 These companies generally start with high costs and limited revenue, which is why they look
for capital from a variety of sources such as venture capitalists.

 State of Startups India

 Over time, startups have assumed a pivotal role in assessing and nurturing a society's spirit of
innovation. Embarking on entrepreneurial ventures is no longer regarded as taboo; rather, it is
seen as a manifestation of talent and courage.
 The startup culture has proven its agility in promptly responding to market and societal demands.
 India has become the 3rd largest start-up ecosystem in the world after the US and China.
 India is home to as many as 75,000 Startups.
 49% of start-ups are from tier-2 and tier-3 cities.
 Startups are also emerging in fields like IT, agriculture, aviation, education, energy, health
and space sectors.

 The Path to Progress

 Startups have emerged as catalysts for economic revitalisation, restructuring, and expansion,
fuelled by creativity. They are paving the way for a decentralised yet collective future, tailored to
the unique requirements and evolving values of each nation. The global startup industry, valued at
approximately $3 trillion within a world economy of roughly $90 trillion, is experiencing rapid
growth.
 The pandemic has underscored the importance of startups in driving innovation to navigate the
swiftly changing global landscape, saving lives, and restoring economic well-being. Moreover,
startups are increasingly providing platforms and technologies that facilitate crossborder
collaboration and innovation, aiding economies in achieving their Sustainable Development
Goals.
 As a result, startups play a vital role in generating employment, fostering technological
advancement, driving long-term growth, and managing crises on a global scale.

 Growth Drivers for Startups

 Government Support: India has increased the Gross Expenditure on R&D (GERD) more
than three times in the last few years.
 India has over 5 lakh R&D personnel, the number that has shown a 40-50% increase in
the last 8 years.
 In the last decade, women's participation in extramural R&D has also doubled.
  Adoption of Digital Services: The pandemic accelerated the adoption of digital services by
consumers helping start-ups and new-age ventures build tech-focused businesses for
customers.
 Online Services and Work from Home Culture: Many Indians moved to online
services exploring a host of services ranging from food delivery and Edu-tech to e-grocery.
The Work-from-home culture helped increase the number of start-ups’ user base and
expedited their business expansion plans and attracting investors.
 Digital Payments: The growth of Digital Payments is another aspect that aided start up
cultures the most.
 Buyouts from Major Public Corporations: Many startups become unicorns as a result of
buyouts from major public corporations that prefer to focus on acquisitions to grow their
business rather than investing in internal growth.

 Challenges for Startups

 Increasing Investments Do Not Ensure Success of a Startup: The billions of dollars being
invested in startups represent the large bets on distant outcomes, and do not value generation
by way of revenues. One cannot assume the high rate of survival of these startups with such
investments, as it can be assured by profits.
 India, still a Marginal Player in the Space Sector: Currently, the global space economy is
worth USD 440 billion, with India having less than 2% share in the sector. The reason for the
lack of independent private participation in space includes the absence of a framework to
provide transparency and clarity in laws.
 Indian Investors Unwilling to Take Risks: The big investors in India’s startup sector are
from overseas, Japan’s Soft Bank, China’s Alibaba, and Sequoia from the US. That’s
because India does not have a serious venture capital industry with an appetite for risk.
 Issues Emanating From Regional Imbalance: India is a highly diverse country with a
plethora of cultures, languages, ethnicities and religions. Due to this, the startups’ understanding
of them is often limited to certain regions. In that sense, comparative advantages are linked to
specific regions.
 Digital Divide: As nearly 70% of the Indian population lives in rural areas, the customers of the
mass market tend to come from low-income backgrounds in villages and this often discourages
many startups to come up with a pan-India approach.
 Issues of Funding: For running a startup, a significant amount of working capital is required.
Many startups, especially at early stages, are bootstrapped, i.e. self-funded through the
founders’ own savings, or using capital from friends and family.
 Hiring Challenge: For many job-seekers, joining a startup as an employee is not an attractive
career option, due to the inherent risk that the startup might fail. In addition to this, many job
applicants are not sufficiently skilled. Startups see a gap between the knowledge taught to
students in colleges and the knowledge needed for the jobs, especially in sectors in which
technologies change at a fast pace.
 Complex Regulatory Environment: The government of India has introduced policies that aim
to ease the business environment for startups. However, the present regulatory framework in
which startups operate is widely seen as difficult, inefficient and unpredictable. For example,
the government has imposed “Angel Tax”, which was introduced in 2012 with the aim to thwart
money laundering, but it also discourages investment in startups.

 Opportunities Available
 India now has around 40,000 officially-recognised start-ups and is the third-largest tech start-up
hub globally. Apart from it, India’s economy, demography and government’s active support
provides a wide scope for establishing a thriving startup environment.
  Growing Indian Economy: Just before sudden disruption by Covid-19 pandemic, the Indian
economy continued to grow and purchasing power was increasing steadily.
 As economic recovery is expected in the short-term, the rising consumption will be driven
by the growth of upper-middle income and high-income segments of the population.
 Thus, the size of the Indian market provides ample opportunity for startups to grow.
 Favourable Demography: The demographics of the Indian population is another advantage.
Half of the country’s population is below the age of 25 years.
 The nearly 700 million people born through the late 1980s to the 2000s carry material
ambitions and have the ability to spend.
 This makes them a huge section of population that has the ability to absorb the innovative
goods and services provided by startups.
 Active Government Support: Government of India launched the flagship initiative, “Startup
India” in 2016. The program envisages building a strong ecosystem that is conducive for the
growth of startup businesses and kickstarted an entrepreneurship revolution.
 Further, the overhaul of the digital payments ecosystem is being led by State innovation
(NPCI), with Aadhaar, Jan Dhan, UPI, and India Stack.
 As India improved its digital connectivity, market access barriers have been brought down
and created a favourable ecosystem for startups.
 High Scope in Rural Areas: As the majority of India’s population still resides in rural areas,
many startups have focused towards providing ease of living in rural areas. For example:
 FIA Global - with a network of 26,000 banking agents - is using Artificial Intelligence
(AI) to deliver financial products and services such as remittance services and access to
credit in rural areas, and has reached over 34 million customers.
 MFine provides an AI-powered health care platform for people to consult over 3,500
doctors.
 PharmEasy connects local pharmacy stores and diagnostic centres to verify prescriptions
and deliver over 100,000 medicines.

 Government’s Initiatives for Startups

 Prarambh
 The ‘Prarambh’ Summit aims to provide a platform to startups and young minds from
around the world to come up with new ideas, innovation and invention.
 National Initiative for Developing and Harnessing Innovations (NIDHI)
 The programme would work in line with the national priorities and goals and its focus
would be to build an innovation driven entrepreneurial ecosystem with an objective of
socioeconomic development through wealth and job creation.
 NIDHI aims to nurture start-ups through scouting, supporting and scaling of innovations.
 Ranking of States on Support to Startup Ecosystems (RSSSE)
 The rankings were started with an objective of fostering competitiveness, mutual
learning and propel States and Union Territories (UTs) to work proactively towards
uplifting the startup ecosystem.
 Startup India Seed Fund Scheme (SISFS)
 It aims to provide financial assistance to startups for proof of concept, prototype
development, product trials, market entry and commercialization.
 Startup India Action Plan (SIAP)
 Startup India is a flagship initiative of the Government of India, intended catalyse startup
culture, to build a strong eco-system for nurturing innovation and Startups in the country that
will drive sustainable economic growth, generate large scale employment opportunities and
transform India into a country of job creators instead of job seekers.
  The Government through SIAP aims to empower Startups to grow through innovation and
design.
 The Action Plan is based on the following three pillars:
 Simplification and Handholding.
 Funding Support and Incentives.
 Industry-Academia Partnership and Incubation.

 StartUp20 by G20
 Startups have become the engine for innovation-fueled economic recovery, reorientation, and
growth for nations around the world.
 Startup20 is the first of its kind official engagement group initiated under the Indian
presidency of the G20 2023. The engagement group would act as the voice of the global
startup ecosystem bringing together varied stakeholders on a common platform.
 Startups need a thriving and favorable environment to scale rapidly; policies, frameworks and
regulations at the national and international platforms need to keep pace with innovation.
 The Startup20 Engagement Group would create a global narrative for supporting startups and
enabling synergies between startups, corporates, investors, innovation agencies and other key
ecosystem stakeholders.
 The ultimate objective of Startup20 is to craft a global narrative that champions startups and
fosters mutual synergies.

 Way Forward
 In present times startups in India are witnessing a golden chapter in the history of Indian
entrepreneurship. However, still the Indian government has a crucial role to play in positioning
India as the Tech Garage of the World. It should act as a catalyst, and bring together the synergies
of the private sector with the aim of innovating for India and the world.
 The accelerated development of the start-up ecosystem needs significant funding and therefore
the role of venture capital and Angel Investors are critical.
 Apart from policy-level decisions that promote entrepreneurship, the onus is also on India’s
corporate sector to foster entrepreneurialism, and create synergies to build impactful technology
solutions, and sustainable and resource-efficient growth.
 With the recent events creating capital distrust in China, the world’s attention is sharpening on
the lucrative tech opportunities in India and the value that could be created. For this, India
requires decisive policy measures in addition to the Digital India Initiative.
 Integration with School Curriculum: The National Education Policy, 2020 envisages
promoting student entrepreneurs by offering vocational education in partnership with industries
and introducing coding for schoolchildren. This can have a favourable impact on the startup
ecosystem in India, if entrepreneurial skills are integrated with the education curriculum under
new education policy.
 Bridging Digital Divide: There is a need to fill infrastructure gaps especially in rural areas,
promote digital literacy and help people become more knowledgeable about the digital world.
 Promoting Agri-Startups: As still the majority of Indian workforce is employed in agriculture,
there is a need to clear roadblocks and promote agri-startups. The new farm acts give greater
choice to farmers and incentivise start-ups to transform the agriculture value chain in storage,
finance, transport, aggregation, and marketing.

Startups are crucial to the global economy. They create employment

opportunities, revolutionise industries, and promote technological
advancements. The World Economic Forum indicates that start-ups are
responsible for generating about 70% of all new jobs in several economies.
 Tackling Plastic Pollution
 Plastic Waste
 Unlike other forms of wastes like paper, food peels, leaves etc, which are biodegradable (capable of being
decomposed by bacteria or other living organisms) in nature, plastic waste because of its non-
biodegradable nature persists into the environment, for hundreds (or even thousands) of years.
 Plastic pollution is caused by the accumulation of plastic waste in the environment. It can be categorized
in primary plastics, such as cigarette butts and bottle caps, or secondary plastics, resulting from the
degradation of the primary ones.
 A recent study conducted by Un-Plastic Collective has revealed that India generates 9.46 million
tonnes of plastic waste annually, of which 40% remains uncollected and 43% is used for packaging, most
of which are of single-use plastic.

 Types of Plastic Waste

 Microplastics
 They are small plastic pieces of less than five millimeters in size.
 Microplastic includes microbeads (solid plastic particles of less than one millimeter in their largest
dimension) that are used in cosmetics and personal care products, industrial scrubbers which are used
for aggressive blast cleaning, microfibers used in textiles and virgin resin pellets used in plastic
manufacturing processes.
 Apart from cosmetics and personal care products most of the microplastics result from
the breakdown of larger pieces of plastic that were not recycled and break up due to exposure to the
sun or physical wear.
 Single-use plastic
 It is a disposable material that can be used only once before it is either thrown away or recycled,
like plastic bags, water bottles, soda bottles, straws, plastic plates, cups, most food packaging and
coffee stirrers are sources of single use plastic.

 Extent of Plastic Waste

 Plastic Waste as a Global Phenomenon
 Over 8.3 billion tonnes of plastic has been produced since 1950, and about 60% of that has ended
up in landfills or in the natural environment.
 Only 9% of all plastic waste ever produced has been recycled and about 12% has been incinerated,
while the remaining 79% has accumulated in landfills, dumps or the natural environment.
 Plastic waste, whether in a river, an ocean, or on land can persist in the environment for centuries,
hence by 2050, the amount of plastic in seas and oceans across the world will weigh more than the
fish.
 Plastic Waste in India
 According to the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB), India generates close to 26,000 tonnes
of plastic a day and over 10,000 tonnes a day of plastic waste remains uncollected.
 India’s per capita plastic consumption of less than 11 kg, is nearly a tenth of the United States of
America (109 kg).

 Impact of Plastic Waste

 Implications for Animals
 Plastic wastes have profoundly affected animals in aquatic, marine, and terrestrial ecosystems.
 Plastic ingestion upsets or fills up the digestive systems of the animals thus contributing to their
death due to intestinal blockage or starvation.
 Marine animals can also be trapped in plastic waste where they are exposed to predators or starve
to death.
 The plastics may also contain toxic chemicals which can harm the animal’s vital organs or
biological functions.
  Economic Losses
 Plastic waste along shoreline has a negative impact on tourism revenue.
 For example, the Andaman and Nicobar Islands, are under the plastic threat and facing the aesthetic
issue because of the international dumping of plastic waste at the island.

 Implications for Human Health

 The chemicals leached from the plastics contain compounds, like polybrominated diphenyl ether
(anti-androgen), bisphenol A (mimics the natural female hormone estrogen) and phthalates (also
known as anti-androgens), impact human health leading to various hormonal and genetic disorders.
 These chemicals can interfere with the functioning of the endocrine system and thyroid
hormones and can be very destructive to women of reproductive age and young children.
 Land Pollution
 Plastics leach hazardous chemicals on land, resulting in the destruction and decline in quality of the
earth’s land surfaces in term of use, landscape and ability to support life forms.
 Air Pollution
 Plastic burning releases poisonous chemicals into the atmosphere impacting general well-being and
causing respiratory disorders in living beings.
 Groundwater Pollution
 Whenever plastics are dumped in landfills, the hazardous chemicals present in them seep
underground when it rains. The leaching chemicals and toxic elements infiltrate into the aquifers and
water table, indirectly affecting groundwater quality.
 Water Pollution
 Many lakes and oceans have reported alarming cases of plastic debris floating on water surfaces,
affecting a great number of aquatic creatures. It leads to dreadful consequences to marine creatures
that swallow the toxic chemicals.
 A United Nations report estimated the annual impact of plastic pollution on oceans at US$ 13 billion.
 Interference with the Food Chain
 Studies determine that the chemicals affect the biological and reproduction process resulting in
reduced numbers of offspring thus disrupting the food chain.
 When the smaller animals (planktons, mollusks, worms, fishes, insects, and amphibians) are
intoxicated by ingesting plastic, they are passed on to the larger animals disrupting the interrelated
connections within the food chain.
 Poor Drainage
 Drainage system clogged with plastic bags, films, and other plastic items, causes flooding.
 Impact on Habitats
 Seafloor plastic waste sheets could act like a blanket, inhibiting gas exchange and leading to anoxia
or hypoxia (low oxygen levels) in the aquatic system, which in turn can adversely affect the marine
life.
 Invasive Species
 Plastic waste can also be a mode of transport for species, potentially increasing the range of certain
marine organisms or introducing species into an environment where they were previously absent.
This, in turn, can cause subsequent changes in the ecosystem of the region.

 Challenges
 Mismanaged Plastic Waste (plastic dumped openly)
 In the form of microplastics/microbeads when plastic enters the environment via inland waterways,
wastewater outflows, and transport by wind or tides cannot all be filtered out once it enters the ocean.
 As plastics travel with ocean currents, an island of trash called the Great Pacific Garbage Patch has
been created.
 Spurious Biodegradable Plastic
 In the absence of robust testing and certification to verify claims made by producers, spurious
biodegradable and compostable plastics are entering the marketplace.
 Online or E-Commerce Companies
 Apart from the plastic we consume through traditional retail, the popularity of online retail and food
delivery apps, though restricted to big cities, is contributing to the rise in plastic waste.
  Microplastics
 After entering into the aquatic environment, microplastics can travel vast distances floating in
seawater, or sediment to the seabed. Microplastic particles are commonly white or opaque in color,
which are commonly mistaken by many surface-feeding fishes as food (plankton) and can even move
up the food chain to human consumers (from eating contaminated fish/seafood/shellfish).
 Marine Litter
 Plastic pollution in freshwater and marine environments have been identified as a global problem and
it is estimated that plastic pollution accounts for 60-80% of marine plastic waste.
 Terrestrial Plastic
 80% of plastic pollution originates from land-based sources with the remainder from ocean-based
sources (fishing nets, fishing ropes).
 Improper Implementation and Monitoring
 In spite of the notification of the Plastic Waste Management (PWM) Rules, 2016 and amendments
made in 2018, local bodies (even the biggest municipal corporations) have failed to implement and
monitor segregation of waste.

 How does Plastic move around the World?

 Most of the plastic trash in the oceans, Earth’s last sink, flows from land.
 Trash is also carried to sea by major rivers, which act as conveyor belts, picking up more and more trash as
they move downstream.
 Once at sea, much of the plastic trash remains in coastal waters. But once caught up in ocean currents, it
can be transported around the world. On Henderson Island, an uninhabited atoll in the Pitcairn Group
isolated halfway between Chile and New Zealand, scientists found plastic items from Russia, the United
States, Europe, South America, Japan, and China. They were carried to the South Pacific by the South
Pacific gyre, a circular ocean current.
 Once at sea, sunlight, wind, and wave action break down plastic waste into small particles, often less than
half a centimeter across.
 These so-called microplastics are spread throughout the water column and have been found in every corner
of the globe, from Mount Everest, the highest peak, to the Mariana Trench, the deepest trough.
 Microplastics are breaking down further into smaller and smaller pieces.
 Plastic microfibers or even smaller nanofibers, meanwhile, have been found in municipal drinking water
systems and drifting through the air.

 Solution: Plastic Waste Management

 Reduce
 First step in reducing plastic waste is to minimize single use plastics by supporting a tax on plastic
bags, restraint on manufacturing of plastics, and using alternatives of plastic or biodegradable plastic.
 For example Project REPLAN (stands for REducing PLastic in Nature) launched by Khadi and
Village Industries Commission (KVIC) aims to reduce consumption of plastic bags by providing a
more sustainable alternative.
 Reuse
 Reusing plastics can reduce the demand for new plastics, hence it can act as the natural restrain on
plastic manufacturing.
 Recycle
 Plastic recycling is the process of recovering waste or scrap plastic and reprocessing it into useful
products. It offers several benefits like:
 Economic benefits due to value addition.
 Generates employment.
 Reduces depletion of fossil fuel reserves.
 Reduces landfill problems.
 Recycling of plastics requires less energy.
 Recovery
 It is the process of converting non-recyclable plastics into a range of useful forms of energy and
chemicals for industry. Since plastics contain mainly carbon and hydrogen, with similar energy
content to conventional fuels such as diesel, they can be used as a potential source of fuel.
 India's actions against Single-Use Plastic
 India's plastic consumption has been growing significantly and despite per capita usage levels lower than
most other developing and developed countries, plastic pollution has emerged as one of the significant
problems in the country.
 Ban on identified Single-Use Plastics
 India has taken resolute steps to reflect its commitment to eliminate Single-Use Plastics that are not
biodegradable and have an adverse impact on the environment. The strategy adopted by the
Government to tackle unmanaged and littered plastic waste has two pillars - a ban on Single-Use
Plastic items which have high littering potential and low utility and implementation of extended
producer responsibility on plastic packaging.
 This amendment further prohibited the manufacture, import, stocking, distribution, sale, and use of
identified Single-Use Plastic items, which have low utility and high littering potential. This includes
earbuds with plastic sticks, plastic sticks for balloons, plastic flags, candy sticks, ice-cream sticks,
polystyrene (Thermocol) for decoration; plates, cups, glasses, cutlery such as forks, spoons, knives,
straws, trays, wrapping or packing films around sweet boxes, invitation cards, and cigarette packets,
plastic or PVC banners less than 100 microns, stirrers.
 Guidelines on the Extended Producer Responsibility
 Further, the Ministry of Environment, Forest, and Climate Change as further notified the Guidelines on
the Extended Producer Responsibility (EPR) for plastic packaging. The amendment aims at reducing
the usage of virgin plastic material in packaging and recycling and reusing plastic packaging. The EPR
guidelines also aim at environmentally sound management of plastic waste, strengthening the circular
economy of plastic packaging waste, and promoting the development and certification of completely
biodegradable plastic packaging.
 Other initiatives
 The waste management infrastructure in the States/UTs is also being strengthened through the Swachh
Bharat Mission-Urban (SBM-U) 2.0. The Ministry of Housing and Urban Affairs (MoHUA) lays
special emphasis on the reduction of plastic waste generation and compliance with Plastic Waste
Management (PWM) Rules. Key focus areas include source segregation of waste; segregated
collection and transportation; the processing of segregated waste; setting up of Material Recovery
Facility (MRF) in all ULBs; continuous awareness generation for reducing Single Use Plastic (SUP)
and use of substitute products. The States/UTs also have been requested to constitute a Special Task
Force for the elimination of Single-Use Plastics. A National Level Taskforce has also been constituted
for taking coordinated efforts to eliminate identified single-use plastic items and effective
implementation of Plastic Waste Management Rules, 2016.
 For effective monitoring of the ban on identified Single-Use Plastic (SUP) items and plastic waste
management in the country, online platforms that are in operation are the National Dashboard on the
elimination of Single-Use Plastics and effective plastic waste management; Central Pollution Control
Board (CPCB) Monitoring Module for Compliance on Elimination of Single-Use Plastic and CPCB
Grievance Redressal App.
 In order to spur innovation in the area of development of eco-alternatives, Ministry of Environment,
Forest, and Climate Change (MoEFCC) organised an India Plastic Challenge Hackathon i for start-
nups and students of colleges and Universities. Two innovative solutions for ecoalternatives were
awarded under the Hackathon, a rigid packaging material made from rice stubble and a flexible
packaging film made from seaweed, which can be used for wrapping and carry bag applications.
 'Prakriti - Messenger of the Earth' was launched as a mascot of sustainability and protection of the
environment to spread awareness amongst the general public. A public movement was built on the
elimination of Single-Use Plastics by NSS, NCC where more than 100,000 eco-clubs from various
schools and colleges participated.
 The United Nations Environment Programme or the United Nations Development Programme could
work together with NITI Aayog to lead research to fill the evidence vacuum and comprehend the
particular difficulties, effects, and needs at the junction of women and the plastics sector.
 Waste management regulations must be enhanced to acknowledge and address the gendered effect of
plastic pollution, from bettering working conditions and guaranteeing fair salaries to provide protective
equipment and access to healthcare.Greater partnerships and synergy between government programs
and efforts, like the Swachh Bharat Mission and the Smart Cities movement, must be added to this.
 Government and Global Interventions
 On World Environment Day, 2018 the world leaders vowed to “Beat Plastic Pollution” & eliminate its
use completely.
 The Group of 20 (G20) environment ministers, agreed to adopt a new implementation framework for
actions to tackle the issue of marine plastic waste on a global scale.
 Plastic Waste Management Rules, 2016 state that every local body has to be responsible for setting up
infrastructure for segregation, collection, processing, and disposal of plastic waste.
 Plastic Waste Management (Amendment) Rules 2018 introduced the concept of Extended Producer
Responsibility (EPR).
 A new national framework on plastic waste management is in the works, which will introduce third-party
audits as part of the monitoring mechanism.

 Way Forward
 Raising awareness amongst the public: of the harm caused by plastic pollution through education and
outreach programs to modify behavior. A movement against plastic waste would have to prioritise the
reduction of single-use plastic such as multi-layer packaging, bread bags, food wrap, and protective
packaging.
 Reduce or abolish taxes: on the import of materials used to make alternatives.
 Provide incentives to the alternative industry: by introducing tax rebates or other conditions to support
its transition from plastic industry.
 Promote Alternatives: before the ban or levy comes into force, the availability of alternatives need to be
assessed, hence the government may:
 Provide economic incentives to encourage the uptake of eco-friendly and fit-for-purpose
alternatives that do not cause more harm.
 Support can include tax rebates, research and development funds, technology incubation, public-
private partnerships and support to projects that recycle single-use items and turn waste into a
resource that can be used again.
 Expanding the use of biodegradable plastics: or even edible plastics made from various materials such
as bagasse (the residue after extracting juice from sugarcane), corn starch, and grain flour.
 Use of microbeads: in personal care products and cosmetics must be prohibited.
 The Swachh Bharat Mission: should emerge as a platform for plastic waste management.
 Target the most problematic single-use plastics: by conducting a baseline assessment to identify the
most problematic single-use plastics, as well as the current causes, extent and impacts of their
mismanagement.
 Consider the best actions to tackle: the problem of plastic waste management (e.g. through regulatory,
economic, awareness, voluntary actions) given the country’s socio-economic standing.
 Assess the potential social, economic and environmental impacts (positive and negative): of the
preferred short-listed plastic waste management measures/actions, by considering how will the poor be
affected, or what impact will the preferred course of action have on different sectors and industries.
 Identify and engage key stakeholder groups: like retailers, consumers, industry representatives, local
government, manufacturers, civil society, environmental groups, and tourism associations in order to
ensure broad buy-in.
 Explaining the decision and any punitive measures: that will follow, as a result of non compliance of
plastic management rule.
 Use revenues: collected from taxes or levies on single-use plastics to maximize the public good, thereby
supporting environmental projects or boosting local recycling with the funds and creating jobs in the
plastic recycling sector with seed funding.
 Enforce: the plastic waste management measure effectively, by making sure that there is clear allocation
of roles and responsibilities.
 Monitor and adjust: the plastic waste management measure if necessary and update the public on
progress.

We must raise awareness, reduce consumption of single-use plastic, promote recycling

and responsible waste management and support innovation for sustainable alternatives.
 TAPI Gas Pipeline
Turkmenistan–Afghanistan–Pakistan–India (TAPI) Pipeline
 The Turkmenistan–Afghanistan–Pakistan–India (TAPI) Pipeline, also known as Trans-Afghanistan
Pipeline, is a natural gas pipeline being developed by the Galkynysh – TAPI Pipeline Company
Limited with participation of the Asian Development Bank.
 The pipeline will transport natural gas from the Galkynysh Gas
Field in Turkmenistan through Afghanistan into Pakistan and then to India. Construction on the
project started in Turkmenistan on 13 December 2015, work on the Afghan section began in February
2018, and work on the Pakistani section was planned to commence in December 2018. The
abbreviation TAPI comes from the first letters of those countries. Proponents of the project see it as a
modern continuation of the Silk Road.
 TAPI Pipeline, also called Peace pipeline, is a 1,814km natural gas pipeline that originates from
Turkmenistan and passes through Afghanistan and Pakistan to reach India.
 It aims to monetise Turkmenistan’s gas reserves and supply them to neighbouring countries to
promote the use of natural gas and improve energy security.
 The project is being developed by TAPI Pipeline Company (TPCL), a consortium established by four
individual state-owned gas companies Turkmengaz (Turkmenistan), Afghan Gas (Afghanistan),
Interstate Gas Service (Pakistan), and Gas Authority of India and Indian Oil (India).
 The four countries signed an Inter Government Agreement (IGA) and Gas Pipeline Framework
Agreements (GPFA) in December 2010 for the development of the pipeline.
 Construction of the pipeline remains stalled.
 History of TAPI
 TAPI began to take form when a memorandum of understanding was signed on 15 March 1995
regarding a pipeline between the governments of Pakistan and Turkmenistan. The Central Asia
Gas Pipeline (CentGas for short), LTD was formed in August 1996 for the construction of the
pipeline. It was incorporated through formal signing ceremonies in Ashgabat, Turkmenistan by
several international oil companies with the Government of Turkmenistan.
 A new deal was signed on 27 December 2002 by the governments of Turkmenistan, Afghanistan
and Pakistan. In 2005, the Asian Development Bank submitted the final version of a feasibility
study. The project has drawn strong US support as it would allow the Central Asian republics to
export energy to Western markets “without relying on Russian routes”.
 India, Pakistan and Afghanistan came to an agreement to buy natural gas from Turkmenistan. The
agreement between them was signed on April 24, 2008, in Ashgabat. Although by 2012, the
governments of India and Afghanistan had yet to decide on the transit fee for the gas passing
through Afghan territory. This was the same problem with the Indian and Pakistani governments
regarding the transit fee for the pipeline passing through Pakistani territory as the fee structure
would be modeled on the basis of an Indo-Afghan agreement.
 Construction on the project started in Turkmenistan on 13 December 2015 and was completed by
mid-2019. Construction on the Afghan side started on February 24, 2018, while construction on
Pakistan began to start by October 2019 and is on schedule.
 In the backdrop of the Afghanistan Peace-Process, Turkmenistan seeks to revive the TAPI project
at the earliest.
.
 General Information about TAPI
Location Turkmenistan, Afghanistan, Pakistan, India

General Direction North-South

Start location Galkynysh gas field, Turkmenistan

Passes through Herat – Kandahar – Quetta – Multan

End location Fazilka, India

Type Natural Gas

Length 1,814 km (1,127 mi)

Maximum discharge 33 billion cubic metres per annum (1.2 trillion cubic feet per annum)

 Financing
 The TAPI project is being funded by the Asian Development Bank (ADB), which is also acting
as transaction adviser for the development.

 Challenges
 One of the major problems with the project has been the bilateral tensions between the involved
countries. India is concerned that Pakistan would be in charge of releasing the gas supply in India.
This has not gone well with India and it has raised its concern on the relevant platforms about it.
  The deteriorating bilateral relationship between the two countries has impacted several
development projects and many scholars are wary that TAPI Project would meet the same fate.
 India and Pakistan have identified terrorist and insurgents’ groups in Afghanistan and Pakistan as
major threat to the pipeline. Some of the land in the both the countries has been occupied by the
terrorist groups. In order to lay the pipelines, the Pakistani government has had to pay royalties to
the Balochis from laying down the pipelines on the land occupied by the land. If this is not done,
then there are very high chances that these organisations would bomb the areas in which the
project would be built.
 The instability in Afghanistan, the economic inadequacies of the country and the tensions
between countries such as India and Pakistan prevent the completion of the TAPI pipeline
project. Although the problems between India and Pakistan seem to overcome, the biggest
obstacle to the realization of the pipeline project is the security problem originating from
Afghanistan.
 The biggest problem of the project is that the pipeline passes through the territory of Afghanistan,
especially the city of Kandahar, known as the stronghold of the Taliban. Although Afghanistan
gave guarantees to ensure the security of the pipeline passing through its territory with the launch
of the project, it has been attacked many times until today. Thus, it questions the feasibility of the
project and its reliability for the final countries. It is possible to say that Afghanistan, by
transferring 5 billion cubic meters of natural gas, besides meeting its energy needs, by providing
natural gas flow to Pakistan and India, it becomes a transit country and can make significant
diplomatic gains. In addition, the project may be instrumental in creating thousands of jobs, as
well as providing economic income to the country. Considering that Afghanistan is 80%
dependent on foreign energy, it is obvious that the Taliban, who took over the administration,
should not miss such an opportunity. In this case, it can be expected that the contacts related to
the project will be revived soon with the Taliban, which has started to carry out a moderate
policy.
 If the TAPI project is successfully implemented, other major powers in the region such as China
and Russia will be bypassed, as well as potentially seizing the opportunity to stabilize the
relations and security situation among Central Asian countries. The TAPI pipeline will also
deliver Central Asian energy to the South Asian market and reduce global energy dependency
from the Middle East. While the TAPI pipeline is seen as a strategic opportunity as it acts as a
bridge between Central and South Asian energy cooperation, many states are waiting to see if the
Taliban can stick to its promise to support economic projects in the country.

 TAPI pipeline Benefits and Importance

 The pipeline is expected to facilitate a unique level of trade and co-operation across the region,
while also supporting peace and security between the four nations.
 More than 1.5 billion people in Afghanistan, Pakistan, and India are expected to benefit from the
long-term energy security provided by the project.
 In addition, the project is expected to boost the revenues of Turkmenistan via the sale of gas.
 Afghanistan and Pakistan will also receive benefits through transit fees.
 Political instability and violence in Afghanistan, however, stalled its progress after a
groundbreaking ceremony was held in Serhetabad in Turkmenistan in February, 2018.
 India’s approach to TAPI positions Turkmenistan as a crucial nexus for its connectivity with
Central Asia as a whole. Equally, for landlocked Turkmenistan, the much anticipated TAPI
pipeline represents an opportunity to find alternative export partners and one that comes with few
strings attached.
 The TAPI pipeline represents a small but important step away from coal in regions primed for
economic growth. Residents of Mumbai, Karachi, Delhi, and Islamabad may get some relief from
the respiratory diseases associated with air pollution.
  The TAPI pipeline’s significance extends beyond energy security and into the geopolitical. TAPI
may contribute to regional stability as Afghanistan, Pakistan, and India experience higher degrees
of energy security.
 India is world’s third largest energy consumer and fourth largest importer of Liquefied natural gas
and India’s energy requirement is increasing steadily.
 According to BP Energy Outlook 2035, India will account for 9% of world energy consumption,
while its share in global production will remain at 5%. In the same period, natural gas demand
will increase by 131% and domestic natural gas production will be far from meeting
consumption. For this reason, India’s natural gas imports are expected to quadruple by 2040. This
emerging and future energy gap explains India’s interest in TAPI and the importance of the
project for India.
 Moreover, the project has the particular advantage of providing an entry point to Central Asia,
enabling future energy deals or similar pipelines to be concluded with this energy-rich region.
This is a very important factor for a large economy with a large population like India. In addition,
the pipeline could lead to the creation of a trade corridor between the four countries, stretching as
far as Kazakhstan.
 TAPI Gas Pipeline will transform the politics of this region and help build trust and confidence
among ourselves as neighbours and partners in progress.

 Conclusion
 It is widely believed that TAPI is a lucrative deal for all the nations involved, with the potential to
create additional sources of revenue.
 As mentioned earlier, TAPI has enjoyed much unilateral support from the U.S. as it circumvents
the dependency of Central Asian Countries for Russian oil. It is also in the U.S interest to
safeguard strategic locations in Afghanistan and Central Asia as a whole so that the entire project
comes to fruition.
 The project is believed to create about 12,000 jobs and above along with access to cheap energy
for both India and Pakistan. But the politics of South Asia is myriad of mistrust and suspicion
wich the TAPI project must navigate through in order to be of any use to all the stakeholders
involved. Until such choppy waters can be navigated through, it is only prudent to wait and watch
how much of a benefit (or drawback) will the scope of the project yield in the long run.
 Expanding the group of stakeholders will lead to several convergences of interests. TAPI should
include Russia, China and SAARC as technical advisors who would provide their expert advice
in the project. TAPI Project operators and countries need to come up with a committee to address
the human security issues. The proposed committee would deal with the R&C Policy and address
the concerns of the local communities. A part of the committee should be experts on environment
security and come up with measures and policy to make the project more sustainable.
 It is of utmost importance to include the local communities in the project building. It will not only
provide with livelihood and employment opportunities but will also help the insurgent and
terrorist forces from attacking the project as the groups will no longer be employed in anti-state
activities or to affiliated terror groups.
 At this point, the project is delayed due to several reasons.This serves as an opportunity to review
the challenges and take a step in addressing them. The TAPI project lacks a qualitative, human
security and environment friendly approach. The project needs to be made more viable and
sustainable by including human security concerns about land-based livelihoods and human rights
in order to prevent a conflict in the future.

The TAPI pipeline promises to be of a great strategic significance of Asia in terms of

energy requirements as well as for opportunities of employment generation and
infrastructure development.
UKRAINE CRISIS – STRATEGY FOLLOWED BY RUSSIA AND
US ALONG WITH THEIR ALLIES AND LESSONS FOR INDIA

 INTRODUCTION
 Ukraine was a cornerstone of the Soviet Union, the archrival of the United States during
the Cold War. Behind only Russia, it was the second–most populous and powerful of
the fifteen Soviet republics, home to much of the union’s agricultural production, defence
industries, and military, including the Black Sea Fleet and some of the Nuclear arsenal.
Ukraine was so vital to the union that its decision to sever ties in 1991 proved to be a coup
de grâce for the ailing superpower.

 Ukraine has long played an important, yet sometimes overlooked, role in the global
security order. Today, the country is on the front lines of a renewed great - power rivalry
that many analysts say will dominate international relations in the decades ahead. In recent
elections, Ukrainians have clearly indicated that they see their future in Europe, but the
country continues to grapple with extreme corruption and deep regional rifts that could
impede its path. Meanwhile, Russia’s aggression in Ukraine has triggered the greatest
security crisis in Europe since the Cold War. Though the US and its allies have taken
significant punitive actions against Russia during the seven-year-old conflict, they have
made little headway in helping to restore Ukraine’s territorial integrity.

 HISTORICAL BACKGROUND
 Ukraine and Russia share hundreds of years of cultural, linguistic and familial links. For
many in Russia and in the ethnically Russian parts of Ukraine, the shared heritage of the
countries is an emotional issue. As part of the Soviet Union, Ukraine was the second-most
powerful Soviet republic after Russia, and was crucial strategically, economically and
culturally.

 A timeline of major events in the Russia-Ukraine History is given below:

YEAR EVENT
1783 Annexation by Imperial Russia. Mostly non violent.
1917-1921 Soviet-Ukrainian War. Ukrainian Soviet Socialist Republic was established.
1922 Soviet Union was founded with Russia and Ukraine as founding members.
1954 Crimea handed over to Ukraine SSR by Soviet leader.
1991 Independence of Ukraine from Soviet Union.
1994 Ukraine joined the Non Proliferation of Nuclear weapons and
carried out nuclear disarmament.
2004 Orange Revolution in Ukraine against election of pro- Russian President.
2013 Euromaidan protests against Ukrainian government resulting in ousting of the
president and overthrowing of the government.

 In 2013, Ukraine's then-President Viktor Yanukovich, decided against signing an association

agreement (AA) with the European Union (EU), sparking major pro- European protests in
Ukraine. In Feb 2014, the Ukrainian parliament voted to impeach Yanukovich, who fled Kyiv.
 Subsequently, in March 2014, Russia annexed Crimea, an autonomous peninsula in southern
Ukraine with strong Russian loyalties, on the pretext that it was defending its interests and
those of Russian-speaking citizens. Shortly afterwards, pro-Russian separatists in Ukraine's
Donetsk and Luhansk regions declared their independence from Kiev, prompting months of
fighting. The EU, the US and other countries imposed sanctions on Russia. In 2014 & 2015, a
peace plan for Eastern Ukraine (the Minsk Protocol I & II) was signed, named after the
Belarusian capital Minsk where the talks were held.

 However, efforts to reach a diplomatic settlement and satisfactory resolution have been
unsuccessful. A major blockade has been Russia’s insistence that it is not a party to the
conflict and therefore is not bound by its terms. Since 2014, Ukraine has been witnessing
shelling and skirmishes between the rebels and Ukrainian forces leading to the loss of over
14,000 lives by most estimates, creating around 1.5 million registered Internally Displaced
Persons (IDPs) and destruction of the local economy. In 2021, Russia started a large military
buildup on the border with Ukraine. The buildup continued despite warnings from other
western countries. On February 24, 2022, the Russian president Vladimir Putin ordered his
troops to invade Ukraine.

 CAUSE OF CONFLICT
 Balance of Power
Ever since Ukraine split from the Soviet Union, both Russia and the West have vied for
greater influence in the country in order to keep thebalance of power in the region in their
favour.

 Buffer Zone for Western Countries

For the US and the EU, Ukraine is a crucial buffer between Russia and the West. As
tensions with Russia rise, the US and the EU are increasingly determined to keep Ukraine
away from Russia.

 Russian Interest in Black Sea

The unique geography of the Black Sea region confers several geopolitical advantages to
Russia. Firstly, it is an important crossroad and strategic intersection for the entire region.
 Access to the Black Sea is vital for all littoral and neighboring states, and greatly
enhances the projection ofpower into several adjacent regions. Secondly, the region is an
important transitcorridor for goods and energy.

 Protests in Ukraine
Two major protests in Ukraine which were pro-European were widely disagreeable
to Russia, namely the Orange revolution of 2004 and the Euromaidan Movement of 2013.

o Orange Revolution In 2004 a series of political protests took place in

Ukraine in response to the elections of Viktor Yanukovych, who also had the
support of Russian President Vladimir Putin. The protesters claimed that the result
of elections were rigged by the authorities in favour of Yanukovych. Results were
annulled and a revote ordered. In the re-election, Viktor Yushchenko won by
securing 52% of the votes.
o Euromaidan Protests On 21 November, 2013, Viktor Yanukovych suspended
signing the EU Association Agreement and instead chose closer ties with Russia.
The decision to not sign the agreement sparked Euromaidan protests. The protests
were aimed at widespread government corruption, abuse of power, and violation
of human rights in Ukraine. Elected President Viktor Yanukovych was ousted and
the Ukrainian government was overthrown.

 Separatist Movement The Donbas region (the Donetsk and Luhansk regions) of
Eastern Ukraine has been facing a pro-Russian separatist movement since 2014.
According to the Ukrainian government, the movement is actively supported by the
Russian government and Russian paramilitary forces make up between 15% to 80% of
the separatists fighting against the Ukraine government.

 Invasion of Crimea Russia seized Crimea from Ukraine in what wasthe first time
a European country annexed territory from another country since World War-ll. The
annexation of Crimea from Ukraine followed a Russian military intervention in Crimea
that took place in the aftermath of the 2014 Ukrainian revolution and was part of wider
unrest across Southern and Eastern Ukraine. The invasion and subsequent annexation
of Crimea have given Russia a maritime upper hand in the region.

 Ukraine’s NATO Membership Ukraine has urged the North Atlantic Treaty
Organization (NATO) to speed up their membership process in the alliance. Russia has
declared such a move a “red line”, and is worried about the consequences of the US-
led military alliances expanding right up to its doorstep. Due to this faceoff between
NATO countries and Russia, the Black sea is a region of strategic importance and a
potential maritime flashpoint.

 UKRAINE - A GEOPOLITICAL FLASH POINT

 In its nearly three decades of independence, Ukraine has sought to forge its own path as a
sovereign state while looking to align more closely with Western institutions, including the
European Union and the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO). However, Kyiv has
struggled to balance its foreign relations and to bridge deep internal divisions. A more
nationalist, Ukrainian-speaking population in Western parts of the country has generally
supported greater integration with Europe, while a mostly Russian-speaking community in
the East has favored closer ties with Russia.
  Ukraine became a battleground in 2014 when Russia annexed Crimea and began
arming and abetting separatists in the Donbas region in the country’s southeast. Russia’s
seizure of Crimea was the first time since World War II that a European state had annexed
the territory of another. More than fourteen thousand people have died in the conflict, the
bloodiest in Europe since the Balkan Wars of the 1990s.

 RUSSIAN INTERESTS IN UKRAINE

 Lineage
Russia and Ukraine have strong familial bonds that go back centuries. Kyiv, Ukraine’s
capital, is sometimes referred to as “the mother of Russian cities,” on par in terms of
cultural influence with Moscow and St. Petersburg. It was in Kyiv in the eighth and ninth
centuries that Christianity was brought from Byzantium to the Slavic people and served as
the anchor for Kievan Rus, the early Slavic state from which modern Russians, Ukrainians,
and Belarusians draw their lineage.

 Historical Ties
Russia has deep cultural, economic, and political bondswith Ukraine, and in many
ways Ukraine is central to Russia’s identity and vision for itself in the world.

 Russian Diaspora
Among Russia’s top concerns is the welfare of theapproximately eight million ethnic
Russians living in Ukraine, according to a 2001 census, mostly in the South and East.
Moscow claimed a duty to protect these people as a pretext for its actions in Ukraine.

 Crimea Connundrum
Soviet leader Nikita Khrushchev transferred Crimea from Russia to Ukraine in 1954 to
strengthen the “brotherly ties between the Ukrainian and Russian peoples.” However, since
the fall of the union, many Russian nationalists in both Russia and Crimea have longed for
a return of the peninsula. The city of Sevastopol is home port for Russia’s Black Sea Fleet,
the dominant maritime force in the region.

 Trade
Russia was, for a long time, Ukraine’s largest trading partner, although this link has
withered dramatically in recent years. China now tops Russia in its trade with Ukraine.
Prior to its invasion of Crimea, Russia had hoped to pull Ukraine into its single market, the
Eurasian Economic Union, which today includes Armenia, Belarus, Kazakhstan, and
Kyrgyzstan.

 Superpower image
After the Soviet collapse, many Russian politicians viewed the divorce with Ukraine as a
mistake of history and a threat to Russia’s standing as a great power. Losing a permanent
hold on Ukraine, and letting it fall into the Western orbit, was seen by many as a major
blow to Russia’s international prestige. Russia’s intervention in Ukraine in 2014 proved to
be immensely popular at home, pushing Putin’s approval ratings above 80 percent
following a steady decline.

 Political Influence
Russia has been intent on preserving its political influence in Ukraine and throughout the
former Soviet Union, particularly after its preferred candidate for Ukrainian president in
2004, Viktor Yanukovych, lost to a reformist competitor due to the Orange Revolution
 movement. The shock in Ukraine came after a similar electoral defeat for the Pro Russian
candidate in Georgia in 2003,known as the Rose Revolution, and was followed by
another, the Tulip Revolution, inKyrgyzstan in 2005.

 NATO Calling Ukraine

Russia is unhappy with efforts by the US and EU to induct Ukraine into the US-led
military alliance of NATO. Ukraine acts a crucial buffer between Russia and NATO
countries of Europe. Russia views the growing presence in Ukraine from NATO - in
terms of weaponry, training and personnel - as a threat to its own security.

 Energy
Russia has relied on Ukrainian pipelines to pump its gas to customers in Central and
Eastern Europe for decades, and it continues to pay billions of dollars per year in transit
fees to Kyiv. However, in mid-2021, Russia completed construction of its Nord Stream 2
pipeline, which runs under the Baltic Sea to Germany. Although Russia is contracted to
keep moving gas through Ukraine for several more years, some critics in the United States
and Europe warn that Nord Stream 2 will allow Russia to bypass Ukrainian pipelines if it
wants and gain greater geopolitical leverage in the region.

 INTERESTS OF USA
 United States of America has been one of the important catalysts of the Russia- Ukraine crisis
since the beginning. It has been trying to get Ukraine towards the Western sphere of influence so
as to have leverage on Russia, one of its major rivals. The United States provided political
assurances to Ukraine with the signing of the 1994 Budapest Memorandum. Twenty years later,
after Russia’s 2014 invasion of Ukraine, U.S. officials came to express more emphatically and
frequently U.S. support for Ukraine’s sovereignty and territorial integrity within its
internationally recognized borders.

 Security
U.S. has maintained that U.S. support for Ukraine’s sovereignty and territorial integrity is
unwavering. This applies to both Crimea and Russia-controlled areasin eastern Ukraine. In July
2018, USA issued the “Crimea Declaration,” which reaffirmed the United States’ refusal to
recognize Russia’s claims of sovereignty over Crimea until Ukraine’s territorial integrity is
restored. Through the Countering Russian Influence in Europe and Eurasia Act of 2017
(CRIEEA), United States has declared never to recognize the annexation of Crimea by Russia. It
has also prohibited foreign assistance to countries that support Russia’s annexation of Crimea.
U.S. also criticizes Russia for failing to fulfill its commitments under the Minsk agreements and
condemns Russia’s aggressive actions in and around Ukraine. In April 2021, US voiced it’s
concerns to Russia over the sudden military build-up in Crimea and on Ukraine’s borders, and
called on Russia to de-escalate tensions.

 Foreign and Military Aid

Ukraine has been a leading recipient of U.S. foreign and military aid in Europe and Eurasia. In
the 1990s, the U.S. government providedalmost $2.6 billion in total aid to Ukraine. In the 2000s,
total aid to Ukraine amounted to almost $1.8 billion. After Russia’s invasion of Ukraine, the
United States began to provide higher levels of annual assistance to Ukraine across multiple
accounts. In all, the United States has allocated more than $2.5 billion in security assistance to
Ukraine since Russia’s 2014 invasion. In addition, the U.S. government has also provided more
than $351 million in humanitarian assistance since 2014 to assist internally displaced persons
 (IDPs) and other victims of conflict. The United States has also provided three $1 billion loan
guarantees to Ukraine.

 Lethal and Nonlethal Security Assistance

US has provided nonlethal security assistance to Ukraine, such as body armor, helmets, vehicles,
night and thermal vision devices, heavy engineering equipment, advanced radios, patrol boats,
rations, tents, counter-mortar radars, uniforms, first aid equipment and supplies, and other
related items upto 2017. From 2017 to 2021, security assistance has included capabilities to
enhance the lethality, command and control, and situational awareness of Ukraine’s forces
through the provision of counter-artillery radars, counter-unmanned aerial systems, secure
communications gear, electronic warfare and military medical evacuation equipment, and
training and equipment to improve the operational safety and capacity of Ukrainian Air Force
bases. Since 2015, U.S. forces from the U.S. Army and National Guard, together with
military trainers from U.S. allied states, have provided training and mentoring to members of the
Ukrainian Armed Forces as part of a Joint Multinational Training Group- Ukraine. The United
States and Ukraine host regular joint military exercises in Ukraine with the participation of
NATO allies and partners such as Ex. Sea Breeze, a maritime exercise. Ukraine has also been a
part Ex Rapid Trident which is historically a NATO exercise. The United States also provides
cyber security assistance to Ukraine.

 Bilateral Trade
The United States granted Ukraine permanent normal trade relations status in 2006. From 2014
to 2016, bilateral trade declined in line with an overall decline in Ukraine’s trade after Russia’s
invasion. U.S.-Ukraine trade began to recover in 2017. In 2020, the United States was Ukraine’s
5th-largest source of merchandise imports and 14th-largest destination for exports. The value of
U.S. merchandise exports to Ukraine—mostly motor vehicles, coal, and industrial machinery—
was $1.9 billion in 2020. The value of U.S. merchandise imports from Ukraine—primarily iron
and steel—was $1.3 billion in 2020.

 Energy security to EU
The United States opposes the Nord Stream 2 pipeline as it assesses that it would have
detrimental impacts on the EU’s energy security, gas market development in Central and
Eastern Europe, and energy reforms in Ukraine it also issued joint statement with Germany in
July 2021 that pledges to bolster Ukraine’s energy security and to support sanctions in response
to further acts of Russian aggression towards Ukraine.

 Other Legislative Initiatives

US has also passed many legislations since 2017 which favour Ukraine and target Russia such
as Ukraine Cyber security Cooperation Act 2017, Crimea Annexation Non-recognition Act
2019, Ukraine Security Partnership Act 2021, Ukraine Religious Freedom Support Act etc.

 Economic Sanctions on Russia

The US imposed sanctions on Russia after the seizure of Crimea. Subsequently, it has imposed
Ukraine-related sanctions on about 735 individuals and entities, such as preventing Russia from
pumping Russian gas through the newly built Nord Stream 2 pipeline to Germany. Nord Stream
2 is one of two pipelines that Russia has laid underwater in the Baltic Sea.

 ROLE OF MEDIA IN THE CRISIS

 Media has played a key role in terms of perception management in the ongoing crisis. In
Western and Ukrainian media, the armed build-up at the border is a sign of Russian imperialist
 aggression, of Moscow trying to bully its smaller neighbour. In Russia, however, the situation is
viewed rather differently. It has been painted as Russia’s efforts to nullify its security concerns
rather than invasion.

 Effect of Social Media

Since Russian President Vladimir Putin officially declared what he calls a “special military
operation" in Ukraine, most social media feeds have been filled with posts about the conflict
between the two countries. Ukraine is utilising social media to mobilise support, with new
content being produced on sites namely Twitter and TikTok regularly. On the other hand, Russia
has been successful in driving out or closing down some of the most popular internet services
like Facebook.

 Ukraine has dominated social media in the days following the Russian invasion, in an expanding
information war with Moscow that Kyiv appears to be winning so far. Even, Ukrainian
President Volodymyr Zelensky’s daily video speeches, which are normally provided with
English subtitles, have become viral sensations. But social media’s role also includes some
challenges. Many online posts may have some truth, but they should be viewed with caution, as
false claims and misinformation about the two countries have proliferated on social media.

 What is the Stand of Different Nations on the Issue

 The United States has already announced sanctions prohibiting “new investment, trade, and
financing by US persons to, from, or in” the two breakaway regions.
 Japan is likely to join the US-led sanctions while French officials have been quoted as
saying in reports that the European Union (EU) is also in discussions for punitive actions
against Russia.
 The EU has condemned Russia over “a blatant violation of international law as well as of
the Minsk agreements.”
 The United Kingdom has also warned of further sanctions.
 Australia also called Russia’s actions unacceptable, it's unprovoked, and it’s unwarranted.

 What is Russia's Stand

 It blamed the NATO for the current crisis and called the US-led alliance an existential threat
to Russia.
 Charged that Ukraine had inherited Russia’s historic lands and after theSoviet collapse was
used by the West to contain Russia.
 It wants Western Countries to guarantee that NATO won’t allow Ukraine and other former
Soviet countries to join as members.
 It has also demanded the alliance halt weapons deployments to Ukraine and roll back its
forces from Eastern Europe. The Western countries have rejected the demand.

 WHAT IS INDIA’S STAND ON THE ISSUE AND THE IMPACT ON INDIA

 India did not join the Western powers’ condemnation of Russia’s intervention in Crimea
and kept a low profile on the issue. In Nov 2020, India voted against a Ukraine-sponsored
resolution in the United Nations (UN) that condemned alleged human rights violations in
Crimea thereby backing old ally Russia on the issue. In Feb 22, India also suggested at the
UN Security Council that quiet and constructive diplomacy is the need of the hour and any
step that could escalate the tension should be avoided. India’s stand has been welcomed by
Russia.
  To maintain balance between Russia and US:
India has good relations with both Russia and the US and siding with one of these
countries could cost India its relationship with the other. However, India has maintained its
neutrality in this conflict. India has abstained from the procedure vote on Ukraine at the
UNSC. India’s position on the ongoing Ukraine crisis undergirded by the desire to keep
clear of the crosshairs of big power rivalry is reminiscent of its quintessential ‘strategic
autonomy’.

 S-400 delivery and US waiver

The crisis comes precisely as India’s purchase of the Russian S-400 missile system is
under way- and India hopes for a waiver of U.S. sanctions on this. This conflict will
complicate both the delivery of the system, and the possibility of a presidential waiver.

 Brings Russia China closer

The Crisis will make Moscow more dependent on friends like China and build a regional
bloc of sorts that India is not a part of. Russia is already averse to the Indo-Pacific concept
and the Quad as a revival of Cold War bloc politics and views them as being against its
Asia-Pacific interests. Any Ukraine conflict and a resulting breakdown of Russia-West ties
will strengthen Russian opposition to these concepts and forums which are binding us to
the US.

 India’s Investment in Russia

India’s plans in Russia’s energy sector and in the development of its Far East, in general,
would become problematic, especially by the reluctance of the private sector to fall afoul
of the complex US sanctions. The new sanctions excludes Russia from the Swift payments
system.

 THE WAY FORWARD

 A practical solution for the situation is to revive the Minsk peace process. Therefore, the
West (US and Other western Countries) should push both sides to resume talks and live up
to their commitments as per the Minsk agreement to restore relative peace on the border.
 While the Minsk agreement is far from ideal, it could be a baseline from which a
diplomatic solution to the current crisis could be found and reviving it could be the ‘only
path on which peace can be built’ as French President Emmanuel Macron has said.
 For Ukraine, it could help it gain control over its borders and end the threat of a Russian
invasion for the time being, while for Russia it could be a way to ensure that Ukraine never
becomes a part of NATO and ensure that Russian language and culture are protected under
a new federal Constitution in Ukraine.

 CONCLUSION
 For many analysts, the conflict marked a clear shift in the global security environment
from a unipolar period of U.S dominance to one defined by renewed competition between
great powers.
 However, a solution to the conflict is at hand, in the form of the Minsk II agreement of
2015 calling for autonomy for a demilitarized Donbas within Ukraine, under international
guarantees.
 UNIFORM CIVIL COURT (UCC)
What is UCC?
Uniform Civil Code refers to the proposition of having a uniform set of civil laws for all citizens
of a country, irrespective of their religious or cultural affiliations.
UCC is envisaged to provide for one law for the entire country, applicable to all religious
communities in their personal matters such as marriage, divorce, inheritance, adoption etc.
Article 44 of the Constitution lays down that the state shall endeavour to secure a UCC for the
citizens throughout the territory of India.
Article 44 is one of the Directive Principles of State Policy (DPSP).
The purpose behind Article 44 is to strengthen the object of "secular democratic republic" as
enshrined in the Preamble of the Constitution.

The Principle Behind UCC

The concept of a UCC is rooted in the idea of equality and uniformity before the law and it aims to
replace the personal laws based on religious practices that currently govern matters such as
marriage, divorce, inheritance, adoption, and succession.

Historical Perspectives on UCC

British rule: There was a lack of uniformity in civil matters as personal laws based on religious
customs and traditions were recognized for different communities. The idea of a UCC emerged
as a response to this fragmentation and as a means to promote a common civil identity.
Portuguese rule: When Goa was under Portuguese rule until 1961, a Uniform Civil Code based on
the Portuguese Napoleonic code was implemented.
Nehruvian Vision: Jawaharlal Nehru envisioned a modern and progressive India and saw the UCC
as an essential element of nation-building. He believed that a UCC would help eliminate
divisions based on religion and promote equality among citizens.
Hindu Code Bill: The Hindu Code Bill sought to codify and modernize Hindu personal laws
relating to marriage, divorce, adoption, and inheritance. It was seen as a step towards a UCC, as
it aimed to bring uniformity in personal laws within the Hindu community.
Shah Bano Case: The Supreme Court judgment, in this case, sparked debates on the need for
a UCC to ensure gender justice and equal rights for women across religious communities.

Constitutional Perspectives on UCC

Constituent Assembly Debates: During the framing of the Indian Constitution, the debates
witnessed diverse viewpoints, with some members advocating for a UCC as a way to promote
gender equality and secularism, while others expressed concerns about preserving religious and
cultural rights.
Directive Principles of State Policy: Article 44 of the Indian constitution states that the state shall
endeavour to secure for its citizens a uniform civil code throughout the territory of India.
Secularism: The Indian Constitution enshrines the principle of secularism, which mandates
the separation of religion and the state. A UCC is seen as a way to promote secularism by
ensuring equal treatment of all citizens irrespective of their religious affiliations.
Equality and Non-Discrimination: The Constitution of India guarantees equality before the law
under Article 14, and prohibits discrimination on grounds of religion, race, caste, sex, or place
of birth. UCC would uphold these principles by ensuring equal rights and equal treatment for all
citizens, regardless of their religious backgrounds.
Gender Justice: The Constitution also guarantees the right to equality and the right against
discrimination based on gender. A UCC is seen as a means to promote gender justice.
Status of Uniform Codes in India
Indian laws do follow a uniform code in most civil matters such as Indian Contract Act 1872,
Civil Procedure Code, Transfer of Property Act 1882, Partnership Act 1932, Evidence Act,
1872 etc.
States, however, have made hundreds of amendments and, therefore, in certain matters, there is
diversity even under these secular civil laws.
Recently, several states refused to be governed by the uniform Motor Vehicles Act, 2019.
As of now, Goa is the only state in India with a UCC.

Implications of Uniform Civil Code on Personal Laws

Protection of Vulnerable Section of Society: The UCC aims to provide protection to vulnerable
sections as envisaged by Ambedkar including women and religious minorities, while also
promoting nationalistic fervour through unity.
Simplification of Laws: A Uniform Civil Code will simplify the complex laws around marriage
ceremonies, inheritance, succession, adoptions, making them one for all. The same civil law
will then be applicable to all citizens irrespective of their faith.
Adhering to the Ideal of Secularism: Secularism is the objective enshrined in the Preamble; a
secular republic needs a common law for all citizens rather than differentiated rules based on
religious practices.
Gender Justice: If a UCC is enacted, all personal laws will cease to exist. It will do away with
gender biases in existing laws.

Benefits of UCC
National Integration and Secularism: UCC would create a common identity among citizens,
fostering national integration. It promotes secularism by treating all religions equally and
reducing communal conflicts.
Gender Justice and Equality: UCC ensures gender justice by removing discriminatory laws and
granting equal rights to women in marriage, divorce, inheritance, etc. It empowers women and
upholds their fundamental rights.
Simplification and Rationalisation of Legal System: UCC simplifies the legal system by
eliminating the complexities and contradictions of multiple laws. It harmonizes civil and
criminal laws and enhances accessibility for the common people.
Modernisation and Reform of Outdated Practices: UCC modernizes and reforms outdated
practices, aligning personal laws with human rights and constitutional values. It abolishes
practices like triple talaq and child marriage.
Empowering Women through Uniformity: It would ensure gender justice and equality by
abolishing the discriminatory and oppressive practices against women in various personal laws,
such as polygamy, unequal inheritance, etc.
Streamlining Laws for Legal Efficiency: India's current legal system is burdened with complex
and overlapping personal laws, leading to confusion and legal disputes. A UCC would simplify
the legal framework by consolidating and harmonising various laws into a single code. This
would enhance clarity, ease of implementation, and reduce the burden on the judiciary, ensuring
a more efficient legal system.
Drawing Inspiration from Global Success Stories: Many countries across the world like France,
have implemented a uniform civil code. A UCC is the sign of a modern progressive nation
implying that it has moved away from caste and religious politics.
Challenges for UCC
Diverse Personal Laws and Customary Practices
The customary practices among various communities vary a lot.
It is also a myth that Hindus are governed by one uniform law. Marriage among close relatives
is prohibited in the north but considered auspicious in the south.
Lack of uniformity in personal laws is also true of Muslims and Christians.
The Constitution itself protects local customs of Nagaland, Meghalaya and Mizoram.
The vast diversity of the personal laws, along with the devotion to which they are adhered to,
makes uniformity of any sort very difficult to achieve. It is very tough to find a common
ground between different communities.
Communal Politics
The demand for a uniform civil code has been framed in the context of communal politics.
A large section of society sees it as majoritarianism under the garb of social reform.
Constitutional Hurdle
Article 25 of Indian constitution that seeks to preserve the freedom to practice and propagate
any religion gets into conflict with the concepts of equality enshrined under Article 14 of
Indian Constitution.
Resistance from Religious and Minority Groups
Some religious and minority groups argue that it could impose majority views and undermine
their constitutional rights, particularly under Article 25 guaranteeing freedom of religion.
Lack of Political Will and Consensus
Concerns exist regarding potential communal tensions and conflicts arising from its
implementation.
Practical Difficulties and Complexities
Implementing UCC would involve substantial efforts such as drafting, codifying,
harmonizing, and rationalizing personal laws and practices.

Way Forward
The government and society will have to work hard to build trust, but more importantly, make
common cause with social reformers rather than religious conservatives.
Rather than an omnibus approach, the government could bring separate aspects such as marriage,
adoption, succession and maintenance into a UCC in stages.
The need of the hour is the codification of all personal laws so that prejudices and stereotypes in
every one of them would come to light and can be tested on the anvil of fundamental rights of
the Constitution.

Conclusion
The implementation of UCC in India requires a balanced approach that respects multiculturalism and
diversity. Inclusive discussions with stakeholders, including religious leaders and legal experts,
are essential to ensure diverse perspectives are considered.
The focus should be on eliminating practices that hinder equality and gender justice while avoiding
reactive culturalism.
The reform process of Muslim Personal Law should be led by the Muslim clergy, and Muslims
should critically examine practices to promote equality and justice.
The aim is to develop a just and inclusive UCC that upholds constitutional values.

The implementation of a Uniform Civil Code will promote the integration

of India by establishing a shared platform for diverse communities.
 Vande Bharat Trains
Introduction
For decades the rail travel within India has remained stagnant and there have been no upgradation in the
train technology. Also the cheap fares and better road conditions has taken the sheen out of the Railways.
There was a need for Railways to win back its past glory. The Budget 2022-23 has given an impetus for
development and manufacturing of 400 Vande Bharat trains in the next three years under the Atmanirbhar
initiative. It will enhance ‘Ease of Living’, boost tourism and benefit the economy.

Vande Bharat Express is also known as Train 18 which is an indigenously designed train. No doubt it is a
unique train that will mark a new era in travel technology for Indian Railways. The cost of this semi-high
speed train is about Rs. 100 crores and is faster than the Shatabdi Express

Key Features of the Vande Bharat Trains

The new trains announced will be in addition to the 75 Vande Bharat Trains scheduled to be operational
by Independence Day 2023. The new announcement has the potential of investment of approximately
Rs 50,000 Crores and generate 10,000 to 15, 000 new jobs as also opportunities for ancillary
manufacturing units. Each train will have 16 compartments.

The Vande Bharat trains are semi-high speed reaching a maximum speed of 160 km/h is India’s first
attempt at adaption at train set technology compared to conventional systems of passenger coaches hauled
by separate locomotives. The new technology though complex, is faster, easier to maintain, consumes less
energy and has greater flexibility in train operation.

The trains are based on a propulsion system called distributed traction power technology, by which each
car of the train set is powered. This is the norm world over for passenger trains. The distributed power
gives the train higher acceleration and deceleration achieving higher speed quicker and coming to halt
faster.

The trains are comfortable and is fully sealed gangways for a dust free environment, modular bio-vacuum
toilets, rotating seats in Executive class, personalized reading lights, automatic entry/exit doors with
sliding footsteps, diffused LED lighting, mini pantry, sensor based interconnecting doors in each coach,
onboard Wi-Fi entertainment, hotspots for entertainment, GPS based information systems and CCTVs.

The Railways are planning to replace the steel compartments with Aluminum coaches which will make
each train set to be around 40-80 tons lighter meaning lower consumption of energy and better speed
potential. It also has an intelligent braking system with power regeneration for better energy efficiency,
thus making it cost, energy and environment efficient.

Benefits of Vande Bharat Trains

 Cuts travelling time drastically.
 Energy efficient trains.
 Reduction in Turnaround time.
 Faster acceleration and deceleration.
 Better passenger comfort.
 It is fully made in India in the Integral Coach Factory, Chennai etc.
 Even, the gaps among the coaches are fully sealed. This helps to reduce the external noise.
 Computerised aerodynamic driver's cabin is there.
Interesting facts about Vande Bharat Express
 Engine of the train: Train 18 or Vande Bharat express is the India's first engineless train. Till date,
trains of India have a separate engine coach while Train 18 has integrated engine like bullet or metro
train. Due to this the journey time will be reduced as this new technology will allow faster
acceleration and deceleration.

 Fully automatic doors and AC coaches: The train has 16 fully air conditioned chair cars coaches
with two seating options - Economy and Executive class. Amazing feature is that the Executive class
have revolving chair which can turn 180 degrees. Also one of the most important facilities provided
in the Vande Bharat Express is the automatic doors with sliding footsteps which are centralised
control like Metro trains.

 Food facility in the train: The semi-high speed train will serve the food which is included in the
price of the ticket itself.

 Onboard Wi-Fi access: The offers onboard Wi-Fi access for users to use the services of internet for
infotainment. Also, on mobile phones or tablets you will be able to use internet.

 GPS based advanced system: The train also has GPS based advanced passenger information system
which will update you about the upcoming stations and information.

 Speed of the train: It is capable of running at the speed over 180 Km per hour faster than the
Shatabdi Express but the current tracks are supportive of speeds not more than 130kmph.

 Bio-Vacuum toilets: To solve the problem of the sanitation in the train that usually people faces bio-
vacuum toilets are used for both Indian and Western style washrooms. It will provide zero discharge
as we see in the aeroplanes. Also, touch -free bathroom fittings are provided to allow users to
experience sanitation without worry.

 Smart security in the train: All the 16 coaches of the train are fitted with the CCTV cameras for
complete security of the passengers onboard. The automatic doors of the train will open only when
the train comes to a complete halt. The train starts only when the doors are completely locked.

 Friendly spaces for the disabled is provided in the train: Some coaches of the Vande Bharat
express train will have spaces to park wheelchairs so, that disabled will not face any kind of difficulty
and make it as disabled-friendly.

 Train cost is half the cost of import: The manufacturing cost of the train 18 is approximately half
the cost of a similar imported train set and is made under 'Make in India'. The average per coach cost
would be around Rs 6 crore. Also, it is said that when mass production of the trail will be started the
cost will come closer to Rs 5 crore per coach.

Conclusion
The introduction of the Vande Bharat Express train has given a solid lift to the Indian Railways. This
promotes the vision of Make-in-India, making India a confident and self-reliant country. Vande Bharat
Express train is a brilliant example of Aatmnirbhar Bharat. Offering the best of comfortable and
enhanced rail travel experience. Vande Bharat Express has emerged as the latest jewel of Indian
Railways. So, Vande Bharat Express train is fully Indian manufactured new technology driven train with
maximum facilities which give the feeling of world class and redefines passenger travel in India and is a
symbol of resolutions and capability of new India that has started on a path of rapid change.
 VARIOUS SECURITY FORCES AND THEIR MANDATE
 Indian Armed Forces, which consist of Defence Forces, Paramilitary Forces and Strategic Force
Command plays a major role in ensuring national security.
 Law and order is a state subject of the state, therefore the bulk of the policing lies with the respective
states and territories of India. Larger cities also operate metropolitan police forces (MPF) under
respective state governments. The majority of federal law enforcement agencies are controlled by
the Ministry of Home Affairs.
 Indian security forces face many internal and external threats. And the various specialized forces of
India have to deal with these threats.
 Security forces in India can be broadly classified into two:
 Indian Armed Forces
 Central Armed Police Force (CAPF)
 The Indian Armed Forces are the primary force responsible for the security of the nation, and they
come under the administrative control of Ministry of Defence. CAPF mainly manage the internal
security threats but they also aid in combating external threats. CAPF comes under administrative
control of Ministry of Home Affairs.

 India Armed Forces

 The different armed forces of the Union of India are having separate mandates handled by
different ministries. Defence Ministry with the help of the Ministry of Home Affairs handles the
majority of external security threats in India.
 Indian armed force is divided into four sub-heads:
1. Indian Army
2. Indian Navy
3. Indian Air Force
4. Indian Coast Guard

 Central Armed Police Force (CAPF)

 There are seven divisions of CAPF:
1. Border Security Force (BSF)
2. Assam Rifles (AR)
3. Central Reserve Police Force (CRPF)
4. Central Industrial Security Force (CISF)
5. National Security Guard (NSG)
6. Indo Tibetan Border Police (ITBP)
7. Sashastra Seema Bal (SSB)

 The important responsibilities of The of Ministry of Home Affairs (MHA) includes management
of paramilitary forces, internal security, administration of Union Territories, Centre- State
relations and disaster management etc.
 Article 355 of the Constitution of India stated that the Union will protect every State against
internal disturbance and external aggression and ensure that the Government of each State is
carried on in association with the provisions of the Constitution.
 The Central Reserve Police Force is primarily responsible for defending the national interest
against internal threats.
 The Ministry of Home Affairs (MHA) oversees seven central police units that assist in
maintaining internal security and maintaining law and order.
  Borders are connected with external danger, whilst political and ideological grounds such as Left
Wing Extremism (LWE) are related to internal threat.
 The country’s internal security issues may be widely classified as follows:
 In the country’s hinterland, there is terrorism.
 In specific locations, there is left-wing extremism.
 The security conditions in the Indian state of Jammu & Kashmir.
 The North-Eastern States are experiencing insurgency.
 Maintaining internal security is the duty of the Ministry of Home Affairs (MHA).
 However, since the structure of the insurgency in these particular places is distinct, the
characteristics of the various forces involved in these operations are notably different. For
example, the security threat presented by Naxalite rebel organizations in Central India is
considerably different from the scenario in Jammu & Kashmir and the Northeast.
 The BSF, ITBP, AR, and SSB are ‘Border Guarding Forces,’ whilst the CRPF is assigned to
assist the Civil Administration under the State Governments / UT Administrations in maintaining
the internal security, Public Order, and counter-insurgency.
 Border Security Force (BSF) – Bangladesh and Pakistan borders.
 Indo-Tibetan Border Police (ITBP) – China border.
 Sashastra Seema Bal (SSB) – Nepal and Bhutan borders.
 Assam Rifles – Indo-Myanmar border.
 Furthermore, the National Security Guard (NSG) is a specialist strike force focusing on counter-
terrorism and anti-hijacking operations.

 The Mandate of Different Agencies and Security Forces

1. Border Security Force (BSF)
 It is a Border Guarding Force with Pakistan and Bangladesh. BSF was founded on 1 st
December 1965 by Khusro Faramurz Rustamji. The headquarters is located in New Delhi.
 The BSF has taken part in the 1971 & Kargil war with Pakistan.
 Tasks of the BSF are divided as follows:
 Peace time:
 Promote a sense of security among the people living in the border areas.
 Prevent trans-border crimes, unauthorized entry into or exit from areas of India.
 Prevent smuggling and any other illegal activity.
 War Time:
 Holding ground in less threatened sectors.
 Protection of vital installations particular air-fields against enemy commandoes.
 Providing extension to the flanks of main defence line by the holding of strong
points.
 Limited Aggressive action against para military or irregular forces of the enemy.
 Performing special tasks connected with intelligence including raids.
 Acting as guides in an area of responsibility where routes are known.
 Maintenance of law and order in enemy territory d under the control of the Army.
 Provision of escorts.
 Guarding of prisoners of war.
 Assistance in control of refugees.
 Anti-infiltration duties in specified areas.

2. Assam Rifles (AR)

 The Assam Rifles came into being in 1835, as a militia called the ‘Cachar Levy’. This Force
was formed to primarily protect British Tea estates and their settlements against tribal raids.
  Subsequently, all these Forces were reorganised and renamed as the ‘Frontier Force’ as their
role was increased to conduct of punitive expeditions across the borders of Assam.
 This Force significantly contributed in opening the region to administration and commerce
and over time they came to be known as the “right arm of the civil and left arm of the
military”.
 It is the highest awarded and decorated Para Military Force of India. The headquarters of
Assam Rifles is located in Shillong, Meghalaya.
 It is under the control of the MHA and they perform many roles including the provision of
internal security under the control of the army through the conduct of counter insurgency and
border security operations, provision of aid to the civilians in times of emergency, and the
provision of communications, medical assistance and education in remote areas.
 In times of war they can also be used as a combat force to secure rear areas if needed.
 Since 2002 it has been guarding the Indo–Myanmar barrier as per the government
policy “one border one force”.

3. Central Reserve Police Force (CRPF)

 CRPF is the largest Central Armed Police Force of India.
 Initially, it was constituted as the Crown Representative Police in 1939, After Independence,
it was renamed as Central Reserve Police Force by an Act of Parliament on Dec 28th 1949.
 CRPF is deployed in aid of civil power in matters related to internal security, counter
insurgency and maintenance of law and order. The headquarters is located in New Delhi.

4. Central Industrial Security Force (CISF)

 CISF is an armed force of the Union established under an Act of Parliament, “Central
Industrial Security Force Act, 1968”.
 CISF was founded on 10th March 1969 and the headquarters is located in New Delhi.
 It provides security and protection to industrial undertakings and vital installations.
 According to the mandate, CISF provides security to the premises staff along with the
security of property and establishments.
 CISF is providing security to the strategic establishment, including the Department of Space,
the Department of Atomic Energy, Airports, the Delhi Metro, the ports, the historical
monuments and the basic areas of Indian economy such as petroleum and natural gas,
electricity, coal, steel and mining and important government buildings.

5. National Security Guard (NSG)

 NSG is Federal Contingency World Class Zero Error Force to deal with anti-terrorist
activities in all its manifestation.
 It was founded on 22 September 1986. The headquarters is located in New Delhi
 The NSG is a Force specially equipped and trained to deal with specific situations and is
therefore, to be used only in exceptional circumstances to thwart serious acts of terrorism.
 NSG, also known as Black Cats is a national security forces in India. It is a commando-
trained force organisation used in special operations.
 The basic philosophy of NSG is swift and speedy strike and immediate withdrawal from the
theatre of action. National Security Guard has been given the Specific Role to handle all
facets of terrorism in any part of the country as a Federal Contingency Force.
 The NSG was modeled on the pattern of the SAS of the UK and GSG-9 of Germany. It is
a task-oriented Force and has two complementary elements in the form of the Special Action
Group (SAG) comprising Army personnel and the Special Ranger Groups (SRG), comprising
personnel drawn from the Central Armed Police Forces / State Police Forces.
 6. Indo Tibetan Border Police (ITBP)
 On 24th October 1962, the Indo-Tibetan Border Police (ITBP) Force was established.
 Currently, the ITBP patrols the 3,488 km long India-China border, which stretches from the
Jachep La pass in Arunachal Pradesh to the Karakoram Pass in Ladakh.
 In addition to these responsibilities, the Force plays a significant part in numerous internal
security operations and duties in the state of Chhattisgarh against Left Wing Extremism.
 The headquarters is located in New Delhi.
 ITBP has also excelled in UN peacekeeping operations. The Force personnel are deployed for
peacekeeping operations in Angola, Namibia, Cambodia, Bosnia & Herzegovina,
Mozambique and Kosovo.
 ITBP is also provides security, communication and medical cover to the pilgrims during the
Annual Kailash Mansarovar Yatra since 1981.
 Being the first responder for natural Disaster in Himalayas, ITBP was the first to establish
7 Regional Response Centres and carried out numerous rescue and relief operations in all
disaster situations, which took place in our areas of responsibility as well as other parts of the
country. In a historic rescue and relief operation in 2013, the ITBP saved 33,009 pilgrims
from grave situation from char dham yatra routes in Uttarakhand in the 15 day rescue effort
by the Force.
 ITBP conducts a large number of medical civic action programmes in remote border and
terrorist/naxal affected areas to provide free and expert medical, health and hygiene care to
the civilian population in remote villages.
 ITBP is at the forefront of movement for the preservation of Himalayan environment &
ecology. ITBP has taken up in a big way the task of greening the Himalayan regions
especially in Inner Himalayas.
 Tasks of ITBP also include:
 Vigil on the northern borders, detection and prevention of border violations, and
promotion of the sense of security among the local populace.
 Check illegal immigration, trans-border smuggling and crimes.
 Security to sensitive installations, banks and protected persons.
 Restore and preserve order in any area in the event of disturbance.

7. Sashastra Seema Bal (SSB)

 SSB is a border guarding force. Following the Chinese assaultof 1962, Sashastra Seema Bal
was founded in May 1963.
 The headquarters is located in New Delhi.
 Tasks of SSB:
 Safeguard the security of assigned borders of India and promote sense of security among
the people living in border areas.
 Prevent trans-border crimes, smuggling and any other illegal activities.
 Prevent unauthorized entry into or exit from the territory of India.
 Carry out civic action programmes.
 Deployed for Law & Order, Counter Insurgency Operations and Election duty.

Preserving peace and harmony have been the prime goals of all the security forces, working in
close synergy with each other, i.e. Indian Army, J&K Police, intelligence agencies and the civil
administration. The synergy between the security forces and law enforcement agencies in J&K,
the NE and throughout the various parts of the country is at an all-time high. It reflects the higher
standards of professionalism and jointness in all the spheres and magnitudes of work ethics.

ANY TASK, ANY TIME, ANYWHERE

 Vibrant Villages Programme
 Border villages are of utmost significance to a country for a multitude of reasons. Firstly, they serve
as the first line of intelligence against any external threat, as exemplified by the Kargil war of 1999,
when the local shepherds alerted the authorities about the infiltration of enemy forces. In Arunachal
Pradesh, the indigenous populace residing in the border areas has time and again reported
construction activities carried out by China's People Liberation Army (PLA) along the Line of Actual
Control (LAC), prompting the authorities for swift vigil. Thus, the locals play a pivotal role in
providing valuable intelligence to the security forces and help in safeguarding the territorial integrity
of the nation.
 The strategic importance of populating and developing border villages has long been recognised by
governments worldwide. India, with its vast land borders and diverse cultural landscape, has taken a
significant step towards this goal through the Centrally Sponsored Scheme - "Vibrant Villages
Programme" (VVP).
 The Union Cabinet approved this program with a financial allocation of ₹4800 crore for the years
2022-23 to 2025-26.

 Vibrant Villages Programme

 The concept of the vibrant villages programme (VVP) is to improve the living conditions for the
people living close to the Line of Actual Control (LAC) i.e. the borderline between China and
India in the western sector of the borderland between India’s Ladakh and China.
 This will help encourage people to stay in their native locations in border areas and reverse the
outmigration from these villages adding to improved security of the border.
 The activities will include construction of village infrastructure, housing, tourist centers, road
connectivity, provisioning of decentralised renewable energy, direct to home access for
Doordarshan and educational channels, and support for livelihood generation.
 Additional funding for these activities will be provided.
 Existing schemes will be converged and their outcomes will be defined and monitored on
a constant basis.

 Aims and Objectives

 The scheme will be implemented in 3 phases:
 To stop migration from all the villages of the entire northern border.
 Promote tourism.
 Provide all facilities at par with the cities.
 To enhance infrastructure in villages along India's border with China, in states like Himachal
Pradesh, Uttarakhand, and Arunachal Pradesh.
 Border villages with sparse population, limited connectivity and infrastructure often get left out
from the development gains. Such villages on the northern border will be covered under the new
Vibrant Villages Programme.
 The scheme will provide funds for the development of essential infrastructure and the creation of
livelihood opportunities in 2967 villages, 19 Districts, 46 Border blocks, 4 states and 1 UT along
the northern land border of the country covering a population of 1.42 lakh people.
 This will help in achieving inclusive growth and retaining the population in the border areas.
 In the first phase, 663 Villages will be taken up in the program.
 The scheme aids to identify and develop the economic drivers based on local natural human and
other resources of the border villages on the northern border.
 Vibrant Village Action Plans will be created by the district administration with the help of Gram
Panchayats.100 % saturation of Central and state schemes will be ensured.
  It also aims for:
 Development of growth centers on the “Hub and Spoke Model” through the promotion of
social entrepreneurship.
 Empowerment of youth and women through skill development and entrepreneurship.
 Leveraging the tourism potential through the promotion of local cultural, and traditional
knowledge and heritage.
 Development of sustainable eco-agribusinesses on the concept of “One Village-One product”
through community-based organizations, Cooperatives, SHGs, NGOs, etc.
 Key outcomes that have been attempted are:
 Connectivity with an all-weather road.
 Drinking water.
 24×7 electricity – Solar and wind energy are to be given focused attention.
 Mobile and internet connectivity.
 Tourist centers, multi-purpose centers, and health and wellness centers.

 Significance of Vibrant Village Programme

 The program envisages coverage of border villages on the Northern border having sparse
populations, limited connectivity, and infrastructure, which often get left out of the development
gains.
 The government has allocated ₹ 4,800 crore for infrastructure development and to provide
livelihood opportunities in the border areas. Out of the total outlay, ₹ 2,500 crore will be spent
exclusively on the creation of road infrastructure.
 The VVP initiative intends to develop a strategy for improving the infrastructure of the
communities at LAC and establishing road connections.
 As part of the programme, residential and tourism centres will be created. It will also make it
easier to create decentralized renewable energy sources and improve road connections.
 The scheme will help encourage people to stay in their native locations in border areas and
reverse the out-migration from these villages, adding to improved security of the border.
 The scheme will provide funds for the development of essential infrastructure and the creation of
livelihood opportunities.
 The scheme will help to strengthen India’s cooperative sector and to deepen its reach to the
grassroots as it will enable cooperative societies to set up and modernize the necessary
infrastructure.
 The also aims to develop sustainable agricultural, dairy, and fishery cooperatives in each village.
 It will be supported by National Bank for Agriculture and Rural Development (NABARD), the
National Dairy Development Board (NDDB), and the National Fisheries Development Board.
 The plan aims to establish viable Primary Agricultural Credit Societies (PACS) in each
uncovered Panchayat.

 Outmigration from border villages

 People of mountain areas depend on subsistence farming, livestock, and income generation from
small-scale trade and wage activities for their livelihood.
 The border villages of India are often neglected by the government leading to poor connectivity,
underdevelopment, and difficult living conditions, causing massive out-migration.
 Uttarakhand is a case in point; the state’s border areas are seeing significant out-migration due to
unfriendly living conditions, appalling infrastructure, lack of connection, and subpar health and
educational services.
 The army pointed out that migration along the border can have substantial national security
implications.
  Out-migration from border regions poses both internal and external security issues; on the one
hand, it strains urban resources, and on the other, if it goes uncontrolled, it offers the hostile
nation room to nibble on the territory.
 India’s northeast region shares a long boundary with China, and the PLA is developing border
villages at a fast pace for surveillance.
 The presence of settlements near the border assists the security forces and gives the country a
psychological edge. Also, it lowers the cost of surveillance because humans are the most accurate
surveillance technology, guarding the whole border.

 Why Earlier Initiatives Were Inadequate

 The Vibrant Villages Program builds on India's previous border management policies, which
have prioritised security concerns over other socioeconomic considerations as exemplified by the
Border Area Development Program (BADP).
 The BADP was introduced during the Seventh Five-Year Plan (1985-1990) to enhance
infrastructure in 457 blocks, 117 border districts across 16 states and two Union Territories for
security purposes.
 Although BADP was later revised to address issues such as health, education, and agriculture, it
initially faced difficulties due to the absence of a socioeconomic focus.
 The main issues that continued to plague border communities in India's northeast region were
declining population, lack of connectivity, resource shortages, and the sense of alienation.
 After the Kargil War (1999), the Indian Government established the Kargil Review Committee
(KRC) to comprehensively evaluate national security and border concerns.
 The KRC's findings indicated that safeguarding border security would require measures beyond
traditional security approaches, such as improving border infrastructure. Consequently, various
initiatives, such as creating the Department of Border Management (2004), the Land Ports
Authority of India (2012), and constructing Integrated Check Posts along the border to facilitate
cross border movement of trade and passengers were implemented.
 These initiatives were geared towards enhancing connectivity rather than reinforcing the borders
physical structures. However, they were limited in coverage, predominantly focused on major
land trade routes, and were security-centric, neglecting infrastructure development in other border
areas.

 Indispensable Component of Sound Strategic Planning

 India shares borders with seven countries, including Pakistan and China, with whom it has
experienced several territorial disputes. Tensions between India and Pakistan have been high
since India's independence, with numerous military conflicts, such as the Kargil War and the Uri
attack.
 Similarly, India's relationship with China has been strained, chiefly because of border disputes in
the Himalayan region.Nevertheless, India and China also continue to be major trade partners.
Despite frosty bilateral relations, the trade between the two countries is at an all time high. The
Nathu La in Sikkim and Lipulekh Pass in Uttarakhand serve as key border crossing for road
transport of goods between the two countries. Hence, the imperative to bolster village settlements
derives from an array of considerations that extend far beyond the immediate tactical exigencies
of territorial security. Rather, it encompasses a range of multifaceted dimensions that include
economic, cultural, and social factors, all of which are integral to the holistic development of the
nation.
 In current circumstances, India's key considerations for bolstering border village settlements
through infrastructure development and sustainable livelihood measures include the following:
 Enhanced surveillance: Populating border villages and enhancing border infrastructure will
enhance the surveillance capabilities of the Indian Army. By populating border villages, the
 Indian Army can garner intelligence about the enemy's troop and weaponry movements.
Moreover, it would facilitate the establishment of a closer relationship between the Indian
Army and local communities, ensuring cooperation in the event of an attack. Also, supporting
infrastructure could be used to deploy advanced surveillance technologies such as radars,
drones, and satellites to monitor the enemy's activities. This would enable the timely
detection of any suspicious movements and prompt action.
 Better military mobility: Enhanced border infrastructure would facilitate better troop and
weaponry mobility. The construction of roads and bridges would enable speedy movement of
troops to the border regions, while tunnels would provide cover and protection from attacks.
 Facilitate cross border trade: Border villages are not just frontline defence outposts, but
also key loci of cross-border trade and commerce. They serve as critical conduits for the
exchange of goods and services, and their prosperity contributes to the economic health of the
nation. In this regard, strengthening their capabilities can also enhance the nation's economic
resilience and competitiveness
 Preserve cultural diversity: Border villages are often characterized by a high degree of
ethnic and cultural diversity, which endows them with unique social and historical
significance. By investing in the development of these communities, the state can bolster its
social cohesion and demonstrate its commitment to the preservation of cultural diversity.

 Countering China's Border Moves

 As a countermeasure to China's aggressive infrastructure development, the Government of India
(GOI), in 2006, began focusing on building strategic roads in the northeast, with a particular
focus on Arunachal Pradesh.
 The Cabinet Committee on Economic Affairs approved the initial construction of strategic
highways in 2006. A plethora of schemes and measures have been in place since then for
augmenting infrastructure and connectivity in border areas.
 However, the Vibrant Villages Program mainly comes as a timely response to China's
developments along its own border posts.
 There have been heightened tensions along the LAC since May 2020, when China deployed a
large number of troops and heavy equipment to change the status quo in eastern Ladakh. While
the disputes that ensued after the May 2020 border skirmishes are still to be resolved, in January
2021, China adopted a new border law. Under the provisions of this law, China has been
developing towns along its borders and increasing the involvement of local residents in
surveillance efforts in the regions surrounding India, Nepal, and Bhutan.

 Conclusion
 The lack of development and prosperity in the border villages is a stark contrast to the progress
experienced by the rest of the country. The underlying reasons for this disparity are multifaceted
and require a thorough examination of the ground realities to devise effective strategies to
integrate these regions into the developmental framework of both the nation and the world.
 Therefore, it is imperative to acknowledge the complexities of the situation and devise informed
and nuanced approaches to address this issue and the Vibrant Villages Programme aims to do
exactly that.
 Hence, the securing of the borders, Vibrant Villages Programme, and Border Area Development
Programme are in the right direction to ensure better lives for people and border security.

The programmme will help in improving the quality of life of people living in identified
border villages and encourage people to stay in their native locations thereby reversing the
outmigration from these villages and adding to security of the border. Thus, Integrating
Border Regions in the Developmental Framework of India.
 Empowering Women
Encouraging Work From Home (WFH)
 The Indian government strongly believes Women's Health and Well Being is Key to a
Better World. For this India aims to prioritise three major aspects:
 Promoting women's leadership at all levels including at the grassroots level.
 Encouraging women's entrepreneurship.
 Ensuring women's education in order to ensure women's empowerment and equal participation in the
workforce.

 For India's sustained commitment to prioritising women's empowerment within the ambit of
governance, India has enacted several exemplary legal and policy frameworks to ensure women's right
to education, work, and good health. These rights are interdependent and interconnected, and the
realisation of one can contribute to the realisation of the others. The right to education for women is
essential for their economic independence, empowerment, and their ability to make informed
decisions regarding their health.
 Education facilitates access to health information and resources, promotes critical thinking skills for
evaluating health information, and fosters healthy behaviors and practices. Additionally, education can
equip women with knowledge and skills to secure better-paying jobs, which, in turn, can enhance
access to better healthcare services.
 The right to work for women is critical for their economic empowerment, which can improve their
overall well being and access to healthcare services. Employment can provide women with financial
resources to afford quality healthcare services, and also offer benefits such as health insurance.
 Meanwhile, the right to good health is a fundamental human right that includes access to affordable,
quality healthcare services, nutrition, clean water, and sanitation.
 A healthy workforce is more productive and contributes to a country's economic growth, while
benefiting women's economic and social well-being. Thus, the centrality of good health is in realising
all other human rights, including women's right to education and work.
 Women work force participation is a driver of a country’s growth and therefore, participation rate
indicates its potential to grow more rapidly. The Government of India is mulling a strategy for
popularizing flexible workplaces, a work-from-home ecosystem and flexible work hours, which can
be used as opportunities for encouraging women's labour force participation.

 India's Employment and Labour Force Participation Trends

 According to the latest Periodic Labour Force Survey (PLFS), labour markets have recovered beyond
pre-COVID levels, in both urban and rural India, with unemployment rates are decreasing.
 The Labour Force Participation Rate (LFPR), Worker Population Ratio (WPR) and Unemployment
Rate (UR) have improved for both males and females in both rural and urban areas.
 The Labour Force Participation Rate for males has gone up to 57.5%.
 The overall Labour Force Participation Rate for females has gone up to 25.1%. There is a notable rise
in rural female Labour Force Participation.
 Despite the positive outlook on employment, the gender disparity in labour force participation is
persistent and this can be largely attributed to the numerous sociocultural barriers faced by the female
population. These barriers are deeply rooted in traditional gender roles, cultural beliefs and social
norms, and pose significant challenges for women seeking to pursue professional careers.
 Though at the policy level, a lot of work has been done in terms of ensuring gender equity in
employment opportunities, the lack of work-life balance continues to be a persistent barrier that
women in India face when trying to build a career. Women are often expected to take on the majority
of domestic responsibilities, including childcare and household chores, which can make it difficult for
them to balance their personal and professional lives. This can be particularly challenging for women
in jobs that require long working hours and significant time for commuting.
  Meanwhile, the pandemic has prompted many changes in the scenario with many organisations re-
evaluating the role of the traditional office, as employees have become more accustomed to remote
work and businesses have realised the potential cost savings of reducing their physical footprint. This
has led to a shift towards more flexible, hybrid workplaces that combine remote and inperson work,
and a greater focus on creating collaborative spaces that support creativity and innovation. This
transition is being billed as a boon for women.

 Emerging Workplace Trends

 Increased focus on employee well-being: The pandemic has highlighted the importance of
supporting employee well-being, both physical and mental. Many organisations have introduced new
programs and benefits to help employees stay healthy and connected while working remotely, such as
virtual fitness classes, mental health resources, and online social events.
 Emphasis on digital transformation: The pandemic has also accelerated the pace of digital
transformation in many industries, as businesses have had to quickly adapt to the new reality of
remote work and online interactions. This has led to the adoption of new technologies and the
development of new digital products and services to meet changing employee and customer needs.
 Remote work: The pandemic has accelerated the trend of remote work, with many employees now
working from home on a full-time or part-time basis.
 Flexible work arrangements: Many businesses have also adopted more flexible work arrangements
to accommodate the challenges of the pandemic, such as offering part-time schedules, job sharing, or
flexible start and end times. This has helped to reduce the stress on employees who are juggling work
with other responsibilities, such as caring for children or elderly family members.

 Benefits of Work From Home (WFH)

 Improved work-life balance: By working from home, women have greater control over their work-
life balance, which can lead to reduced stress and improved well-being.
 Foster more equality: Regardless of your individual background or living arrangements, in the event
that such factors do not impact your work performance or overall output, your professional colleagues
will no longer be influenced by said variables in their perception of you. This new found ability to be
regarded as an equal amongst peers is a significant achievement.
 Enhanced job satisfaction: Studies have shown that WFH can increase job satisfaction, and this is
particularly true for women who may face additional barriers to career advancement, such as
discrimination or bias.
 Greater flexibility: WFH allows women to have greater flexibility in their work schedule, which can
be particularly beneficial for those with caregiving responsibilities, such as caring for children or
elderly family members.
 Saving on commuting time: Without the need to commute to a physical workplace, women can save
time and money on transportation, and have more time to dedicate to work or other activities
 Increased job opportunities: WFH has opened up new job opportunities, especially in industries that
were previously less accessible to women, such as technology or remote customer service
 Opportunities for the marginalised: The advent of remote working opportunities within companies
has enabled the possibility of collaborating with individuals residing in disparate geographical
locations. This novel paradigm offers potential avenues for enhanced diversity and comprehension
within the virtual workplace, as historically marginalised factions now possess the potential to flourish
within a more egalitarian and inclusive environment.

 WFH Opportunities for Women

 In the employment landscape across sectors, there are a very few domains where women are
categorically considered unsuitable. Conversely, in all other spheres, female participation is
deemed acceptable but limited, owing to the manifold obstacles that women encounter when
seeking work outside the domestic sphere. Thus, the prospects for remote work for women are not
lacking per se; however, the availability of optimal opportunities depends upon an individual's
skills, experience, and predilections. Nonetheless, there are some general domains in which
women may locate work from home opportunities, such as:
 Freelancing: Freelancing offers a lot of flexibility and the opportunity to work on project
basis. Women can find freelancing opportunities in writing, graphic design, web
development, social media management, and many other fields.
 Virtual assistant: Virtual assistants provide administrative support to businesses and
individuals remotely. This can include tasks such as scheduling appointments, managing
emails, and data entry.
 Teaching and tutoring: With the rise of online education, women can find opportunities to
teach or tutor students from around the world in a variety of subjects.
 Sales and marketing: Many companies are hiring remote sales and marketing professionals
to help promote their products and services online.
 IT and technical roles: Women with technical skills can find remote opportunities in
software development, database management, network administration, and other technical
role.
 Consulting: Women with expertise in a particular field can offer consulting services to
businesses remotely.
 Writing and editing: Women who enjoy writing or editing can find work from home
opportunities in content creation, copywriting, and proof-reading. The work from home
opportunities are not only limited to women in urban setup. Women in rural India too possess
a wide range of skills that are often overlooked and undervalued. While there has been
notable progress in terms on women's education in most of rural India, even the uneducated
women in rural India have skill sets that are often through their daily activities and
responsibilities including farming, cooking, cleaning, child care, sewing, mending etc.
 Handicrafts and artisanal work: Rural women in India have a long history of creating
beautiful handicrafts and artisanal items such as pottery, embroidery, weaving, and basketry.
They can sell their products locally or online through e-commerce platforms.
 Food processing: Rural women can set up small-scale food processing units at home to make
products like pickles, jams, and chutneys. They can then sell these products locally or through
online marketplaces.
 Agri-businesses: Rural women can also earn income starting small-scale agriculture related
business, such as mushroom cultivation, honey production, etc.
 Home-based childcare: Rural women can provide home based childcare services to working
parents in their community.
 Sewing and tailoring: Women can start home-based sewing and tailoring business and offer
their services to customers in their community or online.
 Beauty and wellness services: Rural women can provide beauty and wellness services like
hair cutting, massage, and beauty treatments from their home setup.
 Online freelancing: Women in rural areas, who are educated but are unable to take up full
time jobs, can pursue successful career in online tutoring, content creation, consultancy,
freelance writing, etc.
 Self Employment and Small Scale Businesses: Self employment and small scale business
also provide ample opportunities for earning while maintaining a healthy work-life balance.
One of the biggest advantages of self employment is the flexibility it offers. Self employed
women can set their own hours and work from anywhere. When you're self employed, you
have greater control over your career path. You can design your work around your life rather
than the other way around. This can lead to a better work-life balance and less stress.
Moreover, many women find that self employment is more fulfilling than working for
someone else. By building their own businesses, they can create something meaningful and
achieve personal and professional growth. As a self employed woman, you have more
autonomy and control over your work. You can make your own decisions and be your own
boss. Additionally, it provides an opportunity to pursue your passions and interests. You can
turn your hobbies and interests into a business and make a living doing what you love.
 Government Launched Schemes and Programs to Empower Women WFM
The Government of India has several schemes and programs aimed at empowering rural women and
providing them with training and support to start their own businesses. These programs can provide
financial assistance, training, and networking opportunities to help rural women succeed in their chosen
field. Some examples are:
 Pradhan Mantri Kaushal Vikas Yojana (PMKVY): This scheme provides skill training to
individuals, including women, to improve their employability and income.
 Mahila Coir Yojana: This scheme provides training and employment opportunities to women in the
coir industry. It aims to improve the socioeconomic status of women by promoting the use of coir
products.
 STEP (Support to Training and Employment Programme for Women): This scheme provides
training and employment opportunities to women, particularly those who are socially and
economically disadvantaged. It aims to enhance the employability of women and enable them to
become self reliant.
 Nai Roshni: This scheme provides training to women in areas such as leadership, health and hygiene,
financial literacy, and legal rights. It aims to empower women to become agents of change in their
communities.
 Udyogini: This scheme provides entrepreneurship training and support to women to enable them to
start and manage their own businesses. It aims to promote women's economic empowerment and
contribute to economic growth.
 Pradhan Mantri Mudra Yojana: This scheme provides loans to micro and small enterprises,
including those owned by women. It aims to enable women to start their own businesses and become
selfreliant.
 Financial assistance schemes: Banks and financial institutions offer schemes that aim to boost
women entrepreneurship.

 How to Build a Successful WFH Career

Here are some steps you can take to upskill and become eligible for good and highly paying work from
home opportunities:
 Identify the skills in demand: Do some research on the current trends in the job market and identify
the skills that are in high demand for work from home jobs. Some examples may include digital
marketing, data analysis, web development, and programming.
 Assess your current skills: Evaluate your current skills and knowledge to identify your strengths and
weaknesses. This can help you understand which skills you need to work on to be more competitive in
the job market.
 Identify gaps: After assessing your skills, identify the gaps between your current skill set and the
skills in demand. This can help you focus on the skills you need to improve.
 Take online courses and certifications: Look for online courses and certifications that can help you
acquire the skills you need.
 Build a portfolio: To showcase your skills to potential employers, build a portfolio that demonstrates
your abilities. This could include examples of work you have done, such as websites you have built,
articles you have written, or social media campaigns you have managed.
 Network: Build a professional network by joining relevant online groups, attending virtual events,
and connecting with professionals in your industry. This can help you stay up-todate on industry
trends and connect with potential employers.
 Apply for relevant jobs: Once you have acquired the necessary skills and built your portfolio, start
applying for work from home jobs that align with your skills and interests. Don't be afraid to start with
entry-level positions and work your way up.

Women's empowerment is the only way to ensure peace, social

inclusion and prosperity in the world.
INDUCTION OF WOMEN IN INDIAN ARMED FORCES
 Women in Armed Forces: Time Line
 The role of women in the Indian Army began in 1888 when the ‘Indian Military Nursing
Service’ was formed during the British Raj.
 The Army, Air Force and Navy began inducting women as short-service commission (SSC)
officers in 1992. This was the first time when women were allowed to join the military outside
the medical stream.
 One of the turning points for women in the military came in 2015 when Indian Air Force (IAF)
decided to induct them into the fighter stream as fighter pilots.
 In 2020, the Supreme Court (SC) ordered the central government to grant permanent
commission (PC) to women officers in the Army's non-combat support units on par with their
male counterparts. The SC had rejected the government’s stand of women officers’
physiological limitations as being based on "sex stereotypes" and "gender discrimination against
women”.
 Women officers have been granted PC in the Indian Army in all the ten branches where
women are inducted for SSC.
 In early 2021, the Indian Navy deployed four women officers on warships after a gap of almost
25 years.
 While women officers in the Indian Air Force and the Indian Navy have been flying helicopters
for long, the Indian Army paved the way for women pilots in 2021 by starting the ‘Army
Aviation course’.
 Recently the Govt allowed women entry in the National Defence Academy Exam and now they
get trained at NDA.
 In early 2021, the Indian Navy deployed four women officers on warships after a gap of almost
25 years. India’s aircraft carrier INS Vikramaditya and fleet tanker INS Shakti are the
warships that have been assigned their first women crews since the late 1990s.
 In May 2021, the Army inducted the first batch of women into the Corps of Military Police, the
first time that women joined the military in the non-officer cadre.
 The launch of Agnipath scheme, granting women in the Navy and Air Force to take up combat
roles are some of the historic moves taken up in a bid to strengthen the Indian military.
 Squadron Leader Avani Chaturvedi, one of the first three women fighter pilots of the IAF created
history once again as the inaugural joint Air Exercise between India and Japan kicked off in Japan
in January 2022 as she became the first IAF woman pilot to participate in an air exercise abroad.
 There are 9,118 women currently serving the Army, Navy and air Force.
 Women comprise only 3.8% of the world's second-largest Army - compared to 13% of the Air
Force and 6% of the Navy.
 Women are now eligible to occupy all the command appointments, at par with male officers,
which would open avenues for further promotions to higher ranks for them.
 The women in the Indian armed forces that constitute 3% of the Indian army are still not
allowed to be a part of the active combat .However, Women are still not allowed in combat
arms like Infantry and Armored Corps.

 Army
 The Indian Army’s combat employment philosophy for women is continuously reviewed.
Currently, women are being commissioned into various streams in the Indian Army. These
include the Corps of Engineers, the Corps of Signals, the Army Air Defence, the Army
Service Corps, the Army Ordnance Corps, the Army Aviation Corps, the Intelligence Corps,
the Judge Advocate General’s Branch, and the Army Education Corps.
  As for military nurses and doctors, these are women only positions. Various initiatives are
being taken to improve the recruitment and training of women in the Indian Army. These
include the establishment of a permanent commission for women officers and the recruitment
of women cadets in the NDA.
 Recently, in a significant development the Indian Army cleared the 108 women
officers eligible to command units and troops in their respective arms and services for the
first time. This would be a major step forward in terms of gender equality. This decision will
also encourage more women to join the Indian Army and will help to
promote diversity and inclusivity within the organization.
 In 2022 the Indian Army deployed its largest contingent of women peacekeepers in United
Nations mission in Sudans Abyei region. The team will provide relief and assistance to
women and children in one of the highly operational and challenging terrain conditions.

 Navy
 In 1991, the Indian Navy started to recruit women as officers. Over the years, various
branches of the organization have been opened for women, including through NDA.
 Women sailors are also being recruited through the Agnipath Scheme for the first time. About
20% of the total vacancies in the Navy are for women.

 Air Force
 The recruitment of women in the Indian Air Force is conducted in a gender-neutral manner.
All the branches of the organization are covered by women officers.
 There are also regular publicity drives and print and electronic media campaigns about
opportunities for women in the service.
 An opening for women has been provided through the National Commission for Women’s
Special entry for flying SSC.
 In 2015, the Indian Air Force started implementing a permanent scheme for inducting women
officers into all combat roles. This approach is gender neutral and allows women to join the
organization without any restrictions.

 Constraints for Women

 Capabilities of women
 There might be situations that could affect the capabilities of women such as absence during
pregnancy and catering to the responsibilities of motherhood, etc.

 Fear of sexual misconduct

 Sexual harassment faced by women military officers is a global phenomenon which remains
largely unaddressed, and women often face retaliation when they do complain.
 Military’s universal perception is that it would lead to “operational, practical and cultural
problems”.

 Gender progressiveness could be an illusion

 There are several factors behind the decision to include women in the forces, including using
the illusion of gender progressiveness within the army to shame populations for their gender
inequities, brand them as backwards and use this to justify military control.

 Battle of ‘Acceptance’
 The only way to command is to show the lower ranks that the orders are fair and just, both in
spirit and action.
 Acceptance of women in the military has not been smooth in any country.
  Job Satisfaction
 Most women feel that their competence is not given due recognition. Seniors tend to be over-
indulgent without valuing their views.
 They are generally marginalized and not involved in any major decision-making. They have
to work twice as hard as men to prove their worth. Additionally, a woman is always under
scrutiny for even minor slip-ups.

 Societal Impact
 The government has argued that if a woman is taken captive by insurgents/terrorists or as a
Prisoner of War (PoW) by an enemy state, then it would become an international and deeply
emotive issue which could have an impact on the society.
 It is often seen as a challenge by society for women to meet the requirements of
service owing to their prolonged absence during motherhood and domestic responsibilities.

 Physical and Physiological Issues

 The natural physical differences in stature, strength, and body composition between the sexes
make women more vulnerable to certain types of injuries and medical problems.
 The vigorous training might also have an effect on the health of women officers.
 The natural processes of menstruation and pregnancy make women particularly vulnerable in
combat situations.
 It’s tough to maintain proper living conditions for women in combat situations, especially
given social norms in India.

 Comfort Level
 Most women accepted the fact that their presence amongst males tends to make the
environment ‘formal and stiff’.
 The mutual comfort level between men and female colleagues is often very low.
 Men miss their light-hearted banter which is considered essential to release work tensions and
promote group cohesion. They consider women to be intruding on their privacy.
 Officers in combat branches have to fight together & there is no privacy which could be an
issue for a female.

 Significance of inducting women in Armed Forces in India

 As per the Global Scenario, women officially became eligible for combat positions in the
American military in 2013, it was widely hailed as another step towards the equality of sexes. In
2018, the UK military lifted a ban on women serving in close combat ground roles, clearing the
way for them to serve in elite special forces. And they have been deployed all over Iraq,
Afghanistan and around the world.
 Women officers will be given equal opportunity to contribute to the nation.
 The armed forces play an important role and need to promote gender equality in the forces.
 Providing women with a more challenging and fulfilling career.
 It would change the “regressive mindset" for not allowing women in the armed forces.
 It will challenge a strong stereotype that assumes that domestic obligations rest solely on women.
 As long as an applicant is qualified for a position, one’s gender is arbitrary.
 In modern high technology battlefield technical expertise and decision-making skills
are increasingly more valuable than simple brute strength.
 Allowing a mixed gender force keeps the military strong. The armed forces are severely
troubled by falling retention and recruitment rates. This can be addressed by allowing women
in the combat role.
  The blanket restriction for women limits the ability of commanders in theater to pick the most
capable person for the job.
 Training will be required to facilitate the integration of women into combat units. Cultures
change over time and the masculine subculture can evolve too.

 Way Forward
 Misleading information such as using the patriarchal nature of the society as an excuse to deny
women their deserving opportunities should be stopped. India has come a long way, and society
should be supportive of women being inducted into combat roles.
 So far combatant roles are concerned, an all-women combat squadron should be conceived.
 The training provided to men and women should be similar to eliminate differentiation designed
and studied extensively before any further development or decisions are made on the basis of
physical standards.
 It is the responsibility of the Government to create both administrative and social infrastructure
for the easy induction of women into the Armed Forces.
 The framework for the induction of women should be incorporated into a policy. As for the
concern of preserving the female officers’ modesty and dignity, there should be elaborate codes
of conduct to ensure no adverse incident occours.
 Women were being kept out of command posts on the reasoning that the largely rank and file will
have problems with women as commanding officers. Thus, changes have to take place in the
culture, norms, and values of not only the rank and file of the Army but also that of society at
large. The responsibility to usher these changes lies with the senior military and political
leadership.
 The United States, Israel, North Korea, France, Germany, Netherlands, Australia and Canada are
among the global militaries that employ women in front-line combat positions.
 It is the right of every woman to pursue a career of her choice and reach the top since Equality is
a constitutional guarantee.’
 The women of the Armed Forces are undoubtedly viewed as role models for all women and the
Supreme Court along with the Indian Government have played a stimulating character in
achieving this end.
 The Indian Armed Forces should also work to provide better facilities and support for women
soldiers like child care, maternity leave and other needs that are specific to women.
 The Armed Forces must take a proactive approach themselves in ensuring gender equality rather
than waiting for courts to intervene.
 The Indian Armed Forces should provide training and support for women who are in command
roles, to ensure that they are able to lead effectively.
 The Armed Forces should also actively encourage and recruit more women to join the military, so
that there is a larger pool of qualified women able to command and work to change the culture of
the military to be more inclusive of women and to address any biases that may exist.
 We need mor e women in the senior ranks of the military; it is not enough just to do
better with the younger and mor e junior demographics, which means finding ways
for women to r eturn and continue their careers after they have childr en.
 Defense readiness is one major aspect which is required to be borne in mind throughout while
considering their employability options. The career aspects and opportunities for women need to
be viewed holistically keeping the final aim in focus.

So yes, we’ve come a long way. But there is plenty of work yet to be done to encourage the
participation of women in the military and to ensure their experiences and opportunities
are equitable to those of the men who serve. If we put the work in, we will have a stronger
military—and country—for it.